No preview available
Project Manual - 1992PROJECT MANUAL OLD CITY HALL GILROY, CALIFORNIA October 26, 1992 Bid No. 93 -PL -205 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: OWNER IS REQUIRING THAT ALL BIDDERS ATTEND A MANDATORY PRE -BID WALKTHROUGH OF THE PROJECT SITE. SEE NOTICE INVITING BIDS FOR TIMES AND DATES. \051 \38572.3 27- 102304706011 PROJECT MANUAL OLD CITY HALL GILROY, CALIFORNIA Bid No. 93- PL-205 PROJECT LOCATION: OWNER: ARCHITECT: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: OLD CITY BALL 7400 Monterey Street (Northeast corner at Sixth Street and Monterey Street) Gilroy, CA CITY OF GILROY 7351 Rosanna Street Gilroy, CA 95020 ARCHITECTURAL RESOURCES GROUP Pier 9 The Embarcadero San Francisco, CA 94111 Attn: Ms. Kathleen Johnson MESERVE ENGINEERING 15951 Los Gatos Blvd., Suite 10 Los Gatos, CA 95032 Attn: Mr. Ed Meserve ADDRESS ALL COMMUNICATIONS REGARDING THIS PROJECT TO THE ARCHITECT \051 \38572.3 27- 102304706011 TABLE OF CONTENTS I. NOTICE INVITING BIDS H. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (WITH SUPPL04ENTARY INSTRUCTIONS) IV. CONTRACT FORMS (i) Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (with Addendum) (ii) General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (with Addendum to General Conditions) (iii) Laws and Regulations Rider (iv) Insurance and Bonds Rider V. SPECIFICATIONS \051 \38572.3 27- 102304706011 SECTION I NOTICE INVITING BIDS (BID No. 93- PL-205) \051 \626.3 216 - 102304706011 NOTICE INVITING BIDS (BID NO. 93- PL-205) BID INVITATION: Notice is hereby given that sealed written Bids are invited by the City of Gilroy ( "Owner ") for certain Work more particularly described below. RECEIPT OF BIDS: Sealed Bids for the Work will be received by the Owner at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, in the Finance Department, City Hall, 7351 Rosanna Street, Gilroy, California 95020, until 2 :00 p.m. on December 10, 1992. Any Bid received after such time will not be given consideration by the Owner. OPENING OF BIDS: Bids will be publicly opened and read at 2:00 p.m. on December 10, 1992, at the City Council Chambers for the City of Gilroy, located at 7351 Rosanna Street, Gilroy, California. ALL BIDDERS MUST ATTEND A MANDATORY PRE -BID WALK - THROUGH OF THE PROJECT SITE. SEE BELOW FOR DETAILS. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The Work involves the seismic repair and strengthening of Old City Hall, located in Gilroy, California, together with associated interior renovation thereof, including the installation of an elevator, removal of existing raised wood floors and miscellaneous concrete and metal work pertaining to handicap access. A more detailed description of the Work is set forth in Section 01010 of the Specifications. SITE OF WORK: The site of the Work ( "Project Site ") is the existing Old City Hall building, located 7400 Monterey Street (northeast corner of Sixth Stmt and Monterey Street), Gilroy, California. COMPLETION OF WORK: Substantial Completion of the Work must be achieved within two hundred seventy ( 270) calendar days after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed issued by the Owner. OBTAINING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents (including Specifications and full scale Drawings) may be obtained from the Owner at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, in the Finance Department, City Hall, 7351 Rosanna Street, Gilroy, California, upon payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100) (non - refundable) for each set of Contract Documents. Please make all checks payable to. the City of Gilroy. Partial sets of the Contract Documents will not be available for purchase. All Specifications and Drawings included as part of such Contract Documents are hereby made a part of this Notice Inviting Bids. PLAN ROOMS: Copies of the Contract Documents (including Specifications and Drawings) will be available for review at the following locations: \051 \626.3 216 - 102304706011 -1- Daily Pacific Builder Plan Room 221 Main Street, Suite 800 San Francisco, CA 94100 (415) 882 -2806 Daily Pacific Builder Plan Room 1774 Technology Drive San Jose, CA 95110 (408) 452 -7667 Santa Clara County Builders Exchange Plan Room 4000 Green Street Santa Clara, CA 95050 (408) 727 -4000 Alameda County Builders Exchange 3055 Alvarado San Leandro, CA 94577 (510) 483 -8800 Monterey Builders Exchange 343 Ocean Ave. Monterey, CA 93940 (408) 373 -3033 Salinas Valley Builders Exchange 590A Brunken Salinas, CA 93901 (408) 758 -1624 Any Bidder desiring to review the Contract Documents at such locations should contact personnel at the applicable location to determine the times during which such review can be made. BID SECURITY: Each Bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier's check or bid bond in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the total Base Bid made payable to the City of Gilroy as a guarantee that the Bidder, if its Bid is accepted, will promptly execute the construction contract set forth in the Contract Documents and make all submittals required to be made pursuant to the Contract Documents, all in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. A Bid shall not be considered by the Owner unless one of the foregoing forms of Bidder's security is enclosed with it. BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN: Each Bid shall remain open, and each Bidder shall guarantee its total Base Bid, for a period of ninety (90) calendar days from the date of bid opening. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE CLASSIFICATION: In accordance with the provisions of California Public Contract Code Section 3300, the Owner has determined that the Contractor shall possess a valid Class "B" General Building Contractors license at the time that the Contract is awarded. Failure to possess the specified license shall render the Bid as non- responsive and shall act as a bar to award of the Contract to any Bidder not possessing said license at the time of award. CALIFORNIA WAGE RATE REO S: In accordance with the provisions of California Labor Code Sections 1770, 1773, 1773.1, 1773.6 and 1773.7, as amended, the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in accordance with the standards set forth in Section 1773 for the locality in which the Work is to be performed. A copy of said wage rates is on file at the office of the City Clerk of the City of Gilroy. It shall be mandatory upon the contractor to whom the \051 \626.3 216 - 102304706011 -2- Contract is awarded and upon any subcontractor under the contractor to pay not less than said specified rates to all workmen employed by them in the execution of the Work. RETAINAGE FROM PAYMENTS: The contractor to whom the Contract is awarded may elect to receive 100 percent of payments due under the Contract Documents from time to tune, without retention of any portion of the payment by the Owner, by depositing securities of equivalent value with the Owner or permitted escrow agent in accordance with the provisions of Section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code. Securities eligible for investment under this provision shall be limited to those listed in Section 16430 of the California Government Code, bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit, interest- bearing demand deposit accounts, standby letters of credit, or any other security mutually agreed to by such contractor and the Owner. Alternatively, such contractor may request and the Owner shall make payment of retentions earned directly to the designated escrow agent at the expense of such contractor, all in accordance with Section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code. MANDATORY PREAD WALK- THROUGHS: Pre-bid mandatory walk - throughs of the Project Site will be conducted jointly by the Owner and the Architect between 1:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m. on November 18, 1992 and November 23, 1992. The object of such mandatory walk- throughs is to acquaint Bidders with the site conditions. All Bidders are required to attend at least one of the two walk- throughs. Failure by a Bidder to attend one of these mandatory walk - throughs shall disqualify any Bid submitted by such non - attending Bidder and shall act as a bar to award of the Contract to any such non - attending Bidder. PROJECT ADMINISTRATION: All communications relative to this Work prior to opening of Bids shall be directed to the Architect at the location listed below: Architectural Resources Group Pier 9, The Embarcadem San Francisco, California 94111 Telephone: (415) 421 -1600 Attn: Ms. Kathleen Johnson OWNER'S RIGHTS RESERVED: The Owner reserves the right, exercisable in its sole discretion at any time, to withdraw its invitation for Bids, to accept or reject any or all Bids, to waive any informality or irregularity in a Bid, to act as the sole judge of the merit and qualifications of submitted Bids, and/or to make awards to the lowest responsible Bidder as it may best serve the interest of the Owner, all without liability to any Bidders or other parties. In addition, the Owner reserves the right, exercisable in its sole discretion at any time prior to its issuance of the Notice to Proceed, to withdraw the solicitation of Bids being made hereby (whether before or after the opening of the Bids) and to revoke any award of the Contract (if such award has been made at such time), without any liability to any Bidders or the parties, including, without limitation, the Bidder to whom the Contract was awarded. In such event, the Owner shall promptly return the Bid securities accompanying the Bids to the respective Bidders whose Bids they accompany. \051 \626.3 216 - 102304706011 -3- PROJECT FUNDING: It is anticipated that the funds used by the Owner to pay for the performance of the Work will include funds received from the State Office of Emergency Services and from the Federal Emergency Management Agency. In addition to complying with all other applicable Laws and Regulations, the Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall be obligated to comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations arising from the fact that a portion of the funds used to pay for the performance of the Work are derived from such sources. EXPERIENCE OF CONTRACTOR: Bidders are hereby notified that each Bidder submitting a Bid must have successfully completed not less than three (3) comparable alteration projects involving historical buildings, at least one (1) of which must have been completed pursuant to a public works contract with a public entity, and all of which must have been completed within the last five (5) years, employing personnel skilled in the processes and operations indicated in the Contract Documents. EXPERIENCE OF SUBCONTRACTORS: In general, all subcontractors proposed by each Bidder should have sufficient experience and expertise to perform the applicable portion of the Work. Bidders are hereby notified that the existing Old City Ball building is a historic structure and that certain portions of the Work are considered by the Owner to be highly technical in nature, thereby requiring a high degree of skill and experience to be properly performed. Accordingly, the Owner is requiring that the subcontractors proposed by each Bidder to perform such portions of the Work have a certain level of experience, which levels of experience are more particularly described in Section 21 of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders and the Specifications. DEFINITIONS: All capitalized terms used herein shall have the same meanings and definitions as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Date: OWE: CTI Y OF GILROY By: Mr. Jay Baksa City Administrator - END OF NOTICE INVITING BIDS - \051 \626.3 216 - 102304706011 -4- SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (With Supplementary Instructions) \051 \38572.3 27- 102304706011 T H E A M E R I C A N I N S T I T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T S Reproduced with permission of The American Institute of Architects under license number #192123. Permission expires October 31, 1992. FURTHER REPRODUCTION IS PROHIBITED. Th xt f thi d t i not' od 1 la Because AIA Documents are revised from tlme to time, users should ascertain from the AIA the current edition of this document. Copies of the current edition of this AIA document may be purchased from The American Institute of Architects or its local distributors. AIA Document A701 e to o s ocumen s m e nVuape and is not Intended for use in other documents without permission of the AIA. Instructions to Bidders 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES INTENTIONALLY DEI= 1. DEFINITIONS 6. 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES AND CONTRACTOR 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS Copyright 1970, 1974, 1978, ©1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • FOURTH EDITION • AIA® • ©1987 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A701 -1987 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 pffl. Rim 14 Mid eentinet f1millpOAle vim MO 111peellielle thr6e�+rrnet. 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Con- tract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in other Con- tract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. C% 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bid- der offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Docu- ments as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.9 A Sub - bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. - - 7AFMCLE Z BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Docu- mer:zs and the Bid is made in accordance therewith. 2.1.2 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Docu- ments or contract documents, to the extent that such docu- mentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently << or presently under construction. 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and sys- tems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 COPIES 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Docu- ments from the issuing office designated in the,40i en' �w�w► in the number and for the ek-peyt sum, if any, stated therein. left eW!s aftel Iseeip! of Bids. 44w "IlEd file, lei W"W"Wa-end * Notice Inviting Bids 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub - bidders or others unless specifically offered in supplementary instructions to bidders. 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 3.1.4 In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bid- ding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub- bidders requiring clarification or inter- pretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, cor- rections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, A!A DOCUMENT A701 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - FOURTH EDITION - AIA''= - O 198' - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1'35 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2(NNx) A701 -1987 2 dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other mate- rials, equipment or other portions of the Work including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or dis- approval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Adden- dum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3A.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form included with the Bidding Documents. 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of dis- crepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern. 4.1.4 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor, part- nership, corporation or other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. 4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 of Sh 141014 Dim - psreg�6�!�� 4.2.2 it. thr 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bondsALoquissilphave been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected. * and all other submittals required by the Bidding Documents 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a scaled opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the nota- tion "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • FOURTH EDITION • AIA® • ©1987 • THE 3 A701 -1987 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS Notice Inviting 5.1.1 Unless stated otherwise in the - 4en-49-10W, the properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS 5.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids, reject a Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically pro- vided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bid- der on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid 089wd6 (less any Alternates not accepted by Owner). ARTICLE 6 INTENTIONALLY DELETED Bids, in P 14806" M�stilire�ie ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND * r See Su lementar�Instructions to Bidders 4waish ham. ins k 114 W"04080"Mew AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • FOURTH EDITION • AIA® • ©1987 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A701 -1987 4 zi i 7.2.2 ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 8.1 FORM TO BE USED 8.1.1 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Con- tractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum/ ** * *,modified as reflected in the Bidding Documents] AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • FOURTH EDITION • AIA® • 01987 • THE 5 A701•1987 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1 -35 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2(")6 f SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS These Supplementary Instructions to Bidders ( "Supplementary Instructions ") are made a part of those certain Instructions to Bidders ( "Instructions ") set forth in that certain Project Manual entitled "Old City Hall, Gilroy, California, Project Manual, October 26, 1992, Bid No. 93-PL-205." 1. Bidder's Statement. In selecting the lowest responsible Bidder, the Owner intends to give consideration to, among other things, the general competency of the Bidder for the performance of the Work. To this end, each Bid shall be supported by a statement on the form set forth in Section II of the form entitled "Information Required of Bidder" ( "Bidder's Statement ") bound herein. Any Bid submitted without a fully completed Bidder's Statement (and/or without the attachments described therein) shall be deemed to be non - responsive and may cause its rejection. 2. List of Subcontractors. In accordance with Section 4104 of the California Public Contract Code, each Bidder shall include in its Bid the following: (i) the name and the location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Bidder in or about the construction of the Work, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the Bidder, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the Work according to detailed drawings, contained in the plans and specifications made a part of the Contract Documents, in an amount in excess of one -half of one percent of the Bidder's total bid amount, and (ii) the portion of the Work which will be done by each subcontractor. Each Bidder shall list only one subcontractor for each such portion of the Work. The foregoing list of subcontractors shall be set forth under Section I of the Bidder's Statement bound herein. The attention of each Bidder is directed to the provisions of Subparagraph 3.4.3 of the General Conditions which stipulates the percent of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces. Any Bids submitted without including the required list of subcontractors shall be deemed to be non - responsive and may cause its rejection. 3. Tualification of Bidders. No person, firm, partnership, corporation or association shall be allowed to make or file or be interested in more than one Bid whether under the same or different names. If it appears that the same person, firm, partnership, corporation or association is interested in more than one Bid, all Bids in which such Bidder is interested shall be rejected. If the Owner believes that collusion exist among the Bidders, all Bids will be rejected. 4. Bidders Examination of Contract Documents and Project Site. It shall be the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to: (i) thoroughly examine the Contract Documents; (ii) visit the Project Site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; (iii) consider all Laws and Regulations that may affect the Work, including cost, progress or performance of the Work; (iv) study and carefully correlate the Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents; and (v) notify the Owner or \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -1- the Architect of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. Nothing in the Contract Documents permits violation of any Laws and Regulations, and where conflict occurs, the Laws and Regulations shall govern, except where superior work is specified or indicated. Such conflict shall be brought to the Architect's attention for clarification prior to the submission of a Bid by a Bidder. If minor changes or additions to the Work are required by any governmental agency after award of the Contract, such changes or additions shall be included as part of the Work at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Underground Utilities. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities at or contiguous to the Project Site is based upon information and data furnished to the Owner and the Architect by the owner of such underground utilities or others, and the Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 6. Examination by Bidders. Before submitting its Bid, a Bidder will, at Bidder's own cost and expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions of the Project Site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress or performance of the Work and which the Bidder deems reasonable necessary to determine its Bid for performing the Work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. The Owner will provide each Bidder with access to the Project Site for such purposes upon the prior written request of the applicable Bidder. Any Bidder desiring access to the Project Site must execute and deliver to the Owner a Site Access Agreement in the form attached hereto as Exhibit "& prior to any entry permitted by the Owner. 7. Bidder's Representations. In addition to the representations set forth in Article 2 of the Instructions, each Bidder by making a Bid represents that it has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Laws and Regulations affecting the Work, including costs, progress or performance of the Work, and has made such independent investigations of the Project Site as the Bidder deems necessary, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the full and complete performance of the Work. Each Bidder by making a Bid acknowledges and agrees that the Contract Documents are complete and unambiguous in all respects. 8. Bid Security. Each Bid shall be accompanied by Bid security in the form of a certified or cashier's check or an approved bid bond in the amount stated in the Notice Inviting Bids. If a Bidder elects to furnish a bid bond as its Bid security, such bid bond shall be furnished in the form attached hereto as Exhibit "B." which bid bond must be executed by a corporate surety that is authorized to engage in such business in the State of California and that is otherwise acceptable to the Owner, and the attorney -in -fact who executes the bond on behalf of the corporate surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. Said check or bid bond shall be made payable to the Owner and shall be given as a guaranty that the Bidder, if awarded the Contract for the Work, will execute and return the Agreement to the Owner, together with the required insurance certificates, bonds and other submittals required under the Contract Documents, all in accordance with Paragraph 15 below. \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -2- 9. Return of Bid SecuriV. Within fourteen (14) days after the opening of the Bids, the Owner will return the Bid security accompanying such of - the Bids as are not being considered in making the award. The Owner's right to retain all other Bids securities shall be governed by Subparagraph 4.2.3 of the Instructions. 10. Bid Form. All Bids shall be made on the forms set forth in Section III of the Project Manual. Any Bid submitted without such forms being fully completed shall be deemed to be non - responsive and may cause its rejection. Each Bid shall be accompanied by the required Bid security, a fully completed original of the Bidder's Statement, a fully executed original of the Non - Collusion Affidavit in the form bound herein and such other submittals required by the Contract Documents. 11. Telephones. Bidders are hereby notified that the availability of public telephones at City Hall is extremely limited and that no private telephones will be made available to Bidders by the Owner. 12. Digpancy in Bids. In the event there is more than one Bid item in the Bidding Schedule, the Bidder shall furnish a price for all Bid items in the Schedule, and failure to do so will render the Bid non - responsive and may cause its rejection. In the event there are unit price Bid items in the Bidding Schedule and the "amount" indicated for a unit price Bid item does not equal the product of the unit price in quantity, the unit price will govern and the amount will be corrected accordingly, and the Bidder shall be bound by said correction. In the event there is more than one Bid item in the Bidding Schedule and the total Base Bid indicated does not agree with the sum of the prices on the individual items, the prices bid on the individual item shall govern and the total Base Bid for the schedule will be corrected accordingly, and the Bidder shall be bound by said correction. 13. Quantities of Work. The quantities of work or materials stated in unit price items of the Bid are supplied only to give an indication of the general scope of the work, and the Owner does not expressly or by implication agree that the actual amount of work or material will correspond therewith, and reserves the right after to increase or decrease the amount of any unit price item of the Work by an amount up to and including twenty-five percent (25 %) of any Bid item, without changing the unit price, and shall include the right to delete any Bid item in its entirety, or to add additional Bid items. 14. Modifications and Unauthorized Alternative Bids. Unauthorized conditions, limitations or provisos attached to the Bid will render it informal and may cause its rejection as being non - responsive. The completed Bid forms shall be without interlineation, alterations or erasures in the printed text. Alternative Bids will not be considered unless called for. 15. Execution of Agreement. The Bidder to whom award is made shall execute and return to the Owner the written Agreement in the form set forth in Section IV of the Project Manual, together with all insurance certificates, bonds and other submittals required by the Contract Documents, all within ten (10) days after receipt of the Agreement from the Owner \051 \59416.3 213- 102204706011 -3- for execution. Failure or refusal to execute and return such Agreement (and furnish such certificates, bonds and other submittals) as herein provided within such ten (10) day period or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in connection therewith shall be just cause for annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Bid security to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. In the event of any such annulment, the Owner may award the Contract to the second lowest responsible Bidder. If the second lowest responsible Bidder refuses or fails to execute the Agreement (and/or furnish the required certificates, bonds or other submittals) as herein provided for or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in connection therewith, the Owner may award the Contract to the third lowest responsible Bidder. On the failure or refusal of such second or third lowest Bidder to execute the Agreement (and/or furnish the required certificates, bonds or other submittals), each such Bidder's Bid security will be likewise forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. 16. Worker's Compensation Requirement. Each Bidder should be aware that, in accordance with Section 3700 of the California Labor Code, it will, if awarded the Contract, be required to secure the payment of compensation to its employees and execute and deliver to the Workers' Compensation Certification in the form contained in these Contract Documents. 17. Bidding Documents. As used in the Instructions, the term "Bidding Documents" shall mean the Contract Documents, which Contract Documents consist of the following: Notice Inviting Bids (Section 1), Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders (Section I), Bid Forms (Section III), Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Addendum to Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions, Laws and Regulations Rider and Insurance and Bonds Rider (all as set forth in Section M, Specifications (Section V), Drawings, and all addendums to the foregoing as may be issued by the Owner or the Architect prior to Bid opening. The Contract Documents also consist of any Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement, however, such Modifications are not part of the Bidding Documents since such Modifications only arise following the award of the Contract. o In addition, the term "Bidding Requirements" as used in the Instructions shall mean those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of the Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form and other sample bidding and contract forms set forth therein. 18. Performance Bond and Payment Bond. The Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder, all in accordance with Section 2 of the Insurance and Bonds Rider included as part of the Contract Documents. 19. Insurance. The Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall furnish insurance certificates in accordance with Section 1 of the Insurance and Bonds Rider included as part of \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -4- the Contract Documents reflecting the insurance coverages required to be maintained by the Contractor pursuant to Section 1 of such Insurance and Bonds Rider. 20. Experience of Contractor. The Owner is requiring that the Contractor to whom the Contract will be awarded must have successfully completed a minimum of three (3) comparable alteration projects involving historical buildings, at least one (1) of which must have been completed pursuant to a public works contract with a public agency, and all of which must have been completed within the last five (5) years, employing personnel skilled in the processes and operations indicated in the Contract Documents. Each Bidder shall submit with its Bid a list of such projects and a name and telephone number of a reference contract person with each project. FAILURE BY A BIDDER TO PROVIDE THE INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THIS SECTION 20 SHALL RENDER THE APPLICABLE BID AS BEING NON- RESPONSIVE AND MAY RESULT IN ITS REJECTION BY THE OWNER. 21. Experience of Subcontractors. 21.1 In G ne . In general, all Subcontractors proposed by each Bidder should have sufficient experience and expertise to perform the applicable portion of the Work. The existing Old City Hall building is a historical structure and certain portions of the Work are considered by the Owner to be highly technical in nature, thereby requiring a high degree of skill and experience to be properly performed. Accordingly, the Owner is requiring that the Subcontractors proposed by each Bidder to perform the portions of the Work described in Section 21.2 below have the level of experience described below and that each Bidder provide evidence thereof in accordance with Section 21.3 below. 21.2 Specification. (a) Shotcrete. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 03310 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience using methods and materials described therein, (ii) employ foremen, nozzlemen, gunmen and rodmen all with at least two (2) years experience in their respective trades, and (iii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of its work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (b) Masonry Cleaning. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 04550 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in comparable projects involving historical buildings, using methods and materials described in such section, and (ii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of its work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (c) Steel Fabricator. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to provide the steel fabrication in accordance with Section 05100 of the Specifications must have at least five (5) years successful experience in the fabrication of structural steel. In addition to the requirements of Section 21.3 below, each Bidder shall submit evidence with its Bid \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -5- satisfactory to the Owner of the ability, facilities and proficiency in personnel of the proposed steel fabricator. (d) Steel Erector. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the steel erection work described in Section 05100 of the Specifications must have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience using methods and materials described therein. In addition to the requirements of Section 21.3 below, each Bidder shall submit evidence with its Bid satisfactory to the Owner of ability, facilities and proficiency of personnel with respect to the steel erector proposed by such Bidder. (e) Selective Demolition. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 02050 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in comparable projects involving historic buildings, and (ii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of its work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (f) Center Core Wall Reinforcement. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 04250 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience working with dry centercoring and with the proportioning and delivery of resin -sand grouts for use in the strengthening of unreinforced masonry walls in comparable projects involving historic buildings, (ii) have successfully completed two (2) projects of with size and scope similar to this project within the last three (3) years, and (iii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of its work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (g) Brick Masonry Restoration. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 04420 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in comparable projects involving historical buildings, using methods and materials described in such section, and (ii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of its work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (h) Stone Masonry Restoration. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 04525 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in comparable projects involving historical buildings, using methods and materials described in such section, and (ii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of its work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (i) Wood Window Restoration. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 08600 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of three (3) years successful experience in the repair and rehabilitation of historic wood and leaded glass windows, and (ii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of its work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -6- ' (j) Lath and Plaster. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 09200 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of three (3) years successful experience in the installation and repair of gypsum and cement plaster in historic buildings, and (ii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of such Subcontractor's work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (k) Wood Strip Flooring. The Subcontractor proposed each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 09560 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of three (3) years successful experience in the installation of wood strip flooring, and (ii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of its work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (1) Pte. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the work described in Section 09900 of the Specifications must (i) have a minimum of three (3) years successful experience in the application of paint systems in historic buildings, and (ii) employ a superintendent to supervise the performance of such work who has sufficient experience and qualifications to provide such supervision. (m) Finished Hardware. The Subcontractor (i.e., supplier) proposed by each Bidder to supply the finished hardware described in Section 08700 of the Specifications must be professionally qualified to schedule and service the requirements of the work of such Section. (n) Food Service Equipment Manufacturer. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the food service equipment manufacturing described in Section 11400 of the Specifications must be regularly engaged in the production of such food service equipment. (o) Food Service Equipment Shop Fabricator/Installer. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform any fabrication and/or installation work described in Section 11400 of the Specifications must have at least five (5) years successful experience in such fabrication and/or installation. (p) Hydraulic Elevator Maintenance. The Subcontractor proposed by each Bidder to perform the maintenance work described in Section 14212 of the Specifications must (i) have successful experience in complete maintenance of elevators, (ii) employ sufficient competent personnel to handle such maintenance service, (iii) have in stock a store of parts adequate for replacement on permanent or emergency basis, (iv) be able to respond to trouble calls within three (3) hours, and (v) offer the Owner an agreement for continuing maintenance after expiration of the Correction Period. 21.3 Submittals by Bidders. Each Bidder shall submit with its Bid evidence satisfactory to the Owner that the Subcontractors described in Section 21.2 above have the requisite experience described in Section 21.2 above and that the superintendents to be employed \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -7- by such Subcontractors in connection therewith have the experience and qualifications set forth in Section 21.2 above. In addition, with respect to each Subcontractor described in Section 21.2 above, each Bidder shall submit a list of projects completed by the applicable Subcontractor within the last two (2) years, together with the name and telephone number of a reference contact person for each project listed. Upon the request of the Owner, each Bidder shall provide such additional information as the Owner may request in connection with the Owner's determination as to whether a Subcontractor proposed by a Bidder meets the applicable qualifications. FAILURE BY ANY BIDDER TO PROVIDE THE INFORMATION REQUIRED BY THIS SECTION 21 OR TO NAME SUBCONTRACTORS AND /OR SUPER- INTENDENTS WHICH THE OWNER, IN ITS SOLE AND ABSOLUTE DISCRETION, DETERMINES MEET THE APPLICABLE QUALIFICATIONS SHALL, IN EITHER INSTANCE, RENDER THE APPLICABLE BID AS BEING NON - RESPONSIVE AND MAY RESULT IN ITS REJECTION BY THE OWNER. 22. Municipal License. In addition to all other requirements set forth in the Contract Documents, the Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded must obtain and keep in force throughout the progress of the Work, a municipal license issued by the City of Gilroy. Concurrently with delivery of the executed Agreement to the Owner, the Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall furnish to the Owner a copy such license. 23. Bid Number. The Bid Number assigned by the Owner for the Project is 93 -PL- 205. In addition to the requirements set forth under Subparagraph 4.3.1 of the Instructions, each Bidder must have such Bid Number clearly typed or printed on the envelope containing its Bid and required submittals. 24. Definitions. The capitalized terms used in the Instructions and these Supple- mentary Instructions shall have the same meanings and definitions as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents. \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -8- EXHIBIT "A" SITE ACCESS AGREEMENT In and for the consideration of being provided access to the Project Site by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 6 of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders included as part of that certain Project Manual entitled "Old City Hall, Gilroy, California, Project Manual, October 26, 1992, Bid No. 93 -PL -205" ( "Project Manual "), the undersigned ( "Bidder ") does hereby agrees as follows: (a) Limited Access. The Bidder's access to the Project Site shall be limited solely to such access as is reasonably necessary for Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents (as defined below) to conduct such explorations and tests as is reasonably necessary for submission of a Bid. In no event shall Bidder enter (or permit Bidder's Agents to enter) upon the Project Site without first obtaining Owner's written approval thereof, which approval (and access rights), if given, may be revoked by Owner at any time in its sole discretion. Approved entries onto the Project Site by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents shall be made at such times and in such manner as Owner may designate and in accordance with all Laws and Regulations, and Bidder agrees to comply with such restrictions and procedures as Owner may impose in connection with any such entries. Bidder acknowledges and agrees that nothing contained in this Site Access Agreement or the Specifications shall in any way provide Bidder with any right, title or interest in or to the Project Site. (b) Damage and Restoration. Bidder shall be responsible for any and all damage caused to the Project Site as a result of any entry by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents onto the Project Site and/or any activities conducted by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents thereon. Bidder shall, at its sole coat and expense, promptly repair any such damage. In addition, following the completion of Bidder's explorations and tests, Bidder shall, at its sole cost and expense, promptly clean-up and restore the Project Site to the condition existing immediately prior to such activities. In the event Bidder fails to promptly take any of the actions required to be taken by Bidder pursuant to this subsection (b), Owner shall have the right to undertake such actions and Bidder shall reimburse Owner for all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in connection therewith, which reimbursement shall be made by Bidder to Owner within ten (10) days following Owner's written demand therefor. (c) Insurance: Safety Precautions. Bidder shall observe all safety precautions and procedures necessary to assure the safety of all persons and property during any entry by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents onto the Project Site. At the time of all entries by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents onto the Project Site and all activities conducted by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents thereon, Bidder shall maintain, at its sole coat and expense, such insurance coverages as are set forth in the Insurance and Bonds Rider set forth in the Project Manual (other than the coverage described in Section 1.4(vi) of such Rider). Prior to any entry by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents onto the Project Site, Bidder shall submit to Owner certificates of insurance reflecting the maintenance of the foregoing insurance coverages. (d) Indemnification. To the fullest extent permitted by the Laws and Regulations, Bidder shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Owner, Architect and their respective officers, directors, agents, employees and representatives against and from all liabilities, claims, costs, expenses, losses and damages, including, without limitation, actual attorneys' fees and legal costs, arising in connection with, by reason of or incidental to any entry by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents onto the Project Site and/or any activities conducted by Bidder and/or Bidder's Agents thereon. (e) Definitions. Except as otherwise provided herein, the capitalized terms used herein shall have the same meanings and definitions as set forth in the Project Manual. For purposes of this Site Access Agreement, the term "Bidder's Agents" shall mean all employees, agents and contractors of Bidder and any other persons for whose acts Bidder may be liable. Agreed to and signed this day of , 1992. BIDDER: By: Its: Agreed to and Accepted by: CITY OF GILROY By: Its: \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -1- ]EXHIBIT "B" BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That [Insert full name and address of Bidderl , as Principal, and [Insert full name and address of Suretyl , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Gilroy (hereinafter called "OWNER "), in the sum of (not less than 10 percent of the toW amount of the Bid) Dollars, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, said Principal has submitted a Bid to said OWNER to perform the WORK required under the bidding schedule(s) of the OWNER's Project Manual entitled "Old City Hall, Gilroy, California, Project Manual, October 26, 1992, Bid No. 93- PIr205." NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal is awarded a contract by said OWNER for the work described in the Project Manual and, within the time and in the manner required in the "Instructions to Bidders," enters into a written agreement on the form of agreement bound within said Project Manual, furnishes the required certificates of insurance, the required performance bond, the required payment bond and all other submittals required to be made at the time of said agreement pursuant to the Project Manual, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by said OWNER and OWNER prevails, said Surety shall pay all costs incurred by said OWNER in such suit, including a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court. SIGNED AND SEALED, this day of '19. (SEAL) (SEAL) (Principal) (Surety) By: By: (Signature) ignature) Title: Title: (SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF PRINCIPAL AND SURETY) \051 \59416.3 213 - 102204706011 -ii- E3 M3 SECTION III BID FORMS \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 BID (BID NO. 93 -PL -205) BID TO: The City of Gilroy 1. The undersigned Bidder does hereby submit this Bid to the City of Gilroy ( "Owner ") for consideration by Owner in connection with its award of the contract for the Work described in that certain Project Manual entitled "Old City Hall, Gilroy, California, Project Manual, October 26, 1992, Bid No. 93- PL-205" ( "Project Manual "). 2. The undersigned Bidder warrants and represents to Owner that it has carefully reviewed and read the Contract Documents and understands their entire contents and that, by submitting this Bid, the undersigned Bidder agrees to be bound by all the terms, provisions and conditions set forth in the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, those provisions dealing with the disposition of the Bid security accompanying this Bid and the execution of the Agreement in the form set forth therein. 3. This Bid shall remain open for the period stated in the Notice Inviting Bids unless otherwise required by law. In the event the undersigned Bidder is awarded the Contract, the undersigned Bidder agrees that it _will enter into and deliver the Agreement within the time and in the manner required in the Instructions to Bidders, and will furnish the insurance certificates, bonds and other submittals required by the Contract Documents concurrently with such delivery. 4. Bidder has examined copies of all the Contract Documents including the following addenda (receipt of all of which is hereby acknowledged): Number Date 5. The undersigned Bidder warrants and represents to Owner that the information accompanying this Bid is true and correct in all respects. To all the foregoing, and including the Bid Schedule, Bid Breakdown and Information Required of Bidder accompanying this Bid, said Bidder further agrees that, if awarded the Contract, it shall complete the Work required under and in accordance with the Contract Documents within the Contract Time stipulated in said Contract Documents, and to accept in full payment therefor the Contract Sum based on the total Base Bid set forth in the attached Bid Schedule. \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -1- The person executing this Bid below on behalf of the undersigned Bidder does hereby represent and warrant to Owner that he /she is duly authorized to execute this Bid on behalf of the undersigned Bidder and that this Bid is binding upon the undersigned Bidder in all respects. Dated: Bidder: a By: (Signature) Title: (AFFIX CORPORATE SEAL IF BIDDER IS A CORPORATION) The following attachments must accompany each Bid with all blanks set forth in such attachments having been fully completed and all attachments described therein having been attached. In the event any Bid is submitted either without any of such attachments or without such attachments being fully completed, such Bid shall be considered non - responsive and may result in its rejection by Owner. (i) Bid Schedule (ii) Bid Breakdown (iii) Information Required of Bidder I. List of Subcontractors H. Bidder's General Information (with all attachments described therein being attached thereto) In addition to the foregoing, each Bid must be accompanied by Bid security as described in Section 8 of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. If the Bidder is a corporation, this Bid must have the corporate seal affixed. In addition, if this Bid is being executed by an agent of the Bidder, a current power of attorney certifying such agent's authority to bind the Bidder must be attached to the Bid. \051 \59247.4 216 - 403004706011 -2- BID SCHEDULE - LUMP SUM BID SCHEDULE FOR OLD CITY HALL, GmROY, CALIFORNIA NOTE: All blanks in this Bid Schedule must be completed at the time of its submission to Owner. Prices bid must be written in both words and figures. Failure by a Bidder to complete all blanks shall render its Bid as being non- responsive and may result in its rejection by Owner. Item Amount No. Description ¢n Figures) ALLOWANCE ITEMS 1 Allowance No. 1 (see Section 01015 of Specifica- tions): Repair or replacement of existing sub - surface drainage system. (A) Concrete: 25 linear feet of concrete multi- plied by $ per linear foot: Dollars $ (Amount in words) (B) Asphalt: 25 linear feet of asphalt multiplied by $ per linear foot: Dollars $ (Amount in words) (C) Soil: 25 linear feet of soil multiplied by $ per linear foot: Dollars $ (Amount in words) \051 \59247.4 216- 103004706011 -3- 2 Allowance No. 2 (see Section 01015 of Specifica- tions): Repair or replacement of existing substrate to receive new epoxy and wood flooring systems. 100 square feet replacement of existing plywood sheathing with new exterior, A -C grade plywood multiplied by $ per square foot: Dollars $ (Amount in words) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 Allowance No. 3 (see Section 01015 of Specifica- tions): Installation of new bronze handrails. 25 linear feet multiplied by $ per linear foot: Dollars (Amount in words) $ 4 Allowance No. 4 (see Section 01015 of Specifica- tions): Installation of 3 new wood and glass, three panel doors at Dining Room 3 doors multiplied by $ per door: Dollars $ (Amount in words) n' # tv 5 Alternate No. 1 (see Section 01030 of Specifica- tions): Miscellaneous Electrical Work: Add Dollars (Amount in words) $ 6 Alternate No. 2 (see Section 01030 of Specifica- tions): Repair /Replacement of Existing Exterior Wood and Sheet Metal Trim: Add Dollars (Amount in words) \051 \59247.4 216-103004706011 e 7 Alternate No. 3 (see Section 01030 of Specifica- tions): Repair or replace sash frames or casing as required at all wood windows: Add Dollars $ (Amount in words) 8 Alternate No. 4 (see Section 01030 of Specifica- tions): Miscellaneous Finish Carpentry Items in Dining Room and First Floor Bar: $ Add Dollars (Amount in words) 9 Alternate No. 5: Not Used $ -0- 10 Alternate No. 6 (see Section 01030 of Specifica- tions): Installation of New Drapes in Auditorium and reupholstery of banquettes in Dining Room: Add Dollars $ (Amount in words) 11 Alternate No. 7 (see Section 01030 of Specifica- tions): Installation of New Exit Doors: Add Dollars (Amount in words) t ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ OTHER ITEMS 12 Sheeting, shoring and bracing or equivalent method conforming to applicable safety orders. For Lump Sum of Dollars $ (Amount in words) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - - - - -- \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -5- 13 Constriction of all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and the performance of all other obligations of the Contractor thereunder, excluding the work listed in bid items nos. 1 through 12 above, inclusive. For Lump Sum of Dollars $ (Amount in words) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - - - - -- TOTAL BASE BID (LUMP SUAQ Sum of Bid Items 1 through 13 above, inclusive: Dollars (Amount in words) $ SEPARATE ALTERNATE BID ITEM (DO NOT INCLUDE AS PART OF TOTAL BASE BID ABOVE) Install new painted, galvanized metal handrailings in lieu of the bronze handrails referenced in Bid Item 3 above (See Section 01030 of Specifications): 25 linear feet multiplied by $ per linear foot: Dollars (Amount in words) $ \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -6- BID BREAKDOWN NOTE: All blanks in this Bid Breakdown must be completed at the time of its submission to Owner. Failure by Bidder to complete all blanks shall render its Bid as being non - responsive and may result in its rejection by Owner. Selective Demolition ....................... $ Excavation ............................. $ Irrigation ............................. $ Planting ............... I............. $ Center Coring ........................... $ Masonry .............................$ Millwork .............................$ Carpentry ............................. $ Metal Roofing ........................... $ Built -up Roofing ......................... $ Sheet Metal ............................ $ Doors............. . ................ $ Finish Hardware ......................... $ Lath and Plaster ...................... ..... $ Carpeting Material ........................ $ Exterior ........................ $ Painting ............................. $ Interior ........................ $ Exterior ........................ $ Commercial Kitchen Equipment ................. $ Elevator ............................. $ Plumbing .............................$ H.V.A.C. ............................. $ Electrical ............................. $ \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -7- INFORMATION REQbIRED OF BIDDER The Bidder shall list below the name and the location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render services to Bidder in or about the construction of the Work, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under #" subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvements according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one -half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid. The Bidder shall also list below the portion of the Work which will be done by each subcontractor. The Bidder shall list only one subcontractor for each portion as is defined by the Bidder in his or her bid. The Bidder's attention is directed to the provisions of Subparagraph 3.4.3 of the General Conditions which stipulates the percent of the Work to be performed with the Bidders' own forces. Failure to comply with the foregoing requirements will render the Bid non - responsive and may cause its rejection. Work to be Subcontr. License Percent of Total Subcontractor's Performed Number Contract Name & Address 1. 2. 3. 4. \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 5. Rl 7. zi 10. 11. 12. 13. \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -9- 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Note: Attach additional sheets if necessary. \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -10- II. BIDDER'S GENERAL INFORMATION: NOTE: All blanks set forth below must be completed at the time of submission to Owner, with all attachments described below being attached hereto at such time. Additional sheets shall be attached as required. Failure by Bidder to complete all blanks and/or attach all attachments shall render its Bid as being non - responsive and may result in his rejection by Owner. 1. CONTRACTOR's legal name and address: 2. CONTRACTOR is a (insert type of entity (e.g., sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other legal entity)): 3. If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, state of incorporation: 4. CONTRACTOR's telephone number. 5. CONTRACTOR's license: Primary classification State License No. and Expiration Date Supplemental classifications held, if any: Name of Licensee, if different from (1) above: 6. Name of person who inspected site of proposed Work for your firm: Name: Date of Inspection: 7. Name of person who attended the mandatory walk-through described in the Notice Inviting Bids: Name: 8. Name, address and telephone number of surety company and agent who will provide the bonds required by the Contract Documents: \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -11- 9. Name, address and telephone number of insurance company or companies and agent(s) who will be providing the insurance required by the Contract Documents: 10. ATTACH TO THIS BID the experience resumes of the person who will be the construction superintendent and proposed substitutes in the event of necessary changes in personnel; such resumes must reflect the projects worked on, the applicable supervisor's specialty and the time that each supervisor has worked on each project. 11. ATTACH TO THIS BID a financial statement, references, and other information, sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of CONTRACTOR's current financial condition. 12. Complete, sign and acknowledge before a notary public the "Noncollusion Affidavit" included herein as required by California Public Contract Code Section 7106. 13. ATTACH TO THIS BID a list of at least three (3) comparable alteration projects involving historical buildings, at least one (1) of which must have been completed pursuant to a public works contract with a public entity, and all of which must have been completed within the last five (5) years, employing personnel skilled in the processes and operations indicated in the Contract Documents, together with the name and telephone number of a reference contact person with each project listed. 14. ATTACH TO THIS BID the evidence and submittals required under Section 21 of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. NOTICE TO BIDDER: Notice is hereby given to the Contractor that any bidder or contractor not properly licensed in accordance with the laws of the State of California at the time the contract is awarded shall be subject to all legal penalties imposed by law, including, but not limited to, any appropriate disciplinary action by the Contractors State License Board. \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -12- NONCOLLUSION AFmAVIT TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID State of California ) ss. County of ) being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is of , the parry making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid. Signed: Title: Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 1992 Notary Public (SEAL) \051 \59247.4 216 - 103004706011 -13- SECTION IV CONTRACT Forms \051 \38572.3 27-102304706011 T H E Reproduced with R I C A N I N S T-1 T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T S p permission of The American institute of Architects ender license number 892123. Permission expires October 31, 1992. FURTHER REPRODUCTION IS PROHIBITED. Because AIA Documents are revised from time to The text of this document is not "model lanpuape• time, users should ascertain from the AIA the current edition of this document. Copies of the current edition of this AIA document may be purchased from The American Institute of Architects or Its local distributors. AIA Document A101 and is not Intended for use In other documents without permission of the AIA. Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and contractor where the basis' of payment is a STIPULATED SUM 1987 EDITION THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. The 1987 Edition of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year of Nineteen Hundred and (APPLICABLE DATE TO BE INSERTED) BETWEEN the Owner: City of Gilroy (Name and address) 7351 Rosanna Street Gilroy, CA 95020 -0141 and the Contractor: (APPLICABLE NAME AND ADDRESS TO BE INSERTED) (Name and address) The Project is: Old City Hall (Name and location) 7400 Monterey Street (Northeast corner at Sixth Street and Monterey Street) Gilroy, CA The Architect is: Architectural Resources Group (Name and address) Pier 9, The Etbarcader0 San Francisco, CA 94111 The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below. Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, ©1987 by The American Institute of Archi- tects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA® • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101 -1987 1 ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall execute the entire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others, eras fe44"": ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement is the date from which the Contract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured, and shall be the date of this Agreement, as first written above, unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement, if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) Date of commencement to be established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner ( "Notice to Proceed "). 3.2 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than (Insert the calendar date or number of calendar days after the date of commencement. Also insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of cer- tain portions of the Work, if not stated elsewbere in the Contract Documents.) Twn Hundred Seventy (270) calendar days following the date of commencement set forth in the Owner's Notice to Proceed, , subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if arty, for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time.) AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA® • ©1987 W THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101 -1987 2 ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of Dollars ($ TO BE COMPLETED AT TIME OF AWARD ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Con- tract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date until which that amount is valid.) (TO BE COMPLETED AT TIME OF AWARD BASED UPON ALTERNATES SELECTED BY THE OWNER) 4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: (TO BE COMPLETED AT TIME OF AWARD BASED UPON UNIT PRICES LISTED I'OR ALLOWANCE ITEMS IN CONTRACTOR'S BID SCHEDULE) AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • A10 • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101-1987 3 ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS and the Owner 5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect /by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: 5.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by the Architecynot later1tnan owner (1st) day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the thirtieth ( 30th) day of the same month. If an Application for Payment is received by the R�Re €heAArchitect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than thirty (30 ) days after the Avek4evt- receives the Application for Payment. Owner 5.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work And be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architec may require. This schedule, or the unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. / Ownerl' 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows 5.6.1. Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of ten percent ( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in the dispute may be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.7 of the General Conditions even though the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order; 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the ompleted construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing�ess retainage of ten percent ( 10 %); 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Para- graph 9.5 of the General Conditions. 5.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Paragraph 5.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to Ninety —five and the Owner percent( 95 %) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architeoishall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and 5.7.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. 5.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: N/A Qf it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit The retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Subpara- graphs 5.6.1 and 5.0.2 aborre, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) *which equipment and materials shall be covered by the insurance required under the Contract Documents and shall reference in the title documents applicable thereto the Owner's interest therein, AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA® • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101-1987 4 ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except ������_hich correct nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 oft uirements, if any, which necessarily surviv e final ertificate for Payment has besuch final payment shall be made by See Addendum ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document, the ref- erence refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice sbould be obtained witb respect to deletions or modifications, and also regarding requirements sucb as written disclosures or waivers.) 7.3 Other provisions: See Addendum ARTICLE 8 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. 8.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA° • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101 -1987 5 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AIA Document A101, 1987 Edition,; as modified herein. 9.1.2 The General Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1987 Editioq. a$ 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated modific October 26, 1992. 9.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 9.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) X"& , SEE EXHIBIT "A" ATTACHED HERETO AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA® • ©1987 4P THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101 -1987 6 9.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated October 26, 1992 unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Nuubbw 49kio. X1;60 SEE EXHIBIT "B" ATTACHED HERETO 9.1.6 The addenda, if any, are as follows: Number jilm! Ram"W 1. Addendum to Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor 2. (OTHER ADDENDUMS ISSUED PRIOR TO BID OPENING TO BE LISTED) iw@ 1606 Pam W966@ Gwo6ow-, AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA" • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101-1987 7 WA DUIUn• Unfi—n—i nhntnennvinn vinlatas U.S. enovriaht laws and is subiect to leaal Drosecution. 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming pan of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List bere any additional documents wbich are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. The General Conditions provide that bidding requirements sucb as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) 1. Notice Inviting Bids (Section I), Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders (Section II), and Bid Forms (Section III), all as set forth in the Project Manual. 2• Addendum to General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Laws and Requlations Rider and Insurance and Bonds Rider, all as set forth in Section IV of the Project Manual. 3. (OTHER DOCUMENTS ISSUED PRIOR TO BID OPENING TO BE LISTED). If Contractor is a corporation or a partnership, the individual executing this Agreement on behalf of the corporation or partnership, as the case may be, represents and warrants that he /she is duly authorized to execute and deliver this Agreement on behalf of said entity in accordance with its corporate by laws or statement of partnership, as the case may be, and that this Agreement is binding upon said entity in accordance with its terms. If Contractor is a corporation, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, deliver to the Owner a certified copy of a resolution of the Board of Directors of the corporation authorizing or ratifying the execution of this Agreement. If the Contractor is a partnership, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, deliver to the Owner a certified copy of its partnership agreement authorizing such execution. The aforementioned corporate resolution shall also designate the person(s) who is authorized on behalf of the Contractor to execute and deliver such documents, instruments and papers as may be necessary,-expedient or proper for the performance of this Agreement. This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. OWNER CITY OF GILROY CONTRACTOR (APPLICABLE NAME TO BE ADDED) (Signature) (Signature) (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA® • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A101 -1987 8 Lai M EXHIBIT "A" LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 01025 01015 01030 01040 01045 01050 01060 01090 01200 01340 01400 01410 01510 01600 01700 Summary of Work Measurements and Payments Allowances Alternates Coordination Cutting and Patching Field Engineering Regulatory Requirements Definitions and Abbreviations Project Meetings Submittals Quality Control Testing Laboratory Services Temporary Facilities Products and Substitutions Project Closeout DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02050 Selective Demolition 02115 Site Clearing and Demolition 02220 Excavation and Backfilling .02710 Subdrainage System 02900 Landscape and Irrigation DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Reinforcing Steel 03300 Concrete 03360 Shotcrete DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04250 Center Core Wall Reinforcement 04420 Brick Masonry 04525 Stone Masonry Restoration 04550 Masonry Cleaning DIVISION 5 METALS 05100 Structural Steel 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06180 Glu -Lam Construction 06200 Finish Carpentry PAGE -1 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 07510 07600 07900 DIVISION 8 08110 08210 08305 08600 08700 08800 DIVISION 9 09200 09250 09310 09560 09650 09680 09900 09970 DIVISION 10 10426 10522 10600 10800 DIVISION 11 11400 DIVISION 12 12500 12501 DIVISION 13 DIVISION 14 14212 DIVISION 15 15050 15400 DIVISION 16 16000 Insulation Built -up Roofing Flashing and Sheet Metal Sealants and Caulking DOORS AND WINDOWS Steel Doors and Frames Wood Doors Access Doors Wood Window Rehabilitation Finish Hardware Glazing FINISHES Lath and Plaster Gypsum Wallboard Ceramic Tile Wood Strip Flooring Resilient Flooring Carpet Painting Pre- Finished Panels. SPECIALTIES Signage Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets Toilet Partitions Toilet Accessories EQUIPMENT Food Service Equipment FURNISHINGS Upholstery Drapery NOT USED CONVEYING SYSTEMS Hydraulic Elevators MECHANICAL Basic Mechanical Requirements Plumbing ELECTRICAL Electrical PAGE -2 f., EXHIBIT "B" LIST OF DRAWINGS DRAWINGS -SHEET INDEX ARCHITECTURAL A.0 Title Sheet A.1 First Floor Plan, First Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan A.2 Second Floor Plans, Second Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan, Roof Plan A.3 East and West Elevations A.4 South Elevation A.5 North Elevation A.6 Sections A.7 Interior Elevations, Door Schedule and Details Courtyard Plan and Details A.8 Interior Details A.9 Exterior Details A.10 Site /Landscape Plan and Restaurant Kitchen Plan STRUCTURAL S.1 Abbreviations and Details S.2 Foundation Plans and Details S.3 Second Floor Framing Plans and Details S.4 Roof Framing Plans and Details S.5 South Elevations S.6 North Elevations S.7 East and West Elevations S.8 Concrete Shear Wall Elevations S.9 Details S.10 Details S.11 Details \051 \84838.1 21- 102304706011 ADDENDUM TO STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR This is an Addendum ( "Addendum ") to that certain Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor entered into concurrently herewith ( "Agreement "), between the City of Gilroy ( "Owner ") and , a ( "Contractor "). The capitalized terms used in this Addendum shall have the same meanings and definitions as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents unless otherwise redefined herein. 1. Contract Sum. It is understood and agreed by the Owner and the Contractor that the Contract Documents call for a stipu- lated sum and that under no circumstances other than Owner- Caused Delays or a Change Order or Construction Change Directive issued in accordance with the Contract Documents which increases the scope of the Work will the amount payable to the Contractor exceed the Contract Sum. Except as otherwise provided in Subparagraph 8.3.1 of the General Conditions for Owner- Caused Delays, a Change Order or Construction Change Directive which only changes the Contract Time (and not the scope of the Work) shall in no event increase the Contract Sum to be paid to the Contractor under the Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing contained in this Section 1 shall be construed to relieve the Owner from liability for its active negligence. 2. Final Payment. Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be paid by the Owner to the Contractor when the following conditions have been satisfied: M the Work has been fully completed, (ii) the obligations of Contractor under the Contract Documents have been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct non - conforming work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions, (iii) a final Application for Payment (together with the submittals required under Subparagraph 9.10.2 of the General Conditions) has been submitted by the Contractor and a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect in connection therewith, (iv) the Work has been inspected and approved by the Owner and all applicable governmental authorities, and (v) no stop notices have been filed with the Owner with respect to the Work. Final payment shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any claims, whether known or unknown, that the Owner may have against the Contractor, and Subcontractors or any other third parties. 3. Liquidated Damages. THE OWNER AND THE CONTRACTOR RECOGNIZE THAT THE OWNER WILL SUFFER SUBSTANTIAL DAMAGES AND SIGNIFICANT FINANCIAL LOSS AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S DELAY IN ACHIEVING SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK WITHIN THE CONTRACT TIME. THE OWNER AND THE CONTRACTOR HEREBY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE \051 \58688.4 212- 102204706011 - 1 - THAT THE DAMAGES AND FINANCIAL LOSS SUSTAINED AS A RESULT OF SUCH FAILURE WILL BE EXTREMELY DIFFICULT AND IMPRACTICABLE TO ASCERTAIN. THEREFORE, THE OWNER AND THE CONTRACTOR HEREBY AGREE THAT IN THE EVENT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK IS NOT ACHIEVED WITHIN THE CONTRACT TIME, THE OWNER SHALL BE ENTITLED TO COMPENSATION BY WAY OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES (AND NOT AS A PENALTY) FOR THE DETRIMENT RESULTING THEREFROM IN THE SUM OF FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($500.00) FOR EACH DAY DURING WHICH SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK IS DELAYED BEYOND THE CONTRACT TIME. THE OWNER AND THE CONTRACTOR FURTHER AGREE THAT THE FOREGOING AMOUNT REPRESENTS A REASONABLE ESTIMATE OF THE OWNER'S DAMAGES AND FINANCIAL LOSS IN THE EVENT OF ANY SUCH DELAY IN ACHIEVING SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION CONSIDERING ALL OF THE CIRCUMSTANCES EXISTING AS OF THE DATE OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING THE RELATIONSHIP OF SUCH AMOUNTS TO THE RANGE OF HARM TO THE OWNER WHICH REASONABLY COULD BE ANTICIPATED AS OF THE DATE OF THIS CONTRACT AND THE EXPECTATION THAT PROOF OF ACTUAL DAMAGES WOULD BE EXTREMELY DIFFICULT AND IMPRACTICABLE. BY INITIALLING THIS PARAGRAPH BELOW, THE PARTIES HERETO SIGNIFY THEIR APPROVAL AND CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION 3. OWNER CONTRACTOR 4. Designated Representative for Notices. The designated representative of the Owner for written notices shall be Mr. Michael Dorn and the designated address for such written notices shall be The City of Gilroy, Planning Department, 7351 Rosanna Street, Gilroy, California 95020. The designated representative of the Contractor for notices shall be and the designated address for such notices shall be The foregoing designated representatives and/or designated addresses for notices may be changed by the applicable party by providing written notice thereof to the other party. 5. Worker's Compensation. In accordance with the provisions of sections 1860 and 3700 of the California Labor Code, the Contractor shall secure the payment of compensation to -its employees. Concurrently with its execution and delivery of the Agreement to the Owner, the Contractor shall execute and deliver to the Owner a certificate in the form attached hereto as Exhibit "A" and shall provide the Owner with satisfactory evidence that the Contractor has secured in the manner required and provided by law the payment of worker's compensation. 6. Attorneys' Fees. If any legal action or other proceeding is commenced to enforce or interpret any provision of, or otherwise relates to, the Contract Documents, the losing party shall pay the prevailing party's actual expenses incurred in the investigation of any claim leading to the proceeding,, preparation for and participation in the proceeding, any appeal or other post - judgment motion, and any action to enforce or collect the judgment, including contempt, garnishment, levy, discovery and bankruptcy. \051 \58688.4 212-102204706011 -2- 13 a For this purpose, "expenses" include, without limitation, court or other proceeding costs and experts' and attorneys' fees and their expenses. The phrase "prevailing party" shall mean the party who is determined in the proceeding to have prevailed or who prevails by dismissal, default, settlement or otherwise. The provisions of this Section 6 relating to post - judgment expenses are intended to be severable from all other provisions of the Contract Documents, and shall survive and not be deemed merged into any judgment obtained. 7. Severability. If any provision of the Contract Documents is determined by a court having jurisdiction thereof to be invalid, void or illegal, such determination shall not affect any other provision of the Contract Documents and all such other provisions shall remain in full force and effect. S. Retainage from Payments. Notwithstanding the provisions set forth in Article 5 of the Agreement regarding retainage to the contrary; the Contractor may elect to receive one hundred percent (100W) of payments due under the Contract Documents from time to time, without retention of any portion of the payment by the Owner, by depositing securities of equivalent value with the Owner or permitted escrow agent in accordance with the provisions of section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code. Securities eligible for investment under this provision shall be limited to those listed in section 16430 of the California Government Code, bank or savings & loan certificates of deposit, interest - bearing demand deposit accounts, stand -by letters of credit, or any other security mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Owner. Alternatively, the Contractor may request and the Owner shall make payment of retentions earned directly to the designated escrow agent at the expense of the Contractor, all in accordance with section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code. 9. Binding Effect. The Contract Documents shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and permitted assigns. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall in any way constitute a personal obligation or impose any personal liability on any employees, officers, directors or agents of the Owner or any successors and /or assigns of the Owner. \051 \58688.4 212 - 102204706011 -3- EXHIBIT "A" (As Required by Section 1861 of the California Labor Code) I am aware of the provisions of section 3700 of the California Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self- insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this contract. Contractor: By: Title: \051 \58688.4 212 - 102204706011 -4- Fleproduced with permission of The American institute of Architects under license number 092123. Permission expires October 31, 1992. FURTHER REPRODUCTION IS PROHIBITED. T H E A M E R I C A N I N S T I `T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T S Because AIA Documents are revised from time to The text of this document Is not *model language" time, users should ascertain from the AIA the and M not Intended for use M other documents currerd edition of this document. Copies of the without permission of the ALA. current edition of this AIA document may be purchased from The American Institute of Archhects or he local distributors. AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES, • CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. TIME 2. OWNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT This document has been approved and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, ©1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C., 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecutions. I I CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIAe • ®1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2ow6 A201 -1987 1 w� e►uun. u..Itww..��A ..{.w•w..w.raww ..1..1 -• -- t l C w.......i..6� 1 «......d t- - u1J�w• •w 1...-1 .......... dinn INDEX Acceptance of Nonconforming Work ......... 9.6.6, 9.9.3,12.3 Acceptance of Work ........... 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9-3,9.10.1. 9.10.3 Access to Work ........................... 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 Accident Prevention .............................. 4.2.3,10 Acts and Omissions ... 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.2, 4.3.9, 8.3.1, 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Addenda ...... ............................... 1.1.1,3.11 Additional Cost, Claims for ......... 4.3.6, 4.3.7, 4.3.9, 6.1.1, 10.3 Additional Inspections and Testing ....... 4.2.6, 9.8.2, 12.2.1, 13.5 Additional Time, Claims for ............. 4.3.6, 4.3.8, 4.3.9, 8.3.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ....... 3.3-3,4,9.4,9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid ...................... 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect ............................... 4.2.13.4-5.1 Allowances ......... ............................... 3.8 Alt -risk Insurance .. ............................... 11.3.1.1 Applications for Payment .. 4.2-5.7.3.7.9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.1.3, 14.2.4 Approvals .... 2.4, 3.3.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 3.12.4 through 3.12.8, 3.18.3, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4, 13.4.2, 13.5 Arbitration ..................... 4.1.4, 4.3.2, 4.3.4, 4.4.4, 4.5, 8.3.1, 10.1.2, 11.3.9, 11-3. 10 Architect ........... ............................... 4.1 Architect, Definition of ............................... 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority ........ 2.4, 3.12.6, 4.2, 4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.6, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2. 1.- 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility . 3.3-3,3.12.8, 3.12.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.2, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.6 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses .......... 2.4, 9.8.2, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract .......... 4.2, 4.3.6, 4.3.7, 4.4, 9.4, 9.5 Architect's Approvals 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.10.2, 3.12.6, 3.12.8, 3.18.3, 4.2.7 Architect's Authority to Reject Work .... 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright .. ............................... 1.3 Architect's Decisions.......... 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4.1, 4.4.4, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Architect's Inspections ........... 4.2.2, 4.2.9.4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect's Instructions .. 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.8, 4.3.7, 7.4.1,12.1, 13.5.2 Architect's Interpretations ................. 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.7 Architect's On -Site Observations ........ 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect's Project Representative ..................... 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor ....... 1.1.2, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.3.3,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.11,3.12.8 ,3.12.11,3.16,3.18,4.2.3,4.2.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.12, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7.3.4, 9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors .... 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7 Architect's Representations ................. 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10. l Architect's Site Visits ........ 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Asbestos ........... ............................... 10.1 Attorneys' Fees ........................ 3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.1.4 Award of Separate Contracts ........................... 6.1.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work .............................. 5.2 Basic Definitions ..... ............................... 1.1 Bidding Requirements ................ 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 5.2.1, 11.4.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance ..................... 11.3.2 Bonds, Lien ....... ............................... 9.10.2 Bonds, Performance and Payment ..... 7.3.6. -1, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Building Permit ..... ............................... 3.7.1 Capitalization ........ ............................... 1.4 Certificate of Substantial Completion .................... 9.8.2 Certificates for Payment ....... 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval ..... 3.12.11, 13.5.4 Certificates of Insurance .................. 9.3.2, 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Change Orders ...... 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.8.2.4, 3.11, 4.2.8, 4.3.3, 5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of .......................... 7.2.1 Changes............ ............................... 7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK, .... 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 10.1.3 Claim, Definition of .. ............................... 4.3.1 Claims and Disputes ................ 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 6.2.5, 8.3.2, 9.3.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.1.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims ................ 4.5.6 Claims for Additional Cost ........ 4.3.6, 4.3.7, 4.3.9, 6.1.1, 10.3 Claims for Additional Time ............ 4.3.6, 4.3.8, 4.3.9, 8.3.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions ........... 4.3.6 Claims for Damages ... 3.18, 4.3.9, 6.1.1, 6.2.5, 8.3.2, 9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Claims Subject to Arbitration ................. 4.3.2, 4.4.4, 4.5.1 Cleaning Up .... ............................... 3.15,6.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period .......... 13.7 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to ....... 2.1.2, 2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 4.3.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Commencement of the Work, Definition of ............... 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration ........................ 3.9.1, 4.2.4, 5.2.1 Completion, Conditions Relating to ....... 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 11.3.5, 12.2.2, 13.7.1 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND ......................... 9 Completion, Substantial ......... 4.2.9, 4.3.5.2, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.8,9.9.1,12.2:2,13.7 Compliance with laws ...... 1.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.13, 4.1.1, 10.2.2, 11. 1, 11 .3, 13.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions ..................... 4.3.6 Conditions of the Contract .................. 1.1.1, 1.1.7.6.1.1 Consent, Written .................. 1.3.1, 3.12-8.3.14.2,4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.5.5, 9.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3,10.1.2, 10.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11, 13.2, 13.4.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS .............................. 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of .............. 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives .... 1. I.1, 4.2.8, 7. t , 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's ............... 3.10, 6.1.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts ................ 5.4 Continuing Contract Performance .................... 4.3.4 Contract, Definition of ............................... 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE .................. 4.3.7, 5.4.1.1,14 Contract Administration ...................... 3.3-3.4 ' 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to ...... 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 9.2, 1 1.1.3. 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Contract Documents, The ....................... 1.1, 1.2, 7 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of ... 1.3, 2.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of ..................... 1.1.1 Contract Performance During Arbitration ............ 4.3.4, 4.5.3 Contract Sum ................... 3.8, 4.3.6, 4.3. -7, 4.4.4, 5.2.3, 6.1.3, 7.2, 7.3, 9.1, 9.7, 11.3.1, 12.2.4, 12.3, 14.2.4 Contract Sum, Definition of .......................... 9.1 Contract Time ................. 4.3.6, 4.:1.8, i.a.i, 7-2.1.3,7-3. 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.7, 12.1.1 Contract Time, Definition of .......................... 8.1.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 2 A201 -1987 AIAe • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEWYORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. 13 CONTRACTOR ........ ............................... 3 Contractor, Definition of .......................... 3.1, 6. 1.2 Contractor's Bid ..... ............................... 1.1.1 Contractor's Construction Schedules ............. 3.10, 6.1.3 Contractor's Employees ....... 3.3.2, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, l l.l.l, 14.2.1.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance ....................... 11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces ...... 2.2.6, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 12.2.5 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors ....... 1.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect .... 1.1.2, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.3.3,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.11,3.12 .83.16,3.18,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6, 4.2.12, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7.3.4, 9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Contractor's Representations.. 1.2.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.7, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work ................. 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 10 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents ...... 1.2.2, 3.2, 3.7.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work ...................... 9.7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract .............. 14.1 Contractor's Submittals ....... 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 Contractor's Superintendent ...................... 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures...... 1.2.4, 3.3, 3.4, 4.2.3, 8.2.2, 8.2.3, to Contractual Liability Insurance ................. 11.1.1.7, 11.2.1 Coordination and Correlation ............... 1.2.2, 1.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications ... 1.3,2.2-5.3-11 Correction of Work ..................... 2.3, 2.4,, 4.2.1, 9.8.21 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 13.7.1.3 Cost, Definition of ............................ 7.3.6, 14.3.5 Costs .... 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3. 15.2, 4.3.6, 4.3.7, 4.3.8.1, 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 6.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.7, 9.7, 9.8.2, 9.10.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.1.3,11.3.4,11.3.9,12 .1,12.2.1,12.2.4,12.2.5,13.5,14 Cutting and Patching ........................... 3.14, 6.2.6 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 9.5.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.3, 11.1, 11.3, 12.2.5 Damage to the Work ..... 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.3, 11.3 Damages, Claims for.. 3.18, 4.3.9, 6.1.1, 6.2.5, 8.3.2, 9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Damages for Dela) ..................... 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of ......... 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of .............. 8.1.3 Day, Definition of .... ............................... 8. 1.4 Decisions of the Architect ...... 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4.1, 4.4.4, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Decisions to Withhold Certification .......... 9.5,9.7,14.1-1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of ............ 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.6, 4.3.5, 9.5.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.5, 12, 13.7.1.3 Defective Work, Definition of ......................... 3.5.1 Definitions ...... 1. 1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 Delays and Extensions of Time .......... 4.3.1, 4.3.8.1, 4.3.8.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 8.1.1, 8.3, 10.3.1, 14.1.1.4 Disputes ............ 4.1.4, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.3.8, 9.3.1.2 Documents and Samples at the Site ...................... 3.11 Drawings, Definition of .............................. 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of..... 2.2.5, 3.119 5.3 Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions ..... 3.2 Effective Date of Insurance ...................... 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Emergencies .. ............................... 4.3.7,10.3 Employees, Contractor's .......... 3.3.2, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and .......... 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.4, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work ....... 1.1.3, 1.2.3, 3.2, 3.4.1, 3.5.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.8, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.9, 8.2, 8.3, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2, 14.2, 14.3 Execution, Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents .......................... 1.2, 3.7.1 Extensions of Time ............. 4.3.1, 4.3.8, 7.2.1.3, 8.3, 10.3.1 Failure of Payment by Contractor .............. 9.5-1,3,14.2.1.2 Failure of Payment by Owner ................ 4.3.7, 9.7, 14.1.3 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment ........ 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 4.3-5, 9.10, 11.1.2,11.1.3,11.3.5, 12.3.1, 13.7 Financial Arrangements, Owner's ....................... 2.2.1 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance ................... 11.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS . ............................... 1 Governing Law ..... ............................... 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties) Hazardous Materials ............................ 10.1, 10.2.4 Identification of Contract Documents ................... 1.2.1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers ............. 5.2.1 Indemnification ....... 3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.1.4, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7 Information and Services Required of the Owner ..... 2.1.2, 2.2, 4.3.4, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.6, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.4, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Injury or Damage to Person or Property ................ 4.3.9 Inspections ......................... 3.3.3, 3.3.4, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Instructions to Bidders ............................... 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor .... 3.8.1, 4.2.8, 5.2.1, 7, 12.1, 13.5.2 Insurance ....... 4.3.9.6.1.1, 7. 3.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11 Insurance, Boller and Machinery .................... 11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor's Liability ...................... 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of ..................... 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use ............................. 11.3.3 Insurance, Owner's Liability .......................... 11.2 Insurance, Property ........................... 10.2.5,11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials .................... 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4 INSURANCE AND BONDS ............................. 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy .. 9.9.1, 11.3.11 Insurance Companies, Settlement with ................. 11.3.10 Intent of the Contract Documents ................ 1.2-3,3.12.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Interest ............ ............................... 13.6 Interpretation ........ 1.2.5, 1.4, 1.5, 4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1.4 Interpretations, Written .................. 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.7 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required ............. 4.5.6 Judgment on Final Award ................ 4.5.1, 4.5.4.1, 4.5.7 Labor and Materials, Equipment .... 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 Labor Disputes ...... ............................... 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations ....... 1.3, 3.6,3.7,3-13, 4.1.1, 4.5.5, 4.5.7, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6 Liens .................. 2.1.2, 4.3.2, 4.3.5.1, 8.2.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder ................ 4.5.5 Limitations, Statutes of ................... 4.5.4.2, 12.2.6, 13.7 Limitations of Authority .................... 3.3.1, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.3, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 5.2.2, 5.2.4, 7.4, 11-3. 10 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIAO • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201 -1987 3 Limitations of Liability ..... 2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.11, 3.17, 3.18, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.10.4, 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.3.7, 13.4.2, 13.5.2 Limitations of Time, General ........... 2.2.1, 2.2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.10, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.3.2, 4.3.3, 4.3.4,4.3.6, 4.3.9, 4.5.4.2, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.4, 7.3.4, 7.4, 8.2, 9.5, 9.6.2, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.5, 11.3.6, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.5, 13.7 Limitations of Time, Specific ......... 2.1.2, 2.2.1, 2.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.15.1,4.2.1,4.2.11,4.3,4 .4,4.5,5.3,5.4,73.5,7.3.9,8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.8.2, 9.10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 11.3.11, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Loss of Use Insurance ............................. 11.3.3 Material Suppliers .............. 1.3.1, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.6.5, 9.10.4 Materials, Hazardous ........................... 10.1, 10.2.4 Materials, Labor, Equipment and ..... 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction .......... 3.3.1, 4.2.3, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Minor Changes in the Work .......... 1.1.1, 4.2.8, 4.3.7, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ........................ 13 Modifications, Definition of ........................... Modifications to the Contract ........... 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.7.3, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7 Mutual Responsibility ........................ I ....... 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of .................. 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of ........ 2.3.1, 4.3.5, 9.5.2, 9.8.2, 12, 13.7.1.3 Notice ............. 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.7.3, 3.7.4, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.17, 4.3, 4.4.4, 4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14 Notice, Written ............... 2.3, 2.4, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 4.3, 4.4.4, 4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 9. 10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Notice of Testing and Inspections ................ 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Notice to Proceed .... ............................... 8.2.2 Notices, Permits, Fees and ...... 2.2.3, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Observations, Architect's On -Site ................. 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 13.5 Observations, Contractor's ....................... 1.2.2, 3.2.2 Occupancy ......................... 9.6.6, 9.8.1, 9.9, 11.3.11 On -Site Inspections by the Architect .......... 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9. 10.1 On -Site Observations by the Architect ......... 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 13.5 Orders, Written ............ 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.7, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12. 1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 OWNER.............. ............................... 2 Owner, Definition of .. ............................... 2.1 Owner, information and Services Required of the ........ 2.1.2, 2.2, 4.3.4, 6, 9, 10.1.4, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 14.1.1.5, 14.1.3 Owner's Authority ......... 3.8.1, 4.1.3, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 14.2, 14.3.1 Owner's Financial Capability ................... 2.2.1, 14.1.1.5 Owner's Liability Insurance .......................... 11.2 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance ........................ 11.3.3 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ............... 1.1.2, 5.2.1, 5.4.1, 9.6.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work ........ 2.4, 12.2.4, 14.2.2.2 Owner's Right to Clean Up ............................ 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts ......................... 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work ................... 2.3, 4.3.7 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work ..................... 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ................. 14.2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents ................ I. I.1,1.3, 2.2.5, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use ................. 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3-11 Patching, Cutting and .......................... 3.14.6.2.6 Patents, Royalties and .............................. 3.17 Payment, Applications for ................. 4.2-5,9.2,9.3,9.4, 9.5 .1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 14.2.4 Payment, Certificates for ........... 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of .......................... 4.3.7,9.5.1-3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final ............ 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 4.3.5, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and .............. 7.3.6.4, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Payments, Progress .......................... 4.3.4, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.3, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ...................... 9,14 Payments to Subcontractors .................... 5.4.2,9.5.1-3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 PCB............... ............................... 10.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond ................. 7.3.6.4, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Permits, Fees and Notices ....... 2.2.3, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF ............ 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl ............................. 10.1 Product Data, Definition of ........................... 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings .... 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion ................... 4.2.2, 4.3.4, 8.2 Progress Payments ............................ 4.3.4,9.3, 9.6, 9.8.3, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Project, Definition of the ............................. 1.1.4 Project Manual, Definition of the ...................... 1.1.7 Project Manuals ..... ............................... 2.2.5 Project Representatives ............................. 4.2.10 Property Insurance ........................... 10.2.5,11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ............. 10 Regulations and Laws ............ 1.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.13; 4.1.1, 4.5.5, 4.5.7, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Rejection of Work ......................... 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.2 Releases of Waivers and Liens ......................... 9.10.2 Representations ......................... 1.2.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.7, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10.1 Representatives ............................ 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.12, 13.2.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes .................. 4.4, 4.5 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work ............ 3.3?, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 10 Retainage ............... 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor ............ 1.2.2, 3.2, 3.7.3, 3.12.7 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect ............. 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.1 1, 3.12, 4.2.7, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor ........................ 3.12.5 Rights and Remedies ............. 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.3.6, 4.5, 5.3, 6. 1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Royalties and Patents ............................... 3.17 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 4 A201 -1987 AIA® • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2(XX)6 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. L MA Rules and Notices for Arbitration ..................... 4.5.2 Safety of Persons and Property ....................... 10.2 Safety Precautions and Programs ........... 4.2.3, 4.2.7,10.1 Samples, Definition of .............................. 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and ... 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and ................... 3.11 Schedule of Values ............................. 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction .............................. 3.10 Separate Contracts and Contractors .......... 1.1.4, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.5.5, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 Shop Drawings, Definition of ......................... 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples .... 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 "'Site, Use of .............................. 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1' Site Inspections ... 1.2.2, 3.3.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9,11.3.6, 9.8.2, 9.10.1, 13.9 - Site Visits, Architect's .......... I ...... 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing .............. 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Specifications, Definition of the ....................... 1.1.6 Specifications, The .......... 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.4, 1.3, 3.11 Statutes of Limitations .................... 4.5.4.2, 12.2.6, 13.7 Stopping the Work ............. 2.3, 4.3.7, 9.7, 10.1.2, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials ........... 6.2.1,9-3.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1.4, 12.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of ........................... 5.1.1 z' SUBCONTRACTORS ... ............................... 5 Subcontractors, Work by .................. 1.2.4,33.2,3-11.1, 4.2.3, 5.3, 5.4 Subcontractual Relations .............. 5.3, 5.4, 9.3,1.2, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 10.2.1, 11.3.7, 11.3.P, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.2, 14.3.2 Submittals ......... 1.3, 3.2.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.1.3 Subrogation, Wahrers of ................. 6.1.1, 11.3.5,11.3.7 Substantial Completion ............. 4.2.9, 4.3.5.2, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of .................... 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors .................... 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of the Architect ........................... 4.1.3 Substitutions of Materials ............................. 3.5.1 Sub- subcontractor, Definition of ....................... 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions ............................... 4.3.6 Successors and Assigns ............................ 13.2 Superintendent ............................... 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures ...... 1.2.4, 3.3, 3.4, 4.2.3, 4.3.4, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 10, 12, 14 Surety ............... 4.4.1, 4.4.4, 5.4.1.2, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2 Surety, Consent of ....................... 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys ...... ............................... 2.2.2,3.18.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience ............. 14.3 Suspension of the Work ............. 4.3.7, 5.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract ...... 4.3.7, 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes....... ............................... 3.6, 7.3.6.4 Termination by the Contractor ........................ 14.1 Termination by the Owner for Cause ............. 5.4.1.1,14.2 Termination of the Architect .......................... 4.1.3 Termination of the Contractor ........................ 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT ...... 14 Tests and Inspections ..... 3.3.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 12.2.1,13.5 TIME................ ............................... 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of .............. 4.3.8, 7.2.1, 8.3 Time Limits, Specific ......... 2.1.2, 2.2.1, 2.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.15.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.11, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 5.3, 5.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.9, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.8.2, 9.10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 11.3.11, 12.2.2, i 2.2.4, i 2.276, 13.7, 14 Time Limits on Claims ......... 4.3.2, 4.3.3, 4.3.6, 4.3.9, 4.4, 4.S Title to Work .. ............................... 9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK ............. 12 Uncovering of Work . ............................... 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions ..................... 4.3.6, 8.3.1, 10.1 Unit Prices ... ............................... 7.1.4, 7.3.3.2 Use of Documents ................. 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2-5,3.12.7,5.3 Use of Site .............................. 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of ............................ 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment ........... 4.3.5, 4.5-1,9.10.3 Waiver of Claims by the Architect ...................... 1 3.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor ......... 9.10.4, 11.3.7, 13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Owner .............. 4.3.5, 4.5-1,9.9.3, 9.10 .3,11.3.3,11.3.5,11.3.7,13.4.2 Waiver of Liens ..... ............................... 9.10.2 Waivers of Subrogation ................... 6.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7 Warranty and Warranties ......................... 3.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13.7.1.3 Weather Delays .... ............................... 4.3.8.2 When Arbitration May Be Demanded .................. 4.5.4 Work, Definition of ... ............................... 1.1.3 Written Consent .............. 1.3.1, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.5.5, 9.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 10.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11, 13.2, 13.4.2 Written Interpretations ................... 4.2.1 1, 4.2.12, 4.3.7 Written Notice ........... 2.3, 2.4, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 4.3, 4.4.4, 4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Written Orders .............................. 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.7, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIAO • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20(x)6 A201 -1987 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modifi- cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive i,QlpPil7piV. •h-- •- ,__._,. �. 'Lai - _...� -._.,. -,._ , , 0 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Con- tract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contrac- tual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Con- tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor or (3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work per- formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con- tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched- ules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equip- ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- sentation that the Contractor has visited the site, become famil- iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per- formed and correlated personal observations with require- ments of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are comple- mentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required•ewirto the extent inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction indus- try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- ance with such recognized meanings. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac- tor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj- ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTE'ENTII EDITION 6 A201 -1987 AIA• • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 21NN)6 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. Im Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw- ings, Spedfications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con- nection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved rights. 1.4 CAPITALIZATION 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num- bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subpara- graphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre- quently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and arti- cles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract. Documents as if singular in number. ''''-° , @Fm " ^- mmpr. ....—init rif tile lecold legal tid, tt, tile FItypelly "Ir. .. 1.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE*OWNER 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assess- ments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 12.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents; the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for' execution of the Work. ' 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon -I slbilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those- in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Anicle- 11 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or.pereietenwir falls to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contrac- tor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- tractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 if the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven -day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, 4%@-04 er the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies tqe Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case on- eppoopliote from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi- ciencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Archi- tect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. * the Owner shall be entitled to deduct ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.'The term " Geintreemp ' — iiieniciit; - the Gontmet9r OF $h@- GRAIF8@11HI41 eWIFIS RKI AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201.1987 7 K a to a fi 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field mea- surements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect at once. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- suant to Paragraph 3.12. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construc- tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con- tract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instruc- tions concerning these matters. Cf�?ritS an-d- 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be respo slble to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor' employees, Subcontractors• and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contraetor* 13.3 The Ctultractor shall not be relieved of obligations to per- form the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents ejtj er by activuies or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the ,fontract, or by tests, inspections . or. approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of por- tions of Work already performed under this Contract to deter- mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equip- ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo- rated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit- ted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these require- ments, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, 4wilt be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the ki and quality of materials and equipment. or th Owner 3.6 TAXES *shall 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con- tractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work 4w A4-which are legally require 3.7.2 aFienlf. 3.7.3 N6 is. Halve ief, if tile CM itinelor obsel I es that paltions t9F tile? he omm"Irlifolled h! "19PIrsp �edi�'reaiit� 3.7.4 irary to laws, 9taitites, ordinanees, building eeides, and rules not .3.8 *ttewmem- ­.W 1911�6191 AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION 8 x201 -1987 AIA• - ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2(XX)6 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. W,. cm 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superinten- dent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- tractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writ- ing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Con- tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi- cable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi- nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- uct Data, Samples and simil/a required submittals. These shall he available to the ArchitecVand shall be delivered to the Archi- tect for subm'ita�I }t�o� the �Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 S DRAWINi^ , PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, per- formance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar sub- mittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their sub- mittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- tractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit- tal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- ings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- tect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria Of materials, systems or equipment Is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifi- cations. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or other- wise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contrac- tor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the AIA Dt)CIIMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA"' • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 200X6 A201 -1987 9 Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unrea- sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 if the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or prod- uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has rea- son to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 ther-off0m, but 0141�, to the negligent acts or emissions of III fibleh elaim, domage, 1098 "r !d in par! by 2 party iReieFaRky which would mhorwism , 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnifica- tion obligation under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Archi- tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifica- lions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- sonably withheld. 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con- tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Para- graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat- ing that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con- AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 10 A201 -1987 AIA® • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, U.C. lINNK� La 0 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. c w" P PY 9 copyright laws and b subject to legal prosecution. tractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra- tion. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially autho- rized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communi- cate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Commu- nications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementa- tion of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi- tect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons perform- ing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu- ments. The Architect's action will be taken with ewG& reason- able promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details. such., as,,,dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instrgpOgns for installation, ors performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submit- tals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations unde( Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall no constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless. otherwisc specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item Is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construc, Lion Change Directives, 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the' Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 if the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will pro- vide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying a out the,.: Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority. of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo. rated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern - Ing performance under and requirements of the Contract 'Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac- tor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be fur- nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur - Aish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions -of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so terldered in good faith. '4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the- Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpre- tation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time, Or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The, term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in ques -- Non between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat- ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging. an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred initially - to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4. A deci- sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4, shall bakequired as a condition precedent toes litigation of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such matters arising prior to the date final payment is due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to which the Work has been com- pleted. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim shall not be a condition precedent toerWI Minn op itigation in ti% eVeili (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take action required under Subparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 days after the Claim is made, (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a mechanic's lien. 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2(XX)6 A201 -1957 11 >F t7 a fD to F� structed 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending al reso- lution of a Claim ' , unless otherwise eit it i ing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor- mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. Of 1.40 GE)RIFNE! &8etH"eft19, of .3 ietwis of speeirA warranties required by the teet will promptly investigate such eenditimis itnel, if they differ s aater;ia!! roost oA r , 6 6entt'aet Time, or beti> if the:4trkiteet eeterrrtineatita� indiested in the 6"neraet Seettinents mid that tie Itermto of the G"nenict is justified, tlIC *Ithifttt 31 21i -QaiM6 by onus; Ige made within 2! days after the #aehiteei ho given 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. if the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency .endangering life or property arising under Para- graph 10.3. If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, 03)a.uisi+t- fleet, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with the procedure established herein. 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of essi- -end-ef- probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. 4.3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data by the Owner, substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, of any of the other party's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first observance. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. IF 2t efitink fm stidi 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a Claim: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant, (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of the Claim by the other party or (5) suggest a compromise. The Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation. 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions: (1) submit additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Architect that the initial �lairrt stands. _.. 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within seven days, km i1w Upon expiration of such time period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. ifrheee-isa sti.M 4.5 AAWWRA*KM_ U1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION IM` 12 A201 -1987 AIA• • © IYR7 TIIE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2(XXX) wner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4.4 sh , i subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4.5.1, be deci d b arbitration in accordance with the Construction Ind try Ar 'tration Rules of the American Arbitration Associatio r- ren in effect, unless the parties mutually agree oche ise. Noti of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writi with the o er party to the Agreement between the Owner a Con- tractor nd with the American Arbitration Associatlo and a copy s N I be filed with the Architect. 4.5.3 Co tract Performance During Arbitration. uring arbi- tration pr ceedings, the Owner and. Contractor all comply. with Subp aRraph 4.3.4. 4.5.4 When rbitration May Be Demanded. and for arbi= tration of any aaim may not be made until the artier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered a al written deci Sion on the Cla n, (2) the tenth day after th ariies have pre sented evidence k) the Architect or have bee given reasonable' opportunity to d so, if the Architect has t - rendered 'a final written decision k that date, or (3) an of the five events described in Subpalvgraph 4.3.2. 4.5.4.1 When a writ n decision of the rchitect states that (f) the decision is final bt subject to arbi [ion and (2) a demand 0 for arbitration of a CI.'m covered b such decision must be made within 30 days a r the date o which the party making the demand receives th final writ[ decision, then failure to demand arbitration withi said 30 ays' period shall result in the Architect's decision b YtAr final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If itect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings hainitiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, bot supersede arbitration pro- ceedings unless the de acceptable to all parties concerned. 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbi[ [ion hall be made within the time limits specified in Subpa raphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and Clause 4.5.4.1 as applicable, an in oche cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has isen, and no event shall it be made after the date when ins* tion of le or equitable proceedings based on such Claim Wfuld he barre y the applicable statute of limitations as deter tined pursuant Paragraph 13.7. 4.5.5 Limitation on nsolidation or inder. No arbitration arising out of or lacing to the Cont ct Documents shall include, by conso dation or joinder or i any other manner, the Architect, the rchitect's employees or onsultants, except by written con, it containing specific refe nce to the Agree- ment and signe by the Architect, Owner, C ntractor and any other person entity sought to be joined. N arbitration shall /ed de, by c nsolidation or joinder or in an other manner,, " ies other han the Owner, Contractor, a se arate contrac - as desc d in Article 6 and other person. iubsiantialfy' lved i a common question Of fact or law w se presence quire if complete relief is to be accorded in ar 'tration. No on o entity other than the Owner, Contractor a sepaeaa— rac r as described in Article 6 shall be included s an origthi party or additional third party to an arbitrati whose e or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to ar itration l ing an additional person or entity shall not co stitute nt to arbitration of a dispute not described thereiwith rson or entity not named or described therein. Th ore g agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arb ate an additional person or entity duly consented to by pa ies e Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under ap li-.- file notice of demand for arbitration must asse the demand laims then known to that party on ch arbitra- tion is permitte be demanded. When a fails to include a Claim through ove t, inadverte or excusable neglect, or when a Claim has matu en acquired subsequently, the arbitrator or arbitrato av it amendment. 4.5.7 Judgme Inal Award. The aihr4,rendered by the arbitrator bitrators shall be final, and ju t may be enternerunon it in accordance with applicable law in a ourt ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon- tractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub - subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub- subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub - subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub - subcontractor. 5.2 !'N bidding requirements, the Contractor, 2S soon a5 p c- tir a after award of the Contract, shall fun in writi g to the ner through the Architect the names of persons r enti- ties (in ding those who are to furnish materials ore ipment, fabricate o a special design) proposed for each pr' cipal por- tion of the ork. The Architect will promptly rep to the Con- tractor in wr 'ng stating whether or not the wrier or the Architect, after a Investigation, has reaso le objection to any such propos person or entity. Failu of the Owner or Architect tc reply p ptly shall constitu notice of no reason- able objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor sha not cog6ct with a proposed per- son or entity to whom the wn or Architect has made rea- sonable and timely objectioNpfbe Contractor shall not be required to contract with any, to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection 5.2.3 I/jate ner or chitect has Sonable objection to a person ty pro sed by the Con ctor, the Contractor s(iall prnot tq. whom the Own or Architect has no, reasonaect' n. The Contract,Su i sh be increased or- decreasdifference it cost occasicme y such change and an Late Change Order shall be issue . iowever, no increas Con tract Sum shall be allowed for . ch change unless tractor has acted promptly and respc sively in submites as required. Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, previously selected if the Owner or Architect AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201 -1987 13 6.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu- ments, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Docu- ments, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcon- tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed.by the Subcontractor sn that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -sub- contractors. The Contractor shall make available to each pro- posed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi- tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub - subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner Sand only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the -Subcon- tractor in ,writing; and " . .. .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surgty, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. ARTICLE 6 ` CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other por- tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site unbitif Gwa4bikkalis 4 iliv y If the Contractors claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else- where in the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for differEnt por- tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate .Owner - Contractor Agreement. 4.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi -v ties of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- ules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con- tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sepa- rate contractors' completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsi- ble therefor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong- fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 if a dispute. arises among the Contractor, separate con- tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround- ing area free from waste materials and rubbish '+I'6, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost amiong those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 14 A201 -1987 AIAW • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2(NN)O WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright Ism and Is subject to legal prosecution. M Ea ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES or 7.1.1 Changes in a Work may be accomplished after execu- tion of the Con . ct, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order#4Construction Change Directive subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and clsewhcrcV the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be teased upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner any}- Aaeh*eet and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; ane+era 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under appli- cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwisL' Provided in the Change Order` Construction Change Directive or 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con- templated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS nd 7.2.1 A Change Order is a writte nstrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owne Contractor tt!w*,4*@k4oet, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 a change in the WorI& if any; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, If any; and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre- pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner "a, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work consisting of addi- tions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- tract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.3.3 If the'ConstniWon Change Directive 'provides f6i' eft' adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per- mit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or sub- sequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percent• age fee; or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. X7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the .Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractori agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro- posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac- tor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, includ- ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- tect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ- ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following;_ g .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, includ- ing cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person- nel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contrac- tor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost *R-~- When both additions and credits .covering related Work or substitutions are involved• in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured -on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. AW a.....F- 44:6414 iw, in the Contract Sum and,, Contract Time 7.3.9 When the Ownc and Contractor ;tee Shp detor reach agree- ment upon the adjustment. , such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execu- tion of an appropriate Change Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION * FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° • © 1997 Tim AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2oaX) A201 -1987 15 �p fi �t--� N N O N r O rh a ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree- ment or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. gpiless Ike- 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with ade- quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8:8.1 employee of either, or of it sepittitie etmtmetor empieyetl Ipp ttt::�rcxua,bW -ci ,4sC e - t4?,ite�eIr- a- cettp� 8.3.2 Claim/ly ting r te. to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph`3. 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does notf preclude recovery of dam- ages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, includ- ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contraet- Documents. ti 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Architect and Owner ,view and approval 9.2.1 Before the first Applicat' fr Payment, the Contractor shall submit to th schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup - ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as th rchitect may require. Vhis schedule, unless objected to by th s iitect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contrac Al ica- tions for Payment. wrier 9.3 APPLIC3 TIONS FOR PAYMENT Own, or 9.3.1 At least fm days before the date established for each ,progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders.! 9:3.1.2 Such *applications • may not include requests for pay- ment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incor- poration in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed ulx>n in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such raterials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by, an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material supplier;,, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason oC having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • fOURTtiENTII EDITION 16 A201-1987 AIA® • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASIIINGTON, D.C. 21HNKi for and EM I >f ou O (D (D Ort ftl rt ((D gg i7' n� �w • O rti O F-� Owner a Ccrtiftcalc for Payment, with a copy to tilt• Contrac- tor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly clue, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor- dance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representa- tions are suhicct to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Conir.ct Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issu:utce of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute :t representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the anu>unt certified. - f+t+wr. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on :I revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Archi- tect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third part%, claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat- ing probable filing of such claims; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop - erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or egnipinenh, .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonably evidence that the Work will not be com- pleted n•ithin the Contract Time, or • .7 ailure to carry out the Work in accordance %with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification arc removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub- subcontractors in similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- tions of the Work done by such SUI)c(nlractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT ourteen 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certi ate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, withi seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for ayment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer- tified by the Architect then the (:on- tractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut -down, delay and start -up, which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi- ciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use., * 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a por- tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect,a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- plete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW.., WASHINGTON. D.C. 2(8X)6 A201 -1987 17 >f O b F_ kC rto E F-_ • (D fi P. 8 O I-fa nated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contrac- tor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Com- pletion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate Of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Con- tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Complc- tion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be sub - mitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written accep- tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.3 l Ipon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or por- tion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par- tially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contrac- tor, provided such occupancy or use is authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to cac4h of them for payments, retainage if any, secu- rity, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insur- ance, and have Agreed in writing concerning the period for cor- rection of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occu- pancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree - nhent between the Owner and Contractor or, Kilo agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area 10 be occupied or portion of file Work to he used in order to determine and record the ronclitiun of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep- tance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work accept- able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per- formed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract DOCII- mcnts and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- tor and noted in said final Certificate is clue and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and .equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might he responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidenc- ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason [hat the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by tjhe Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may he designated by the Owner. If a Subcon- tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. if such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may he compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final conh- pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work filly completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully cony pletcd or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the ( :on- tract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por- tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be Submit- ted I)y the Contractor to the Architect prior to ccrtific:uion of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. "......lkn . ' k m. ! ._ .- by the Owner. 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Sub- contractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of clkims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final_ Application for Payment. ' kaill lie in o4jiko*6-s*0 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAI. l' <)NUI'I'1a )N1 OF "1'111? CON'I'KAC'I' Pt )k <:( )Nti'I'KI Y:'1'I( )N • H d J< I VI%N'I I I FUl I H )N 18 A201 -1987 A1A• •L lvti ?'1'111: Ah1EKICANI NS ITUTE OFAKCIIITEC'I:S, 17i5 NEWYORK AVENUE, N.W.. WA.SHINI(1'()N, U.C. IINNN) WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall he responsible for initiating, main- taining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (1'C13) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by %vrinen agreement Of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (1'C13) and has nut hccn rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed) in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- n:ned biphenyl WC13), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance with final determination by the Archftect,oafa -vv 4W-1 1104ifFSHr -r AFI:ele 1. 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). ............. . .... ....... 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety Of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may he affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- rated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody Or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub- subcontrac- tors; and .3 Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relo- cation Or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply vvitli applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders Of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason- able safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hartrds, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use Or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials Or equipment Or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and puss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Soh- SUbcOntractor, or anyone directly Or indirectly employed by any of them, Or by anyone for whose acts they may he liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or Omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly Or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 10.2.7 T'he Contractor shall not load Or permit an }' part of the construction or site to he loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 EMERGENCIES easonable 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of psons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor'.• discretion, to pre vent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compxnst- tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall he determined as provided in Paragraph ,9.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS * 44.4.1 +11e AIM! rureh*lc- fffmi 11"0 milimisipi fwt�ile: Wkitik lift 111414MI14le 114 *@ '94141 $00 140 reFf4li'M 4 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA ' - (J 19A "1'111? AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W'., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20tNKi A201 -1987 19 *See Insurance --- Bonds Rider included as Part of� the `Contract �Documents tional sickness or disease, or death of the Contracto s employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sick ess or disease, or death of any person other than the ,on \clainis tor's employees; s for damages insured by usual persona injury ility coverage which arc sustained (1) by - person S result of an offense directly or indirectly fated to loyntent of such person by the Contra or, or (2) another person; ns for damages, other than to the oak itself, use of injury to or destruction of I. gible prop - 5 hduding loss of use resulting the -from; m for damages because of bodily " jury, death of crs n or property damage arisin out of owner- , m intenance or use of a moto vehicle; and s ii olving contractual liabilit insurance appli- le tut e Contractor's obliga[io under Paragraph . 11.1.2 The insurance e< written for not Icss the t tract D(„LiiltentS or re greater. Coverages, wl claims-ntadc hasiS, shall from date of commence payment and tcrnlinatiol tallied after final payment. juired by Subp• limits of liahilit L by law, •ther written )c maintail e I ent of th u any co •ra 11.1.3 Certificates of Insuranl be filed with the Owner prior These Certificates and the in; Paragraph 11.1 shall conta afforded under the policies w expire until at least 30 days' to the Owner. If any of th f( required to remain in fore a ably available, an additio c( of such coverage shall b su for Payment as require by S concerning reduction f Contractor with reako ate Contractor's informa on fter bmitte ar• rapIt 1 1.1.1 shall be specified in the Con ,hichevcr coverage is on an occurrence or I without interruption Work until date of final gc required to be main- eptable to the Owner shall nmencement of the Work. e policies required by this provision that coverages be cancelled or allowed to 'itten notice has been given g insurance coverages are, payment and are reason- [ evidencing continuation d tote the ftnal Application igr h 9.10.2. Information a be furnished by the i accordance with the coverage sh• le promptness and belief. 11.2 OW/ER BILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The shall be responsible ti purchasing and maintaining ner's usual liability insu nce. Optionally, the Owner hase and maintain other i surance for self - protection laims which may arise )m operations under the Tote Contractor shall not a responsible for purchasmaintaining this optional O ner's liability insurance pecifically required by t e Contract Doc umcnts ,,:33.1 .3 P PERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 lI less otherwise provided, the Owner shall )urchas( and mat twin, in a company or companies lawfully at horized t0 do «sines in the jurisdiction in which the Pr jcct is Locate ,property insurance in the amount of the initi Con tract 11111 :is well :is subsequent modifications thereto f the cntir Work at the site on a replacement cost basis withou vol- iuu ry deductibles. Such property insurance shall be in tai col, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Doocvnte ts' 0 otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities w , e beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has bee c!uired by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever e: Mier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, �I Cko.actor, Subcontractors and Sub- suhconuracturs in �t W / 11.3. .1 Property insurance shall be on an ail -risk policy form and sl dl insure against the perils of fire and extended co erage and pi \0( ss or damage including, without duplic tun of covcrat, vandalism, malicious mischief, /1X , false - work, ary buildings and debris remocluding demolasioned by enforcement of any ale legal requirand shall cover reasonable conon for Architvices and expenses required as a f such insureoverage for other perils shall no quired unless se provided in the Contract IN,ct 11.3.1.2 If the )w erty insurance kq coverages in the inform the Conte the Work, The Cot protect the interest subcontractors in It the cost thereof sh• for is damaged by chase or maintain notifying the Contr able costs properly attrib tab, ner dotes not intend to pure uircd by the Contract an() Count described above, tl 'tor in writing prior to n ractor may then effect it su s A the Contractor, Sub Lint i Work, and by appr priat all e charged to t/(\,,,n,,, the ailure orlf tinsu • nce as descah( actor then the O� sal 11.3.1.3 If the property it w bles and such deductibles a e ments, the Contractor shall such deductibles. If the Own, minimum deductibles above t Owner elects to purchase this 'tible amounts, the Owner sh• [he additional costs not cov voluntary deductibles. If d Contract Documents, the a because of deductibles. 1,1.3.1.4 Unless otherw' • p ments, this property in stored off the site aftc value established in th in transit. asc such prop - with all of the Owner shall so nntencentcnt of ranee which will ractors and Sub - c Change Order . If the Contrtc- e (honer to pur- ,vc, without so 1 hear all reason- cc equires InininlUlll deducti- e ified in the Contract Docu - )sts not covered Ixcausc of insurer increases the required amounts so identified or if the iurance with voluntary deduc- e responsible for payment of cause of such increased or i es are not identified in the x call pay costs not covered s ranee shall c written appr approval, and 11.3.2 Boiler and achiner purchase and n intain boiler and ►na timer }' insu required by the ,ontract Documents or h} law, which specifically cov • such insured objects Burin installation until final accep ance by the Owner; this insura cc shall in interests of th Owner, Contractor, Suhcuntra sees and subcuntracto in the Work, and the Owner a d Conte shall be man d insureds. 11.3.3 Lo of Use Insurance. The Owner, at t c Ow option, n y purchase and maintain such insurat c as insure th Owner against loss of use of the Owner', prul due to re or other hazards, however caused. 'I'll O waives • I rights of action against the Contractor for lo. u of the wncr's property, including consequential losses I fire o other hazards however caused. the Contract Duce -, portions of the Work of the Owner at the. . portions of the Work l'he (honer shall ranee shall and elude Sub - actor ner's will )erty caner f use is to 11.3 If the Contractor requests in writing than insuranc tier cis other than those described herein or tier other special cz- ar be included in the property insurance I)Olicy, the Owl •r s II, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost there f all be charged to the Contractor by appropriate (;hang AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS (,F TIIE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOI It I FEN'1'l l 1!UI'1'IuN 20 A201 -1987 AIA4' • U19H7'1'111'.ANIEHi(:ANINS'r11' 117' EO FARC111TEA S, 1735NEWYO RK AVENUE, N.V(',VXASIIINGr(tN,1) 11NNN, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. as 'nsures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adj - •nt to the site by property insurance under policies separ e fi xn those insuring the Project, or if after final payment pr )p- cr - insurance is to be provided on the completed Pr sect thr ugh a policy or policies other than those insuring the )roj- ect wring the construction period, the Owner shall w. a all right. in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11 .7 for dama •s caused by fire or other perils covered by this eparate proper insurance. All separate policies shall pro ide this, waiver < 'subrogation by endorsement or othcrwis 11.3.6 13e ) Gic with t insurance c policy shall tions, exclu. policy shall cancelled or ten notice h 11.3.7 Wai waive all rig tractors. stub Other, and contractors contractors, dan)agcs cat property insurance obtai •d other property insurance rights as they have to pros c )caner as fiduciary. The O� shall require of the Architcc contractors described in Art tors, Sub - subcontractors, age by appropriate agreements, validity, similar waivers eac crated herein. The policies gation by endorsement or a shall he effective as to a son or entity would oth contractual or otherwi. directly or indirectly, had an insurable into •st re :u) exposure to loss may occur, the e Contractor a copy of each policy vcrages required by this Paragrap )stain all generally applicable co i sic is and endorsements related tot s ct rain a provision that the p tcy all( wed to c *pire until /tsand da ashen given to the Co vers o Subrogation. The r an tits agar st (1) each othey of t - subcon actors, agents aloyce. (2) the A 'hitect, Architnsults clesc•rihed Article 6, if d any sub -suhco tractors, agd em used by fire c other peril exten in wner shall tat includes 11.3• Each tions, defini- Project. Each, will not be day prior writ- d Contractor heir subcon - s, each of the nts, separate of their sub - ployees, for I covered by sua t to this Paragraph 11.3 or bbl to the Work, except such o such insurance held by the r Contractor, as appropriate, chitect's consultants, separate 6, if any, and the subcontrac- tnd employees of any of them, en where legally required for avor of other parties enum- vide such waivers of subro- w e. A waiver of subrogation ity even though that per - duty of indemnification, the insurance premium of the person or entity per damaged. rson ore t wise have did not pa d whether or in the pr o 11.3.13 A loss insur 1 under Owner's pre rty insurance shall he adjusted h} the )caner as fiduciary and ale payable to the Owner as fiduci. y for the insureds, as tear interests may appear, subject ) requirements of any ap icable mortgagee I and of S �par.+graph 1 1.3.10. The Co It shall pay SuhccmtracI heir just shares of insurance p )seeds received by the Contr (tor, and by appropriate agre e ants, written where legally re•yuired for validity, shall require , ubcontractors to make p ymcnts to their Sub - subcontract( s in similar manner. 11.3 .9 if equired in writing by a party in interest, to Owner as fiduc +r}' shall, upon occurrence of an insured )ss, give bond f r proper performance of the Owner's duties. he cost of req ired honds shall be charged against proceeds re ived as fiduc' ry. The Owner shall deposit in a separate accou t pro cece so received, which the Owner shall distribute in ccor- dat e with such agreement as the parties in interest may r \ch , or n accord ance with an arbitration award in which case p )cedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after h )ss no other special agreement is made, replacement of - sc•t • a loss with insurers unless one of they parties in into st shall bject in writing within five days after occurrence ( oss to the wner's exercise of this power; if such objc on be made, a\aordance all be chosen as provided in Para aph 4.5. The Ow fiduciary shall, in that case, make sett Hunt wit h insurers with directions of such rhitruors. If distriburance proceeds by arbitra ' )n is required, the arbidirect such distribution. 11.3.11 Partial occu i 9.9 shall not conurlcn panics providing props • it partial occupancy or use Owner and the Contractor s consent of the insurance cc without mutual written ytt" partial occupancy Or use reduction of insurance. cy or use in acct until the insu en )SA-ince with Paragraph rice company or com- jj �(have consented to such F.scnlcnt or otherwise. The c reasonable steps to obtain y or companies and shall, cc no action with respect to �ause cancellation, lapse or 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 'rhe Own • shall have the right to uirc the Contrac- tor to furnish h ds covering faithful perforn rice of the Con tract and pay ent of obligations arising there- uler at stipu- latcd in hi ing requirements or specific rcc ir( in the Contraci ocuments on the date of execution of th Contract. 11.4. 1pc)n the request Of any person or entity appe. ng to be otential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of o iga- ti s arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promiNy ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncover- ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, he charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor Shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall he responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall hear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspec- tions anti compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. 12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substantial Comple- tion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the daite AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE. CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA`" • ©1997 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2(XW) A201 -1987 21 rt m rt P. 51 tD to rD K r• O a U) N rt rn 0 K rt ro a K a �A K a 'L7 N a t'r 0 C (D , at its sole cost and expense, for commencement of warranties established under Sub* paragraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract cuments, t e Contractor sfi5TAcorrect it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written accep- tance of such condition. This period of one year shall he extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan- tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- tance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Cwner shall give such notice promptly after dis- covery of the condition. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which arc not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accor- dance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within *- FrAtx� the Owner may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage within ten days after written eoticc, the Owner may nol;«sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con- tractor, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which_ the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the C )n- tract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Subparagraph 12.2.1 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor- rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall he governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- ments and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise unposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi- nances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless other- wise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvalg with an independent test- ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, anti shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- tions are to he made so the Architect may observe such proce- dures. , 13.5.2 If the Architect /Q)wner - jtiFiltheikit* determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub- paragraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval h), an cmity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections aie to he made so the Architect may observe such procedures. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • Fol'RT FENTII 1i1)1'1l()N 22 A201 -1987 AIAw • U 1987 THE AMERICAN INs,rITtJT'E OF ARCIIJITCTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 24XX)6 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. Lo IM 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures anti compensation for the Architect's services and expenses. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will du so promptly :Ind, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con- tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable dclav in the Work. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may erminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public author- ity having jurisdiction; .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable; .3 . Stilipartigrarh 9.4.1, tip because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment withirf the time stated in the Contract Documents; .4 if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- ber of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365 -day period, whichever is less; or il...t r�. f..m.�l+ ♦.� eMa I'.....�.......� _ 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. o 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of A days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters impor- tant to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 dii�&WAI or .4 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner,w - AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA" - 0198- THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201 -1987 23 left -rxseh itekeony may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, termi- nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equip- ment, tools, and construction equipment and machin- ery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para- graph 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the S Owner. The amount to be paid to the GOMFIkelOF-er Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon appli- cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termina- tion of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER * FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused by suspension, delay or internlp- tion. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was or would have been so sus- pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract. 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 24 A201 -1987 AIA°' •©1987 THE AMERICANINSTITUTE OFARCHITECI'S, 1735 NEWYORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 24m)(06 ADDENDUM TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION This is an Addendum ( "Addendum ") to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction ( "General Conditions "). The terms used in this Addendum shall have the same meanings as set forth in the other Contract Documents (as defined in the General Conditions) unless otherwise redefined herein.. 1. The Contract. The following shall be added following the third sentence of Subparagraph 1.1.2 of the General Conditions: Modifications to the Contract may be made without notice to the Contractor's sureties, and absence of such notice shall not exonerate or release such sureties or the Contractor from any bonds issued to the Owner pursuant to the Contract Documents. 2. Review of Contract Documents. The following shall be added to the end of Subparagraph 1.2.2 of the General Conditions: and that the Contractor has thoroughly reviewed the Contract Documents and acknow- ledges that the Contract Documents are complete and consistent, and agrees that it shall not be entitled to make later claims of any increase in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time on the basis of subse- quently discovered inconsistencies, errors or omissions in the Contract Documents. 3. Correlation. The following shall be added to the end of the second sentence in Subparagraph 1.2.3 of the General Conditions: given the Contractor's extensive experience and expertise with construction projects similar to the Project. 4. Conflicts or Discrepancies. The following shall be added to Article 1 of the General Conditions as Subparagraph 1.2.6: \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 - 1 - 1.2.6 Conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents shall be resolved in the following order of precedence: 1. Modifications issued after the execution of the Contract (with documents of later date taking precedence over those of earlier date); 2. Addendum to Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor; 3. Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (as modified); 4. Bid Forms; 5. Addendum to General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (including Laws and Regulations Rider and Insurance and Bond Rider); 6. Notice Inviting Bids; 7. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders; S. Instructions to Bidders (as modified); 9. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (as modified); 10. Drawings and Specifications (Drawings govern Specifications for quantity and location, and Specifications govern Drawings for quality and performance; in the event of ambiguity in quantity or quality, the greater quantity and the better quality shall govern) ; and 11. Submittals. With reference to the Drawings, the order of precedence shall be as follows: 1. Figured dimensions govern over scaled dimensions; 2. Detailed drawings govern over general drawings; \051 \58801.4 214- 103004706011 -2- 3. Addenda /change order drawings govern over Contract drawings; 4. Contract drawings govern over standard drawings; and 5. Large scale drawings govern small scale drawings. 5. Review of Contract Documents. The following shall be added to the General Conditions as Subparagraph 3.2.1: The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and shall at once report to the Architect and the Owner errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered or any variance from applicable Laws and Regulations. The Contractor shall be liable for any damage, loss or expense incurred by the Owner or the Architect resulting from the Contractor's failure to report such discovery or its performance of any construction activity if it knows or should have known of such error, incon- sistency, omission or violation. 6. Subcontract Limitations. The following shall be added to Article 3 of the General Conditions as Subparagraph 3.4.3: 3.4.3 The Contractor shall perform not less than ten percent (10t) of the Work with its own forces (i.e., without subcontracting). The foregoing percentage requirement shall be understood to refer to the Work, the value of which totals not less than ten percent (10t) of the Contract Sum. 7. Warranty. The following parenthetical shall be added following the word "Work" in the fourth line of Subparagraph 3.5.1 of the General Conditions: "(including all materials and workman- ship)"; the following parenthetical shall be added following the words "improper and insufficient maintenance" in the third sentence of Subparagraph 3.5.1 of the General Conditions: "(provided the Contractor has furnished complete maintenance instructions to the \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 -3- Owner) "; the following parenthetical shall be added following the words "improper operation" in the third sent --nce of Subpara- graph 3.5.1 of the General Conditions: "(provided the Contractor has furnished complete operational instructions to the Owner) "; and the following shall be added following the third sentence of Subparagraph 3.5.1 of the General Conditions: The foregoing exclusions shall not apply to any damage or defect caused by improper or insufficient maintenance if the Contractor is responsible for such maintenance under the Contract Documents. 8. Superintendent. The following shall be added to the end of Paragraph 3.9 of the General Conditions: The Superintendent shall be approved by the Owner and shall not be replaced without the Owner's prior consent. 9. Indemnification. The following shall be added to Article 3 of the General Conditions as Subparagraph 3.18.1: To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend, protect and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants and any other person or entity designated by the Owner, and the officers, directors, employees and agents of each of them (collectively, the "Indemnitees "), from and against all claims, demands, causes of action, damages, liabili- ties, losses and expenses, including, without limitation, attorneys' and consultants' fees and expenses, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, breach of the Contract by Contractor or the acts or omissions of the Contractor, its Subcon- tractors, Sub - subcontractors, suppliers or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, demand, cause of action, damage, liability, loss or expense is caused in part by an Indemnitee. Such obligations shall not extend to claims, demands, causes of action, damages, liabilities, losses or expenses to \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 -4- „, the extent such result from the active negli- gence or willful misconduct of an Indemnitee. Nothing herein shall be deemed to abridge the rights, if any, of the Owner or the Contractor to seek contribution where appropriate. 10. Contractors' Other Obligations. The following subpara- graphs shall be added to Paragraph 3.18 of the General Conditions: 3.18.4 The Contractor shall defend each Indemnitee, through counsel approved by such Indemnitee, in any action, proceeding or arbitration brought against the Indemnitee by reason of any such claim described in this Paragraph 3.18. The Contractor's obligation to defend an Indemnitee shall not extend to any action, proceeding or arbitration which asserts or alleges only that the injury to the claimant resulted solely from the active negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnitee and from no other cause or if a final judgment is obtained establishing that such injury to the claimant resulted solely from the active negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnitee, in which latter event the Contractor's obligation to defend such Indemnitee shall cease upon the date such judgment becomes final. 3.18.5 If any claim of lien or stop- notice or any other demand for payment or security therefor, including claims or demands upon performance and payment bond sureties for the Contract, is made or filed with the Owner or the Project by any person claiming that Contractor or any Subcontractor or supplier or any other person claiming under any of them has failed to perform its contractual obliga- tions or to make payment for any labor, services, trust fund contribution, materials, equipment, taxes or other item furnished or obligation incurred for, or in connection with, the Work, or if at any time there shall - be evidence of such nonperformance or nonpay- ment of any claim or lien or stop- notice or other demand for which, if established, the Owner or the Project might become liable, then the Owner shall have the right to retain from any payment then due or thereafter to become due under the Contract or to be reimbursed by the Contractor for an amount sufficient to ( i ) satisfy, discharge and defend against any such claim of lien or stop- notice or other demand, \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 -5- or any action or proceeding thereon which may be brought to judgment or award; (ii) make good any such nonpayment, nonperformance, damage, failure or default; and (iii) compen- sate the Owner for and indemnify it against any and all loss, liability, damage, cast and expense (including attorneys' and consultants' fees and costs) which may be sustained or incurred in connection therewith. 3.18.6 Should any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or any of them make, record or file, or maintain any action on or respecting a claim of mechanic's lien, stop - notice, equitable lien, payment or performance bond, or a lis pendens, relating to the Work, the Contractor shall immediately and at its own expense procure, furnish and record appro- priate statutory release bonds which will extinguish or expunge said claim, stop- notice or lis pendens. 3.18.7 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 3.18 shall survive the completion of the Work or the sooner termina- tion of the Contract. 11. Claims The following shall be added to the end of Subparagraph 4.3.1 of the General Conditions: For purposes of the Contract Documents, the term "Claim" shall include only such disputes, demands, assertions or other matters arising or first recognized prior to the date final payment is due. 12. Time Limit on Claims. The time limits set forth in Subparagraph 4.3.3 of the General Conditions shall not apply to Claims made by the Owner for failure of the Contractor to perform the Work within the Contract Time. The Owner shall not be required to make any such Claims until Substantial Completion of the Work. 13. Claims for Unknown Conditions. The following shall be added to Article 4 of the General Conditions as Subparagraph 4.3.6: \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 -6- 4.3.6 Claims for Unknown Conditions. (a) The Contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify the Owner, in writing, of any: (1) Material that the Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in section 25117 of the California Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law; (2) Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated; or (3) Unknown physical condi- tions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. (b) The Owner shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work, shall instruct the Architect to issue a change order ,under the procedures described in the Contract Documents. (c) That, in the event that a dispute arises between the Owner and the Contractor whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the Contract, but shall proceed with all Work to be performed under the Contract, unless instructed otherwise by the Owner. The Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties. \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 - 7 - 14. Resolution of Claims and Disputes. The following shall be added to the end of Subparagraph 4.4.4 of the General Conditions: Any decision of the Architect shall be non - binding upon the parties and shall not preclude the parties from thereafter pursuing such rights and remedies as may be available under the Contract Documents, by law or in equity with respect to the applicable Claim. 15. Resolution of Construction Claims. The following shall be added to Article 4 of the General Conditions as Paragraph 4.5: 4.5 Resolution of Construction Claims. Notwithstanding anything contained in Paragraphs 4.3 and 4.4 above to the contrary, the provisions of Section 20104 ml sea, of the California Public Contract Code shall govern the resolution of any "claims" (as defined in Section 20104(b)(2) of the California Public Contract Code) of Three Hundred Seventy -five Thousand Dollars ($375,000) or less which are between the Owner and the Contractor. 16. Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts. The following shall be added to the end of Subparagraph 5.4.1 of the General Conditions: The Contractor shall cause each subcontract agreement entered into by it with any Subcon- tractor to include a provision pursuant to which the applicable Subcontractor recognizes the right of the Owner under this Subparagraph 5.4.1 to be substituted for the Contractor and agrees to be bound to the Owner to complete its obligations under its subcontract if the subcontract in question is so assigned to the Owner. 17. Processing Change Orders. The following shall be added to Article 7 of the General Conditions as Subparagraphs 7.4 and 7.5: M \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 7.4 Processing Chancre _Order 7.4.1 If a change in the Work is to be ordered, a Supplementary Instruction shall be issued by the Architect to the Contractor describing the change and request- ing the submission of a Change Order Request. When time does not permit the processing of a Change Order in advance of commencing the change in the Work, upon receipt of a written authorization from the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed with a change in the Work, and Contractor shall concurrently proceed with submission of a Change Order Request. 7.4.2 Within five days of its receipt of a Supplementary Instruction, the Contractor shall provide the Architect with a preliminary estimate of any change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time associated with the change described in the Supplementary Instruction. Within 10 days following receipt of a Supplementary Instruction, the Contractor shall submit a Change Order Request to the Architect together with the revised or new documents which, if approved by the Owner in writing, will become part of the Contract Documents setting forth any requested adjust- ment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and including an itemization of all costs of material and labor with the extensions listing quantities and total costs, and a substantia- tion of any Claim for an extension of the Contract Time. If the Contractor is unable to submit the above information within the time limit, it shall notify the Owner of the same in writing within such time limit, setting forth for Owner's approval a date by which the Contractor will submit the information as well as a schedule for the performance of the Work for which a Change Order Request will be forthcoming. 7.4.3 If the Owner approves a Change Order Request submitted by the Contractor, the Architect shall prepare a Change Order that is based upon such Change Order Request for execution by the Contractor and the Owner, and the Contract Sum and /or the Contract Time shall be adjusted as provided in the Change Order Request. 7.4.4 Nothing contained herein shall limit the right of the Owner to order \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 - 9 - Un changes in Work by Construction Change Direc- tives pursuant to Paragraph 7.3 above. 7.4.5 Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 7.3 above, no change in the Work shall be the basis of an addition to the Contract Sum or a change in the Contract Time unless and until such change has been authorized by a Change Order executed and issued in accordance with the Contract Documents. Changes in the Work may be made without notice to Contractor's sureties, and absence of such notice shall not exonerate or release such sureties or the Contractor from any bonds issued to the.Owner pursuant to the Contract Documents. 7.5 Changes No change in the Work, whether by way of alteration or addition to the Work, shall be the basis of an addition to the Contract Sum or change in the Contract Time unless and until such alteration or addition has been authorized by (i) a Change Order executed by the Owner and the Contractor and issued in accordance and strict compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or (ii) a Construction Change Direc- tive executed by the Owner and issued in accordance and strict compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. This requirement is of the essence of the Contract Documents. Accordingly, no course of _onduct or dealings between the parties, nor express or implied acceptance of alterations or additions to the Work, and no claim that the Owner has been unjustly enriched by any alteration or addition to the Work, whether or not there is in fact any such unjust enrich- ment, shall be the basis for any claim to an increase in the Contract Sum or change in the Contract Time. 18. Delays and Extensions of Time. The following shall be added to Article 8 of the General Conditions as Subparagraph 8.3.1: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by (i) any act or neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or (ii) by any employee of the Owner or the Architect, (iii) by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or (iv) by changes ordered by the Owner in the Work, or (v) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 _10- deliveries, unavoidable casualties, and any other such causes wholly beyond the Contractor's or its Subcontractors', Sub - subcontractors' or suppliers' control and not reasonably anticipatable, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order, without notice to sureties, for such reasonable time as the Owner may determine. A time extension shall be the Contractor's sole remedy and compensation for all such delays other than those delays for which the Owner is responsible (provided such delays are unreasonable under the circumstances involved and not within the contemplation of the par- ties) (collectively, "Owner- Caused Delays ") . For Owner- Caused Delays, the Contractor shall be entitled to recovery for its reasonable additional costs resulting from such delays. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to relieve the Owner from liability for its active negligence. 19. Applications for Payment. With each Application for Payment, the Contractor shall provide, in addition to all other submittals required by the Contract Documents, both (i) uncondi- tional lien waivers and releases in statutory form (California Civil Code section 3262) with respect to the period covered by the immediately prior Application for Payment from all Subcontractors, Sub- subcontractors or others with respect to whose work and /or materials such immediately prior Application for Payment covered, and (ii) conditional lien waivers and releases in statutory form with respect to the period covered by the current Application for Payment from all Subcontractors, Sub- subcontractors or others with respect to whose work and /or materials such current Application for Payment covers. In addition to the reasons set forth in Subpara- graph 9.5.1 of the General Conditions, payments may be withheld on account of the failure by the Contractor to submit the foregoing lien waivers and releases with each Application for Payment. \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 20. Joint Payments. The following shall be added to Article 9 of the General Conditions as Subparagraph 9.6.7: 9.6.7 Joint Payments. Unless the Contractor is not in default and otherwise requests the Owner not to do so as a result of the Contractor's good faith dispute with a Subcontractor or supplier, Owner may make payments jointly to the order of the Contractor and its Subcontractor or supplier. 21. Failure of Payment. The following shall be added to the end of Subparagraph 9.7.1 of the General Conditions: The proceeding to the contrary notwith- standing, no sum shall be added as a result of a bona fide dispute between the Owner and the Contractor. 22. Final Completion and Final Payment. The following sentence shall be added after the first sentence of Subpara- graph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions: Notwithstanding the foregoing, in no event shall the retainage attributable to unfinished Work be less than two hundred percent (200 ,t) of the cost of finally completing the Work. 23. Correction of Work. The following shall be added to the end of Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions The Contractor shall bear the cost of any corrective work required pursuant to this Subparagraph 12.2.2. The time period of one (1) year as described in this Subpara- graph 12.2.2 is sometimes referred to in the Contract Documents as the "Correction Period." Unless a shorter time period is specified in the Contract Documents, all corrective work required to be performed by the Contractor shall be completed within ten (10) days after written notice thereof from the Owner (except' that, if the nature of such corrective work would reasonably require more than ten (10) days for performance, then the Contractor shall commence such performance within such ten (10) day period and diligently pursue such corrective work to completion within a reason- able time period thereafter, but in no event \051 \58801.4 214- 103004706011 - 12 -r more than thirty (30) days after the afore- mentioned written notice from the Owner). 24. Successors and Assigns: Assignment. The following shall be added to Article 13 of the General Conditions as Subpara- graph 13.2: The Contractor shall have no right to assign or otherwise transfer the Contract, including, without limitation, any of its rights, obliga- tions or duties thereunder, without the written consent of the Owner, which consent may be withheld in the Owner's sole and absolute discretion. The Owner shall have the right to assign or otherwise transfer the Contract, including therewith its rights, obligations and duties thereunder, to any other entity at any time without the consent of the Contractor or sureties under any bonds required by the Contract Documents, and, upon any such assignment or other transfer, the Owner shall be automatically released from all further obligations, duties and liab.lities under or arising in connection with the Contract and /or the Work. Upon any such assignment or transfer by the Owner, the term "Owner" as used in the Contract Documents and shall mean the applicable assignee or transferee and the Contractor shall promptly cause all bonds and insurance policies required by the Contract Documents to be amended for the benefit of any such assignee or transferee. 25. Written Notice. The following shall be added to Article 13 of the General Conditions as Subparagraph 13.3: Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, such written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the designated representative of the parties as set forth in the Contract Documents (as such designated representatives may be changed from time to time by the appropriate party by written notice thereof given to the other party) or delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the address set forth in the Contract Documents as the address for notices, which address may be changed from time to time by \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 - 13 - the appropriate party by written notice thereof given to the other party. 26. Tests and Inspections. The following shall be added to the end of Subparagraph 13.5.1 of the General Conditions: The cost of all tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public autho- rities having jurisdiction shall be borne by the Contractor, except that the Owner shall bear the cost of any tests, inspections or approvals which become requirements following the opening of bids for the Work. The following shall be added to the end of Subparagraph 13.5.2 of the General Conditions: The Owner shall bear the costs of any such tests, inspections and approvals except (i) as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3 below, or (ii) if such additional testing, inspection or approval is required.by the Architect or the Owner based upon their good faith determina- tion that the applicable portion of the Work may not have been performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. With respect to the tests, inspections or approvals described in subsection (ii) above, the Contractor shall bear all related costs of such tests, inspec- tions and approvals unless such tests, inspec- tions and approvals establish that the applic- able portion of the Work was in fact performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, in which even the Owner shall bear such costs. 27. Termination by the Owner for Cause. The following is hereby added as Subparagraphs 14.2.1.3 and 14.2.1.4 of the General Conditions: .3 disregards applicable Laws and Regulations; or .4 otherwise breaches any term or provision of the Contract Documents. The following sentence shall be added to the beginning of Subparagraph 14.2.4 of the General Conditions: \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 - 14 - If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds all cost to the Owner of finishing the Work, including, without limitation, the cost to the Owner of the services of the Architect, the Owner's other consultants and attorneys and any additional expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. 28. Termination by the Owner for Convenience. The following shall be added to Article 14 of the General Conditions as Paragraph 14.4: 14.4 Termination by Owner for Convenience. 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract in whole or in part for the Owner's convenience and without cause. Termination by the Owner under this paragraph shall be by written notice of termi- nation given to the Contractor specifying the extent of termination and the effective date. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall immediately, in accordance with the Owner's instructions, proceed with performance of the following duties: .1 cease operations as specified; .2 unless otherwise speci- fied, place no further orders and enter into no further subcontracts for materials, labor, services or facilities to the extent they relate to the Work so terminated; .3 unless otherwise speci- fied, terminate all subcontracts and orders to the extent that they relate to the Work so terminated; .4 complete the perform- ance of the Work not terminated; and .5 take such other actions as may be necessary or requested by the Owner for the protection and preservation of the terminated Work. \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 - 15 - 14.4.3 In the event of termina- tion for the Owner's convenience following the issuance by the Owner of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall be paid: .1 for Work performed on the terminated portion of the Work before the effective date of termination, the cost of the Work under clauses 1 through 5 of Subpara- graph 7.3.6 for that Work or, for unit cost items, the cost based upon the units performed before the effective date of termination; directly related described in detai tions provided b approved by the Owner; and .2 re to su t in in v y the asonable costs ch termination as oices and descrip- Contractor and as .3 if the Contractor would have earned a profit under the Contract had the Work been completed, a pro rata portion of such profit based upon the percentage of completion of the Work as of the effective date of termination. 14.4.4 In the event of termina- tion for the Owner's convenience prior to the issuance by the Owner of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall have no claims against the Owner in connection therewith. 14.4.5 due Contractor under Owner shall be previously made to terminated portion which the Owner has under the Contract, materials, supplies, to be disposed of b y covered under the Co In determining amounts this Paragraph 14.4, the credited for payments the Contractor for the of the Work and claims against the Contractor and for the value of equipment or other items the Contractor that are ntract Sum. 14.4.6 Except for amounts to be paid to the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 14.4, the Contractor shall have no claims against the Owner in connection with any termination of the Contract, in whole or in part, by the Owner pursuant to this Paragraph 14.4. 29. Partial Elimination by Owner. The following shall be added to Article 14 of the General Conditions as Subparagraph 14.5: \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 - 16 - 14.5 Partial Elimination by Owner. The Owner shall have the right to eliminate any portion of the Work from the scope of the Contract Documents at any time by written notice thereof being given to the Contractor. In the event a portion of the Work is so eliminated by the Owner prior to commencement of such portion by the Contractor and no lump sum or unit price is named in the Contract Documents to cover such eliminated work, the price of the eliminated work shall be agreed upon in writing by the Owner and the Contractor and the Contract Sum shall be decreased accordingly. In the event the Owner and the Contractor fail to agree upon such decrease, such matter shall be submitted to the Architect in accordance with Article 4 above for determination. In the event a portion of the Work is so eliminated following the commencement of such portion by the Contractor and a lump sum or unit price is named in the Contract Documents to cover such eliminated work, the Contract Sum shall be reduced on the basis of such lump sum or unit price. In the event the Owner elects to eliminate a portion. of the Work after the Contractor has commenced with such portion, such elimination shall be subject to the terms of Paragraph 14.4 above. 30. Effect of Addendum. Except as otherwise modified herein, the terms of the General Conditions shall remain unmodified and in full force and effect. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Addendum and the terms of the General Conditions, the terms of this Addendum shall control. \051 \58801.4 214 - 103004706011 -17 - LAPS AND REGULATIONS RIDER 1. IN GENERAL: The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to observe and comply with) all federal, state and local laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, regulations, rules, conditions of approval, and all executive, legislative, administrative, regulatory and judicial m orders, decrees, requirements, rulings or judgments (collectively, "Laws and Regulations "), which now or in the future may govern or affect the Work or any actions to be undertaken by the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, those Laws and Regulations which in any.manner affect those engaged or employed by the CONTRACTOR in connection with the Work, the materials used in the Work and /or the conduct of the Work. If any discrepancy or inconsistency between the Contract Documents and any applicable Laws and Regulations is discovered by the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately report the same in writing to the Architect and OWNER. Any Laws and Regulations specified or referred to elsewhere in the Contact Documents, including those described in this Rider below, shall in no way limit the obligation of the CONTRACTOR to observe and comply with all other applicable Laws and Regulations and to cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to observe and comply with the same. 2. FEDERAL REQUIREMMS: In addition to its observance and compliance (and the observance and compliance by its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors) with all other applicable federal Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall observe and comply with the following: A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with all federal statutes relating to non - discrimination, including, without limitation, to the extent applicable, the following: (a) Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (Public Law ( "P.L.") 88 -352) prohibiting discrimination on the basis of race, color or national origin; (b) Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972 (20 U.S.C. §§ 1681 -1683 and 1685 - 1686), as amended, prohibiting discrimination on the basis of sex; (c) Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. § 794), as amended, prohibiting discrimination on the basis of handicaps; (d) the Age Discrimination Act of 1975 (42 U.S.C. §§ 6101 - 6107), as amended, prohibiting discrimina- tion on the basis of age; (e) the Drug Abuse Office and Treatment Act of 1972 (P.L. 92 -255), as amended, relating to non - discrimination on the basis of drug abuse; (f) the Comprehensive Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism Prevention Treatment and Rehabilitation Act of 1970 (P.L. 91 -616), \079 \65319.4 210- 103001501001 ' 1 as amended, relating to non - discrimination on the basis of alcohol abuse or alcoholism; (g) Sections 523 and 527 of the Public Health Service Act of 1912 (42 U.S.C. S 290 dd -3 and 290 ee -3), as amended, relating to confiden- tiality of alcohol and drug abuse patient records; (h) Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 entitled "Equal Employment Opportunity," as amended by Executive Order 11375 of October 13, 1967 and as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (41 CFR part 60) ; and (i) Section 112 of the Public Works and Economic Development Act Amendments of 1971 (P.L. 92 -65). B. The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with the Copeland "Anti - Kickback" Act (18 U.S.C. 874), as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR part 3). C. The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with the pertinent provisions of the Davis -Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a to a -7), as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (2 9 CFR part 5). D. The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors to comply) with the pertinent provisions (including, without limitation, Sections 103 and 107) of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 327 -330), as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR part 5) , and shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time for work, arising out of or in the course of employment on work performed under the Contract. E. The CONTRACTOR shall permit the OWNER, the Federal Emergency Management Agency, the Comptroller General of the United States, and the California Office of Emergency Services, through their respective agents, employees and representatives, to access and examine any books, documents, papers and records of the CONTRACTOR which are directly pertinent to the Contract for purposes of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions thereof. F. The CONTRACTOR shall establish a proper accounting system in accordance with generally accepted accounting standards and /or directives of the Federal Emergency Management Agency, the Comptroller General of the United States and the California Office of Emergency Services. G. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required records for three years after the OWNER makes final payment and all other pending matters are closed. \079 \65319.4 210- 103001501001 - 2 - H. The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with the provisions of the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.) and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251 et sea.), including, without limitation, all applicable standards, orders or requirements issued under Section 306 of the Clear Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7602), Section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368), Executive Order 11738 and Environmental Protection Agency regulations (40 CFR part 15). I. The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with all mandatory standards and policies related to energy efficiency which are contained in any California energy conservation plans issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conser- vation Act (P.L. 94 -163). J. The CONTRACTOR shall comply, and shall assist the OWNER, the Federal Emergency Management Agency, the Comptroller General of the United States, and the California Office of Emergency Services in assuring compliance, with Section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16 U.S.C. 407), as amended, Executive Order 11593 (identification and preservation of historic properties), and the Archeological and Historic Preservation Act of 1974 (16 U.S.C. 469 a -1 gt =.). R. The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors to comply) with all applicable provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 (the "Act ") in its current form and as it may be amended from time to time. 3. CALIFORNIA STATE REQQIREEBNTS: In addition to its observance and compliance (and the observance and compliance by its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors) with all other applicable state Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall observe and comply with the following: A. State Wage Determinations: (1) In accordance with Sections 1770 pj secr. of the California Labor Code, the CONTRACTOR shall pay ( and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to pay) not less than the prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations to all laborers, workmen and mechanics employed by them in performance of the Work. Copies of such prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file at the office of the City Clerk for the City of Gilroy, which copies shall be made available to any interested party on \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 - 3 - request. The CONTRACTOR shall post a copy of such determination at each job site. The OWNER shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including apprentices and trainees, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the Contract, shall be classified or reclassified conformably to the wage determination. In the event the interested parties cannot agree on the proper classification of a particular class of laborers and mechanics, including apprentices and trainees, to be used, the question accompanied by the recommendation of the contracting officer shall be referred to the Department of Industrial Relations or such other applicable agency for final determination. (2) In accordance with Section 1775 of the California Labor Code, the CONTRACTOR shall, as a penalty to the OWNER, forfeit not more than $50.00 for each calendar day or portion thereof for each worker paid less than the prevailing rates as determined by the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations for the work or craft in which the worker is employed for any Work done under the Contract by the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors and Sub - Subcontractors. (3) The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with all applicable provisions of Section 1770 jat Beg. of the California Labor Code relating to the payment of prevailing rates. B. Workers' Compensation: In accordance with the provisions of Sections 1860 and 3700 of the California Labor Code, the CONTRACTOR shall secure the payment of compensation to its employees and shall for that purpose obtain and keep in effect during the performance of the Work the workers' compensation insurance required under the Contract Documents. C. Apprentices on Public Works: Attention is hereby directed to the provisions of Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 of the California Labor Code concerning the employment of apprentices by contractors and subcontractors upon public works projects. The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with all applicable provisions of Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 of the California Labor Code for all apprenticeable occupations. D. Working Hours: The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with all applicable provisions of Sections 1810 to 1815, \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 -4- to` rM inclusive, of the California Labor Code relating to working hours. The CONTRACTOR shall, as a penalty to the OWNER, forfeit $25.00 for each worker employed in the execution of the Work by the CONTRACTOR or by any Subcontractor or Sub- subcontractor for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any one calendar day and 40 hours in any one calendar week, except that, pursuant to Section 1815 of the California Labor Code, such workers shall be permitted to work in excess of 8 hours per day, and 40 hours during any one week, upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of eight hours per day at not less than 1 -1/2 times the basic rate of pay. E. Notice of Completion: In accordance with Sections 3086 and 3093 of the California Civil Code, within 10 days after date of acceptance of the Work by the OWNER, the OWNER will file, in the County Recorders office, a Notice of Completion of the Work. F. Unpaid Claims: If, at any time prior to the expiration of the period for service of a stop notice, there is served upon the OWNER a stop notice as provided in Sections 3098 and 3179 gir g=. of the California Civil Code, the OWNER shall, until the discharge thereof as provided in Section 3186 of the California Civil Code, withhold from the monies under its control such amounts due or to become due to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents as may be sufficient to answer the claim stated in such stop notice and to provide for the reasonable cost of any litigation thereunder; provided, however, that if the OWNER shall, in its discretion, permit the CONTRACTOR to file with the OWNER the bond referred to in Section 3196 of the California Civil Code, said monies shall not thereafter be withheld on account of such stop notice. G. Protection of Workers in Trench Excavations: In accordance with Section 6705 of the California Labor Code, and in addition thereto, in the event the Work involves the excavation of any trench or trenches 5 feet or more in depth, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for acceptance by the OWNER or by a registered civil or structural engineer employed by the OWNER, to whom authority to accept has been delegated, in advance of excavation, a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trench or trenches. If such plan varies from the shoring system standards established by the Construction Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer employed by the CONTRACTOR, and all costs therefor shall be borne by \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 ' S the CONTRACTOR without increase in the Contract Sum. Nothing provided herein shall be deemed to allow the use of a shoring, sloping or other protective system less effective than that required by the Construction Safety Orders. Nothing provided herein shall be construed to impose tort liability on the OWNER or any of its officers, agents, representatives, engineers or employees. H. Concrete Forms, Falsework and Shoring: The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with the requirements of Section 1717 of the Construction Safety Orders, State of California, Department of Industrial Relations (Cal. Code Regs. tit. 8, § 1717), regarding the design of concrete forms, falsework and shoring, and the inspection of the same prior to the placement of concrete. Where said section requires the services of a civil engineer registered in the State of California to approve design calculations and working drawings of the falsework or shoring system or to inspect such system prior to the placement of concrete, the CONTRACTOR shall employ a civil engineer, currently registered in California, for such purposes, and all costs therefor shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR without increase in the Contract Sum. I. Retainage From Monthly Payments: To the extent permitted under Section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code, the CONTRACTOR may substitute securities for any monies withheld by the OWNER to insure performance under the Contract. At the request and expense of the CONTRACTOR, securities equivalent to the amount withheld shall be deposited by the CONTRACTOR with the OWNER, or with a state or federally chartered bank in California as the escrow agent, who shall then pay such monies to the CONTRACTOR. Upon satisfactory completion of the Contract, the securities shall be returned to the CONTRACTOR. Deposit of securities with an escrow agent shall be subject to a written agreement between - the escrow agent and the OWNER which provides that no portion of the securities shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR until the OWNER has certified to the escrow agent, in writing, that the Contract has been satisfactorily completed. The OWNER will not certify that the Contract has been satisfactorily completed until at least 30 days after filing by the OWNER of a Notice of Completion. Securities eligible for investment under Section 22300 shall be limited to those listed in Section 16430 of the Government Code and to bank or savings and loan certifi- cates of deposit, interest bearing demand deposit accounts, standby letters of credit, or any other security mutually agreed to by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. Alternatively, the CONTRACTOR may request, and the OWNER shall make, payments of earned retentions \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 - 6 - 10 directly to the permitted escrow agent at the expense of the CONTRACTOR, all in accordance with Section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code. J. Public Works Contracts; Assignment to Awarding Body: In accordance with Section 7103.5 of the California Public Contract Code, the CONTRACTOR hereby offers and agrees to assign to the OWNER all rights, title and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 16700) of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services or materials pursuant to the Contract or any subcontracts arising in connection therewith. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the OWNER tenders final payment to the CONTRACTOR, without further acknowledge- ment by the parties. The CONTRACTOR shall cause all its Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors to make the foregoing assignment to the OWNER in their respective subcontracts and sub - subcontracts and shall provide the OWNER with evidence of such assignments concurrently with any Application for Payment submitted by the CONTRACTOR which covers work and /or materials of any such Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors. K. Payroll Records; Retention; Inspection; Noncompliance Penalties; Rules and Regulations: (1) The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for compliance with (and for causing its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply with) Section 1776 of the California Labor Code. In accordance with Section 1776 of the California Labor Code, the CONTRACTOR and all Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors shall keep an accurate payroll record, showing the name, address, social security number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker or other employee employed by them in connection with the performance of the Work. (2) The payroll records enumerated in Paragraph 3.K.(1) above shall be certified by the CONTRACTOR (or its Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors, as applicable) pursuant to such form of certification as the OWNER may designate and shall be available for inspection at all reasonable hours at the principal office of the CONTRACTOR on the following basis: a. A certified copy of an employee's payroll record shall be made available for inspection \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 - 7 - or furnished to the employee or his or her authorized representative on request. b. A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in Paragraph 3.K.(1) above shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request to a representative of the OWNER, the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement and the Division of Apprenticeship Standards of the Department of Industrial Relations. C. A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in Paragraph 3.K.(1) above shall be made available upon request by the public for inspection or .copies thereof made; provided, however, that a request by the public shall be made through either the OWNER, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement. If the requested payroll records have not been provided pursuant to Paragraph 3.K.(2)(b) above, the requesting party shall, prior to being provided the records, reimburse the CONTRACTOR, the Subcontractors, Sub- subcontractors and the entity through which the request was made for all costs of preparation. The public shall not be given access to the records at the principal office of the CONTRACTOR. (3) The CONTRACTOR shall file (and shall cause its Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors to file) a certified copy of the records enumerated in Paragraph 3.K.(1) above with the entity that requested the records within 10 days after receipt of a written request therefor. (4) Any copy of records made available for inspection as copies and furnished upon request to the public or any public agency by the OWNER, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement shall be marked or obliterated in such a manner as to prevent disclosure of an individual's name, address and social security number. The name and address of the CONTRACTOR awarded the contract or performing the contract shall not be marked or obliterated. (5) The CONTRACTOR shall inform the OWNER of the location of the records enumerated under Paragraph 3.K.(1) above, including the street address, city and county, and shall, within 5 working days, provide a notice of change of location and address to the OWNER. \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 - 8 - (6) In the event of noncompliance with the requirements of Section 1776 of the California Labor Code, the CONTRACTOR shall have 10 days in which to comply subsequent to receipt of written notice specifying in what respects the CONTRACTOR must comply with said section. Should noncompliance still be evident after the 10 day period, the CONTRACTOR shall, as a penalty to the OWNER, forfeit $25.00 for each calendar day or portion thereof for each worker until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, these penalties shall be withheld from progress payments then due to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. L. Cultural Resources: The CONTRACTOR shall comply, and shall assist the OWNER and the California Office of Emergency Services in assuring compliance, with the Historical Resources Act as set forth in Sections 5020 at sea. of the California Public Resources Code. M. Travel and Subsistence Pay: (1) In accordance with Section 1773.8 of the California Labor Code, the. CONTRACTOR shall pay travel and subsistence payments to each workman needed to execute the Work, as such travel and subsistence payments are defined in the applicable collective bargaining agreements filed in accordance with said section. (2) To establish such travel and subsistence payments, the representative of any craft, classification or type of workman needed to execute the contracts shall file with the Department of Industrial Relations fully executed copies of collective bargaining agreements for the particular craft, classification or type of work involved. Such agreements shall be filed within 10 days after their execution and thereafter shall establish such travel and subsistence payments whenever filed 30 days prior to the call for bids. N. Public Utility,Protection: (1) In accordance with Section 4215 of the California Government Code, as between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER shall be responsible for the timely removal, relocation or protection of existing main or trunkline utility facilities located on the Project site, if such utilities are not identified by the Specifications and Drawings. The OWNER shall compensate CONTRACTOR for the costs of locating, \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 - 9 - repairing damage not due to the failure of the CONTRACTOR to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such utility facilities not indicated in the Specifications and Drawings with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the Project site necessarily idled during such work. (2) The CONTRACTOR shall not be assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of the Work when such delay was caused by the failure of the OWNER or the owner of the utility to provide for removal or relocation of such utility facilities. (3) Nothing herein shall be deemed to require the OWNER to indicate the presence of existing service laterals or appurtenances when the presence of such utilities on the Project site can be inferred from the presence of other visible facilities, such as buildings, meter and junction boxes, on or adjacent to the site of construction; provided, however, that nothing herein shall relieve the OWNER from identifying main or trunklines in the Specifications and Drawings. (4) Nothing herein shall preclude the OWNER from pursuing any appropriate remedy against the utility for delays which are the responsibility of the utility. (5) Nothing herein shall be construed to relieve the utility from any obligation as required either by law or by contract to pay the cost of removal or relocation of existing utility facilities. (6) If the CONTRACTOR while performing the Contract discovers utility facilities not identified by the public agency in the plans or specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the OWNER and utility in writing. 0. Certain Claims: \079 \65319.4 210-103001501001 (1) All separate demands made by the CONTRACTOR in the amount of $375,000 or less for (i) a time extension, (ii) payment of money or damages arising from work done by or on behalf of the CONTRACTOR pursuant to the Contract Documents and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the CONTRACTOR is not otherwise entitled to, or (iii) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the OWNER, shall be processed in accordance with the provisions of California Public Contract Code Section 20104 21 =. relating to informal conferences, non - binding -10- M judicially supervised mediation and judicial arbitration. P. Labor Discrimination: Attention is directed to Section 1735 of the California Labor Code, which reads as follows: "No discrimination shall be made in the employment of persons upon public works because of the race, religious creed, color, national origin or ancestry, physical handicap, medical condition, marital status, or sex of such persons, except as provided in Section 12940 of the Government Code, and every contractor for public works violating this section is subject to all the penalties imposed for a violation.of this chapter." During the performance of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees as follows: (1) The CONTRACTOR shall comply with Section 1735 of the California Labor Code and shall take affirmative action to ensure the applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religious creed, sex, national origin or ancestry, physical handicap, medical condition or marital status (except as provided in Section 12940 of the Government Code) . Such action shall include, without limitation, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or training, recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff to termination rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. (2) The CONTRACTOR agrees to post in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment, any notices provided by the OWNER relating to the provisions of this non- discrimination clause. (3) The CONTRACTOR will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the CONTRACTOR, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religious creed, national origin or ancestry, physical handicap, medical condition, marital status or sex, except as provided in Section 12940 of the California Government Code. (4) The CONTRACTOR will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or worker's representative of the CONTRACTOR's commitment and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (5) The CONTRACTOR will furnish all required information and reports and will permit access to his books, records and accounts by the OWNER for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders. (6) In the event of the CONTRACTOR's non - compliance with the non - discrimination clauses of the Contract Documents or with any such rules, regulations or orders, the Contract may be cancelled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the CONTRACTOR may be declared ineligible for further contracts with OWNER. (7) Contractor shall cause all Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply with the non - discrimination provisions imposed on contractor under the Contract Documents and shall cause such non - discrimination provisions to be included in every subcontract and sub - subcontract entered into in connection with the performance of the Contract. (8) The provisions of this Paragraph 3.Q. are not intended to be all- inclusive, and Contractor shall comply (and cause its Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors to comply) with all other applicable Laws and Regulations pertaining to the non - discrimination in employment of persons, including, with limitation, the Laws and Regulations set forth under Paragraph 2.A above. 4. LOCAL REOUIRMUNTS: In addition to its observance and compliance (and the observance and compliance by its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors) with all other applicable local Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall observe and comply with the following: A. Affirmative Action Program: The CONTRACTOR shall comply (and cause all Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to comply) with provisions of the City of Gilroy's Affirmative Action Program as set forth in Attachment No. 1 attached hereto, as the same may be amended or ow revised from time to time, and shall execute and deliver \079 \65319.4 210- 103001501001 -12- to the OWNER, concurrently with its- delivery of the executed Agreement to the OWNER, the Fair Employment Practices Statement set forth under Section B in Attachment No. 1 attached hereto. B. Conflict of Interest: No official of the OWNER who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the OWNER to negotiate, make, accept, or approve, or to take part in making, accepting, or approving, any architecture, engineering inspection, construction or material supply contract, or any subcontract in connection with the performance of the Work shall become directly or indirectly interested personally (i.e., in a non- official capacity) in the Contract or any part thereof. No officer, employee, attorney, architect, engineer or inspector of or for the OWNER who is authorized in such capacity on behalf of the OWNER to exercise any legisla- tive, executive, supervisory or other similar functions in connection with the performance of the Work shall become directly or indirectly interested personally (i.e., in a non - official capacity) in the Contract or in any part thereof, any material supply contract, sub- contract, insurance contract or any other contract pertaining to the performance of the Work. \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 - 13 - ATTACHMENT N0, 1 CITY OF GILROY AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM (Adopted by Gilroy City Council Per Resolution No. 84 -39, May 21, 1984) SECTION II. A. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN FOR EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY IN THE PRIVATE SECTOR 1. General. The Gilroy City Council is required to insure that public funds be awarded only to contractors that comply with a policy of equal employment oppor- tunity. The Council states that no bid for a public works project in excess of $50,000 shall be awarded until the contractor complies with the following equal employment opportunity conditions. 2. Policy Statement. The contractor adopts, as part of its operating policy, a statement as outlined in Section II -B below. 3. Dissemination of Policy. All members of the contractor's organization responsible for hiring, supervising, recruiting, terminating, and promoting, shall be made fully aware of and will implement the Affirmative Action Plan. 4. Recruitment. a. All advertisements for employees will carry the notation, "An Equal Opportunity Employer." b. Recruitment efforts, for other than union employees, will be made to local qualified minorities. Requests will be made to the union for minorities when employment levels fall below parity. C. Use local advertising media for recruitment especially directed toward the prospective minority employee. d. Present employees will be encouraged to refer minority group applicants for employment. \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 -14- *' 5. Training and Promotion. Whenever feasible, programs for the improvement of skills will be promoted for minority group employees and applicants. 6. Unions. a. Whenever possible, all efforts will be made to encourage and cooperate with local unions to develop training programs aimed at increasing the participation of minority group employees. b. All efforts will be made to include an equal employment opportunity clause into union agreements which defines responsibilities for non- discrimination in hiring, training, referrals, and all other areas that currently limit minority group participation in the labor sector. 7. Records. The contractor shall create and maintain all necessary records essential to the determination of compliance with the equal employment opportunity obligations under the Contract. All such records will be maintained for a period of one year following completion of the project and shall be made available to the City's Affirmative Action Officer. These records will show the following: a. Number of minority and non - minority workers employed in each job classification. This list shall be provided to the Affirmative Action Officer with the Statement of Certification. b. The efforts and progress made in cooperation with unions to increase minority group employment opportunities. C. All employment advertisements, applicant forms, and employment records. d. The efforts and progress made in recruiting, training, and promoting minority group employees. e. The efforts and progress made in securing subcontractors with a demonstrated record of meaningful minority group representation. \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 - 1 5 - B. STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to the OWNER concurrently with its delivery of the executed Agreement to the OWNER, the following Fair Employment Practices Statement: FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES STATEMENT [Name of Contractorl is an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer; as such has adopted the policy and will take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed,.and that employees are treated without regard to race, religion, age, handicap, color, sex, or national origin. On [Datel rName of Contractorl was awarded a public improvement contract by the City of Gilroy located in the County of Santa Clara, State of California, for seismic repair and strengthening of Old City Hall, located in Gilroy, California, together with associated interior renovation thereof and other work more particularly described in such contract. Under said contract, [Name of Contractorl has agreed to comply with those Equal Employment Opportunity conditions as put forth in Section II of the City of Gilroy's Affirmative Action Program, and has agreed, among other things, that damages will be paid to the City of Gilroy in the event that the requirements of said conditions have not been satisfied. Date: Signed: [Company's Name] [Company's Address] ,J� \079 \65319.4 210 - 103001501001 -16- 0*' INSURANCE AND BONDS RIDER 1. Insurance. 1.1 In General. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own expense, with companies satisfactory to the Owner, the insurance required under this Rider. Such insurance shall include the specific coverages set forth herein and shall be written for not less than the limits of liability for such coverages set forth in Section 1.6 below, or such limits of liability required by law, whichever are greater. All required insurance coverages shall be maintained in full force and effect until final completion of the Work, except for the Products and Completed Operations Coverage required hereunder, which shall be maintained for five (5) years following final completion of the Work. If any policies of insurance are written on a claims -made basis, the Certificate of Insurance furnished to the Owner shall so specify and such insurance policies shall be maintained in full force and effect for five (5) years after the final completion of the Work. The Contractor's liabilities under the Contract Documents shall not be limited in any manner or to any extent on account of the insurance coverages required hereunder. 1.2 Certificates of Insurance. 1.2.11 From Contractor. Concurrently with the Contractor's delivery of the executed Agreement to the Owner, Contractor shall furnish to the Owner certificates of insurance, in a form acceptable to the Owner, reflecting the insurance a. coverages to be procured and maintained by the Contractor pursuant to this Rider. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Rider shall contain provisions that coverage afforded under the policies will not be cancelled, reduced or allowed to expire until at least thirty (30) days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the insurance coverages are required to remain in full force and effect after final completion of the Work, an additional certificate of insurance evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final application for payment by the Contractor. 1.2.2 From Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall not permit any Subcontractor or any Sub - subcontractor to commence performance of any portion of the Work unless and until the Contractor has provided the Owner with certificates of insurance, in a form acceptable to the Owner, reflecting the insurance coverages to be procured and maintained by the Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor in question pursuant to this Rider or that such Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor is covered by the insurance maintained by the Contractor with respect to the required coverages. These certificates and insurance policies shall be in the same form and include the same provisions and amounts of coverage as required under this Rider with respect \051 \59878.3 213- 102301501001 " 1 " to the Contractor's certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 1.3 Other Matters. The policies of insurance maintained by the Contractor and any Subcontractor and Sub- subcontractor shall contain provisions stating that such policies are primary and not contributory to any other insurance available to the Owner or the Architect. Except for the Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability insurance, such insurance policies shall name the Owner and the Architect and their respective officers, directors, agents and employees as "additional named insureds." 1.4 Coverages. The insurance coverages to be procured and maintained by Contractor are as follows: (i) Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance as required by California law, including coverage under the U.S. Longshoreman's and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and other applicable federal laws. This coverage shall include an "all- states" endorsement. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor and Sub - subcontractor to provide Workers' Compensation Insurance for all of its employees engaged in the Work, unless such employees are covered by the insurance maintained by the Contractor. If any class of employees of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor is not covered under the Workers' Compensation laws, the Contractor shall provide, and cause each Subcontractor and Sub - subcontractor to provide, Employers' Liability Insurance for such unprotected employees. (ii) Comprehensive General Liability Insurance written on an "occurrence" basis, coverage to include personal injury, bodily injury and /or property damage liability arising out of the operations of the Contractor and its agents, employees, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors. Such coverage shall be in such form as approved by the Owner and shall include: (a) Premises and Operations Coverage. (b) Owner's and Contractor's Protective Coverage. (c) Products and Completed Operations Coverage. (d) Broad Form Property Damage Coverage, including Completed Operations. (e) Blanket Contractual Coverage. (f) Personal Injury Coverage, with employ- ment exclusion deleted. If the Work performed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor involves blasting, explosives or underground operations, there shall be no exclusion of coverage relative to blasting, explosives,. collapse of buildings or damage to underground structures. \051 \59878.3 213 - 102301501001 -2- The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor and Sub - subcontractor to maintain Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with the same coverages described above, unless the Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors are covered by the insurance maintained by the Contractor. (iii) Business Automobile Liability Insurance, written in comprehensive form covering bodily injury and /or property damage liability pertaining to owned, non- owned, hired or borrowed automobiles. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor and Sub - subcontractor to maintain Business Automobile Liability Insurance with the same coverages described above unless the Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors are covered by the insurance maintained by the Contractor. (iv) Aircraft and Watercraft Bodily Injury and Property Damage Insurance, if the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor uses owned or non -owned watercraft and /or aircraft in its operations pertaining to the Work. (v) Excess or Umbrella. Liability Insurance covering bodily injury and /or property damage liability, listing .the Comprehensive General Liability, Employers' Liability, Business Automobile Liability and Aircraft and Watercraft Liability required policies as underlying policies and including a "Broad -as- Primary" endorsement. (vi) Builder's Risk Property Insurance covering the entire Work on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles. This insurance shall name the Owner, the Contractor, the Architect and all Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors as insureds as their interests may appear. The insurance shall be on an all -risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, flood, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal, including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensa- tion for architectural and design services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. The amount of such insurance shall be not less than the insurable value of the Work upon completion. This insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site and portions of the Work in transit, both on a replacement cost basis. This insurance shall contain a provision or endorsement that, in the event of any payment of any loss under the coverage provided, the insurance company shall have no rights of subrogation or recovery against the Owner, the Architect, the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors or the respective directors, officers, agents or employees of any of the foregoing parties. The Contractor waives any rights to recovery against the Owner and the Architect (and their respective directors, officers, agents or employees) for injury or loss due to hazards covered by the Builder's Risk policy, and Contractor shall require that all Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors \051 \59878.3 213 - 102301501001 - 3 - provide similar waivers for the benefit of the Owner and the Architect (and their respective directors, officers, agents and employees). Proceeds of this insurance shall be used solely to restore, replace and /or repair the damaged Work in accordance with the agreement of the parties in interest or as otherwise directed by the Owner. 1.5 Insurance Companies. All insurance required by this Rider to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors shall be obtained from insurance companies that are qualified to do business in the State of California and acceptable to the Owner. Such insurance companies shall have a current Best's rating of at least an "A" (Excellent) general policy holders rating and a Class VII financial size category or as otherwise approved by the Owner and shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be established by the Owner. 1.6 Amount of Coverage. The limits of liability of the insurance required by this Rider shall be not less than the following amounts for the required insurance described; however, the limits of liability shall be greater if and to the extent required by law: (i) Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance. (a) Workers' Compensation insurance- - applicable statutory minimum limits under state and federal law. (b) Employers' Liability insurance- - $1,000,000 aggregate limit of liability. (ii) Comprehensive General Liability Insurance- - combined single limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence and annual aggregate, applicable to all coverages included thereunder or, if approved by the Owner, Commercial General Liability Insurance, the limits of which (if issued on the Commercial General Liability Insurance form) shall include a general aggregate in the amount of twice the per occurrence limit stated above or in the amount of the specified project aggregate. (iii) Business Automobile Liability Insurance- - combined single limit of $1,000,000 per person and per occurrence, applicable to bodily injury and property damage coverages. (iv) Aircraft and Watercraft Bodily Injury and Property Damage Insurance -- combined single limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence, applicable to bodily injury and property damage coverages. (v) Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance- - combined single limit of $3,000,000 per occurrence in excess of primary insurance. ME \051 \59878.3 213 -102301501001 -4- " (vi) Builder's Risk Property Insurance -- aggregate amount equal to the initial Contract Sum as well as subsequent modifications to such Contract Sum. 1.7 Damage to Work Caused by Act of God. Pursuant to Section 7105(a) of the California Public Contract Code, nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall require the Contractor, to be responsible for the costs of repairing or restoring damage to the Work, which damage is determined to have been proximately caused by an act of God (as defined in Section 7105 (b) (2) of the California Public Contract Code (i.e., earthquakes in excess of a magnitude of 3.5 on the Richter Scale and tidal waves)), in excess of five percent (5k) of the Contract Sum, provided that the Work damaged is built in accordance with accepted and applicable building standards and the plans and specifications set forth in the Contract Documents. 1.8 Failure to Maintain. If the Contractor, a Sub- contractor or a Sub - subcontractor fails to maintain any insurance required to be maintained pursuant to this Rider, the Owner may, in its sole discretion and in addition to all other rights and remedies available to the Owner under the Contract Documents, at law or in equity, take out such insurance to cover any damages for which the Owner may be held liable on account of such failure, and deduct and retain the amount of the premiums paid by the Owner for such insurance from any sums otherwise payable to the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1.9 Waiver of Rights to Recovery and Subrogation. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor waives any rights to recovery against the Owner and the Architect (and their respective directors, officers, agents or employees) for any personal injury, bodily injury and /or property damage arising in connection with the Work, it being the intent of the parties that the insurance to be maintained by the Contractor pursuant to this Rider be the sole source of recovery for any such injury and /or damage. The Contractor shall require that all Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors provide similar waivers for the benefit of the Owner and the Architect (and their respective directors, officers, agents and employees) . The policies of insurance to be maintained by the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Sub- subcontractors pursuant to this Section 1 shall, in addition to all other requirements set forth in this Section 1, contain a provision or endorsement providing that, in the event of any payment of any loss under the coverage provided, the applicable insurance company shall have no rights of subrogation or recovery against the Owner, the Architect and /or their respective directors, officers, agents or employees. 2. Bon 2.1 In General. The Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, cause (i) a performance bond to be issued in favor of \051 \59878.3 213 - 102301501001 - 5 - the Owner as security for the faithful performance of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents, and (ii) a payment bond to be issued in favor of the Owner as security for the payment of all persons for furnishing materials, provisions, provender, equipment and other supplies used in, upon, for or about the performance of the Work. The performance bond shall be on the form set forth in Exhibit "A" attached hereto and shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100W) of the Contract Sum, and the payment bond shall be on the form set forth in Exhibit "B" attached hereto and shall be in the amount of one hundred percent (100W) of the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall cause the performance bond to remain in effect at least until one (1) year after the date of final completion the Work or for such longer period as may be required by any Laws and Regulations. 2.2 'Sureties. Such bonds shall be executed by a corporate surety that (i) is named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Governmental Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department, with an underwriting limitation equal to or greater than the Contract Sum, and is acceptable to the Owner, and (ii) is authorized in the State of California to issue bonds for the limits so required. All bonds signed by an agent of the surety must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act. 2.3 Delivery. The Contractor shall cause fully executed originals of the bonds required by this Section 2 to be furnished to the Owner concurrently with the Contractor's execution and delivery of the Agreement to the Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause the performance bond to be maintained in full force and effect at least until one (1) year after the date of final completion of the Work or for such longer period as may be required by any Laws and Regulations. 2.4 Other Matters. The Contractor shall promptly furnish additional security required to protect the Owner and persons supplying labor or material under the Agreement if the Contract Sum is increased so that the penal sum of any bond becomes, in the sole opinion of the Owner, inadequate. \051 \59878.3 213- 102301501001 -6- " "' EXHIBIT "A" PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That , as CONTRACTOR, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Gilroy (hereinafter called "OWNER"), in the sum of dollars, (Not less than 100 percent of Contract Sum) for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and „ assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. .WHEREAS, said CONTRACTOR has been awarded and is about to enter into the annexed Agreement with said OWNER to perform the WORK as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents entitled "Old City Hall, Gilroy, California, Project Manual, October 26, 1992, Bid No. 93- PL- 205." NOW THEREFORE, if said CONTRACTOR shall perform all the requirements of said Contract Documents required to be performed on its part, at the times and in the manner specified therein, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, that any change, addition, alteration or modifica- tion in either the Contract Documents or the Work which may be made pursuant to the terms of said Contract Documents, including, without limitation, any changes extending the time for performance, the materials to be furnished or the scope of the Work, shall in no way exonerate or release said CONTRACTOR or said Surety from this Bond, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of and consent to any such change, addition, alteration or modification in the Contract Documents and /or the Work. SIGNED AND SEALED, this day of , 19 CONTRACTOR By: Signature SURETY By: Signature (SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF CONTRACTOR AND SURETY) \051 \59878.3 213 - 102301501001 -7- EXHIBIT "B" PAYMMVr BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That , as CONTRACTOR, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto The City of Gilroy (hereinafter called "OWNER "), in the sum of dollars, (Not less than 100 percent of Contract Sum) for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, said CONTRACTOR has been awarded and is about to enter into the annexed Agreement with said OWNER to perform the WORK as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents entitled "Old City Hall, Gilroy, California, Project Manual, October 26, 1992, Bid No. 93 -PL -205." NOW, THEREFORE, if said CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, provender, equipment or other supplies used in, upon, for or about the performance of the WORK contracted to be done, or for any work or labor thereon of any kind, or for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code of the State of California, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment; Insurance Code of the State of California with respect to such labor, all as required by the provisions of Title XV, Chapter 7, Sections 3247 -3252 inclusive, of the Civil Code of the State of California and acts amendatory thereof, and sections of other codes of the State of California referred to therein and acts amendatory thereof, and provided that the persons, companies or corporations so furnishing said materials, provisions, provender, equipment or other supplies, appliances or power used in, upon, for or about performance of the work contracted to be executed or performed, or any person, company or corporation renting or hiring implements or machinery or power for or contributing to said work to be done, or any person who performs work or labor upon the same, or any person who supplies both work and materials therefor, shall have complied with the provisions of said laws, then said Surety will pay the " same in an amount not exceeding the sum hereinabove set forth and .g also will pay, in case suit is brought upon this bond, a reasonable attorneys' fee, as shall be fixed by the Court. This bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons.named in Section 3181 of the Civil Code of the State of California so as to give a right 4 of action to them or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. \051 \59878.3 213 - 102301501001 PROVIDED, that any change, addition, alteration or modifica- tion in either the Contract Documents or the Work which may be made pursuant to the terms of said Contract Documents, including, without limitation, any changes extending the time for performance, the materials to be furnished or the scope of the Work, shall in no way exonerate or release said CONTRACTOR or said Surety from this Bond, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of and consent to any such change, addition, alteration or modification in the Contract Documents and /or the Work. SIGNED AND SEALED, this day of 19_ CONTRACTOR SURETY By: By: Signature Signature (SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF CONTRACTOR AND SURETY) \051 \59878.3 213 - 102301501001 -9- SECTION V SPECIFICATIONS \051 \38572.3 27- 102304706011 OLD CITY HALL GILROY, CALIFORNIA SPECIFICATIONS OCTOBER 26, 1992 Architectural Resources Group Pier 9, The Embarcadero San Francisco, California CONTACT: Kathleen Johnson Project Architect (415) 421 -1680 OLD CITY HALL PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 01015 01025 01030 01040 01045 01050 01060 01090 01200 01340 01400 01410 01510 01600 01700 DIVISION 2 02050 02115 02220 02710 02900 DIVISION 3 03100 03200 03300 03360 DIVISION 4 04250 04420 04525 04550 Summary of Work Allowances Measurements and Payments Alternates Coordination Cutting and Patching Field Engineering Regulatory Requirements Definitions and Abbreviations Project Meetings Submittals Quality Control Testing Laboratory Services Temporary Facilities Products and Substitutions Project Closeout SITE WORK Selective Demolition Site Clearing and Demolition Excavation and Backfilling Subdrainage System Landscape and Irrigation CONCRETE Concrete Formwork Reinforcing Steel Concrete Shotcrete MASONRY Center Core Wall Reinforcement Brick Masonry Restoration Stone Masonry Restoration Masonry Cleaning DIVISION 5 METALS 05100 Structural Steel 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06180 Glu -Lam Construction 06200 Finish Carpentry ARG: 89119 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE -1 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 Insulation 07510 Built -up Roofing 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07900 Sealants and Caulking DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 08210 08305 08600 08700 08800 DIVISION 9 09200 09250 09310 09560 09650 09680 09900 09970 Steel Doors and Frames Wood Doors Access Doors Wood Window Rehabilitation Finish Hardware Glazing FINISHES Lath and Plaster Gypsum Wallboard Ceramic Tile Wood Strip Flooring Resilient Flooring Carpet Painting Pre- Finished Panels DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10426 Signage 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10600 Toilet Partitions 10800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11400 Food Service Equipment DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12500 Upholstery 12501 Drapery DIVISION 13 NOT USED DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14212 Hydraulic Elevators DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15400 Plumbing DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16000 Electrical ARG: 89119 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE -2 SECTION 01010 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SUMMARY OF WORK A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . This following Summary of Work is a summary only, may not provide a complete listing of the Work required by this Contract, and shall not limit the Work as stipulated in other parts of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for every part of the Work indicated in the Contract Documents whether included in the following summary or not. Refer to every part of the Contract Documents for the Work included in this Contract. C. Summary of Work: 1. Verification of condition of existing sub - surface drainage system, repairs to and modifications of the system as required (see Allowances - Section 01015). 2. Alteration of existing irrigation system as indicated; and/or as required by Work and to protect finishes of building. 3. Installation of new drought tolerant planting materials as required by seismic work. 4. Renovation of existing concrete walls and planters at courtyard as indicated, due to seismic work. 5. Installation of new concrete ramp and metal railings as required by Title 24. 6. Seismic repair and strengthening of existing unreinforced masonry building - including concrete foundations, hear walls and beams; center - coring of existing masonry wall; steel plates, brackets, straps, etc. 7. Removal of existing wood frame floor to facilitate seismic work. 8. Installation of new concrete slab. 9. Construction of new wood frame stairs as required by floor removal and seismic work. 10. Repair of finishes damaged by the Loma Prieta Earthquake and as required by seismic work. 11. Restoration of exterior finishes as indicated and/or as required 12. Installation of new hydraulic elevator. 13. Installation of new Men's and Women's Toilet Rooms in the existing Service Kitchen on the Second Floor. Renovation of the existing Service Kitchen. 14. Renovation of the existing Commercial Kitchen on the first floor. 15. Modifications of existing plumbing, piping and fixtures; mechanical units, pipes and ducting; electrical conduit, outlets, switches and fixtures as required by Seismic Work. ARG: 89119 SUNIlvIARY OF WORK 01010 -1 'All 16. Repairs to existing plumbing, piping and fixtures; mechanical units, pipes and ducting; electrical conduit, outlets, switches and fixtures as required 17. Refurbishing of existing mechanical and electrical systems due to having been shut down for an extended period of time. D. Old City Hall is a historic structure, listed on the National Register of Historic Places. Because the building is a historic structure the Owner is requiring that the Contractor, and Sub - Contractors and workmen for a number of trades have proven skills in working on historic buildings. See individual Specification Sections for requirements. E. Work shall be performed by a Class B General Contractor. Workmanship shall be first class throughout, performed only by competent workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trades they are performing, and in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. Constant supervision of the work either by the Contractor or his competent representative shall be maintained. 1.03 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. All obligations set forth in the Contract Documents, including without limitation, the performance of all work and activities described in the Contract Documents, except as otherwise specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, shall be deemed to constitute obligations of the Contractor whether or not the same is specifically stated in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall perform all such obligations for the Contract Sum and within the Contract Time. B. Information is conveyed by means of brief mention or notation in the Contract Documents, which, regardless of brevity, shall be binding exactly as if presented in complete sentences employing mandatory language. Work not explicit in the Contract Documents, but necessary to complete the Work, shall be included as though fully specified and drawn. C. Drawings and specifications supplement each other. The work indicated in one may not necessarily be indicated in the other. Therefore, the work shall be required even if indicated in only one of the two documents. D. Not all required items are necessarily shown on the Drawings or described in the Specifications. Items not explicit in the Specifications or Drawings but clearly implied as necessary to complete the specified Work shall be included as though fully specified and drawn. No additional cost to the Owner will be allowed due to the inclusion of these items. E. Drawings are diagrammatic and show general arrangement except where specifically dimensioned. Study Drawings and premises to determine the best methods, exact locations, routing and arrangement for the work. Contractor shall be solely responsible for means, techniques, sequences and procedures of the work, as well as coordination between the trades involved. F. Conflicts within or between the Drawings and Specifications shall be referred to the Architect for clarification before the work is installed. ARG: 89119 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 -2 G. Existing conditions are shown in their approximate location and condition only. Contractor shall verify all existing conditions in field before commencing Work. H. If any discrepancies are found between the Drawings and actual Site conditions, the Architect reserves the right to make minor adjustments in the work as necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Contractors Examination of Site: 1. By executing Contracts, Contractor and Subcontractors represent that they have: a. Visited the site and made due allowances for difficulties and contingencies; b. Compared Contract Documents with existing conditions and informed themselves of conditions to be encountered; and c. Notified Architect of ambiguities, inconsistencies, and errors they have discovered within Contract Documents or between Contract Documents and existing conditions. 2. Failure to visit the site and become familiar with conditions shall not relieve Contractor or Subcontractors from furnishing materials or equipment; or completing the Work in accordance with Contract Documents at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Contractor or Subcontractors will not be given extra payment for Work related to conditions they can determine by examining the site and Contract Documents. 4. Contractor or Subcontractors will not be given extra payment for work related to ambiguities, inconsistencies, or errors within Contract Documents, or between Contract Documents and existing conditions, when such ambiguities, inconsistencies, or errors are known to Contractor or Subcontractor before Contract execution unless Contractor or Subcontractor has notified Architect in writing of such condition before execution of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. 5. Interested parties shall contact Michael Dorn, Gilroy City Planning Director regarding access to the building at times other than those scheduled. B . Locate known existing installations before proceeding with excavation or other operations which may damage same; maintain them in service where appropriate; and repair damage to them caused by the performance of the Work, all at no additional cost to the Owner. C . Contractor shall accept the site and the existing building in the condition in which they exist at the time Contractor is given access to begin the Work. D. The existing building is an historically significant structure. While Work under this Contract is in progress, protect existing building, grounds, contents, and occupants, including those on adjacent property, whether private or public, from damage or harm. E. Provide complete, weather -tight protection of all interior spaces and materials whenever there is the possibility of inclement weather. F. Damage caused by Contractor to existing structures, grounds, plants, pavements, utilities, work by others, fixtures, or furnishings, shall be repaired by Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, and left in as good condition as existed before the damaging, unless such existing work is shown to be removed or replaced by new work. ARG: 89119 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 -3 G. Complete documentation of existing construction is not available. Dimensions, layouts, existing materials, and concealed conditions have not necessarily been verified and are not represented to be accurate beyond the level necessary to define the approximate scope of surface renovation and system replacement. 1. Before starting work, Contractor and each Subcontractor shall verify governing dimensions at the premises, including floor elevation, floor -to -floor heights, and column locations and shall examine adjoining work on which Contractor's or Subcontractor's Work is in any way dependent. No additional compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual measurements and dimensions shown. Submit discrepancies discovered to Architect for interpretation before proceeding with associated Work. H. Immediately upon entering the site for purposes of beginning Work, locate general reference points and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction; lay out Work and be responsible for lines, elevations, and measurements, and Work executed under this Contract. Exercise proper precautions to verify figures shown on Drawings before laying out Work. 1.05 SURVEY OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. After Contract award and before starting Work at the site, Contractor, Owner and Architect together shall make a thorough survey of the building and grounds where Work under this Contract will occur and areas to be used as access ways to the Work areas. Contractor shall list, and photograph if Contractor desires, existing conditions not requiring alteration, shall note discrepancies between Contract Documents and existing conditions, and shall designate areas of storage and routes of access agreed upon by Owner. B . At a mutually agreed upon time, before completion of the Work under this Contract, Contractor Owner'sand Architect shall make a resurvey of the same areas. Contractor shall furnish a report on conditions then existing compared with conditions as first noted. Damage listed in the report that was caused by Contractor, or anyone employed by or under contract to Contractor or Subcontractor shall be repaired by Contractor and left in as good condition as existed before the damaging, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION A. Normal working hours and normal working days for for performance of the Work shall be between 7 A.M. and 6 P.M., Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, except as otherwise specified. B . Confine activities at Site to normal working hours and normal working days, unless Owner requires or approves other times or days. C. Should Contractor desire to carry out part of the Work at times other than normal working hours or days, submit written request to do so to Owner together with specific calendar days and hours Contractor wishes to work and description of activities Contractor proposes to carry out during those times. Construction activities will not be permitted at times other than those specified or subsequently approved in writing by Owner. Only those activities specifically approved by Owner are permitted during hours or on days other than those stipulated as normal working days or hours. C3 ARG: 89119 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 -4 1. Do Work other than on normal working days and hours at no additional costs to Owner, whether Owner requires Work at such times or Contractor requests such times and Owner approves. 2. No extension of Contract Time will be granted and no increase in Contract Sum will be made due to Owner's failure to approve the performing of construction activities during other than normal working days or hours. D. If necessary to complete Work within Contract Time, request Owner's approval to work during days or times other than those designated as normal working days or hours; and if Owner approves, perform work during such additional times and on such additional days as have been approved, at no additional cost to Owner. Work during such additional times and on such additional days shall continue only so long as is necessary to complete the Work within the stipulated time period. 1.08 SPECIAL PROCEDURES -ASBESTOS A. Should a material suspected to be asbestos be encountered, immediately notify the Owner and implement measures to prevent disturbance of suspected material or exposure of workmen to the materials. 1.09 USE OF PREMISES A. Contractor may use the parking lot on the east side of the building for project storage and parking. Contractor shall install and pay for additional security fencing as required. Any damage done to the lot or building due to use of this area shall be repaired as required by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner either, immediately if the safety of the public or building are jeopardized; or prior to final inspection. B . Use of the premises for work, storage, and vehicular parking is limited to the areas designated by the Owner. C. If the areas indicated as project area are not sufficient, obtain and pay for storage, and parking areas needed. 1.10 ACCESS TO SITE A. Access to the site may be from Monterey or Sixth Streets. B. Safety of the public will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor at all times including when construction traffic crosses public ways. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 -5 SECTION 01015 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ALLOWANCES A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and on -site conditions. B. This Section describes the requirements for identifying unit price allowances for indicated items and identifies each allowance by number. 1.03 ALLOWANCES A. A "Schedule of Allowances" is included at the end of this section. Coordinate allowance work with related work to ensure that each selection is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. B . The Contractor shall include a separate line item in the Base Bid for all allowances required herein. 1. Submit proposals for allowance work as directed in the Schedule of Allowances. Indicate units costs and total purchase amounts, including taxes, delivery charges and trade discounts. Furnish detailed breakdown of quantity survey where required. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCE A. Unit Price Allowance No. 1: Repair / Replacement of Existing Sub - surface Drainage System. Existing sub - surface drainage system is assumed to be terra- cotta drain tiles. Area drains and downspouts are tied into the existing system, which is assumed to be tied into the City's storm sewer system. 1. In the Base Bid, indicate an allowance for the replacement of 100 linear feet of existing terra cotta drain tile with flexible, polyvinylchloride piping, sized to match existing subsurface drainage tiles. In addition, provide a price for tying sub - surface drainage system to existing City storm sewer. Include excavation and repair of surfaces in unit pricing. a. Break -down repair of surfaces into: 1) 25 linear feet of concrete. 2) 25 linear feet of asphalt . 3) 50 linear feet of soil. ARG: 89119 ALLOWANCES 01015 -1 2. Allowance shall be broken down as a cost per linear foot for each type of surface. a. If the amount of replacement work for each surface exceeds the allowance, the work shall be performed at that cost per linear foot of additional work. b. If the amount of replacement work for each surface is less than the allowance, that cost per linear foot of work less than the allowance shall be deducted from the Contract Sum. B. Unit Price Allowance No. 2: Repair / Replacement of Existing Substrate to Receive New Epoxy and Wood Flooring Systems. 1. In the Base Bid, indicate a unit price allowance for the replacement of 100 square feet of existing plywood sheathing with new exterior, A -C grade plywood. 2. Allowance shall be broken down as a cost per square foot. a. If the amount of replacement work exceeds the allowance, the work shall be performed at that cost per linear foot of additional work. b. If the amount of replacement work is less than the allowance, that cost per linear foot of work less than the allowance shall be deducted from the Contract Amount. C. Unit Price Allowance No. 3: Bronze Handrails: 1. In the Base Bid, indicate a unit price allowance for the fabrication and installation of new bronze handrails as indicated at the exterior of the building. 2. Allowance shall be broken down as a cost per linear foot. D. Allowance No. 4: Three -panel Doors at Dining Room: 1. In the Base Bid, indicate a unit price allowance for the supply and installation of three -panel wood and glass doors, as specified, at the Dining Room. 2. Allowance shall be broken down as a cost per door. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Ea ARG:89119 ALLOWANCES 01015 -2 SECTION 01025 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit 5 copies of the notarized Application and Certificate for Payment, AIA form G702, to the Architect for processing by the fifteenth of each month of the Contract Period. B. Substantiating Data for Progress and Final Payments: 1. When substantiating data are required, submit suitable information as specified in Section 01340 "Slbmittals," with a cover letter identifying: a. Project. \_ b. Application number and date. c. Detailed list of enclosures. d. Number: Five copies of each application. 1.03 CHANGE ORDERS A. Backup data submitted with Applications for Payment may be used as basis for approving or rejecting costs submitted in Change Orders. B. Submit an detailed cost breakdown, including unit cost, total purchase amount, taxes, delivery and Contractor's mark -up, with each Change Order request. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01025 -1 SECTION 01030 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ALTERNATES A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. This section identifies each Alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the work when each Alternate is made a part of the work by specific provisions in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. B . Drawings are referenced with the Alternates for the convenience of the Contractor in preparing his Bid. These references describe the general requirements for the work under each Alternate and are not intended to be all inclusive. The Contractor shall be responsible for all Alternates listed below, whether shown on drawings or not. C . The Contractor shall coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to integrate the various elements to provide the complete work required by the Contract Documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. The Contractor shall provide separate line items in the Base Bid for the following Alternates: 1. Alternate No. 1 - Miscellaneous electrical work as indicated on drawings including refurbishing existing electrical system as required because it has been shut down for an extended period of time; repairing existing chandeliers in Dining Room and Auditorium as required; installation of stub -outs for future stage lighting and acoustical equipment and repairing and refurbishing existing exterior lights and installation of new exterior lights as indicated. See section 16000 for description of work. 2. Alternate No. 2 - Repair/Replacement of Existing Exterior Wood and Sheet Metal Trim: Repair existing exterior wood trim as indicated and/or as required due to deterioration. This work shall include repair of fascias, mouldings and trim, clock face and hands, reworking of flagpole pulley and installation of pigeon netting at tower. Repair existing exterior sheet metal trim as required due to deterioration. Contractor shall make every effort to verify the amount of trim repair and replacement prior to the submission of bids. Provide a total cost for execution of this work, including the work of all trades. Work required to perform center coring of walls and install new roofing shall not be included in this Alternate. See Section 06200 and 07600 for description of work. ARG: 89119 ALTERNATES 01030 -1 3. Alternate No. 3 - Refurbish Existing Wood Windows: Repair or replace sash, frames or casing as required at all wood windows. Replace existing cracked or broken glazing. Repair existing leaded glass. Provide a total cost for execution of this work, including the work of all trades. See Section 08600 for description of work. 4. Alternate No. 4 - Miscellaneous Finish Carpentry Items in Dining Room and First Floor Bar: Demolition and reworking of existing trim and casework and installation of new trim as indicated on drawings to include: removal of existing plastic laminate trim at beams and columns in Dining Room and installation of new wood trim; removal of existing glass partition and wood trim at wall behind first floor Bar and installation of new wood trim on top of existing wall as indicated; rework of existing bar and casework behind bar as indicated and as required by work. Provide a total cost for execution of this work, including the work of all trades. See Section 06200 for description of work. 5. Alternate No. 5 - Not Used. 6. Alternate No. 6 - Drapes: Install new drapes to match existing in the Auditorium. See Section 12501 for requirements and fabric. Re- upholster existing banquettes to remain in Dining Room. See Section 12500 for requirements and fabric Provide a total cost for execution of this work, including the work of all trades. 7. Alternate No. 7: Install new one -hour fire -rated wall with 20- minute rated door and hardware at exit corridor at southeast corner of Dining Room and replace existing window at south facade with a new metal exit door and hardware. Provide a total cost for execution of this work, including the work of all trades. See section 06100, 08110, 08210 and 08700 for description of work. 8. Separate Alternate Bid Item: Painted Metal Handrails: Fabricate and install painted, galvanized steel handrails in lieu of the bronze handrails indicated, at the exterior of the building. For bidding purposes this cost should not be included in the Base Bid, but should be shown as a line items on the Bid Form. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 ALTERNATES 01030 -2 SECTION 01040 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS COORDINATION A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate the Work and shall not delegate the responsibility for coordination to any Subcontractor. B. Contractor shall resolve differences or disputes between Sub - Contractors, concerning coordination, interference or extent of work of these sections. The Contractor's decisions, regarding disputes between Contractor and/or Sub - Contractors shall be final, if consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor shall review conditions at the building site, together with the Contract Documents, and plan the installation of all work to conform with existing conditions and those indicated here; to provide the best possible assembly of the combined work of all trades. 1. No additional costs will be considered for work which must be relocated due to conflicts with the work of other trades. 2. Work out "tight" conditions in advance and if necessary, prepare supplemental fabrication drawings for the Architect's review before proceeding with work in these areas. 1.03 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL COORDINATION A. Design build plumbing, mechanical and electrical systems shall be coordinated within those trades and with all other trades as required for a complete system. B. Perform and complete checking and coordination before commencing construction in the affected areas. 1.04 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Use large scale layout drawings together with Shop Drawings or layout drawings of all other affected trades to check, coordinate and integrate the work of the various sections to prevent interferences. B . Prepare coordination drawings before beginning fabrication or delivery of materials to the project site. C. Keep copies of the coordination drawings at the Site. ARG: 89119 COORDINATION 01040 -1 1.05 COORDINATION OF LAYOUTS A. Provide basic layouts of gridlines and station points on subfloors as necessary to facilitate coordination and layout of partitions and Work at and above ceilings. 1.06 ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTRATE A. Subcontractor shall assume responsibility for substrate once commencing work on that substrate. Should substrate not be acceptable, Contractor shall coordinate the resolution of the problem to the satisfaction of the Sub - Contractor commencing work on the substrate and the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION M ARG: 89119 COORDINATION 01040 -2 SECTION 01045 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regualtions and on -site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for performing cutting and patching. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Patching shall achieve security, strength, and weather protection, as applicable, and shall preserve continuity of existing fire ratings. 2. Patching shall successfully duplicate undisturbed adjacent finishes, colors, textures, and profiles. Where there is a dispute as to whether duplication is successful or has been achieved to a reasonable degree, the Architect's judgement shall be final. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be as specified in the applicable, individual sections of the Specifications and as required to match existing construction. B. For salvaged materials to be reused refer to Section 02050, "Selective Demolition." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Perform cutting, associated structural reinforcing, and patching in a manner to prevent damage to other work and to provide proper surfaces for the installation of materials, equipment, and repairs. B. Do not cut or alter structural members without prior written authorization by the Architect. ARG: 89119 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 -1 C. Where removal of partitions, equipment, and other items has exposed holes in existing slabs, fill in holes with new concrete and reinforce as necessary. Prepare slabs as required to provide clean, sound surfaces for the installation of new materials. D. Adjust and fit products to provide a neat installation. E. Finish or refinish, as required, cut and patch surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Paint over complete surface plane, unless otherwise indicated. Over patched wall or ceiling surfaces, paint to nearest cutoff line for entire surface, such as intersection with adjacent wall or ceiling, beam, pilasters or to nearest opening frame, unless otherwise indicated. Painted surfaces shall not present a spotty, touched -up appearance. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 -2 - SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIP T ION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regualtions and on -site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for the lay out and installation of work to the lines and grades indicated and specified. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF ENGINEER OR SURVEYOR A. Contractor shall retain and pay expenses of a qualified Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor to establish on the site the required reference points and bench marks, establish building lines and elevations, check structural framework for plumbness, and establish the required basic grid lines from which work of other Sections shall be laid out. B . The Engineer or Land Surveyor shall be licensed in the State of California and shall be acceptable to the Owner. 1.04 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1.05 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Establish lines and levels. Locate and lay out: 1. Site improvements: a. Stakes for grading, fill, and topsoil placement. b. Invert elevations, 2. Batter boards for structures. 3. Building foundations, column locations, and floor levels. 4. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work. B. From time to time, verify layouts and new work as required to ensure conformance with the Contract Documents. ARG: 89119 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 -1 1.06 RECORDS A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey showing all dimensions, locations, angles, and finish floor elevations for Owner. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Upon request, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. PART 2 - MATERIALS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) Not Used END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 FIELD ENGINEERING 01050 -2 SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work and materials shall conform with requirements prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, including, without limitation those of- 1 . City of Gilroy 2. County of Santa Clara. 3. State of California Administrative Code, Title 8. 4. State of California Administrative Code, Title 24. 5. State of California Fire Marshall. 6. Occupational Safety Administration (OSHA). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). B . Standards: Comply with the latest editions of applicable standards, including, without limitation, ASME, ANSI, ASTM, UL, FM, and OSHA. C. Materials and equipment shall be Underwriter's Laboratory listed, labeled where necessary to satisfy these requirements. D. If, after Contract is awarded, minor changes and alterations are required by regulatory authorities, even though such work is not indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall make such changes and alterations without additional cost to Owner. 1.03 PERMITS AND FEES A. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permit, inspections and certificates for inspection which may be required by any applicable Laws and Regulations. The Contractor shall perform its duties under this section in a timely manner in accordance with the Construction Schedule. 1.04 MECHANICAL WORK A. Comply with the requirements of the Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC) as adopted by jurisdictions having authority. A copy of this code shall be kept. on hand at the Site by the Contractor. 1.05 PLUMBING WORK A. Comply with the requirements of the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) as adopted by jurisdictions having authority. A copy of this code shall be kept on hand at the Site by the Contractor. ARG: 89119 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01060 -1 1.06 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Comply with the requirements the National Electric Code (NEC) as adopted by jurisdictions having authority. A copy of this code shall be kept on hand at the Site by the Contractor. 1.07 BUILDING CODES A. Comply with the requirements of the Uniform Building Code (UBC) and the California Administrative Code, Title 8 and 24, as adopted by jurisdictions having authority. A copy of these codes shall be kept on hand at the Site by the Contractor. 1.08 CONFLICTS A. Any Laws and Regulations specified or referred to in the Contract Documents shall in no way limit the obligation of the Contractor to observe and comply with all other applicable Laws and Regulations and to cause its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to observe and comply with the same. B . Nothing in the Contract Documents permits violation of any Laws or Regulations, and where conflict occurs, the Laws and Regulations shall govern, except where superior work is specified or indicated Such conflict shall be brought to the Architect's attention for clarification prior to the submission of a Bid by the Bidder. If minor changes or additions to the Work are required by any governmental agency after award of the Contract, such changes shall be included as part of the Work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.09 ASSIGNMENT TO OWNER A. In accordance with Section 7103.5 of the California Public Contract Code, Contractor offers and agrees to assign to Owner all rights, title and interest in and to all causes of action Contractor may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. 15) or under the CartWright Act (Chapter 2 [commencing with Section 16700] of Part 2 of Division 7 of the California Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services or materials pursuant to the Contract or any subcontracts arising in connection therewith. This assignment shall be made and become Effective at the time the Owner tenders final payments to the Contractor, without final acknowledgment by the parties. Contractor shall cause all its Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors to make the forgoing assignment to Owner in their respective Sub - contracts and Sub - subcontracts and shall provide Owner with evidence of such assignments concurrently with any application for payment submitted by Contractor which covers work and/or materials of any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor. ARG: 89119 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01060 -2 - 1.10 CERTAIN DEMANDS A. All separate demands made by the Contractor in the amount of $375,000.00 or less for (i) a time extension, (ii) payment of damages arising from work done by or on behalf of the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the Contractor is not otherwise entitled to, or (iii) an amount, the payment of which is disputed by the Owner, shall be processed in accordance with the provisions of California Public Contract Code Section 20104 et seq. relating to informal conferences, non- binding, judicially supervised mediation and judicial arbitration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01060 -3 SECTION 01090 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS A. General Applicability of Standards: Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect (and are made a part of Contract Documents by reference) as if copied directly into Contract Documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith. B. Abbreviations and Names: Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Contract Documents they are defined to mean the industry recognized name of trade association, standards generating organization, governing authority or other entity applicable to context of text provision. C. Abbreviations and Names: The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated names. AIA American Institute of Architects AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ACI American Concrete Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute ASSHO American Society of State Highway Officials ASTM American Society for Testing Materials AWSC American Welding Society Code CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute FS Federal Specifications NBFU National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electric Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NWMAN National Woodwork Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation UBC Uniform Building Code UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. UMC Uniform Mechanical Code UPC Uniform Plumbing Code USAS United States of America Standards (National Bureau) USS United States Standards WIC Woodwork Institute of California ARG: 89119 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS 01090 -1 D. Abbreviations used on Drawings are indicated on Sheet A.0 of the Drawings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other parts of the Contract Documents, including Drawings, which must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general to extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of Contract Documents. B. The following words and phrases as used in the Contract Documents shall have the following meanings: ,. 1. "Architect ", "Engineer" refers to the Architect. All questions shall be forwarded to the Architect for interpretation. If necessary the Architect will forward questions to the Structural Engineer. The Contractor shall not contact the Structural Engineer directly without the authorization of the Architect. 2. The "Owner's Representative" shall be the person designated by the City of Gilroy to oversee the project. pr 3. "Codes ", "ordinances" and `rules" of place or building refer to Laws and Regulations. The most strict of such Laws and Regulations shall govern construction. 4. Words such as "approved ", "directed ", "proper ", "suitable ", "satisfactory", "equal ", "necessary",and other words of similar meaning or intent, implying exercise of judgment, refer to decisions of the Architect, which must be obtained in writing prior to executing the Work. 5. The terms "selected ", "as selected ", or other terms of similar meaning and intent, shall mean as selected by the Architect from referenced manufacturer of quality established in Contract Documents. 6. References to Standard Specifications shall mean latest edition, including revisions thereto, of such Specifications in effect at date of Contract, with exceptions specifically required by Laws and Regulations in effect at Site. 7. "Provide" means "furnish and install ". 8. "Indicated" means "as shown on the Contract Drawings ". 9. "Required" means "as required to meet the intent of the Contract Documents ". 10. "Item" means "material, equipment, article or process ". 11. "Code" means all applicable Laws and Regulations in force under this Contract. At a minimum, a copy of the Uniform Building Code, Uniform Plumbing Code, Uniform Mechanical Code, National Electric Code and California Administrative Codes, Title 8 and Title 24 shall be kept on hand at - the Site by the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's obligation to comply with all Codes. ARG: 89119 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS 01090 -2 U M 12. "Defect" includes, but is not limited to, any occurrence which: a. Impairs the structural, physical or chemical properties of the Work. b. Impairs the operation or required normal maintenance of the Work. c. Impairs the surface finish or texture of the Work. d. Impairs the visual appearance of the Work e. Fails to meet any requirements of the Specifications or Drawings. 13. 'Restoration" indicates the act of bringing items and/or structures back to a former appearance, condition, capacity or usefulness that existed at some historical time. 14. 'Rehabilitation" is the same as "restoration" and may include new construction compatible in scale, materials and texture. 15. 'Reconstruction" shall indicate the process of rebuilding nonexistent or severely damaged items and/or structures as they once existed according to documented evidence of original condition. 16. 'Reproduction" shall mean construction of an exact replica of an item based on documented evidence of an original condition. 17. "New" indicates an item which is recently made, has never been used and shall be supplied by the Contractor, unless otherwise noted, to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 18. "Existing" indicates items original to the work. These items shall either remain in place and be protected by the Contractor throughout the course of the Work.; or they shall be "repaired and/or replaced" as indicated and/or as required by the Work. 19. 'Repair and/or replace" indicates work necessary to maintain and/or bring existing items into conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The first priority shall be to repair, rather than replace existing items whenever possible. If it is not possible to repair an existing item then such item shall be replaced The Contractor shall consult the Architect prior to proceeding with replacement of work. 20. "Salvaged" indicates an existing item to be removed from the site or structure and reused in the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for the for the storage and protection of salvaged items throughout the course of the Work, and for reinstallation of such items, unless otherwise noted PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS 01090 -3 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 PRE - CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Prior to beginning Work, there shall be a Pre- construction Conference with the Owner, Architect and Contractor to go over questions, schedules, and potential problems. Date and location to be determined. 1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. There shall be weekly Progress Meetings at the site attended by the Owner, Architect and Contractor. Day, time and location to be determined. B. There shall be additional Progress Meetings as requested by Owner, Architect or Contractor at the site or at a mutually agreed upon location. PART H - MATERIALS Not Used END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-1 SECTION 01340 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. At least 21 days before need for approval, Contractor shall forward all submittals to the Architect. Unless a different number is called for in the individual sections, submit one blue line print and one reproducible transparency of each Shop Drawing, three specimens of each sample, and five copies of all other submittals requested. B . Provide permanent markings on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, Subcontractor and submittal name. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through the Contractor's office will be returned without action. C. Coordinate all submittals and review them for legibility, accuracy, completeness, and compliance with Contract Documents. Submittals without evidence of Contractor's approval will be returned for resubmission. 1. The Contractor shall stamp and endorse with initials or signature, all submittals prior to their submittal to Architect certifying review and approval of submittal, compliance with Contract Documents and verification of field measurements. 2. Identification: Identify each submittal and resubmittal with the following information: a. Project name and address as they appear on the Contract Documents. b. Contract name and number. c. Contractor's name and address. 3. Identify each Shop Drawing, Product Data, Sample and other submittal with the following additional identification: a. Drawing and Specification Section numbers to which the submittal applies. b. Subcontractor's or supplier's name and address. c. Name and telephone number of the individual to contract for additional information regarding the submittal. d. Whether it is an original or a resubmittal. e. Date of submission. D. Architect reserves the right to require submittals from Contractor, in addition to those called for in individual sections. ARG: 89119 SUBMITTALS 01340 -1 1.03 ARCHITECT'S ACCEPTANCE A. Architectural checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated on the job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and the satisfactory performance of all Work. B . Upon receipt the Architect will indicate whether he accepts each submittal or not. When Architect has accepted submittals, they shall be returned to the Contractor. Any work done before acceptance shall be at Contractor's own risk. C. Action on Submittals: Where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark with "Action," and where possible return within three weeks (fifteen working days) of receipt. Where submittal must be held for coordination, the Contractor will be so advised without delay. 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with the Contract Documents, when submittal is returned marked "No Exceptions Taken." 2. Final- But - Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations and corrections on submittal and with Contract Documents, when the submittals is returned marked "Make Corrections Noted" 3. Returned for Resubmittal: Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking when the submittal is returned marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected." Do not allow submittals with these markings to be used in connection with performance of the Work. 1.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor's submittals shall show all aspects of work as required for a complete, finished, weather -tight installation of all items. B . Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by the Architect's review of submittals. C. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by the Architect's review of submittals, unless the Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations. Contractor shall identify deviations as part of each submittal. D. Architectural checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated on Site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and the satisfactory performance of all Work. ARG: 89119 SUBMITTALS 01340 -2 1.05 SPECIFIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Construction Schedule: Within ten days after Notice to Proceed and before beginning any work, submit five copies of a Construction Schedule showing estimated starting and completion dates for each part of the work. Construction Schedule shall comply with the following: 1. Provide separate horizontal bar column for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal Time Scale: Identify first work day of each week. B. Project Photographs: At each Application for Payment provide four prints of 5" x 7" glossy black and white project photographs complying with the following requirements: 1. Identification on the back of photograph with the project name, date, photographer's name and address, vantage point taken from, and subject. 2. No less than eleven exposures (with high resolution, maximum depth of field and minimum distortion) taken from vantage points approved by the Owner, attempting to document the extent of progress represented in the Application for Payment. C. Schedule of Values: Submit five copies of a schedule of dollar values based on the Contract Bid Schedule, including all unit price allowances and accepted alternate items, for approval by the Owner and Architect within 10 days of Notice to Proceed and at least fifteen days prior to submitting first Application for Payment. 1. Submit typewritten Schedule of Values on AIA Document G703 (Continuation Sheet for G702). a. Use Specification Table of Contents as basis of format for listing cost of work for sections under Divisions 2 through 16. b. Identify each line item number and listing as listed in the Project Manual Table of Contents. 2. Upon request by Owner or Architect support values given with data that will substantiate their correctness. 3. Submit quantities of designated materials. 4. Submit in a timely fashion as required in the General Requirements. 5. Submit updated Schedule of Values with each Application for Payment. a. Use Project Manual Table of Contents as basis of format for listing cost of work for sections under Divisions 2 through 16. b. Identify each line item number and listing as listed in the Specification Table of Contents. c. Itemize separate line item costs for each of the following cost items: 1.) Performance and Payment Bonds. 2.) Project Management. 3.) Field Supervision. 4.) Field Office Staff. 5.) Tool Rental, Repair. 6.) Truck and Vehicle Expenses. 7.) Temporary Facilities. 8.) Progressive clean up. 9.) Temporary Utilities. 10.) Insurance ARG: 89119 SUBMITTALS 01340 -3 d. Itemize any separate line item costs for work required by each section of the Specifications. e. Break down installed costs into: 1.) Cost of product, delivered to site. 2.) Total installed cost of product with overhead and profit. f. For each line item which has an installed value of more than $1,500, break down costs to list major products or operations thereunder. g. Sum of total costs for each item listed in the Schedule of Values shall be equal to total Contract Sum. h. Revise and resubmit the Schedule of Values as required by Owner and Architect. 6. Review of Schedules: Submit Schedule of Values and Construction Schedule to the Architect as a package. The Architect will review the Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Values for format and content. D. Administrative Submittals, including: 1. Listing of Subcontractors. 2. Insurance Certificate(s). 3. Performance and Payment Bonds. 4. Project Schedule(s). 5. Inspection and Test Reports. 6. Payment Applications. 7. Project Personnel Listing. E. Design Drawings for: 1. Design -Build Plumbing installations for new toilet rooms and revised piping throughout building. 2. Design -Build Mechanical revisions due to Work. 3. Design Build Electrical.installations of new lighting, switching and outlets and new conduit and stub outs for future theatrical lighting and acoustical equipment. F. Shop Drawings, including: 1. Fabrication and Installation Drawings. 2. Schedules. 3. Design Mix Formulas. 4. Contractor's Engineering Calculations. G . Product Data, including: 1. Manufacturer's Literature. 2. Standard Color Charts. 3. Catalog Cuts. 4. Performance Literature. 5. Product Operating and Maintenance Manuals. H. Samples, including: 1. Partial Sections of Manufacturer's or Fabricator.work. 2. Small Cuts or Containers of Materials. M ARG:89119 SUBMITTALS 01340 -4 - PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 SUBMITTALS 01340 -5 j. • 1 411 QUALITY CONTROL PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL A. Old City Hall is a historic structure, listed on the National Register of Historic Places, because of this the Owner is requiring that the Contractor, Sub - Contractors and workmen for a number of trades have proven skills in working on historic buildings. See individual Specification Sections for requirements. B . Work shall be performed by a Class B General Contractor. 1. Workmanship shall conform to best standards and accepted practices of the trade or trades involved, and shall include all items of fabrication, construction, and installation regularly furnished or required for completion of all portions of the project, including any finish required for appearance or operation as intended. Work required throughout shall be of such quality as will result in first class work only, executed by mechanics skilled in their respective lines of work, and specialized in the treatment of historic materials. Labor shall be performed in best, most workmanlike manner. 2. Constant supervision of the work either by the Contractor or his competent representative shall be maintained.Contractor shall employ competent superintendents, experienced in the work required on this project, and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the project site during the progress of work. The superintendents shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed except with the consent of the Owner. 3. Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees at all times and shall not employ any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him on the Work. C. Work may be inspected at any time by the Architect or his representative. Work covered or concealed before being inspected and accepted shall be opened and uncovered upon request, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS A. Where any provision of all applicable Laws and Regulations, Contract Documents, cited manufacturer's specifications or industry standards are in conflict, the more restrictive and higher quality provisions shall take precedence. ARG NO: 89119 QUALITY CONTROL 01400-1 PART II - MATERIAL Not Used. PART III - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION ARG NO: 89119 QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2 SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, hereinafter called "Testing Laboratory", to perform specific testing, in accordance with the Uniform Building Code, Section 306, the Specifications, and the other Contract Documents. Testing Laboratory shall be subject to prior written approval by the Owner. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the Testing Laboratory to facilitate the execution of required services. 2. Employment of Testing Laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. The Contractor shall provide adequate substantiation of the physical properties of specified materials and products prior to use. 1.03 TESTING LABORATORY DUTIES A. Provide qualified personnel, hereinafter referred to as the "Testing Agent". B . Perform specified reviews, inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies. If irregularities of deficiencies are uncorrected, the Testing Agent shall notify the Owner and the governing agency. D. The Testing Agent shall promptly submit written report of each test and inspection with copy each to Architect, Owner, Contractor, governing agency and other designated persons. Each report shall include: 1. Date Issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. ARG: 89119 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 -1 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect. E. The Testing Agent shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of his knowledge, in conformance with the Drawings and Specifications and the applicable provisions of the Uniform Building Code, latest edition as adopted by the local governing agency. 1.04 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. The Testing Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES . A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to Work. B . Provide the Testing Laboratory with adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. C. Provide the laboratory with design mixes and material properties proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials and material mixes which require control by the Testing Laboratory. D. Furnish copies of products and material test reports, certifications and affidavits as required. E. Furnish labor and facilities. 1. To provide access to Work to be tested 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project Site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. F. Notify Testing Laboratory 72 hours in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. G . Make arrangements with Testing Laboratory and pay for additional samples and . tests required for Contractor's convenience. H. Expenses incurred by the Testing Laboratory due to retesting and reinspection necessitated by non - conformance of work and testing and inspection required for compliance of substitutions to the Specifications shall be paid by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION La ARG: 89119 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 -2 w SECTION 01510 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY FACTUTTRIR A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. The work of this section consists of providing temporary facilities as required for Contractor's performance of the Work of this Contract. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTII.IMS A. Electric Power and Lighting: 1. Temporary electric power will be available at the Project site, from existing outlets and panels. The Contractor shall pay the costs of power used. 2. Should the existing electric power not be sufficient, arrange with the utility company to provide the additional service required, and pay the costs associated with providing the additional service. The Contractor shall pay the costs of power used. 3. Distribute electric power and lighting as required for performance of the Work. 4. In the event the Owner is billed directly by the applicable utility provider for any power used in connection with the performance of the Work, Contractor shall pay such bill in full within ten (10) days following the Contractor's receipt of the bill from the Owner. B . Heat and Ventilation: 1. Provide temporary heat as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the work, to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation and curing of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to improper temperature and humidity conditions. 2. Portable heaters shall be standard units complete with controls. 3. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas as required for proper installation and curing of materials, to disperse humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors and gases. 4. Pay the costs of installation, maintenance, operation, and removal of temporary heat and ventilation. The Contractor shall pay the costs of the fuel used. 5. In the event the Owner is billed directly by the applicable utility provider for any fuel used in connection with providing heat for the performance of the Work, Contractor shall pay such bill in full within ten (10) days following the Contractor's receipt of the bill from the Owner. ARG: 89119 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01510 -1 C. Water: Temporary water for construction purposes and human consumption is available at the project site. The Contractor shall pay the costs of water used. 1. In the event the Owner is billed directly by the applicable utility provider for any water used in connection with the performance of the Work, Contractor shall pay such bill in full within ten (10) days following the Contractor's receipt of the bill from the Owner. D. Sanitary Facilities: Contractor shall provide portable toilet facilities of sufficient numbers to accommodate construction personnel and employees. 1. Locate as approved by the Owner. 2. Maintain in a neat, sanitary condition, and adequately supplied. E. Telephone Service: 1. Arrange with local telephone service company for telephone service for the use of the Owner and construction personnel -and employees: 2. Pay the costs for telephone installation, maintenance, service, and removal. F . Fire Protection: 1. Place a capable and qualified person in charge of fire protection. Responsibilities shall include locating and maintaining fire protection equipment. 2. No smoking shall be allowed within the building. 3. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire hoses, and other equipment as necessary for proper fire protection during the progress of the Work. Such equipment shall be designated for use for fire protection only. a. Furnish one extinguisher for each 1,500 square feet of area. Travel distance to nearest extinguisher shall not exceed 75 feet. 4. Take all necessary precautions to prevent fire during construction. Do not store flammables or combustible liquids in existing structure. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Plant and Equipment: 1. Furnish, operate and maintain a complete plant for fabricating, handling, conveying, installing and erecting materials and equipment required under the Contract. Include conveyances for transporting workmen, materials and equipment; hoists, derricks; debris chutes; tools, appliances, and equipment necessary for performance of the Work. 2. Maintain plant and equipment in safe and efficient operating condition. Damages due to defective plant and equipment, and uses made thereof, shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Scaffolds and Runways: 1. Furnish, erect, and maintain for duration of Work, as required, scaffolds, runways, guardrails, platforms, and similar temporary construction necessary for the performance of the Work. Such facilities shall be of type and arrangement required for their specific use, structurally sound, and well secured. 2. Connect the levels of the structure by means of suitable ladders, ramps, and temporary stairs, as necessary. Enclose open wells and shafts to prevent injury and damage to persons and adjacent construction and improvements. 3. Contractor shall provide a suitable means of access to scaffolding and runways for ARG: 89119 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01510 -2 Owner and Architect to view the Work on a regular basis. C. Temporary Enclosures and Protection of Work in Place: 1. Provide temporary, weathertight enclosures as required to provide acceptable working conditions; weather protection for interior materials; temporary heating; and as required to prevent entry of unauthorized persons; abrasion damage; injury and damage to persons and adjacent construction and improvements. Provide removable enclosures as necessary. D. Use of Permanent Stairs: 1. Protect stairways and balustrades from damage from demolition and construction operations. 2. Do not overload stairways beyond their rated capacities. 3. Upon completion of temporary use, repair damage, clean, and leave in satisfactory condition for permanent use. 1.05 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES A. General: 1. Provide and maintain suitable temporary barriers as required to prevent public entry into project work areas; protect the work and existing facilities; persons and trees and plants to remain from damage or injury from demolition and construction operations. 2. Maintain temporary barriers in a structurally sound condition, with orderly, neat appearance. 3. Should regulatory requirements necessitate the construction of temporary barriers, barricades, or pedestrian walkways not indicated or specified, construct same at no additional cost to Owner. Paint such items with primer and finish coat in color selected by the Architect. 4. Relocate as required by the progress of the Work. B - Temporary Security Fencing: 1. The temporary site fencing presently surrounding the project site (31 - 7-0" high Port-A- Panels) is being provided pursuant to rental agreement #0010663 ( "Fencing Lease "), between the Owner and Security Contractor Services, Inc., 170 28th Street, P.O. Box 1900, San Jose, CA 95106, (408) 295 -8556 ( "Fencing Lessor "). Temporary site fencing adequately protecting and securing the project site shall be maintained by Contractor until final completion of the Work (or until such earlier date as Owner may designate). Upon the request of the Contractor, the Owner shall provide the Contractor with a copy of the Fencing Lease. Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of such temporary fencing upon final completion of the Work, or upon such earlier date that the Owner may designate. 2. Effective as of the commencement date set forth in the Notice to Proceed issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall assume all obligations and liabilities of the Owner under the Fencing Lease, including, without limitation, the payment of all rent and other sums payable by Owner thereunder. Any advance rent paid by the Owner under the Fencing Lease attributable to any period of time following the commencement date set forth in Notice to Proceed shall be reimbursed by the Contractor to the Owner within ten (10) days following the Owner's written demand therefor. 3. Upon the request of the Owner, the Contractor shall accept an assignment of the Fencing Lease from the Owner and shall promptly execute and deliver to the Owner ARG: 89119 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01510 -3 such documentation (i) as the Owner may request to evidence that assignment and the assumption by the Contractor of the obligations and liabilities of the Owner under the Fencing Lease, and/or (ii) as may be required by the Fencing Lessor to obtain its consent to such assignment. 4. The Contractor shall indemnify, defend, protect and hold the Owner, its officers, directors, employees and agents harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, causes of action, damages, liabilities, losses and expenses arising out of or in connection with the Fencing Lease (and/or the temporary fencing provided thereunder) which arise following the commencement date set forth in the Notice to Proceed. The foregoing obligation of the Contractor shall survive the completion of the Work or the sooner termination of the Contract. 5. The Contractor shall verify the adequacy of and be responsible for the maintenance and repair of all temporary fencing, and shall erect any additional fencing the Contractor may feel is necessary to adequately protect and secure the project site. 1.06 SECURITY A. Secure, maintain, and protect the Work, stored materials, equipment, and temporary facilities whether on or off Site, until time of acceptance, or such earlier time as Owner may choose to assume such responsibility. B. Security and protection may be by any legal method, or combination of methods, unless objected to by the Owner. C. Provide temporary fire and security alarm system acceptable to the Owner. D. Special care shall be taken to make sure salvaged materials are safe from vandals, thieves and the weather. 1.07 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Provide all necessary facilities to minimize the impact of weather, site conditions, and disturbances resulting from the work on the project and adjoining properties. B . Provide for safe access to any space within the project occupied after substantial completion of the space and the project, but prior to final completion. C. Noise and Vibration: 1. Impact tools shall not be used on any part of the existing building. 2. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations for the operation of powered equipment. 3. Equipment and impact tools shall have intake and exhaust mufflers. 4. Cooperate with the Owner in the scheduling of any work involving the use of noisy and vibratory equipment. D. Dust and Dirt 1. Maintain as dust -free an environment as possible at all times, employing barriers !} when required to keep dirt and dust from adjacent properties and streets. 2. Conduct demolition and construction operations to prevent wind -blown dust and dirt ' from interfering with the progress of the Work. Water may be used on the exterior, if necessary, with proper protection of work in place. Contractor shall verify any local LI ARG: 89119 TEMPORARY FACH ITIES 01510 -4 oil LA requirements for the use of recycled water for such work. E. Fumes: Perform all work involving excessive or toxic fumes outside normal business hours. Follow manufacturer's recommended safety procedures at all times. F . Water: Do not permit surface and subsurface water, and other liquids to accumulate in or about the Project Site and vicinity thereof. G . Pollution: 1. No burning of refuse, debris, or other materials shall be permitted on or in the vicinity of the Project Site. 2. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations, including anti- pollution ordinances, while conducting demolition, construction, and disposal operations. 1.08 FIELD OFFICES AND STORAGE SHEDS A. Contractor's Field Office Requirements: 1. Size as required for general use at location to be approved by Owner. a. Obtain Owner's approval of locations for field office prior to commencing site preparation for the Work. b. Perform periodic maintenance and cleaning for field office including associated furnishings, equipment, and services. c. Remove field office, and storage area for the Project Site as soon as, in the opinion of the Architect, the progress of the work permits. d. Properly remove from the site and dispose of debris resulting from removal and reconditioning operations. 2. Provide adequate lighting, ventilation and temperature control. 3. Provide telephone(s). 4. Provide racks and files for Project record documents. 5. Provide one 10 -inch, outdoor -type thermometer on the outside wall of the Field Office.. B. Storage Area Requirements: 1. Number and Sizes: Adequate for storage and handling requirements of the various types of work. a. Obtain Owner's approval of locations for storage areas prior to commencing site preparation for the work. b. Perform periodic maintenance and cleaning for storage area,. 2. Ventilation: Comply with manufacturers' and specified requirements and Laws and Regulations for products stored. 3. Heating: Adequate to maintain temperatures specified for the product stored. 4. Lighting: As required to facilitate product handling and inspection. C. Signs: Obtain Owner's approval of location of all Contractor/Project signs. ARG: 89119 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01510 -5 PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 GENERAL: A. Temporary materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary facilities and controls as required to perform the Work. C. Materials, installation, and maintenance of temporary facilities and controls shall be in compliance with applicable Laws and Regulations. D. Remove temporary facilities and controls, including associated materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. 1. Restore and recondition areas of site damaged or disturbed by temporary facilities and controls or their installation. 2. Remove and properly dispose of debris resulting from removal and reconditioning operations. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01510 -6 UR SECTION 01600 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: 1. "Products" is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the Work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for project or taken from Contractor's stock of previously purchased products. 2. "Materials" is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, produced, installed or applied to form units of work. 3. "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, etc.). B . Definitions in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in Contract Documents, including "specialities," "systems," "structures," "finishes," "accessories," "furnishings," "special construction," and similar terms which are self - explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry. C. Contractors' Bid shall be based on the use of products, materials and/or equipment required by the Contract Documents. No other product, materials and/or equipment will be approved or accepted, except as stated herein. D. Substitutions: Contractor's requests for changes in products, materials and/or equipment required by Contract Documents are considered requests for "substitutions," and are subject to requirements hereof. The requirements for substitutions do not apply to specified Contractor options on products and construction methods. Revisions to Contract Documents, where requested by Owner or Architect are "changes" not "substitutions." Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing Laws and Regulations does not constitute "substitutions ", and does not constitute a basis for change orders, except as provided for in Contract Documents. 1.03 REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Material and equipment intended for reuse in the Work is indicated. B. Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation to assure proper function in the completed Work. Contractor shall assume responsibility for storage of all items to be reinstalled Damaged or missing material or equipment shall be replaced to the Owner's satisfaction and at no additional cost to the Owner. Duplication of existing material or equipment shall not be considered an ARG: 89119 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01600 -1 acceptable alternative to the careful removal and reinstallation of existing, unless specifically accepted by the Architect. C. Arrange for transportation, storage, handling of items which require off -site storage, restoration, or renovation, and pay the costs for such work. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY - STORAGE - HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft. Control delivery schedules to minimize long -term storage of products at site and overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, provide delivery, installation and coordination to insure minimum holding or storage times for products recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss. 1. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and accepted submittals, and to verify that products are properly protected and undamaged. 2. Promptly remove damaged and defective products from the site, and replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Exterior Storage: Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids to prevent soiling and staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. Store loose granular material in a well- drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 1.05 WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES) A. Categories of Specific Warranties: Warranties on work are in several categories, including those of General Conditions, and including without limitation the following specific categories related to individual units of work specified in sections of divisions 2 through 16 of these Specifications: 1. Special Project Warranty (Guarantee): A warranty specifically written and signed by Contractor for a defined portion of the work; and, where required, countersigned by subcontractor, installer, manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor. 2. Specified Product Warranty: A warranty which is required by Contract Documents, to be provided for a manufactured product incorporated into the . Work; regardless of whether man ufacturer has a published warranty without regard for specific incorporation of product into the Work, or has written and executed warranty as a direct result of Contract Document requirements. 3. Coincidental Product Warranty: A warranty which is not specifically required by Contract Documents (other than as specified in this Section); but which is available on a product incorporated into the Work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer of product has a published warranty in connection with purchases and uses of product without regard for specific applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warranty. B. Refer to individual sections of divisions 2 through 16 for the determination of units of work which are required to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specific requirements and terms of those warranties (or guarantees). C. Related Damages and Losses: In connection with Contractor's correction of warranted work which has failed, remove and replace other work of project ARG: 89119 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01600 -2 which has been damaged as a result of such failure, or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work. D. Reinstatement of Warranty Period: Except as otherwise indicated, when work covered by a special project warranty or product warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or restoration, reinstate warranty by written endorsement for a period of time equal to original warranty period , starting on date of acceptance of replaced or restored work. E. Specific Warranty Forms: Where a special project warranty (guarantee) or specified product warranty is required by the Contract Documents, prepare a written document to contain terms and appropriate identification, ready for execution by required parties. All such warranties shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. F . The Warranty set forth in Paragraph 3.5 of the General Conditions and the obligations of the Contractor to correct the Work pursuant to Paragraph 12.2 of the General Conditions are intended to apply to the entire Work even though certain portions of the Work may also be covered by a Special Project Warranty (Guarantee), a Specified Product Warranty and/or a Coincidental Product Warranty. In the event of conflicts between the any such warranties or guarantees and the terms and provisions of Paragraphs 3.5 and/or 12.2 of the General Conditions, the more superior of such terms and provisions shall apply to that portion of the Work in question. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCE A. The compliance requirements, for individual products as indicated in Contract Documents, are multiple in nature and may include the following: 1. Generic requirements. 2. Descriptive requirements. 3. Proprietary requirements. 4. Performance requirements. 5. Prescriptive requirements. 6. Compliance with standards. 7. Conformance with graphic details. B . Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by the requirements of the Contract Document and by Laws and Regulations, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects. Required procedures include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following for various indicated methods of specifying: 1. Single Product/Manufacturer Name or Accepted Equal: Provide product indicated, except advise Architect before proceeding, where known that named product is not a feasible or acceptable selection. Contractor shall follow substitution submittal procedure when proposing an "equal" product for Architects' acceptance. 2. Two or More Product/Manufacturer Names: Provide one of the named products, at Contractor's option, but excluding products which do not comply with requirements. Do not provide or offer to provide an unnamed product, ARG: 89119 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01600 -3 except where none of the named products comply with requirements or are a feasible selection. 3. "Named," except as otherwise indicated, is defined to mean manufacturer's name for product, as recorded in published product literature, of latest issues as of date of Contract Documents. Refer requests to use products of a later (or earlier) model to Architect for acceptance before proceeding. 4. Performance Requirements: Provide products which comply with specific performances indicated, and which are recommended by manufacturer (in published product literature or by individual certification) for application indicated. Overall performance of a product is implied where product is specified for specific performances. 5. Prescriptive Requirements: Provide products which have been produced in accordance with prescriptive requirements, using specified ingredients and components, and complying with specified requirements for mixing, fabricating, curing, finishing, testing and similar operation in manufacturing process. C. Visual Matching: Where matching of an established sample is required, final judgment of whether a product proposed by Contractor matches sample satisfactorily shall be determined by the Architect. Where no product within specified cost category that matches the sample satisfactorily is available, comply with Contract Documents provisions concerning, "substitutions" and "change orders" for selection of a matching product outside established cost category. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: Contractor's request for substitution will be received and considered by the Architect, when extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required; and changes are in keeping with general intent of Contract Documents; and are fully documented and properly submitted as specified herein. Otherwise, requests will be returned without action except to record non - compliance with these requirements. B . Whenever a product is identified in the Contract Documents by reference to manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog number, or the like, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard, and products of other manufacturers may be equally acceptable, provided the proposed products are, in the opinion of the Architect, of equal quality, utility, and appearance. Contractor shall follow substitution submittal procedure when proposing an "equal" product for Architects' acceptance. C. Burden. of proof as to equality of any substitution rests with the Contractor. In requesng acceptance of a substitution, the Contractor represents that he: 1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that indicated or specified 2. Will furnish the same guarantees /warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product indicated or specified. 3. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work, and make such other changes as required to make the work complete and in compliance with the contract documents and applicable regulatory requirements. 4. Waives all claims for additional costs which may subsequently become apparent, associated with the substitution. K ARG: 89119 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01600 -4 0` D. Requests for approval for a substitution shall be submitted in written form and accompanied by sufficient information to enable proper evaluation to be made. Submit with request: 1. Complete technical data, including drawings, performance specifications, cost data, samples, and test reports of the product proposed for substitution. Submit additional information, if required by the Architect. 2. Data similar to that specified for the item for which substitution is proposed. 3. Effect on the construction schedule. 4. Contractor's detailed comparison of significant qualities between specked item and proposed substitution. 5. Signed statement that the proposed substitution is in full compliance with the contract documents and applicable Laws and Regulations. 6. Complete breakdown of costs indicating the amount to the added or deducted from the contract sum if the proposed substitution is accepted. 7. List of other work, if any, which may be affected by the substitution, including the cost of the Architect's additional services associated therewith. 8. Information on availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials. 9. Sample of manufacturer's standard form of guarantee or warranty for proposed substitution. 10. Description of how proposed substitution will result in overall work equal - to-or- better -than work originally indicated. E. The Architect will be the judge of the acceptability of proposed substitution, and such determination shall be final. The Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness and notify the Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject the proposed substitutions. F. The Contractor shall pay the Architect's fees, based on a standard hourly rate, for time spend reviewing substitution submittals and for any additional design fees necessary due to the acceptance of any substitution, all at no additional cost to the Owner. G . Approval of a substitution shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the proper execution of the work and/or any other requirements of the Contract Documents. H. If a substitution is not accepted, use the product originally specified or indicated. I. No substitution shall be purchased or incorporated in the work without the Architect's prior written acceptance. J. Work Related Submittals: Contractor's submittal of, and Architect's acceptance of, shop drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of Contract Documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof. 1. Contractor must notify Architect in writing if a substitute is proposed in a shop drawing submittal. 2.03 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide new products which comply with requirements of the Contact Documents, and which are undamaged and unused at time of installation, and ARG: 89119 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01600 -5 which are complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards or other devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended use and effect. B . Name Plates: Except as otherwise indicated by requirements of the Contact Documents, approval labels, and operating data, do not permanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on exterior of the work. 1. Labels: Locate required labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface which, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on each item of service- connected or power operated equipment. Indicate manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, speed, ratings, and similar essential operating data. Locate nameplates on an easily accessed surface which, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION U ARG: 89119 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01600 -6 W" SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for project closeout, including provisions for final cleaning, project record documents, operating and maintenance data, instruction of Owner's personnel, guarantee /warranties and bonds, services and maintenance contracts, preparation for final inspection, restoration of damaged work, remedial work, and extra materials. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations while conducting cleaning and disposal operations. B . Use cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property or cause damage to products or work. C. Use cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers of the products to be cleaned. D. Schedule operation to prevent dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning operations from adhering to wet or newly finished surfaces. E. Remove dust, dirt, grease, stains, fingerprints, labels, spilled and spattered, and other foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. F . Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. G . Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. H. Ventilating Systems: 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters of units. 2. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units. I. Vacuum and wipe insides of electrical panels and cabinetwork. J. Broom -clean interior spaces. K. Clean roof areas and gutters of sticks, rubbish, and other debris. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintenance of Documents and Samples: 1. Store Project Record documents and samples in field office apart from documents ARG: 89119 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 -1 LAN ca used for construction. 2. Maintain Project Record documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. 3. Do not use Project Record documents for construction. B . Recording: 1. Record information carefully and neatly in ink. 2. Label each document "Project Record" in large, neat, printed letters. C. Record Drawings: 1. Record the following kinds of information on the Record Drawings: a. Changes made by Change Orders and other modifications described in the General Conditions. b. Locations of work buried under and outside the building, such as plumbing and electrical lines and conduits. c. Locations of significant work concealed inside the building whose general locations have been changed from those shown on the Contract Documents. 1.) Establish locations of underground work by dimensions to column lines or walls. d. Locations of items not necessarily concealed which have been changed, with the Architect's prior acceptance, from the locations shown on the Contract Documents. e. Record deviations from the sizes, locations, and other features of installations shown in the Contract Documents. D. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of Specifications, including addenda, change orders and similar modifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark -up variations in actual work in comparison with text of Specifications and modifications as issued. E. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each product data submittal, and mark -up significant variations in actual work in comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in product as delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. F . In addition to the previously specified requirements for record documents: 1. Keep up to date during the entire progress of the Work, and make available to the Architect at any time. 2. Furnish reproducible record drawings, made from final Shop Drawings which have been updated to show actual conditions for work specified in the individual Specification Sections. G. "As- Built" Drawings: 1. At time of acceptance of the Work and prior to final payment, using the record drawings for reference, prepare "As- Built" drawings on permanent, transparent, reproducible prints to be furnished by the Architect. 2. Prepare the "As- built" drawings from the record drawings, using standard drafting devices and techniques. 3. Submit the As -Built Drawings to the Owner as part of the project close -out procedure, prior to final payment. ARG: 89119 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 -2 H. Specifications and Addenda: 1. Mark each Specification Section to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually incorporated in the Work. b. Changes made by Change Order and other modifications described in the General Conditions. I. Sign and date the completed Project Record documents and deliver them to the Architect. 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Where maintenance manuals, record data, and operating instructions are required in the individual Specification sections prepare such in three -ring durable, plastic binders sized for 8 -1/2 x 11 inch sheets and including at least the following: 1. Identification on the front cover with the Project name and address and the general subject matter contained in the manual. 2. Typewritten index near the front of the manual. 3. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of the equipment included in the manual. 4. Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, their part numbers, and name and address of nearest source of parts. 5. Copy of each guarantee /warranty, and services contract issued for the equipment included in the manual. B. Shop Drawings: With each copy of the manual, furnish one set of applicable, accepted Shop Drawings showing changes made during construction. C. Number of Copies Required: 1. Submit manuals in the quantity which is required to be returned, plus the following, unless otherwise specified, which will be retained by the Architect: a. Four copies of Mechanical and Electrical manuals. b. Two copies of all other manuals. 1.06 INSTRUCTION OF THE OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Where specified in the individual Specification sections, furnish qualified personnel for on-the-job instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Where possible, furnish instruction, including special start-ups and running time, prior to occupancy of the building at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.07 GUARANTEES /WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. The Contractor warrants to the Owner that the materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new, unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free of defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. See General Conditions, Section 3.5 for further warranty requirments. 1. Warranties between Contractor and manufacturers, and Contractor and suppliers shall not affect guarantees /warranties between Contractor and Owner. ARG: 89119 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 -3 B. Submittal Requirements: All guaranties /warranties required by the individual Specification Sections shall be submitted in a form that is acceptable to the Owner. Submit the guarantees /warranties, typed on the Contractor's letterhead if for the entire Work, or on the Subcontractor's letterhead if for the work of a specification section. 1. Compile specified guarantees /warranties and bonds. a. Submit to the Architect for review and approval fifteen (15) days prior to submission of final Applications for Payment. The Architect will deliver guarantees /warranties and bonds to the Owner after acceptance of the Work. 2. Time of Submittal: a. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during the progress of the Work, submit guarantee /warranties within 10 days after acceptance of the Work. b. Otherwise, submit guarantees /warranties to the Architect for review and approval fifteen (15) days prior to submission of final Applications for Payment.. C. Correction of Work: Contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the Owner or Architect, or failing to conform tho the Contract Documents as required by General Conditions, Section 12.2. 1. Work shall be coordinated with the Owner and performed at such time and in such manner to cause minimal interruption and inconvenience to the Owner's operation. 1.08 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance shall consist of a written statement from the Contractor to the extent that he has carefully inspected all portions of the Work, that he has reviewed in detail the Drawings and Specifications, and that all conditions of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled. B. Upon acceptance of notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect, together with the Contractor and Owner, shall promptly make a joint inspection of the work and note deficiencies, if any. If there are no deficiencies, or when noted deficiencies have been removed and the work is found acceptable under the Contract and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will notify the Contractor in writing. 1.09 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued when, in the Architects opinion, Substantial Completion (as defined by the General Conditions) of the Work has been achieved. B. Remaining deficiencies will be noted by the Architect on a "punchlist" that will become part of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The remaining deficiencies shall be corrected by the Contractor prior to submitting application for final payment. 1.10 FINAL SUBMITTALS A. In addition to items required elsewhere in the Contract Documents the following items shall be submitted before final payment is authorized: 1. Submit all required written warrantees /guarantees to Owner. 2. Provide Owner with complete and satisfactory file of Operation and Maintenance Manuals of equipment and materials used in the work. 3. Submit signed certificates of final inspection from all applicable government agencies to the Architect. ARG: 89119 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 -4 1. 11 PREPARATION FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Perform final cleaning as specified herein. B. Remove temporary tapes, wrapping, coatings, paper labels, and similar items. Dust, mop, wash or wipe exposed and semi- exposed surfaces as necessary to leave the Work in a new, clean condition. 1.12 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED WORK A. Restore or replace, as specified or directed by the Architect materials and finishes damaged from movement of equipment or other operations at no additional expense to the Owner. B. Restoration shall be equal to the original work, and finishes shall match the appearance of existing adjacent work. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Where required in the individual Specification sections, furnish extra materials in the quantities and manners specified. B. Delivery and certification of such extra materials shall be a prerequisite to issuing a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 -5 SECTION 02050 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . Work in this section describes the requirements for performing general demolition of existing construction as required for installation of new work. The basic items for demolition shall include, but may not be limited to: 1. All abandoned and obsolete wires, pipes, ducts, which are accessible or shall be made accessible by Work. 2. Remove interior finishes as indicated and or as required by new construction 3. Interior partitions as indicated. 4. Removal of masonry as required by seismic work and new construction. Care shall be taken with the removal of all brick specified to be reused, especially the white face brick on the south and west elevations. 5. Removal of all existing roofing material to existing roof framing. 6. Removal of existing paving, fencing, landscaping, and irrigation as indicated and as required to accommodate new construction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of five (5) years successful experience in comparable projects involving historic buildings. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. B. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 1. All work shall conform with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Reference Standards: 1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute, Inc. - A10.6 - "American National Standard Safety Requirements for Demolition ". ARG: 89119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02050 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Reports of inspections conducted by the Contractor with the Owner and the Architect both before and after performing demolition. 1.05 SPECIAL PROCEDURES- ASBESTOS A. For special procedures pertaining to asbestos removal, refer to Section 01010 "Summary of Work ". 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from the Owner. B . Protection: 1. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of persons and property. 2. Limit work to areas indicated for demolition or as required to perform the Work of the Contract. Protect existing finishes, furniture, equipment, etc. to remain. 3. Take care to ensure that there will be no damage to structural elements or portions thereof which are not required to be removed. Erect and maintain temporary shoring, bracing, and other means to safeguard the structural integrity of the existing building and its parts. 4 Erect and maintain temporary bracing, shoring, barricades, signs, and other means to protect the public, workmen, and other persons, finishes and improvements to remain. 5. Material or equipment temporarily removed for protection shall be reinstalled if not damaged or, if damaged, repaired or replaced with material of the same quality, size and kind at no additional cost to Owner. - 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials forming portions of the permanent structure designated for demolition shall become the property of the Contractor unless otherwise noted, remove and dispose of such materials otherwise indicated or specified. 2.02 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS A. Materials and finishes indicated for reuse shall be removed by or under the direct supervision of the craftsmen who will be responsible for its reinstallation. Materials and finishes to be salvaged shall be carefully removed and restored to their pre- removal condition. B. Items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully disconnected and removed as indicated or as required by Work of the Contract Documents. All existing finish materials which are salvageable and are designated for reuse in new construction shall be held by the Contractor in storage until a decision by the Architect is made as to their usability." ARG: 89119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02050 -2 I . Salvageable items designated for reuse include the following, without limitation: a. Built -in upholstered banquettes. b. Bars and bar appliances. c. All interior, wood trim, balusters, etc. d. Safe door. e. Commercial Kitchen Equipment. f. Light fixtures. g. Mechanical equipment. 2. All items to be salvaged shall be inventoried in the presence of the Owner prior to the removal thereof from the premises. The Owner and the Contractor shall jointly conduct such and inventory at a mutually agreeable time. C. Contractor shall be responsible for all precautions required to ensure that salvaged items are not damaged in removal, handling, transport and storage. Contractor shall replace any damaged or unusable stored items at his own expense. Refer to Section 01600 - 1.03. D. Prior to removing any salvageable items from the premises, Contractor shall provide the Owner with evidence, in a form satisfactory to the Owner, that all items to be transported and stored off site are covered under the Builder's Risk Property Insurance described in Section 1.4(vi) of the Insurance and Bonds Rider set forth in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor shall be responsible for the reinstallation of all salvaged items at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION TION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to starting demolition operations, make inspection and report observable defects and structural weaknesses of construction designated for demolition. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence demolition until appropriate determinations have been made. 1. Examine areas affected by work in this section and verify that any necessary shoring is in place. B . Where existing conditions conflict with the Contract Documents, notify the Architect immediately and obtain written clarification before proceeding. C. As demolition operations progress, periodically inspect structures for adverse conditions. Immediately notify the Architect when such conditions become apparent and stop operations at that location until appropriate determinations have been made. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Lay out cutting work at job site and coordinate with related work for which cutting is required. B. Review proposed layout with Architect prior to performing cutting operations. 3.03 DEMOLITION A. Remove items designated for demolition within limits of work indicated, and as required ARG: 89119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02050 -3 to preform the work. Do not remove anything beyond limits of demolition indicated without prior written approval of the Architect. If in doubt whether to remove an item, obtain written direction or approval prior to proceeding. B . Remove materials carefully, to the extent shown or required. Provide neat and orderly junctions between existing and new materials. C. Proceed systematically. Demolish in small sections. D. All work shall be done by properly skilled and equipped workmen. Use equipment most suitable for the work and that will not introduce harmful vibrations in the building or result in excessive demolition beyond that noted. 1. Perform demolition as much as possible with hand tools. 2. Do not use impact equipment for demolition. 3. Do not operate air - compressors inside of the building. E. Use methods required to complete the work within the limitations of Laws and Regulations. F . Protect existing structures, facilities, and plant life from damage. Items damaged as a result of demolition operations shall be repaired or replaced at at no expense to the Owner. G. Perform demolition to provide the least interference and most protection to existing facilities and improvements to remain. H. Remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floor or framing. Contractor shall design and install temporary shoring and bracing as required. Leave shoring and bracing in place until new Work provides adequate bracing and support. I. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by suitable methods. Do not allow to free fall. J. Provide safety devices including barricades, signs and coverings in conformance with all applicable Laws and Regulations. See Section 01510. 3.04 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use temporary enclosures, or other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing Laws and Regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 3.05 CUTTING A. Provide a suitable surface for patching and joining and to present an acceptable finish appearance when such cutting appears in the finished work. Make new openings neat, as close as possible to profiles indicated and only to extent necessary for new work. B. Floor Penetrations: Penetrations to be cut through existing floors shall be cut plumb and straight and to dimensions indicated or as required for minimum clearances. C. Do not cut or alter structural members unless specifically indicated. If cutting of structural members is required by Work, but not indicated, Contractor shall notify ARG: 89119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02050 -4 Architect for clarification and direction prior to proceeding. D. Upon completion of cutting, clean remaining surfaces of loose particles and dust. 3.06 PIPES, DUCTS AND CONDUITS A. Remove deactivated mechanical, plumbing, and electrical elements, including fastenings, connections, and other related appurtenances and accessories which would otherwise be exposed in the completed work or interfere with construction operations. B. These facilities above ceilings may remain in place if their presence does not result in interference with new work, in which case they shall be removed to the extent necessary. C. Cap deactivated piping systems at points of cutoff. 3.07 DEMOLITION DEBRIS A. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate. B. Regularly remove debris from the site so that its presence will not delay progress of the Work. C. Nothing to be removed from site shall be stored, sold or burned on the site without the Owner's prior written approval. 3.08 REMAINING CONSTRUCTION A. Protect existing utility, irrigation and drainage lines to remain. B. Repair or replace any surfaces to remain which become exposed, defaced or damaged as a result of demolition work at no additional cost to Owner. Make all such repairs with materials in kind and quality to match existing adjacent surfaces. Repaint or refinish surface as required to blend into adjacent existing finish. 3.09 RECONDITIONING EXISTING SUBSTRATES A. Refer to other sections for individual substrate requirements. B. Clean surfaces on which new materials will be applied, removing adhesives, bitumen, and other adhering materials, as necessary to furnish acceptable subsurfaces for new materials. C. Determine substrate requirements for reconditioned surfaces in cooperation with the manufacturer's representative and installer of each new material involved. D. Prepare existing concrete surfaces to receive new cast -in -place concrete by sandblasting, to the extent that the entire surfaces has a moderate to heavy broken or fractured texture, except for keyed joints and other areas indicated, which require the exposure of coarse aggregate. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02050 -5 SECTION 02115 SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work in Specified Elsewhere: I. Temporary Facilities: Section 01510. 2. Landscaping and Irrigation: Section 02900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . This section describes the requirements for site clearing and demolition, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary partitions and barricades. 2. Protection of existing items to remain. 3. Removal, storage and protection of items to be reused 4. Removal of existing items as necessary to provide for new construction. 5. Debris removal. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Examine all objects designated to be removed or protected and the limits of demolition, including subsurface conditions before starting work on this section. B . Reference Data: Maps and similar reference data not included in the Contract Documents but made available to the Contractor, are for information only. Conclusions drawn there from are the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Protection: Provide all means necessary to protect objects designated to remain including structures, utilities, plant materials, and irrigation systems. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements, as acceptable to and at no cost to the Owner. D. Protection of Personnel: Erect signs, barricades and such other forms of warning as may be required to prevent personnel from putting themselves in the way of injury. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment, as necessary for completion of site demolition work. ARG: 89119 SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION 02115-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL A. Check Contract Documents carefully and thoroughly to investigate existing construction. Notify Architect of ambiguities, inconsistencies, and errors between Contract Documents and existing conditions prior to proceeding with work. B. Schedule work so as to impose a minimum of hardship on the present operation of the facilities and the performance of the work of other trades. 3.02 PROTECTION, TRIMMING AND TREATMENT OF EXISTING PLANT MATERIALS TO REMAIN A. Trees and Shrubs marked with a brightly colored ribbon are to remain both within and immediately adjacent to the construction area. These items shall be protected from vehicles and workmen at all times by means of adequate construction barricades and or notices of warning and caution. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure the safety and well -being of existing plant material to remain in the proximity of work. The Contractor shall be relieved of his responsibility for damage to the existing landscape only if written verification is received from the Owner outlining specific conditions and directives which may vary from this specification. 1. Any plant that is destroyed or damaged to such a point as being deemed unfit by the Owner without previous written verification, shall be replaced in kind and size, by Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. 3.03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. Portions of the existing irrigation system which are to remain shall be protected at all times during the course of the work. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that those portions of the irrigation system remain operable during the course of the Work. Any damage to the system shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. If it should become necessary to remove, or relocate or adjust any irrigation lines or equipment to allow construction of other items of Work, the Contractor shall notify the Architect for instruction prior to proceeding. 3.04 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS A. Where concrete paving and curbs are shown to be removed they shall be saw cut and removed to the limits indicated. All cutting shall be done to a neat and even line with proper tools or a concrete cutting saw. Any concrete broken beyond the indicated limits shall be removed to the nearest joint or score line and then replaced with new concrete to match the existing at no additional expense to the Owner. Ease all cut edges of concrete. 3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS A. Contractor shall furnish trucks, do all loading and pay for all dump and other fees in connection with the disposing of all debris. Load debris as it accumulates and haul debris away from site promptly and dispose of off -site in a legal manner. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION 02115-2 SECTION 02220 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this Section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Landscaping and Irrigation: Section 02900. 2. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100. 3. Concrete: Section 03300. 4. Mechanical: Section 15000. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for excavating and backfilling for new foundations, and includes trenching and backfilling for the construction and installation of pipelines and repair of existing paving surfaces. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM D1556: "Standard Method of test for Density of Soil in place by the Sand Cone Method." 2. ASTM 1557: "Standard Method of test for Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Solid Aggregate Mixtures, Using 10 lb. Rammer and 18 inch Drop." 3. Comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relative to excavations and protection thereof including, without limitation, Section 6705 of the California Labor Code. 4. Comply with all construction safety orders and trench construction safety orders of the State of California. B. Methods and materials used in the repair of existing asphaltic concrete paving shall conform with current Cal -Trans Specification for Materials and other local, state and federal requirements and standards. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Fill: All soil or soil -rock materials placed to raise the natural grade of the site or to backfill excavation. ARG: 89119 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 02220 -1 B. On- Site - Material: Soil which is obtained from the required excavation on the site. C. Bedding: When rock, unsuitable material, or wet trench is encountered at the excavated grade for utility installation, bedding is required. Material shall be predominantly sand and gravel, having a plasticity index of less than 5. Bedding may be omitted if, in the opinion of the Electrical/Mechanical Engineer, excavated trench bottom will adequately support and not damage the utility line. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Verify or determine locations of underground utilities, and avoid damaging them. Should any damage occur, notify the Architect and repair the damage at no additional cost to the Owner. B. If any discrepancies are found between the Drawings and actual Site conditions, the Architect reserves the right to make minor adjustments in the work as necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ASPHALT PAVING A. Use locally available materials and gradations which exhibit a satisfactory record for previous installations and meet or exceed Cal -Trans Specification requirements. Materials used in patching shall match materials in existing paving. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Notify the Architect immediately in the event that piping, electrical conduit or other underground utilities, not indicated, are encountered in the excavation. All utilities, conduits, piping, etc. whether indicated or not, shall be protected to keep them safely in service. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Provide and maintain a safe place to work. Contractor to design and install of any shoring which may be required. B. Excavate as required for footings and foundations as indicated. Excavations shall conform as nearly as possible to the neat lines required by the size and shape of the footings and the footings cast in earth trenches without forming. Wet trenches immediately before placing concrete. C. Take care not to over- excavate. Over- excavations shall be backfilled with concrete. Backfilling due to over - excavations shall be done at no expense to the Owner. D. Excavate by hand to final grade all footing excavations just prior to rebar placement and prior to Architect's inspection. If excavation bottom must be extended below indicated ARG: 89119 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 02220 -2 depth due to effects from water or excavation work, provide concrete fill at no expense to Owner. E. If the Architect determines that bearing capacity of the soil is unsuitable for new foundations at levels indicated, perform additional excavation as directed, in writing, by the Architect . Such authorized over - excavation will be paid for in accordance with the article entitled "CHANGES IN THE WORK" in the General Conditions. F. Contractor to design and install shoring and bracing required to hold walls of excavation and to provide safety for workmen. G . Remove all water from excavation by pumping or draining. Keep the excavation free from water at all times. H. Do not backfill against stem wall/piers-or remove shoring until 75% design strength of the concrete has been obtained. I. Footings shall not be exposed at the lowest finished grade. J . Excavated material not required for reuse as backfill shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a legal manner. 3.03 TRENCH EXCAVATION: A. Exercise special care when excavating around existing structures and utility lines designated to remain. 1. All utilities shall be marked for location and identified by marking tapes by Contractor. B. Trenching Guidelines: Excavate the trench to the approximate level of the bottom of the utility line to be installed, using adequate trench width and side slopes to safely accommodate worker access. C. Rocky Trench Bottom: Where ledge rock, hard pan, boulders, or sharp -edged materials are encountered, over - excavate a minimum depth of six inches below the bottom of the utility exterior wall to permit adequate bedding preparation. The installed utility shall have at least six inches of clearance from any rock protrusion. D. Hand Excavation: Perform hand excavation of trenches dug within the drip line of trees. Carefully excavate around all roots two inches in diameter and larger to ensure against damage. E. Bedding: Compact the specked material to 95 percent of maximum density to the finished utility grade. G . Utility Installation: Shape the trench bottom to ensure uniform contact with the full length of the installed line and remove any sharp -edged materials that might damage the line. Compaction shall be maintained beneath the line. ARG: 89119 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 02220 -3 3.04 BACKFILL OF TRENCHES A. Backfill against foundation walls only after review by the Architect, and by Building Inspector if required. Backfill so as to avoid damage to the walls. No jetting will be allowed. B . Drain rock, as indicated, shall be permeable, free - draining gravel or crushed rock. C. Before placing backfill, remove all debris, forms, or shoring lumber from the area to be filled. D. Backfill other than drain rock shall be compacted as specified in Section 3.04 below. E. Utilities: Fill by hand placement around the utility to just over half depth, and compact in a manner to ensure against lateral or vertical displacement or damage of utilities. 3.05 COMPACTED FILLS A. Compact subgrade soil in excavation to dry densities in excess of 90 percent of the maximum dry density as obtained by the Standard Compaction test, ASTM Designation. It may be necessary to adjust the moisture content of the subgrade soil by watering or aeration, to bring the moisture content of the soil near optimum in order that the specified densities can be obtained. B . Spread fill materials in layers. It shall have a uniform moisture content that will provide the specified dry density after compaction. If necessary to obtain uniform distribution of moisture, water shall be added to each layer by sprinkling and manipulated after the water is added. The layers of the fill material shall not exceed 8 inches and each layer shall be compacted with suitable compaction equipment to provide the specified dry densities. Compaction by flooding, ponding or jetting will not be permitted. C. The dry density of the compacted earth fill shall exceed 90 percent of the maximum dry density obtainable in the Standard Compaction Test, ASTM Designation D 1557 D. No fill shall be placed during weather conditions which will alter the moisture content of the fill material sufficiently to make adequate compaction impossible. After placing operations have been stopped because of adverse weather conditions, no additional fill material shall be placed until the last layer compacted has been checked and found to be compacted to the specified densities. E. Use mechanical tampers for sand gravel containing a significant portion of fine- grained material. Hand tamp around pipe to protect the lines until adequate cushion is attained. 1. Planting Areas: Fill and compact in 6-inch maximum layers to 90 percent of maximum density. Allow 12 inches form the top of compacted fill to the top of curbs and slabs adjacent to planting areas for installation of planting mix. 3.06 SURFACE FINISH WORK A. Planting Areas: Prepare the area for proper planting of specified plant materials. Remove trench and backfill materials from adjacent planting areas to permit unhindered growth of plants. ARG: 89119 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 02220 -4 La Ej g B. Paved Areas: 1. Concrete: Repair concrete as required to match existing adjacent surfaces. See Section 03300, Concrete for further requirements. 2. Asphaltic Concrete: a. Provide compacted, soil subbase as recommended by manufacturer and as required by Cal -Trans Specification. b. Provide aggregate subbase of thickness and material to match existing. Compact and construct aggregate subbase as recommended by manufacturer and as required by Cal -Trans Specification. Remove loose materials from compacted aggregate subbase immediately before applying prime coat. c. Apply prime coat to aggregate subbase and cure as recommended by manufacturer and as required by Cal -Trans Specification. d. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to contract surfaces of existing asphalt and surfaces abutting or projecting into new asphalt as recommended by manufacturer and as required by Cal -Trans Specification. e. Make joints between existing and new pavement and between successive days work, to insure continuous bond between adjoining work. Make cut -outs in existing asphalt pavement where new asphalt is placed on top of existing. Do not feather new asphalt. Construct joints to have same texture, density and smoothness as existing adjacent paving. f. Finish asphalt paving flush with abutting asphalt paving, concrete paving, drains, and manholes covers. Grade between adjacent paving, curbs, and other surfaces to produce a smooth surface which will not collect water or retain dirt. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. Slope to drain. g . Traffic Line Paint 1) Prepare paving by removing chalk, dirt, grease and oils. Do not paint over surface where moisture content exceeds manufacturers recommendations. 2) Paint surfaces as required by codes and standards and as indicated. Apply paint per manufacturer's recommendations. 3) Protect adjacent work from paint. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing and repaint as required. Provide "Wet Paint" signs or barriers to protect newly painted surfaces. 3.07 CLEAN -UP A. Prior to final inspection and acceptance, remove all rubbish and excess material for disposal as accepted, and leave area in a neat and clean to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 02220 -5 SECTION 02710 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Field Engineering: Section 01050. 2. Landscaping and Irrigation: Section 02900. 4. Concrete: Section 03300. 5. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the work necessary to repair and replace existing sub- surface drainage and install new sub - surface drainage as required. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certification: Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of a statement (the format of which is subject to the Owner's approval) certifying that the installed system conforms to the Specifications and the system has successfully passed specified flow tests. 1.04 INSPECTION A. Contractor shall verify extent and condition of existing subsurface drainage system, including area drains, downspout inlets, outlets and connection to storm sewer. 1.05 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent existing and newly placed construction, finishes, irrigation and plant materials as necessary to prevent damage during installation of this work. ARG: 89119 SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM 02710 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. Existing Materials: Existing materials are believed to be as listed below. If materials are encountered which differ from the assumed, immediately notify Architect for direction prior to proceeding. 1. Drain tile: 4 inch diameter clay drain tile. 2. Cast Iron fittings above grade at downspouts. B . Repair existing system with new materials to match existing. C. New Materials where system is replaced due to Work: 1. Drain Pipe: Schedule 40, Polyvinyl Chloride, 4 inch diameter, perforated, flexible drain pipe. 2. Clay "tees" and fittings as required to connect to existing system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of subsurface drainage. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. At existing installation: Repair as required to drain. B . New Installation: 1. Trench: Bottom of trench shall be a minimum of 24 inches below finished grade. Bottom of trench shall be smooth and free of rocks, snags, debris, or sharp objects. The width of the trench at and below the top of the pipe shall be such that the clear space between the barrel of the pipe and the trench wall shall not be less than 12 inches on either side of the pipe. The width of the trench above that level may be as wide as necessary for sheeting and bracing and proper performance of the Work. The banks of the excavation shall be as nearly vertical as is possible. 2. Gravel: Install drain pipe on 6 inches of gravel. Compact gravel lightly to eliminate sharp edges prior to installing pipe. 3. Install drain pipe to slope a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot to outlet point. Lay pipe straight on gravel bed. Minimum turning radius: 3 feet. 3.03 COMPLETION A. At completion of Work under this section, remove all surplus material, debris and rubbish resulting from work under this Section from the site. END OF SECTION A La Im ARG: 89119 SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM 02710 -2 ft- SECTION 02900 PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Site Clearing and Demolition: Section 02115. 2. Subdrainage System: Section 02710. 3. Concrete: Section 03300. 4. Plumbing: Section 16000. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work as described on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . The Work of this Section shall include, without limitation, supply and installation of new landscape materials as required by seismic work and new construction on site, as well as the repair of and revisions to the existing irrigation system as required by this Work. 1. The Landscape Subcontractor shall provide a design/build installation that shall successfully meet the criteria set forth herein. Work of this section includes, without limitation: a. Revisions to existing landscape finish grading and planting.as required by new construction. b. Mulch and Top Dressing. c. Drainage Rock. d. Insect, Weed and Fungus Control. e. Maintenance and Plant Establishment. f. Watering. g. Trenching. h. Installation of Valves. i. Installation of Backflow Preventers. j . Installation of Sprinkler Heads. k. Backfill. 1. Testing. m. Adjustments. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate operations with other trades, utility firms, street tree department and other affected public departments to assure continuity of access and service in conformance with applicable requirements of these organizations. ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -1 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage Areas: 1. Contractor shall coordinate the locations of material and equipment storage on -site within the limits of work as indicated on Drawings. 2. Location shall be where it will not interfere with other work under separate contracts. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for all materials and equipment stored on site. B. Delivery: I. Deliver fertilizer to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade mark, and conformance to Laws and Regulations. 2. Deliver all plants with legible identification labels. 3. The Contractor shall notify the Architect seven (7) days in advance of delivery of all plant materials and shall submit an itemized list of the plants in each delivery. C. Storage: Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted within four (4) hours in a healthy, vigorous condition. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall examine the Site, determine and verify all existing conditions under which he will be obligated to operate in performing the Work. Contractor shall verify extent and condition of existing planting and irrigation system. B. Location of Underground Utilities: Verify locations of underground utilities prior to the installation of trees. If any discrepancies occur between Drawings and site condition, notify the Architect immediately and adjust tree locations(s) as per his direction prior to proceeding. C. Protection: The Contractor shall be responsible to cover all pipe openings, valves, etc., before and after being set in place to prevent obstructions in the pipe and valves. 1.06 PERMITS A. Any permits for the installation or construction of the irrigation system shall be obtained and paid for by the Irrigation Subcontractor. 1.07 SUPERINTENDENT, SUPERVISION A. Landscape and Irrigation Subcontractor(s) employ a competent superintendent and any necessary assistant, all satisfactory to the Owner, throughout the course of the Work. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Owner unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Landscape Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given by him shall be as binding as if given by the Landscape Contractor. ME ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -2 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Design Drawings: Within thirty (30) days after the award of the Contract, Landscape Subcontractor shall submit five copies of planting and irrigation system Design Drawings to the Architect for review and approval. 1. Minimum format for drawings shall be 24 "06 ". 2. All drawings shall be drafted by a competent draftsperson at a conventional scale, using conventional symbols for piping, . B . Materilas Lists: Within thirty (30) days after the award of the Contract, submit a complete list of materials proposed for installation to the Architect for approval. 1. List all materials by manufacturer's name and model number. 2. List plants by common, as well as Latin names. C . Certificates: Prior to final acceptance, written certifications (in a format acceptable to the Owner) shall be executed and submitted by the Contractor to the Owner for the following: 1. Quantity of commercial fertilizer or organic fertilizer and/or organic amendment. 2. Quantity of soil amendments. 3. Quantity of pesticide. 4. Quantity of herbicide. 5. Soil test verification of soil amendment in compliance with these specifications. D. Record Drawings: Contractor shall maintain daily records showing all locations of main lines, buried valves, conductors, quick coupler valves and plugged or capped outlets. Locate each item from two points of architectural permanence i.e., curbs, walls, light standards, etc. prior to backfill. Do not dimension from sprinkler heads or other parts of the irrigation system. 1. Obtain reproducible drawings from the Architect, at Contractor's cost for use as a base for Record Drawings. 2. Keep Record Drawings on Site for daily observation by the Architect. 3. Deliver completed Record Drawings to the Architect as part of the Close -Out procedure, not less than fiftenn (15) days prior to submission of final Application for Payment. 4. Delivery of Record does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility of providing any further information that may be omitted from the prints. E. Keys: Provide two (2) sets of keys to controller boxes, Q.C.V. and hose swivels to the Owner, as part of the Close -out procedure. 1.09 OBSERVATION A. Workmanship: Architect shall observe and approve the following before installation of seed or plants This observation shall be made immediately before and during placement. Contractor shall hav e equipment prepared so that observation will only. 1. Finish grading. 2. Soil preparation. 3. Header installation. 4. Placement of shrubs and trees. all necessary materials, labor and occur on a maximum of two (2) dates ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -3 B. Substantial Completion: 1. Architect shall observe work following written notification from the Contractor that the Work is Substantially Complete (See Section 01700, Project Close -Out ). a. Contractor shall provide a written request for observation received by the Architect not less than seven (7) days prior to inspection date. b. All deficiencies found by this observation shall be corrected immediately and approved by means of a second observation by the Architect. c. Entire irrigation system shall be tested and in operation at the time of observation. Any items deemed not acceptable shall be reworked to the satisfaction of the Architect. d. The Landscape Maintenance Period shall not commence until written notice of approval of landscape and irrigation installation has been received from the Architect. C. Final Observation of the Work % 1. Written request for observation shall be addressed to the Owner and Architect at least seven (7) days prior to the anticipated termination date of the Landscape Maintenance Period. 2. The Contractor, Lansdscape Subcontractor(s), Architect, Owner and future Maintenance Contractor shall meet on the Site to review the project and state of the landscape. At that time any final adjustments necessary to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Docuemnts shall be made to the planting and irrigation systems. After the Landscape Maintenace Period ends, but while the extended warranty on plant materials, described herein, is still in effect, the Maintenance Contractor shall notify the Contractor in writing of any problems, diseases, etc. 1.10 WARRANTEES A. Plant materials shall be warranted by the Contractor to take root, grow and thrive. This will be as determined by Architect and Owner. Contractor shall guarantee: 1. All plant material to be true to name and variety. 2. That any plant material that is not healthy, dies, dying or the design value of which, in the opinion of the Architect, has been so injured or damaged as to render it unsuitable for the purpose intended, shall be replaced immediately by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The removal of plant material, additional fertilizer and topsoil necessary for the replacement, all labor, and correction of any damage to the adjacent areas incurred by the Contractor during replacement shall be at the Contractor's expense. a. All replacement plant materials shall also be governed by this guarantee with the exception of commencement time, which shall be the date of replanting. 3. Contractor shall not be responsible under the above guarantees for damage arising from acts of God, vandalism, negligence or inadequate maintenance by the Owner. 4. "Landscape Maintenance Period ": Contractor shall cause the Landscape Subcontractor(s)to be responsible for maintaning all plant materials for a period of one year from the date of final approval of the Work of this Section, such maintenance shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall guarantee: ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -4 ok a. Against improper handling, improper installation, and improper protection and maintenance during Landscape Maintenance Period, and for the time periods commencing from the end of the maintenance period as follows: 1) One (1) year for all 24" box and larger size plants. 2) Six (6) months for all 1,5, and 15 gallon size plants. 3) One (1) month for all ground cover. B . The entire irrigation system shall be warranted by the Contractor, against defects in materials, equipment and workmanship. The warranty shall also cover repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting from defects, leaks or settling of trenches. Defects shall be promptly repaired, at the Contractors' sole expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner, including the restoration of planting, paving, structures or other improvements. 1. "Irrigation Maintenance Period ": Contractor shall cause the Landscape Subcontractor(s) to be responsible for maintaning the irrigation system for a period of one year from the date of final approval of the Work of this Section, such maintenance shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall guarantee: a. If, during that period, settlement occurs and adjustments in pipes, valves and sprinkler heads, planting areas or paving are necessary to bring the system to the proper level of the permanent grades, the Contractor shall make all adjustments with no additional cost to the Owner. b. After the system has been completed, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner in the operation and maintenance of the system. c. Contractor wilf not be held responsible under the above guarantee for damage arising from acts of God, vandalism, negligence, or inadequate maintenance by Owner. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Plants shall conform with the American Association of Nursery Standards, ANSI Z60.0, in all ways B. Upon delivery of plant material to site: 1. All plant material shall be observed and approved by the Architect for quality, size and variety prior to installation. Such approval shall not unpair the right of observation and rejection during the progress of the work for size,condition, latent defects, diseases or injuries. 2. Provide tags or labels on five or 5% of each variety of plans (whichever is greater) which identify genus, species, and (if applicable) variety of proper botanical name. 3. All rejected plant material shall be removed from site within two working days. 1.12 DAMAGE TO PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall restore to its original condition, at no additional cost to the Owner, any damage due to negligence of any of the Contractor's employees, agents, Subcontractors or others for whose acts Contractor may be liable. B. Any existing buildings, equipment, piping, oil lines, pipe coverings, sewers, sidewalks, landscaping, etc., damaged during the course of the Work shall be replaced or repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner, before final payment will be made. ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -5 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages to the grounds, walks, roads, building, piping systems, electrical systems and their equipment and contents caused by leaks or water damage as a result of the irrigation system being installed or having been installed. He shall repair, at no additional cost to the Owner, all damage so caused. All repair work shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. 1.13 PAYMENT FOR ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS A. Any additional observations of the Work required of the Architect because of non- compliance with these Contract Documents shall be paid by the Contractor at the Architect's current hourly rates. Charges incurred by any additional soil analyses required shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.14 CLEAN -UP AND DISPOSAL A. Keep the work area and the adjacent areas affected free and clear of all debris caused by the work of this Section. During and upon completion of work herein specified, remove all debris, unused materials and equipment related to the work of this Section, and leave work in a safe and clean acceptable condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 IRRIGATION MATERIALS A. Type of System: Provide materials as required for a drip irrigation system. All materials shall be new and of size and type as required to successfully perform the Work of this Section. All materials of like -kind shall be of one manufacturer. B. Newly installed equipment shall be compatible with the existing irrigation equipment to remain. 2.02 PLANT MATERIALS A. Plant materials shall be furnished in quantities required to complete the work as indicated and shall be of species, kinds, sizes, etc. indicated and specified herein. B . Plants shall be symmetrical, typical for the variety and species, sound, healthy, vigorous and free from plant disease and insect pests and their eggs. C. All plants shall conform to the State of California Grading Code of Nursery Stock or equivalent and shall be Number 1 Grade. D. All plants shall conform to quantity and quality standards as set forth in USDA Standard for Nursery Stock, Publication No. 260.1. E. All plants shall be grown in nurseries observed by the State of California Department of Agriculture. F. Plants shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those of the jobsite for at least one year. ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -6 G. All trees and shrubs shall be container grow or established "boxed out" field grown materials unless otherwise specified. H . Pruning: At no time shall trees or plant materials be pruned, trimmed or topped prior to delivery and any alteration of their shape shall be conducted only with the approval and as directed by the Architect. I. Ground Cover Plants: Rooted cuttings or seedlings shall have been grown in flats and remain in those flats until planting. Plant roots shall be well developed, but not so excessive that they do not separate without breaking when plants are removed from flats. Plant roots shall be kept moist at all times while in flats. J. Substitute plant material will not be permitted unless specifically approved in writing by the Architect. K . All Manufactured and/or Processed Items or Materials: All materials shall be installed in accordance with the methods, techniques and specifications as set forth by each representative manufacturer. All pertinent descriptive literature issued by any of these manufacturers shall become a part of these specifications. 2.03 SOIL A. The Contractor shall verify the amounts of soil, where required, by plan check and site observation. The Contractor shall provide adequate amounts of specified soils to attain grades, after compaction, as shown and/or noted on drawings. B . Fill and Back Fill: Fill and backfill soil shall contain no more than twenty percent (20 %) clay (expandable material) and have a pH range between 6.0 and 8.0. Mix shall be free of debris, any noxious weeds, ingredients or objects that are detrimental to healthy plant growth. C. Imported Topsoil: All topsoil to be fertile, friable, natural top - loam free from alkali, noxious weed seed, admixtures of clay, sub- soil, rocks larger than 1" diameter, sticks, debris, construction waste or other foreign matter that would be detrimental to healthy plant growth. Silt plus clay content of the import soil shall not exceed 20% by weight with a minimum 95% passing the 2.0 millimeter sieve. The sodium absorption ratio (SAR) shall not exceed 6 and the electrical conductivity (ECE) of the saturation extract of this soil shall not exceed 3.0 millimhos per centimeter at 25 degrees centigrade. The boron content shall be no greater than 1 part per million as measured on the saturation extract. In order to insure conformance, samples of the import soil shall be submitted to the laboratory for analysis prior to, and following, backfilling. Contractor shall submit soil test results to Architect for approval. 2.04 FERTILIZER AND SOIL AMENDMENTS - SOIL PREPARATION A. The following organic, soil amendments and fertilizer are to be used for bid price basis only. Specific amendments and fertilizer specification will be made after rough grading operations are complete and soil samples are tested by the Contractor as described in Section 1.10, above. B. All materials shall be of standard, approved and first -grade quality and shall be in prime condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -7 packaged material shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened container bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. C. Nitrolized Redwood Sawdust: 1. 100% redwood sawdust, no shavings allowed. 2. Physical Properties: Percent Passing Sieve size 95 -100 6.5mm (1/4 inch) 80 -100 2.38 mm (No. 8, 8 mesh) 0 -30 500 micron (No. 35, 32 mesh) 3. Chemical Properties: a. Nitrogen Content (Dry weight basis): Minimum 1.00 percent. b. Iron Content: Minimum .08 percent dilute acid soluble iron (Fe) on dry- wieght basis. c. Soluble Salts: Maximum 3.5 millimhos /centimeter at 25 degree C. as determined by saturation extraction method. d. Ash (Dry Weight Basis): 0 -6.0 percent. D. Controlled- Release Fertilizer: 16 -7 -12 (N -P -K) with 21 gram contolled- release fertilizer tablets, 10 -10 -5 (N -P -K). E. Topsoil: Imported topsoil on grade shall be a light sandy loam, free from rocks larger than 1 inch and and free of any deleterious materials which may be harmful to plant growth. All imported topsoil shall have an agricultural suitability test by a qualified soils laboratory prior to delivery to the job site. Submit test results to the Architect for review. F . Weed Control: Provide herbicides for control of all harmful weeds as is necessary to protect all plant materials. The Contractor shall verify compatibility of herbicide with proposed plant materials. Contractor shall be responsible for application methods and rates. All applications shall be in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations .\ G. INSECT CONTROL: Provide insecticides for control of all harmful insects as is necessary to protect all plant materials and as approved by a licensed Pest Control Advisor. 2.05 DRAINAGE MATERIAL A. Gravel for drainage shall be 3/4" to 1 -1/4" diameter washed gravel or crushed rock, free of dirt and extraneous materials. 2.06 WATER A. Domestic, potable water from sources on site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 IRRIGATION GENERAL A. Contractor shall design and install a drip irrigation system to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide for the healthy maintenance of ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -8 0 the plant materials indicated, be compatible with existing irrigation system components to remain and comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Contractor shall modify existing irrigation system components as required for installation of a drip irrigation system. C. Observe installed work of other trades and verify that it is complete to the point where irrigation work may properly commence. 3.02 CONNECTION TO WATER SUPPLY (POC) A. Prior to submitting Bid, Contractor shall verify point of connection to existing water sources. 3.03 LAYOUT OF HEADS AND STAKING A. Sprinkler heads shall be staked and installed as close as practical to the locations shown on the Contractor's Design Drawings. Discrepancies between Contractor's Desing Drawings and Site conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect immediately. Do no proceed with trenching prior to resolution of discrepecies by the Architect. B. Do not install the sprinkler system where it is obvious in the field that previously unknown obstructions or grade differences exist, that might not have been considered in the engineering, or if discrepancies in construction details, legend or specific notes are discovered. . 3.04 TRENCHING A. Check all grades so that work may proceed, keeping materials at required depth. B . Do all excavation for installation of Work. Mechanical trenching machines shall be of approved type to cut trenches with straight sides. Trenches shall be only wide enough to lay the pipe and control wires. Perform minor adjustments to avoid existing utilities as directed with no additional cost to the Owner. "Pulling" of pipe and/or control wires will not be permitted C. Use all possible care to protect existing trees and plants during trenching. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter shall be tunneled under and wrapped with wet burlap to prevent scarring or drying. When roots one inch and larger are cut, they shall be painted with two coats of approved sealer manufactured for this purpose. Cover all trenches in root areas (only while open) with wet burlap and backfill within 24 hours after opening the trench. Obtain Architect's approval before cutting any root over one inch in diameter. All trenching in such areas shall be done by hand. D. If pipe must be laid after paving is in place, it shall be done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving. If cutting or breaking of any paving is necessary, it shall be done and replaced with like material at the expense of the Contractor after obtaining approval of the Architect. Hydraulic driving will not be permitted under asphalt paving. ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -9 3.05 ASSEMBLY OF PIPES A. Pipe shall be assembled in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and in consideration of prevailing site and weather conditions. B . Threaded Joints: 1. Plastic to plastic: Field threading of plastic pipe or fittings is not permitted - use only factory- molded materials. 2. Plastic to metal connections shall be made by means of of male plastic threads. 3. Metal threaded joints shall be made with proper tools and joint compounds, caulking will not be permitted. No more than three full threads shall show when joint is made up. C. Rubber Ring Seal Joint: 1. Use factory made male end or prepare field -cut male end to exact specifications of factory made end. 2. Carefully clean bell or coupling and insert rubber ring without lubricant. Position ring carefully according to factory instructions. 3. Lubricate male end according to manufacturers' recommendations and insert male end to specified depth. Use hand only when inserting PVC pipe. D. Solvent Weld Joints: 1. Verify that pipe end is square, deburr pipe amd clean pipe and fitting of dirt, dust and moisture. 2. Dry- insert pipe into fitting to check for missing. Pipe should enter fitting 1/3 to 2/3 the depth of socket. 3. Coat the inside socket surface of the fitting and the external surface of the male end of the pipe with P -70 primer (manufacturered by Weld -On) or accepted equal. Then, without delay, apply Weld -On 711 cement, or accepted equal, liberally to the male end of the pipe and lightly to the inside of the socket. Apply a second coat of cement to the pipe end. 4. Immediately insert pipe into fitting and turn 1/4 turn in the same motion to distribute cement and remove air bubbles. The pipe shall seat to the bottom of the fitting. Pipe and fitting shall be aligned properly without strain to either. 5. Hold joint of thirty (30) seconds and then wipe off excess cement from the pipe and fitting. Cure joint a minimum of thirty (30) minutes before handling and at least six (6) hours before allowing water in pipe. E. Flanged connections shall use approved gaskets and bolt sets. Assembly bolts shall be tightened to proper torque. F. Field- cutting is to be discouraged and shall be made only when absolutely necessary. G . All pipe shall be assembled free of dirt and pipe scale. Field -cut ends shall be reamed only to full pipe diameter with rough edges an burrs removed. H. Provide concrete thrust blocks where necessary to resist system pressure on ring - type pipe fittings. Blocks shall be concrete and the size shall be based on an , average soil safe bearing load of 700 pounds per square foot. Form thrust blocks in such a manner that concrete comes in contact with the fittings. Thrust blocks shall be between solid soil and fittings. ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -10 3.06 LAYING OF LINES A. All lines set in place under paving shall extend 18" minimum beyond such paving and be capped hand tight. No fittings, including couplings will be permitted under surfaces to be paved except where the length of the line under the paving exceeds 20 feet or where shown on the drawings, i.e. parking lots, etc. B . Pipes shall be bedded in at least 2 inches of finely divided material with no rocks over 1 inch in diameter to provide a firm uniform bearing surface. C. Snake PVC plastic pipes side to side in trench bottom keeping 4" horizontal clearance between two pipes in same trench. Do not lay pipe in trench containing water or at less than 32 degrees F. Centerload immediately, leaving joints exposed. D. Except where necessary for making connections lay pipe with the bells facing the direction of laying. 3.07 LAYING OF CONTROL WIRES A. Lay wires in common trench with main lines wherever possible. Splicing is allowed with 24" expansion loop only in electrical junction box with bolt down Ed. Common wire and pilot wires are to be tagged with 1/4" wide embossed plastic labeling tape, showing controller and station number designation. Use plastic electrical tape and bind all control wires in bundles at 10 feet intervals. All splices shall be waterproof. 3.08 FLUSHING OF MAINLINES A. Mains shall be flushed before attaching remote control valves, quick coupler valves, hose bibbs or pressure relief valves and with pipe centerloaded. All water being discharged shall be temporarily piped up and out of the trenches. Trenches are to be kept dry for pressure tests to follow B . Laterals shall be flushed before sprinkler heads are installed Cap all risers, apply pressure, remove caps in sequence starting at cap nearest the control valve. Replace caps before removing caps to follow. Continue to end of each lateral. Flush until all foreign matter and mud is cleared of the system. Contractor to provide all materials needed for flushing operations. 3.09 PRESSURE TESTS A. Perform all hydrostatic tests in presence of the Architect after flushing lines. Maintain 125 PSI without any pressure drop on main lines for 2 hours with all air expelled from line and with all valves in place. All leaks shall be corrected in mechanical manner without use of epoxy fillers or other filler compounds. Provide all equipment for tests including force pump and pressure gauges. 3.10 BACKFILL A. After the work has been installed, flushed, tested, and proven tight in the presence of the Architect, backfill with fine materials. Allow no rocks or other objects larger than one inch diameter to fall in the first 6" of cover. Backfill in 4" layers and tamp properly to avoid any voids. Flooding of trenches shall be done ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -11 only with the approval of the Architect. However, all sandy soils, as determined by the Architect, shall be flooded during the backfill- compaction operation. Compact backfill over lateral lines to equal density of adjoining undisturbed soils, and compact to 90% over main lines. All trenches shall be left flush to the adjoining undisturbed grades. All backfill under surfaces to be paved for vehicular use shall be compacted to 95 %. Any work covered prior to observations by the Architect shall be uncovered at the expense of the Contractor to allow for such observations if demanded by the Architect. Any surplus soil shall be distributed on site as directed by the Architect. 3.12 CONTROLLER MAINTENANCE CHARTS A. Provide hermetically sealed plastic covered charts in each automatic controller, showing only the systems operated by that controller. Charts to be as large as possible to fit door and meet approval of the Architect before being acceptable for insertion in plastic. Charts to be in controllers for the final observation by the Architect. 3.13 PAINTING A. Paint all ferrous valves, fittings, pipes and enclosures installed permanently above grade with one coat fish oil base metal primer and two coats of outdoor enamel, using a color as approved by the Architect. 3.14 ADJUSTING SYSTEM A. Adjust entire system prior to coverage test, and again at conclusion of maintenance period. 1. Set all shut -off valves in the system to full open position. 2. Adjust all stationary heads to uniform coverage on each system using adjusting screws in each sprinkler head and by control of the throttle device on each remote control valve. 3. Adjust arcs of all heads to prevent overspray areas to be kept dry. Replace nozzles in heads to different arcs, i.e., 180 degrees nozzle to 120 degree nozzle, etc. to provide proper and more adequate coverage. These changes or adjustments shall be made without additional cost. 4. Install check valves to prevent drainage from any sprinkler head. 5. Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements. Give Owner's representative a key to controllers and written instructions on how to turn off system in case of emergency. 3.15 COVERAGE TEST A. When installation of the sprinkler system is completed, perform a coverage test in the presence of the Architect to determine that coverage for planting areas is complete and adequate and to verify that heads are not spraying building. B. Where inadequate coverage occur the Contractor shall provide necessary material and perform work to correct all inadequacies without additional cost. These tests and corrections shall be accomplished before any ground cover or turf is planted. ow ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -12 10- 3.16 LANDSCAPE GRADING A. Landscape Fine Grading: All landscape areas shall be graded within approximately 1 /10 (0.10) feet of existing. If additional soil is necessary to bring grade to proper elevations as specified herein the Contractor shall arrange for the installation of imported soil. 1. Under this Section all soil shall be brought to grades as required, importing soil as necessary and anticipating the installation of soil amenders and settling and/or compaction. Imported soil shall be compacted to a minimum of 80% and a maximum of 90% prior to soil preparation. (The soil shall not be worked when the moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur nor when it is so dry that clods will not break readily) Water shall be applied, if necessary, to provide ideal moisture for filling and for planting as herein specified. 2. Grades shall be governed as follows: a. 1" below adjacent paving or curb. b. 1 1/2" below adjacent paving, curb, and mowing strips for shrubs and ground cover beds. 3. Make entire area smooth and even to finish grade. Cultivate all areas so that there are no humps or hollows, so that areas drain as indicated. Grade to allow free flow of surface water to drainage devices and/or away from the areas without it puddling or ponding and/or channeling such that undue erosion could occur. Cultivate entire planting area to a depth of 6" minimum and remove all rock in excess of 1" in diameter, rubble, construction material and waste and any other material that may cause unsatisfactory results. B . Backfill, Imported Fill or Artificial Soil and Gravel: Prior to the installation of any imported soil, backfill, gravel fill or sub -base, required under the Work of this Section, the Contractor shall observe the integrity of all water - proofing and damp- proofing membranes which occur over, on or against any construction which said material is to be installed. The Contractor shall arrange for the satisfactory correction of any defects which might affect the performance of the above membranes prior to proceeding with any work. C. Topsoil: Import additional topsoil only as required to bring planting area up to finish grade. Topsoil shall be imported by the Contractor and shall be of the quality specified herein. Soil shall be spread and cultivated so that no overt settling takes place at any time. D. Remove all stumps, roots and stones larger than I" in diameter and vegetative growth not shown to remain. E. All soil polluted by gasoline, oil, plaster, construction debris, or other substances which would render it unsuitable for a proper plant growth medium shall be removed from the premises whether or not such pollution occurs or exists prior to or during the contract period. Such materials shall be disposed of off Site in accordance with all applicable Laws and Regulations. F. Dispose of buried debris found upon any excavation, at no additional expense to Owner. Such materials shall be disposed of off Site in accordance with all applicable Laws and Regulations. G. Elimination of Live Perennial Weeds: Prior to commencement of soil amending, planting or seeding, all existing live perennial weeds shall be killed by means of ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -13 spraying with a non - selective systemic herbicide as recommended and applied by an approved State Licensed Pest Control Advisor and Applicator, prior to any soil amending, planting or seeding in the area. Contractor shall wait the required time interval specified by the manufacturer before commencing subsequent work. 3.17 SOIL PREPARATION A. Verify proper scheduling of soil amending and fumigation with fumigant manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor will take soil samples prior to installation of soil amendments and after all grading is completed, as described in Section 1.10. When results of soil tests are complete, Contractor shall review soil amendment requirements and forward amendment quantities to Architect for approval. Pending soil test results, the soil shall be amended as itemized. B. Soil Amendments: Thoroughly and uniformly incorporate by mechanical tiller, in two directions, where possible, or by hand tilling, into the top 6 inches of soil, the following: 1. For all planting areas to receive ground cover plants and shrubs: 2 cubic yards nitrogen stabilized wood shavings. 200 lbs. Gro -Power Plus, 5 -3 -1 Soil conditioner /fertilizer. 3.18 HERBICIDE APPLICATION A. Herbicide shall be applied to all planting areas within contract limits. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. After this application, apply 1 inch to 2 inches of water. 3.19 PLANTING A. Do not install any plant material or lawn until irrigation system is installed, tested, approved by Architect and operating normally. Planting, staking, guying and tying of trees to be followed by planting of shrubs, vines, ground cover, and lawn, in respective order. Plan drawings indicate the desired size, type and location of plant material and are to be followed as closely as possible. In the event changes from indicated locations are deemed necessary by the Architect, they shall be made by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner, provided the change is ordered before the particular plant material is installed and no significant additional labor or material is required. When plant material is spaced in rows, the total dimension shall be verified and the plants equally spaced within the designated area. B. Lay -out of Major Plantings: Locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be marked on the ground by the Contractor before any plant pits are dug. All such locations shall be approved by the Architect. If underground construction or utility line is encountered in the excavation of planting areas, other locations for planting may be selected by the Architect. Layout shall be accomplished with flagged grade stakes indicating plant names and specified container size on each stake. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to confirm with the governing agencies the location and depth of all underground utilities and obstructions. ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -14 V C. Planting: All plants shall be installed with main stems bearing the same relation to finished grade that they did in their place of growth. All plants shall be located in the center of plant pits. All main stems shall be vertical. 1. No plant shall be planted if the root ball is broken or cracked either before or during the process of installation. 2. No wilted plant shall be planted. 3. Water all plants immediately after installation. D. Plant Pits: 1. Plant pits for container grown plants larger than 15 gallon size shall have vertical sides with widths 2 times wider than root ball width and a depth 12" deeper than the height of the root ball. 2. Plant pits for container grown plants 1 gallon size to 15 gallon size shall be as follows: Container Sizes Pit Width Pit Depth 1 gallon 12" 12" 2 gallon 18" 14" 5 gallon 24" 18" 7 gallon 26" 22" 15 gallon 36" 24" 3. Plant pits for rooted cuttings or seedlings to be at least 6" x 6" x 6 ". E. Back Fill for Plant Pits: 1. Fill with backfill to proper height to receive the plant, and thoroughly tamp the mixture before setting the plant. 2. Set plant in upright position in the center of the hole, and compact the back fill mixture around the rootball. 3. Thoroughly water each plant when the hole is 2/3 full. 4. After watering, tamp the soil in place until the surface of the back fill is level with the surrounding grade. 5. Back Fill a. For all container sized plants, other than Azaleas, backfill shall be a uniform mixture of the following ingredients (by volume): 1) 60% excavated soil. 2) 40% Nitrogen stabilized wood shavings. 3) 17 pounds per cubic yard 5 -3 -1 Gro -Power Plus Soil conditioner /fertilizer. 4) Add planting tablets per section 3.05E -5C. b. For all Azalea and Camellia Beds: 1) Back fill per section 3.O1A -2C. 2) Add planting tablets per section 3.05E -5C. 3) Top dress with Gro -Power controlled release 12 -8 -8 at 1/4 cup per pplant. Work fertilizer into top 4" of soil. c. All backfill shall be installed and semi - compacted in a manner so that after settling, the base of plant stem is flush with adjacent finish grade. During backfilling, place fertilizer tablets near, but not in direct contact with, the bottom half of the root balls at the following rates: 1) 2 tablets per 1 gallon plant 2) 3 tablets per 2 gallon plant 3) 6 tablets per 5 gallon plant 4) 8 tablets per 7 gallon plant 5) 12 tablets per 15 gallon plant 6) 14 tablets per 24 inch and larger boxes 7) 18 tablets per 36 inch box ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -15 8) 22 tablets per 48 inch and larger boxes. d. For all ground cover plants, and 4" pots place one tablet near but not in contact with, the bottom half of the root ball. 6. Watering Basins: a. For plants not within lawn areas construct a berm 3" above finish grade and continuous at the periphery of the root ball of the plant such as to keep water confined around the root ball. Basins shall have flat bottoms. 7. Rooted Cuttings or Seedlings (Ground Cover): a. Plants shall be grown in flats until time for planting. At time of planting, pits for plants from flats shall be at least 6" x 6" and the earth around each plant shall be fumed sufficiently to force out all air pockets. Water immediately after planting, and keep root zone adequately moist for the duration of the work. 3.20 WATERING A. Trees, Shrubs and Ground Cover 1. Water plants immediately after planting. Do not allow plants to dry out before or while being planted. Keep exposed roots wet with wet sawdust, peat moss or burlap at all times during planting operations. 2. Immediately after planting, apply water to each tree, shrub and vine by means of a hose in a moderate stream in the planting hole until the material about the roots is completely saturated from the bottom of the hole to the top of the ground. 3. Following the planting of ground cover, each plant shall be immediately and thoroughly watered by means of a hose with a slow stream of running water. 4. Apply water in sufficient quantities and as often as seasonal conditions require to keep the ground wet, but not soaking, at all times, well below the root systems of the plants and grass. 5. Water plants which cannot be watered efficiently with existing system with a hose. B. Contractor shall pay for the water used prior to Substantial Completion. See Section 0 15 10, Temporary Facilities for requirments. 3.21 MULCH COVER A. All ground cover, perennial, shrub, and annual beds to be dressed with 3/4" layer of mulch. Apply in all areas less than 2:1 slope. 3.22 WEED AND PEST CONTROL A. Weeding: All planting areas shall be kept weed free during the duration of the Contract. The Contractor, at his option, may use herbicides but only specified types following the exact recommendations of a California Licensed Pest Control Operator and of the manufacturers. If the Contractor is in doubt as to whether a particular ornamental might be harmed by any herbicide, he will manually remove the weeds around the ornamental. B . Insecticides: The Contractor shall use the appropriate specified insecticides using manufacturer's recommendation during the duration of the Contract to eliminate harmful insects. Contractor shall verify that a particular insecticide is not corrosive to metal, plastic, or limestone, before any spraying. ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -16 R 3.23 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT A. All work shall be continuously maintained in all areas included in the Contract throughout the progress of the Work, and until the expiration of the Landscape and Irrigation Maintenance Periods. 1. The entire project shall be so cared for that a neat and clean condition will be presented at all times to the satisfaction of the Architect. 2. Weeds, Dallis, Johnson, Kikuyu, Nut and Bermuda Grass shall be removed. B . Contractor shall coordinate with Owner for scheduling of the maintenance activities so as not to impede normal function of the job site. C. Contractor shall keep a project maintenance log recording all herbicide, fungicide, insecticide and fertilizer applications, as well as maintenance and repair activities performed. The log will be turned over to the Owner prior to the final acceptance of the Work. D. Shrub Pruning: 1. The objective of shrub pruning are to select and develop permanent scaffold branches that are smaller in diameter than the trunk or branch to which they are attached and have radial orientation so as not to overlay one another; to eliminate diseased or damaged growth; to eliminate narrow V- shaped branch forks that lack strength; to reduce toppling and wind damage by thinning out crows; to maintain growth within space limitations; to maintain a natural appearance; to balance crown with roots. Shrubs shall not be clipped into balled or boxed forms unless such is required by the design and directed by the Architect. 2. All pruning cuts shall be made to lateral branches or buds or flush with the trunk. "Stubbing" will not be permitted. E. Staking and Guying: Remove stakes and guys as soon as they are no longer needed Stakes and guys are to be inspected to prevent girdling of trunks or branches and to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds. Replace all broken stakes and ties with specified materials. F . At the end of 30 days of the maintenance, apply NPK 5 -3 -1 Gro -Power Plus at the rate of 20 pounds per 1,000 square feet uniformly over all planted areas, including lawn. Apply equal amounts of fertilizer each 30 days thereafter until acceptance of work. G . Plants that show signs of failure to grow at any time during the progress of the Work or the Landscape Maintenance Period, or those plants so injured or damaged as to render them unsuitable for the purpose intended shall be replaced immediately by the Contractor at no addional cost to the Owner. 1. The Contractor shall replace any material which does not meet requirement within fifteen (15) days of notification. H. Damage to planting areas shall be replaced or repaired immediately. 1. Depressions caused by vehicles, bicycles or foot traffic are to be filled with topsoil and leveled. I. Control all harmful insects and fungi using appropriate insecticides and fungicides in strict accordance with regulating agencies and manufacturer's recommendations. ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -17 J. Irrigation System 1. Throughout the progress of the Work and Irrigation Maintenance Period the Contractor shall check all systems for proper operation weekly. Lateral lines shall be flushed out after removing the last sprinkler head or two at each end of the lateral. All heads are to be adjusted as necessary for unimpeded coverage. 3.24 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect seven (7) days in advance for the following site visits: 1. Pre job conference -To be conducted prior to any irrigation or landscape work under this contract. 2. Observation of flushing. 3. Observation of pressure tests. 2. Final grade review. 3. Plant material review. 4. Plant layout review. 5. Soil preparation and planting operations. 6. Pre- maintenance 4. Observation of coverage performance. 5. Final observations of the completed installation. 9. Final walk - through B. Irrigation Contractor shall not cover any work prior to observation by the Architect. C. All observances shall be requested in writing, at least 72 hours in advance. D. All work shall meet the Architect's approval, or be rectified at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.25 SITE CLEANING A. Irrigation: Clean and dispose, legally, all debris from site. Remove all storage area and all other constructions and make site ready for planting work to follow. B. Planting: 1. Remove cans, surplus materials and other debris from site. 2. Neatly dress and finish planting areas. 3. Flush walks, paved areas and the like clean to the satisfaction of the Architect. 4. Remove nursery tags and binding tape from plants. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION 02900 -18 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Field Engineering: Section 01050. 2. Excavating and Backfill: Section 02220. 3. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03200. 4. Concrete: Section 03300. 5. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 6. Structural Steel: Section 05120. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and placing concrete formwork. 1. Provide materials and labor for installation and removal of all formwork for cast -in -place concrete and the installation of embedded items. 2. Design and construction is the complete responsibility of the Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Published specifications, standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organization apply to work of this section. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Federal Specifications (FS). 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 347 'Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." 4. American Plywood Association (APA): "Guide to Plywood Grades.". 5. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB): "Standard Grading Rules No. 16," latest edition. 6. Uniform Building Code (UBC), latest edition as adopted by the City of Gilroy. B. Wood forms shall be constructed of sound material, of the correct shape and dimensions, mortar tight, of sufficient strength, and shall be braced and tied together so that placing of materials and vibrating the concrete will not move them ARG: 89119 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 -1 out of line. Forms shall be strong enough to maintain their exact shape under all imposed loads. All exposed concrete edges shall be chamfered a minimum of 1/4". C. Earth forms may be used for footings only where the soil is firm and stable and the concrete will not be exposed. Excavations shall be cut neatly and true. D. Tolerances: Finish surfaces shall not deviate more than 1/8" from a straight line 10' -0" long at any point. 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate and make provisions for the installation in the form of all sleeves, dowels, anchors, bolts, and other items required by other trades. B . Secure necessary information relating to and provide for all openings, offsets, sinkages, recesses, nailing blocks, chases, inserts, and other related items. C. Ascertain that all items necessary to be installed in the forms are accurately located and secured in the forms prior to placing of concrete. 1. Insure timely delivery of embedded items. 2. Provide all cutting and patching necessitated by failure to place embedded items without additional cost to Owner. D. Plan formwork erection and removal to permit proper sequence of placing concrete without damage to concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms for flat surfaces shall be constructed of flat lumber free from warps, checks, and raised or separated face veneers. Plywood shall be 5 -ply exterior B- B Class I "exterior" plywood, U.S. Department of Commerce Standard PS 1. Minimum thickness of 5/8" with sealed edges. Panels with raised or face veneers shall not be used. 1. Form materials shall be new at start of job. 2. Wood framing and Backing: Standard grade or better Douglas Fir. B. Form Sealer: All panels shall have a smooth surface treatment to prevent any development of bond or adhesion to concrete and to seal form surface against moisture. Form sealer shall be non -grain raising and non - staining type that will not leave residual matter on surface of concrete or adversely affect proper bonding of materials applied to concrete surfaces. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. "Form Saver," Sonnebom Building Products, Inc. b. "Form Film," Grace Construction Materials. c. "Form Sealer," Burke. La ARG: 89119 CONCRETE FORMWORK W, 03100 -2 a C. Bolts, rods or devices used for internal ties and spreaders shall be of such construction that when the forms are removed, no metal shall be within 1 -1/2" of an exterior, nor within 3/4" of an interior concrete surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of concrete formwork. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. B. All foreign matter shall be completely removed before concrete is deposited. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide and maintain a safe place to work. Contractor shall design and install any shoring which may be required. B . Obtain necessary information for coordination of formwork with items to be embedded in concrete and with other related work. Properly locate and place all inserts and embedded items required by other trades prior to casting concrete. C . Coordinate all formwork with other trades to allow for placement of piping, sleeves, conduit and other items into form areas. D. No piping sleeves, conduit, or other items may be placed within a a footing or wall without the prior approval of the Structural Engineer. E. Check all lines and elevations using surveying instruments; check and relate survey, drawings, property lines and elevations before concrete is poured. F . Take special care that forms are true to the required lines, grades, and surfaces, so as to give a uniform, neat and workmanlike finish to all concrete surfaces. G . Forms and form supports shall be complete and of such strength and construction as to prevent any spread, shifting or settling of same when concrete is deposited. and tight enough to avoid any leakage or washing out of cement mortar from the concrete. H. Preparation: Treat contact surface of forms with form sealer in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. I. Earth Forms: Trench earth forms at least 2 inches wider than footing widths indicated. Construct wood edge strips at each side of trench at top to secure reinforcing and prevent trench from sloughing. Earth forms shall be tramped firm and cleaned of all debris and loose materials before placing concrete. J. All forms shall be thoroughly moistened before concrete is placed. ARG: 89119 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 -3 3.02 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms and shoring until concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its own weight and construction live loads to be placed thereon without damage to the structure, but not before a minimum of seven (7) days from the date of last placement of concrete. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 -4 13 SECTION 03200 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS REINFORCING STEEL A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100. 2. Concrete: Section 03300. 3. Structural Steel; Section 05120. 4. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing concrete reinforcement. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 301: "Standard Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings." b. ACI 315: "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." c. ACI 318: 'Building Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). a. A82: "Standard Specification for Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement." b. A185: "Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement." c. A615: "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement." d. A706: "Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), latest edition, as adopted by the City of Gilroy. ARG: 89119 REINFORCING STEEL 03200 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for all concrete reinforcing. Provide 1/4" plans and elevations showing size, length, location and spacing of bars and quarter size details showing bar size, length, location, spacing, laps, splices, etc. B. The reinforcing steel shop drawings shall be reviewed by the Structural Engineer. Any errors or discrepancies found shall be corrected before concrete may be placed. Such review shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for compliance with Contract requirements. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store off ground, protected from elements and contaminants which could adversely affect bond. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide steel for reinforcement from new, unrested stock, free from mill scale and delivered without rust. B. Deformed reinforcing steel bars shall be in conformance with ASTM A -615, Grade 40, for #3 and smaller bars and to A -615, Grade 60 for #4 and larger. C. Spacers, bar supports, and other accessories: In accordance with ACI 315 and in conformance with the "Manual of Standard Practice" of the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, latest edition. D. Welded Wire Mesh: reinforcement for concrete walkways on grade; 6 "x 6 ", #10 /10 WWF to conform to ASTM A -185. .. . 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of concrete reinforcing steel. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions are corrected. B . Provide Special Inspections for reinforcing steel per UBC, Section 306(a)4B. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and erect reinforcing steel in accordance with the ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. La in ARG: 89119 REINFORCING STEEL 03200 -2 MI B. Do not place reinforcement until the forms have been carefully cleaned and reviewed. Thoroughly clean reinforcement of loose mill and rust scale and coatings of any character that will destroy or injure the bond, before placement. C. Maintain a minimum clear distance between adjacent bars of not less than 1 -1/2 inch. Maintain a minimum clear distance between bars and formed surfaces of not less than 1 -1/2 inch. Maintain a minimum clear distance between bars and earth formed surfaces of not less than 3 inches. D. All reinforcing bars shall be continuous. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. Avoid splices of tensile reinforcement at or near points of maximum stress. The location of splices shall be subject to review. Where special bars or dowels are used, fully lap the projecting portion with the bars to which they connect. Lap 30 diameters for #5 bars or smaller, 48 diameters for #6 and #7 bars, 60 diameters for #8 or larger bars in concrete, typical unless otherwise noted. E. All column ties shall have a 135 degree turn plus an extension of at least ten (10) bar diameters, but not less than 4 inches at the free end. All tie spacing shall conform to Section 2607(k)3 of the latest, approved UBC. F . Lap welded wire mesh reinforcement 12 inches at edges, unless otherwise indicated, and wire together. G . Tie reinforcing bars in walls by wire at least every six inches at splices. Stagger splices in horizontal bars so that those in adjacent tiers will not be less than 10 feet apart. H. Wherever conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves, and other items interfere with this placing of reinforcement as indicated, consult with the Architect and secure a method of procedure before placing any concrete. Do not bend or field cut bars around openings or sleeves. 1. Accurately place and secure all reinforcement indicated in a rigid manner with metal ties and spreaders. Such devices shall be sufficiently rigid and numerous to prevent displacement of the reinforcing during placing of concrete. Tie bars at each intersection and not over 12 inches from each support. J. Straighten reinforcement in a manner that will not injure the material. Do not bend or do not use reinforcement with kinks or bends which are not indicated. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF REINFORCING A. Continuously inspect and maintain reinforcement in proper position during concrete operations. B. Where reinforcing cannot otherwise be kept in proper alignment by reasonable effort, provide additional bracing, ties, stirrups, or other items as necessary. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 REINFORCING STEEL 03200 -3 SECTION 03300 CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03200. 3. Structural Steel: Section 05120. 4. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 5. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and placing all cast -in -place concrete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Published specifications, standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or governmental organizations apply to work of this section. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" (ACI 301), latest edition. b. "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" (ACI 306), latest edition. c. 'Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting" (ACI 305), latest edition. d. 'Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing Concrete" (ACI 304), latest edition. 3. Uniform Building Code, (UBC) latest edition, as adopted by the City of Gilroy. B. Where provisions of Laws and Regulations and/or Specifications conflict, the more restrictive provision governs. C. Notification: Notify the Owner, Architect, and the Building Inspector at least 48 hours prior to placement of any concrete. ARG: 89119 CONCRETE 03300 -1 D. Allowable Tolerances: Deviation from plumb or level shall not exceed 1/8 inch within 10 feet in any direction, as determined with a 10 -foot straightedge. E. Mix Designs: Design of concrete mixes, including recommended amounts of admixture and water to be used in the mixes, shall be obtained by the Contractor from a recognized independent testing laboratory or from a batch plant properly equipped to design concrete mixes. Costs of obtaining the mix designs shall be paid for by the Contractor. Contractor shall submit these mix designs to the Architect for review. Contractor shall be responsible for providing concrete that meets the minimum strengths specified F. Compression tests of concrete shall be performed by a qualified testing laboratory as specified in Section 0 15 10. 1. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule the testing services. 2. All tests shall be in accordance with the all applicable Laws and Regulations governing this work. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the installation of items to be embedded in concrete, and provide openings in the concrete as necessary for performance of the Work of other Sections. B . Anchors, bolts, sleeves, inserts, wood blocking and any other items to be embedded in concrete shall be accurately secured in position before concrete is placed. C. Footing excavations and slab subgrade shall be reviewed by the Architect before placing concrete. D. Concrete shall not be placed until all reinforcing steel is in place and reviewed by the Architect or his representative. E. Cold Weather Concrete: Concrete shall be protected from low temperatures at all times in accordance with "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" (ACI -306). F. Hot Weather Concrete: Conform with recommendations of ACI 305; temperature of concrete while being placed shall not exceed 75° F. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Mix designs: Submit to testing laboratory mix designs and certification tests for all proposed concrete mixes. Do not proceed until all acceptances are issued. Allow for sufficient lead time for testing and review. 13 ARG:89119 CONCRETE 03300 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: Shall be Type IP (MS), conforming to ASTM C595. Maximum percentage alkalie (Na20 + o.658K20) of 0.25. One brand of cement shall be used throughout the work for concrete. B. Aggregates: Shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates" (ASTM C -33) for stone concrete, except as herein modified. Proportion to be determined by mix design. 1. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregates shall be natural sand. The average value of sand equivalent, determined by ASTM C33 and the State of California, Test Method No. California 217, shall be 75 minimum. 2. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse Aggregates, when sampled at the batching bin shall have a cleanness value of not less than 75 when subjected to the cleanness test performed in accordance with the State of California Test Method No. California 227. Coarse aggregates shall be well graded between size limits as required by ASTM C -33. 3 Aggregate: Regular weight hard rock. C. Water: The water used in the concrete shall be potable. D. Admixtures: Comply with ASTM -494. E. Bonding Solution: "Konset Stabilizer" by Conrad Solvig Co., or accepted equal. F. Grout: Non -shrink grout shall be used for all grouting of base plates, etc. Grout shall be metallic type, Embeco 636 for concealed work and non - metallic type Master Builder 713 for exposed work, as manufactured by Master Builders or accepted equal. G. Dry Pack: Dry pack for cosmetic concrete repairs only shall consist of one part cement to 2 -1/2 parts fine aggregate (screen out all materials retained on No.4 sieve), mixed with a minimum amount of water, in small amounts. The consistency shall be such that when a ball of the mixture is compressed in the hand it will maintain its shape, showing finger marks, but without showing any surface water. H. Moisture Barrier: Fortifiber, "Moistop ", or accepted equal, 10 mil polyethlene sheeting for slabs on grade, in longest and widest roll sizes available to eliminate or minimize joints. Provide manufacturer's recommended plastic adhesive tape for sealing joints and repairs. 2.02 DESIGNING AND PROPORTIONING CONCRETE A. Proportions of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate to be used shall be subject to review and shall be mixed in such proportions as specified to be sufficiently workable to produce a uniform, dense concrete without segregation and of the minimum strength specified. Mixes shall be designed, tested and ARG: 89119 CONCRETE 03300 -3 adjusted in ample time before the first concrete is scheduled to be placed. Proportion and design the mixes to result in a concrete slump at time of placement of not less than 2" nor more than 4 ". 2.03 CONCRETE PROPERTIES A. Minimum 28 day concrete strength and mix design shall be as follows: Min 28 Day Max. Size Compressive Location Ag=gatP Strength IPSII lump 1. Slabs on Grade 3/4" 3000 4" 2. Footing & Walls 3/4" 3000 4" B. Batch and mix concrete per ASTM C -94 at an established plant using approved mix designs. PART 3 - EXE _t TION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Notify the Architect, Owner and Building Inspector at least 48 hours prior to pouring concrete so that they may observe placement of the work. B. Notify the Testing Agent so that he may be present during concrete pours to take samples and observe operations, as required by the Uniform Building Code. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete from injurious action of the elements and defacement of any nature during the construction operations. B. Protect adjacent, existing areas against overpour or splashing during placement of concrete. Remove all concrete overages from existing materials to remain without damaging finishes and at no cost to the Owner. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Protect finish surfaces adjacent to areas receiving concrete. B. Thoroughly moisten all earth and wood forms prior to placing concrete. 3.04 MIXING A. General Requirements: 1. Mix cement, fine and coarse aggregates, add mixtures, and water to exact proportions of mix designs. 2. Measure fine and coarse aggregates separately according to accepted method which provides accurate control and easy checking. M ARG:89119 CONCRETE 03300 -4 w 3. Adjust consistency to improve workability; do not add water, unless otherwise directed. 4. Maintain proportions, value, or factors of accepted mixes throughout the work. B. Batch Mixing: 1. Use a batch mixer for machine mixing the concrete. Prepare no greater quantity of concrete than is required for immediate use. No excess that is left over at night or that has been standing long enough to set shall be retempered or used in any way. 2. Accurately measure the ingredients forming the concrete and so thoroughly mixed by machine that every piece of rock is completely covered with mortar. After all the materials composing the concrete have been introduced into the mixer, it shall turn not less than ten(10) complete revolutions, and in any event shall turn for not less than one (1) minute before any portion of the concrete is taken out for use. The mixer shall make more than ten (10) complete revolutions if so directed. 3.05 PLACING CONCRETE A. Equipment shall be maintained clean and of sufficient quantity and capacity to efficiently execute the work required. B . Remove all dirt, chips, sawdust, rubbish, water, etc. from the forms before any concrete is deposited. No wooden ties nor blocking shall be left in concrete except where indicated for attachment of other work. C. Thoroughly clean reinforcement and other embedded items free from loose rust and other matter that might affect bond. D. Check all embedded items for location, position and inclusion. E. Prevent displacement of reinforcement, anchor bolts, or any other items required to be embedded in concrete. F. Do not place concrete when the mean daily temperature is less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit or greater than 75 degrees Fahrenheit. Protect freshly poured concrete from premature drying. G . Thoroughly wet wood forms and bottom and sides of trenches, except coated plywood, at least 1 hour in advance of placing concrete. 1. Securely close clean-out and inspection ports. 2. Repeat wetting as necessary to keep forms damp. H. Before the placing of new concrete on or against set concrete, clean the surface, saturate the previously poured concrete and apply a slush coat of Concresive 1001LPL, or accepted equal, per manufacturer's recommendations. I. Pumping: Concrete may be placed by pumping, provided an appropriate mix design has been reviewed by the Architect prior to placement. ARG: 89119 CONCRETE 03300 -5 J. Place concrete before initial set has occurred, and in no event after it has retained its water content for more than 45 minutes. Convey concrete from mixer to forms as rapidly as possible and deposit as nearly as practicable in its final position by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Thoroughly tamp so that all parts of the form are filled and so that no voids remain in the mass or on the surface. Special care shall be taken to work the concrete through and around the reinforcing steel. 1. Pouring of concrete, once started shall be carried on as a continuous operation. 2. Concrete shall be placed as nearly as practical in its final position to avoid rehandling or flowing. 3. Place concrete in layers not to exceed 18 inches in depth. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 5 feet in unexposed work and 3 feet in exposed work. Place concrete in level lifts throughout formwork receiving the material. 4. Concrete that has partially hardened shall not be placed in the work. K. Consolidation: All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated and compacted by vibration, spading, rodding or forking during the operation of placing and depositing and shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items and into the corners of forms. 1. All concrete against forms shall be thoroughly spaded. 2. Internal vibrators shall be used under experienced supervision and shall be kept out of contact with reinforcement and wood forms. 3.06 SLABS AND WALKS A. Floor slabs shall be limited to an area of 800 square feet with a maximum of 30 feet without an expansion joint or cold joint, limit slab pours to a maximum length to width ratio of 2 to 1. Where possible locate joints at walls. B . Concrete walks shall have 3/8" thick expansion joints at maximum intervals of 20 feet and tooled joints at maximum intervals of 5 feet on center each way, unless otherwise specified. C. All exterior flat work shall drain positively whether indicated or not on the drawings. All exterior slabs shall drain away from building walls at a minimum slope of 1/4" per foot for the first six (6) feet perpendicular to the wall. Any condition which may result in water standing or flowing adjacent to buildings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect before placing concrete. Slabs with floor drain shall slope to the drain. Standard for'level slab' shall have a variation of 1/8" maximum under 10' -0" straight edge. 3.07 FINISH A. Level: Screed to a true surface with a maximum deviation of 1/8" in a 10' -0" length in any direction.- B. Steel Trowel Finish: All interior slabs shall receive a monolithic steel trowel finish to make a smooth, hard, dense, impervious surface, free of defects. ARG:89119 CONCRETE 03300 -6 M C. All new, exterior,concrete slabs and walkways shall have a slip- resistant finish to match existing adjacent surfaces. Placement of tooled and control joints shall match pattern of existing walkways and slabs, unless otherwise noted. D. Protect concrete from injurious action of the elements and defacement of any nature during the construction operations. 3.08 CURING CONCRETE A. All concrete surfaces shall be protected from loss of moisture for a ten day period. 1. Water curing consisting of ponding, soaking or spraying. 2. Covering with Kraft paper or plastic sheets. 3. Leaving forms in place. B. Curing agents shall be as accepted by the Architect. 1. An approved liquid curing compound may be used. In the event the curing compound is not compatible with finish materials that are to be applied to concrete surfaces the Contractor shall neutralize the curing compound before applying the finish materials. C. Construction joint contact surfaces shall be roughened to 1/4" as specified in U.B.C. section 2611(h) 9. D. Expansions anchor bolts and power driven nails shall not be installed until concrete has reached design strength. 3.09 TESTING A. Provide special inspection for concrete as required by the U.B.C. B. The Testing Laboratory shall preform slump tests and prepare and cure compression test samples. One set of at least four cylinders shall be made in accordance with ASTM C -31 for each day concrete is cast, for each 100 cubic yards cast and for each type of concrete cast. Cylinders shall be cured by the Testing Laboratory. C. One cylinder from each set shall be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C -39. The results of these tests shall be provided to the Architect for review. D. The fourth cylinder from each set shall be kept until the 28 day test report has been received by the Architect. In the event the second and third cylinder tests are below the required strength, the laboratory shall then test the fourth cylinder at the age selected by the Architect. E. In the event the 28 day strength tests is below the specked minimum, the Architect may require test cores of the hardened structure to be taken by the Testing Laboratory in accordance with ASTM C -42 and UBC 2604 0) at Contractor's expense. If such tests indicate that the core specimen is below the required strength, the concrete in question shall be removed and replaced, including work damaged by this removal, at no cost additional to the Owner. If concrete proves to be satisfactory, the cut out sections shall be restored to their ARG: 89119 CONCRETE 03300 -7 original condition in a manner satisfactory to the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 PATCHING AND FINISHING A. After forms are removed and form ties withdrawn, all projections and fins shall be cut away from exposed surfaces, and all honeycombs and porous surfaces shall be cut back to solid concrete. The defective surfaces shall then be repaired by the use of grout and finished to match adjacent surfaces. B . Concrete surfaces that are exposed to view shall be smooth and free from form marks. Wet and rub with a Carborundum brick or other abrasive block, until a uniform, fine- textured surface appearance is obtained. Use cement mortar paste in rubbing and remove excess material by brushing and washing. Smooth trowel and burnish weathering surfaces and leave external angles neaty rounded with an edging tool. C. Concrete Surfaces that are to receive plaster or veneer shall be cleaned of all foreign material and roughened by chipping or sandblasting to a sufficient depth to form a surface that will bond with plaster or mortar. 3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Evaluation and acceptance of concrete shall comply with Title 24, Section 2 -2604 (d). Concrete not conforming with the design requirements or which has voids, honeycombs or other defects or has been repaired other than under the direction of the Architect shall be deemed to be defective and shall be removed from the site. B. Defective concrete shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor,as directed by the Architect, at no addional cost to the Owner. Repair materials shall include cements, epoxy and aggregates as required. C. Where concrete is under strength, out of line, level or plumb, or shows objectionable cracks, honey combing, rock pockets, voids, spalling, exposed reinforcement or is otherwise defective, and in the Architect's judgement these defects impair proper strength or appearance of the work, the Architect may require its removal and replacement by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Immediately after stripping and before concrete is thoroughly dry, patch minor defects such as; form tie holes, small honey combed areas, etc., with patching mortar. 3.09 CLEANING A. All loose materials such as laitance, fins, excess mortar, nails, form ties, form release agents, bond breakers, and other blemishes that would impair the visual appearance of exposed concrete or the application of other finishes shall be removed to the satisfaction of the Architect. ARG:89119 CONCRETE 03300 -8 tff, B. Remove all concrete overage from existing elements to remain, at no additional cost to the Owner. Do not damage surfaces. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 CONCRETE 03300 -9 SECTION 03360 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SHOTCRETE A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Work Specified in Other Sections: 1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03200. 3. Concrete: Section 03300. 4. Brick Masonry: Section 04200. 5. Structural Steel: Section 05100. 6. Metal Fabrication: Section 05500. 7. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. The work under this section includes all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to the furnishing and placement of all shotcrete, as indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of five years experience using methods and material specified and proposed. 2. Employ only Foremen, Nozzlemen, Gunmen and Rodmen with at least two years of experience. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. B. Reference Standards: 1. Uniform Building Code, (UBC) latest edition, as adopted by the City of Gilroy. 2. ACI Standard 506-66 and ACI 506.2 -77; "Specification for Materials Proportioning and Application of Shotcrete ". 3. ASTM A615 for Grade 60 reinforcing bar. C. Allowable Tolerances: Deviation from plumb or level shall not exceed 1/8 inch within 10 feet in any direction, as determined with a 10 -foot straightedge. ARG: 89119 SHOTCRETE 03360 -1 1.04 PROTECTION A. Protect shotcrete from injurious action of the elements and defacement of any nature during the construction operations. B . Protect adjacent, existing areas against overspray or splashing during placement of shotcrete. 1. Surfaces which do not receive shotcrete, such as wood framing, shall be protected with waterproof paper or other means. 2. Adjacent structures which would be damaged by dust and rebound shall also be protected. 3. Remove all shotcrete overages from existing materials to remain without damaging finishes and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 TESTING A. Tests of shotcrete shall be performed by the agent of a qualified testing laboratory as required by Section 0 15 10, Testing Laboratory. 1. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all testing services. 2. All tests shall be in accordance with the all applicable Laws and Regulations governing this work. B. Preconstruction Tests: A test panel shall be shot, cured, cored or sawn, examined and tested prior to commencement of the project. The sample panel shall be representative of the reject and simulate job conditions as closely as possible. The panel thickness and reinforcing shall reproduce the thickest and most congested area specified in the structural design. It shall be shot at the same angle, using the same nozzleman and with the same shotcrete mix design that will be used on the project. 1. Equipment: The equipment used in preconstruction testing shall be the same equipment used in the work requiring such testing, unless substitute equipment is approved by the building official. B . Strength Test: Strength test for shotcrete shall be made in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 26-10, by the Testing Agent, on specimens which are representative of work and which have been water soaked for at least 24 hours prior to testing. Specimens shall consist of not less than three 2 -inch diameter cores or 2 -inch cubes. Specimens shall be taken in accordance with one of the following: 1. From the inplace work: taken at least once each shift nor less than one for each 50 cubic yards of shotcrete; or 2. From test panels: made not less than once each shift nor less than one for each 50 cubic yards of shotcrete placed. The test panels shall have a minimum dimension of 12 by 12 inches. Panels shall be gunned in the same position as the work, during the course of the work and by nozzlemen doing the work. The condition under which the panels are cured shall be the same as the work; or 3. Testing Lab shall core each test panel and obtain compression test data for 7 and 28 day strength. C. Notify the Testing Agent at least 72 hours prior to placing shotcrete, so that he may be present during placement to take samples and observe operations, as required by the Uniform Building Code. ARG: 89119 SHOTCRETE 03360 -2 M FA �IL�i : K•��I ��•g� A. Coordinate the installation of items to be embedded in shotcrete, and provide openings in the shotcrete as necessary for performance of the Work of other Sections. All openings, sleeves, etc. shall be placed per the requirments of the Structural Engineer. If penitrations are not indicated, Contractor shall verify location with Architect prior to proceeding with Work. B . Anchors, bolts, sleeves, inserts, wood blocking and any other items to be embedded in shotcrete shall be accurately secured in position before shotcrete is placed. C. Shotcrete shall not be placed until all reinforcing steel is in place and reviewed by the Architect and Building Inspector when required. D. Notify the Architect and Building Inspector at least 72 hours prior to placing shotcrete so that they may observe placement of the work. ..•� 2.01 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise noted, materials shall conform to those specified for heavy weight concrete. B. Proportions and Materials: Shotcrete proportions shall be selected that allow suitable placement procedures using the delivery equipment selected and shall result in finished, in- place, hardened shotcrete meeting the strength requirements of the U.B.C. C. Aggregate: 3/8" maximum aggregate. D. Reinforcement: 1. ASTM A615 Grade 60 reinforcing shall be used. 2. The maximum size of reinforcement shall be No. 5 bars. 3. There shall be a minimum clearance between parallel reinforcement bars of 2 -1/2 inches. a. Lap splices in reinforcing bars shall be by the non - contact lap splice method with at least 2 inches clearance between bars. b. Use appproved mechanical coupling nuts where rebar congestion does not permit a non - contact lap splice. E. Water: Clean and potable and free from impurities detrimental to shotcrete and free from substances which would cause staining. F. Ground Wires: 18 or 20 gauge hard steel piano wire. Adequate ground wires or other devices should be installed to establish the thickness and surface planes of the shotcrete build -up. G . Admixtures: None required or permitted. 2.02 SHOTCRETE CHARACTERISTICS A. Shotcrete shall conform to the following characteristics: 1. Minimum compressive strength: 3,000 psi @ 28 days. ARG: 89119 SHOTCRETE 03360 -3 2. The maximum volume of dry sand per 94 pound sack of cement shall be 4.5 cubic feet. 3. Sand and cement shall be mixed dry in batching machine, using approximately one (1) part cement to four (4) parts dry, loose sand, having a moisture of 5% by weight. B. Obtain approval of final mix design and proportions from Testing Laboratory. 2.03 QUALITY CONTROL A. Batch all materials by weight and machine mix, using self - cleaning mixers suitable for the purpose. B . Air Supply: Employ a properly operating compressor of ample capacity to perform the work. Comply with capacity requirements stated in ACI 506, Table 401(c) with modifications for hose lengths and working heights as required. C. Supply water pressure at nozzle at least 15 psi higher that air pressure at gun. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Inspect existing walls, formwork and previously placed concrete surfaces to determine that they are in proper condition to receive shotcrete and permit escape of air and rebound. B. Inspect reinforcing and determine that it is properly placed and tied, that sufficient clearances have been provided and that it is free of grease, loose rust or other coatings which would inhibit bond. C. Proceeding with shotcrete installation implies acceptance of surfaces and conditions as satisfactory. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Notify theOwner, Architect and Building Inspector at least 72 hours prior to placing shotcrete so that they may observe placement of the work. B . Notify the Testing Agent so that he may be present during shotcrete placement to take samples and observe operations, as required by the Uniform Building Code. C . Inspections: 1. During Placement. When shotcrete is used for columns and beams, a special inspector is required by the U.B.C. The special inspector shall provide continuous inspection of the placement of the reinforcement and shotcreting and shall submit a statement indicating compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Visual examination for structural soundness of in -place shotcrete. Completed shotcrete work shall be checked visually for reinforcing bar embedment, voids, rock pockets, sand streaks and similar deficiencies by examining a minimum of three 3 -inch cores taken from three areas chosen by the design engineer which represent the worst congestion of reinforcing bars occurring in the project. Extra reinforcing bars may be added to noncongested areas and cores may be taken from these areas. the ARG: 89119 SHOTCRETE 03360 -4 cores shall be examined by the special inspector and a report submitted to the building official prior to final approval of the shotcrete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Sandblast concrete or brick surfaces where they are to adjoin and bond with shotcrete. Clean such surfaces free of dirt and dust, thoroughly wet and then damp dry, just prior to shotcrete application. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal and vertical groundwires to establish thicknesses and surface plane, true to line, tight and in such manner that they might easily be re- tightened. Do not remove them until just prior to application of finish coat. 3.04 PLACEMENT A. Hydration shall occur at the nozzle of the cement gun, using just enough water so that no slump shall occur in the shotcrete. The cement gun shall be equipped with an air pressure gauge, and the air pressure at the gun shall be 45 psi or more. Where length exceeds 100 feet air pressure shall be increased 5 psi for. each additional 50 feet of material hose used, but not more than 300 feet of material hose shall be used unless approved by the Architect. Water pressure at the gun nozzle shall be maintained at not less than 15 psi greater than the air pressure at the gun. Nozzles used for shotcrete shall have a maximum size of 1 -5/8 ". B . Whenever possible, except when enclosing reinforcing steel, the nozzle shall be held at right angles to the surface to be shotcreted and at a distance from 2 -1/2 to 3 feet. 1. When enclosing reinforcing steel the nozzle shall be held so as to direct the material behind the bars. Each side of each bar shall be shot separately. 2. Horizontal members shall not be shot from the top unless special methods, satisfactory to the Architect, are used to eliminate rebound. 3. A second, experienced Nozzleman's Helper equipped with an air jet shall attend the Nozzleman and blow all rebound, sand, etc., which may have lodged on the forms, steel or shotcrete. C . All loose fine aggregate or rebound shall be removed from the surface being shotcreted before placing succeeding layers. Rebound shall not be reused as aggregate. D. Whenever possible, the fast layer of shotcrete shall entirely cover the reinforcing steel in order to secure it in its proper position. In blockouts or bond beams the Contractor shall employ a second Nozzleman who shall follow the fast and shall blow out all dry rebound which might collect in pockets or behind reinforcement, before next layer of shotcrete is placed. E. Upon reaching the thickness and planes outlined by the forms and/or ground wired, the surface shall be rodded off to true lines. Low spots shall be built out to proper thickness. F. Blockouts or recesses for built -in items such as drains, etc., shall be substantially built and so formed as to permit escape of air and rebound. G. Connections and anchors shall be set and rigidly secured to forms or reinforcement. ARG: 89119 SHOTCRETE 03360 -5 H. Screeds and adequate ground wires which are to be used as screeds shall be placed to establish the thickness, surface planes and form for the shotcrete work. I. Construction joints: Do not allow unfinished work to stand more than 30 minutes unless construction points are provided for. Slope construction joints to thin edge over width of approximately one foot. Unless otherwise detailed, ordinary square construction joints are not permitted. Thoroughly clean and wet entire joint surface prior to application of additional shotcrete. 3.05 FINISHING A. Exposed surfaces: Bring shotcrete layers to within 1/4" to 3/8" of final finished surface. When surface has taken its initial set, trim excess material with a sharp edged cutting screed. Remove ground wires following initial screeding. Apply finish coat using finer gradation of sand, and greater nozzle distance, bringing screeded surface to required planes, filling local voids and depressions. Float with rubber or cork floats to a uniform, smooth surface. B. Surfaces that are to receive plaster shall be cleaned of all foreign material and roughened by chipping or sandblasting to a sufficient depth to form a surface that will bond with plaster. 3.06 CURING A. Immediately following finishing, cure exposed surface continuously for not less than ten days using fog sprays or water spraying. Thoroughly wet down forms each day during curing period. Do not let any layer of shotcrete dry out prior to completion of curing period. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces and remove all rebound, waste materials, droppings, splatters, etc. from job site. A, 3.08 TOLERANCES OF FINISHED SURFACES A. A maximum of 1/8" variation from horizontal and vertical straight lines in any 10 feet and free from ridges, sharp offsets, depressions and other irregularities. Repair, or remove and replace finished shotcrete not in compliance at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 SHOTCRETE 03360 -6 SECTION 04250 CENTER CORE WALL REINFOR EMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03200. 2. Concrete: Section 03300. 3. Brick Masonry: Section 04200. 4. Stone Masonry: Section 04400. 5. Structural Steel: Section 05120. 6. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 7. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for centercoring brick masonry walls, including all labor and equipment to core vertical holes, as indicated, and install reinforcing bars and resin grout. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE. A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of five (5) years successful experience working with dry centercoring and with the proportioning and delivery of resin -sand grouts for use in the strengthening of unreinforced masonry walls in comparable projects involving historic buildings. Additionally Contractor shall have successfully completed two (2) projects of similar size and scope to this project within the last three (3) years. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. B. The Contractor shall establish, and submit to the Architect for review and approval, a Quality Assurance Plan to insure that all work is to the highest ARG: 89119 CENTER CORE WALL REINFORCEMENT 04250 -1 standards of the industry. The Quality Assurance Plan shall specifically address accuracy and plumbness of coring operations, reinforcing bar placement and mixing and placing of resin grout. C. Grout Testing Service: Engage a testing laboratory acceptable to Owner to perform material evaluation tests and to verify design of resin grout mix. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of all applicable codes, specification, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ASTM C658: Chemical- Resistant Resin Grouts for Brick or Tile. 2. Resins shall comply with VOC requirements by the State of California. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit data and certifications verifying that the materials meet the Specifications as follows for the Architect's review and approval: 1. Test data of resin grout identical to that used on this project confirming that all specked physical properties are met by the formulation of resin grout used. 2. All test reports submitted shall be by independent testing agencies and/or as acceptable to the Owner. B. General: Submit the following for Architect's review in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Description of Method: Detailed description of equipment and procedures to be used for the Work, including description of the following: a. Drilling method b. Protection of adjacent building finishes from damage due to dust. c. Removal of cored material from hole. d. Removal of debris from existing vent holes. e. Storage and disposal of cored material. f. Protection of roof surfaces. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Tests shall be performed by a qualified testing laboratory as specified in Section 01510. 1. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule the testing services. 2. All tests shall be in accordance with the all applicable Laws and Regulations governing this work. B . The Contractor shall remove the outer wythe(s) at the bottom of each core for inspection and debris removal and anchorage. Prior to pouring resin bricks will be replaced, aligned with adjacent materials and repointed to match existing. C. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of resin grout may include the following, as directed by Architect: 1. Sampling Fresh Resin Grout: Take grout samples for Compression and Setting Time Testing as the grout is being placed in the cored hole. Select a level location where molds can remain undisturbed for 48 hours. Take a r ARG: 89119 CENTER CORE WALL REINFORCEMENT 04250 -2 or a minimum of one sample for each grouted core. Field samples may be taken at any time except for the first and last 10% of the batch volume. a. Setting Time: ASTM C308; one specimen shall constitute one sample for the Setting Time Test. Working time test not required. b. Compression Test: ASTM C579 Method A; Four compression test specimens taken from the same batch of grout shall constitute one sample; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. Provide one set of 4 cylinders for each Compression Test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field -cured test specimens are required. 1) Strength level of grout will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. D. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain complete material identification, mixing ratio, identification of test Method, conditioning procedure, sampling conditions, test conditions, location of grout batch in structure, design strength, and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests. E. Additional Tests: The Testing Agent will make additional tests of in -place grout when test results indicate specified grout strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. The Testing Agent may conduct tests to determine adequacy of grout by cored cylinders, or by other method,s as approved by the Architect. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with appropriate trades on the removal of parapet walls, sheet metal roofing, and roof sheathing, etc. required to perform Work. B. Coordinate this Section with all other Work of the project. PART H - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Provide technology, equipment and labor to accurately core vertical holes in the existing brick masonry walls by the dry process, without water, as indicated. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615 -89, Grade 60. ARG: 89119 CENTER CORE WALL REINFORCEMENT 04250 -3 B. Resin grout shall contain resin and sand which shall have properties to flow into place, set and bond to brick and reinforcing steel and meet the following physical properties: Minimum Tesile Strength 6000 psi Minimum Compressive Strength 7400 psi Minimum Heat Distortion Temperature 140 degree F Minimum Ultimate Elongation 1.5% Maximum Ultimate Elongation 4.5% Minimum Elastic Modulus 350,000 psi Minimum Compressive Modules 1,000,000 psi Maximum Viscosity 400 cps C. Spacers to hold reinforcing bar in center of cored hole. Submit sample for review by the Architect. D. Resin grout shall consist of liquid resin and sand mixed with a resin -to -sand ration of approximately 1:1.75. Grout design shall be appropriate to attain maximum resin migration through the voids in the masonry while retaining specified bonding, volumetric stability, and strength adjusted to achieve a grout viscosity appropriate for the void content of the wall, the hole diameter, and the porosity of the wall surfaces. Gel time shall not be less than 1 hour. 1. Resin: Neat liquid polyester resin capable of forming resin -sand grout when mixed with a suitable setting agent and filler (sand). 2. Sand: ASTM C144; natural, washed, clean, kiln -dried masonry sand. E. Contractor shall be prepared with backer -rods or similar material to fill large openings in face of masonry to stop grout from moving to the face of the wall at cracks and joints. All seepage and grout that is visible on the face of the wall shall be removed immediately as recommended by manufacturer. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Use and disposal of all chemical compounds shall be in accordance with all applicable governmental regulations. B . Handling of all chemical compounds shall conform to applicable OSHA regulations. C. Thoroughly mix the resin, catalyst and sand in clean, dry containers in amounts suitable to the pace of the Work. D. Mixing tools or containers cleaned with acetone or other solvents shall be allowed to thoroughly dry before use to avoid contamination of the resin. E. All measures shall be taken as required before, during, and after grouting to prevent staining of the exterior or interior exposed building finishes with resin or grout. Visible staining from resin or grout at the completion of the Work will not be accepted. ARG: 89119 CENTER CORE WALL REINFORCEMENT 04250 -4 3.02 PREPARING THE SITE A. After existing parapet, sheet metal roof, and sheathing, to the extent required, is removed by others, coordinate work with the erection and installation of temporary weather and water protection over the coring and working space as is necessary to complete the work. B. Erect a temporary working platform as needed to complete the work. Relocate the platform as the work progresses. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Locate, to a reasonably possible degree, all metal in the wall which might interfere with the coring process. Known metal in the brick walls includes: Z- shaped veneer anchors; horizontal dog anchors embedded in brick masonry and attached to floor and roof framing, at random locations, adjacent to joists at floor and roof levels. Locating the metal shall be nondestructive with a suitable metal detector. Cores should be stopped short of the existing I -beams to avoid damage. B. Layout exact location of vertical cores to miss existing metal within the walls using the tolerances specified herein. Ideally, the center of the cores shall be 12 inches from the closest window jamb or equally spaced between adjacent cores. 1. For walls without veneer, cores shall be at the middle of the 13 in brick thickness and may be relocated up to plus or minus 4 inches along the wall from core location shown on drawings to avoid metal or stone obstructions and interference from roof framing. 2. For walls with veneer, cores shall be at the middle of the 8 inch "red" brick thickness and may be relocated up to plus or minus 4 inches along the wall from the core location shown on the drawings to avoid metal or stone obstructions and interferences from roof framing. C. Exisiting vents in the north wall of the building will be used to reinforce wall. Remove debris and soot from vents using vacuum and/or wire brushes as required. Take care not to unduly damage brick and mortar. D. Drill the vertical cores with suitable equipment, in good condition that will provide accurate holes in the brick masonry. 1. The cores shall be drilled dry, without water, within the brick masonry walls. 2. Debris from the drilling shall be removed by vacuum and captured in bags or containers without allowing any drilling debris to be broadcast in the air. 3. Holes shall be drilled to the length shown and full length holes shall extend at least 12 inches below the floor joists unless noted otherwise. 4. Four inch diameter holes shall be drilled vertically and shall not vary by more than 1 inch from a true vertical line parallel to the actual centerline of the brick masonry wall. Thre (3) inch diameter holes shall be drilled vertically and shall not vary by more than 1 inch from a true vertical line parallel to the actual center line of the brick masonry wall (excluding the brick veneer.) E. Thoroughly clean the cored hole of all drilling dust and debris, using vacuum and wire brushes as required. Take care not to unduly damage brick and mortar. ARG: 89119 CENTER CORE WALL REINFORCEMENT 04250 -5 LM F. The cored holes shall remain completely dry at all times. Protect holes from infiltration of foreign materials. G. Below the floor Joists at the core, the outer wythes shall be removed. Remove all debris and clean core edges. H. Install achorages and replace the outer wythe(s) at the bottom of the cores such that they will resist the pressure of the grouting of the vertical walls, unless otherwise noted. I. Install reinforcing steel in vertical cored holes full length as shown on the drawings. No mechanical or lap splices may be used. J. At floor levels, install anchorage and seal holes. K. Fill the vertical core holes with resin grout. 1. Procedures shall be used to ensure that the hole is fully filled with resin grout with no voids. 2. It is anticipated that resin grout will be installed through a tube inserted in the core hole and retracted as the resin grout is placed. a. Resin grout shall be placed before set begins and the rate of placement shall be carefully controlled so as not to create excessive pressure to damage the existing brick masonry. b. Limit the pouring of resin grout so that the uncured height of each pour shall not exceed 15 feet. c. Each pour shall be completed at least 15 minutes before gelling of the resin begins in that pour. d. The second pour should not commence less than 45 minutes after completion of first pour in the same core. L. Care shall be taken not to spill the resin grout and shall be immediately cleaned and all finishes restored to their original condition. Visible staining due to spilling or seepage of resin or grout, or damage to finishes due to clean-up of resin or grout, on exterior or interior face of building, will be grounds for rejection of Work M Clean up all debris, remove from the site, and dispose of in a legal manner. Repair any damage to the building and landscape improvements in kind, and leave the site clean and undamaged END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 CENTER CORE WALL REINFORCEMENT 04250 -6 SECTION 04420 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS BRICK MASONRY RESTORATION A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Speed Elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Shotcrete: Section 03360. 3. Stone Masonry Restoration: Section 04525. 4. Masonry Cleaning: Section 04550: 5. Structural Steel: Section 05120. 6. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 1.02 DESCRIP'T'ION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. Brick masonry restoration includes, without limitation: 1. Close range survey of the brick facade by Contractor from scaffold to detect damaged masonry. 2. Reattachment of existingbrick veneer to existing structural brick and/or new concrete. 3. Repair of cracked mortar joints and bricks. 4. Replacement of damaged bricks. 5. Rebuilding original brick walls as brick faced,.reinforced concrete walls. 6. Selective re- pointing of brick masonry as indicated. 7. Rebuilding a portion of original brick walls as reinforced masonry walls. C. Construction Sequencing: New footings, existing footing modifications, center core wall reinforcement and resin injection into unreinforced masonry walls shall be completed prior to unreinforced masonry crack repair and other repairs that may introduce moisture into the unreinforced masonry walls. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of five years successful experience using methods and material specified and proposed. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. ARG: 89119 BRICK MASONRY RESTORATION 04420 -1 B. Allowable Tolerances: Deviation from plumb or level shall not exceed 1/8 inch within 10 feet in any direction, as determined with a 10 -foot straightedge. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Brick Samples: Should it be necessary to provide replacement brick, either red structural brick or glazed face brick, Contractor shall submit 6 samples of each type of brick. B . Sample Panels: Provide the following panels using the techniques proposed for review and approval of the Architect. Approved test panels shall be left in place for comparison of the progress of the Work. 1. Re -point a 4 -foot x 4 -foot panel on the building in location selected by the Architect showing representative joint size and profile. 2. The approved sample panels shall be used as a standard for all masonry repair work. 3. Repeat the test processes and alter methods and materials as required to achieve results which are satisfactory to the Architect. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: 1. During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each days' work. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Staining: Prevent grout, mortar or soil from staining the face of brick. Immediately remove grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain - splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 3. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. B. Drilling for bolts and dowels shall be done with an electric rotary drill. Impact tools may not be used for drilling holes or tightening anchors and shearbolt nuts. C. Impact tools shall not be used for brick removal or footing modifications at foundations supporting brick walls. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in unopened containers as shipped by the manufacturer. The Architect shall be permitted to view delivered materials in their original unopened containers. Store, handle and protect all materials from damage, moisture, dirt, and intrusion of foreign matter. Immediately re-seal containers after partial use. Remove and replace damaged materials. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All uncompleted work shall be protected at any time when liable to injury from storms or freezing. B. Materials shall be used only at the manufacturer's recommended temperature tolerances for masonry materials. C. The work shall be protected during hot weather from premature or rapid curing by the use of dampened fabric coverings. LA ARG: 89119 BRICK MASONRY RESTORATION 04420 -2 �. D. Work shall not be permitted in freezing weather, or when temperature of the air is expected to freeze within 48 hours of work. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the materials from freezing during treatment. No work shall begin when any materials in use are frozen, or the site is subject to freezing temperatures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK MASONRY A. Reuse existing brick to the greatest extend possible. If replacement brick must be used, obtain used brick from one source, preferably from a single manufacturer. Replacement brick shall be of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. Replacement bricks shall match the originals with respect to size, color, texture and strength.. 2.02 MORTAR FOR MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement -lime. 2. Color: Add lamp black or approved coloring agent as necessary to match existing mortar color where brick will be exposed. 3 . Water: Clean and free of deleterious impurities, acids, alkalies, or organic matter. Water shall be potable, from city mains. 4. Admixtures: Admixture ingredients of any kind not specifically listed in this specification shall not be used B. Mortar shall be made of Portland Cement, type "S" lime, type "F" fly ash, and sand. For cracks not less than 1/16 inch nor more than 3/16 inch in width, and collar joints that are full or less than 1/4 inch in width, the sand should be omitted The following mix proportions are recommended (in parts by volume): Sand Sand Portland ment Fly #60 Silica #90 Silica Lime Ash Sanded 3 1 1 1/2 1/2 Unsanded - - 1 1/2 1/2 1. Water shall be added to the mix to achieve a pourable but not watery consistency. A field test for consistency based on the diameter of flow of a given quantity of grout on a smooth impervious surface is still under study. 2. The grout shall be batch mixed to a thoroughly uniform consistency before being transferred to the pump reservoir. The pump reservoir shall be continuously agitated to prevent grout segregation. Water may be added to the mixer to maintain a proper consistency. Grout shall not be used more than two hours after initial wetting of the dry ingredients. C. Mortar mix shall be type "S" Proportions. The tuck- pointing mortar should be pre - hydrated to reduce excessive shrinkage. The proper pre - hydration process is as follows: 1. All dry ingredients should be thoroughly mixed Only enough clean water should be added to the dry mix to produce a damp, workable consistency which will retain its shape when formed into a ball. The mortar should stand in this dampened condition for 1 -1 1/2 hours. ARG: 89119 BRICK MASONRY RESTORATION 04420 -3 2.03 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. General: 1. All anchors which extend into exterior wythes, shall be fabricated from steel and shall have a hot - dipped galvanized coating meeting the requirements of ASTM A153. 2. All reinforcing bar ties that extend into exterior wythes shall be epoxy coated to meet the requirements of ASTM D3963. B. Anchors: Provide straps and bolts fabricated from not less than 9 gauge sheet metal or wires, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flexible Anchors: Where brick is indicated to be anchored to structural framework with flexible anchors, provide 2 -piece anchors which will permit horizontal and vertical movement of masonry but will provide lateral restraint. D. Ties: Provide ties fabricated from not less than 3/8" diameter rod stock, unless otherwise indicated Threaded rods shall meet the requirements of ASTM A307, for Grade 2 Materials. 1. Brick Veneer ties: Epoxy coated No. 4 reinforcing bars with Hit C -20, Veneer Pin screen and adhesive, as manufactured by Hilti , or accepted equal. E. All threaded rods which require bends shall be pre-bent prior to installation. W �•► 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor shall make thorough, close -up inspection of all exposed surfaces of unreinforced masonry walls. 1. Special attention shall be paid to areas prone to deteriorated mortar. This deterioration appears to be the result of the lime mortar being exposed to the weather, ground water or another moisture source. Areas commonly in need of repair are: a. The bottom few feet around the perimeter of the building. b. The joist pockets at each floor level. c. The area around window and door openings. 2. Where mortar is suspect it shall be tested by scratching it with a screw driver.or similar tool. Joints shall be pointed where the mortar has deteriorated to a depth greater the 3/8 ". If the deteriorated joint is greater than 2 ", the brick shall be removed and reset with new mortar. 3. Contractor shall verify extent of damaged brick and verify that a sufficient number of replacement bricks are available on site. If it is determined that additional replacement brick is required Contractor shall follow the submittal process. Assessment and submittal process shall be schedule as required in order to avoid delays in the Work. 4. After close -up inspection and evaluation of masonry, meet with the Architect and Owner's Representative to review proposed repair /replacement scope of work. B. All grouting, crack repair and pointing work must be done under the continuous inspection of an Inspector to be approved by the Architect. The Inspector shall file a report to the Architect, Owner and Building Department for approval. C. Twenty-five percent (25 %) of all new shear bolts and combined tension and shear bolts in unreinforced masonry walls shall be tested according to UBC Standard No. 24-8. ARG: 89119 BRICK MASONRY RESTORATION 04420 -4 D. Epoxy set threaded rods used for tension in unreinforced masonry walls: 1. Five percent (5 %) of anchors must be tested, with a minimum of two (2) tests required where the wall thickness varies. At least one (1) test must be performed on an anchor which has the minimum embedment. Tests must confirm that bolts can maintain a tensile load of 3000 pounds for five (5) minutes (ten percent [10 %] deviation). The test report shall include: a. Test locations. b. Brick mortar conditions. c. Bolt movement and elongation information. d. Embedment depth. e. Applied load. 2. Twenty percent (20 %) of installed anchors must be tested by a special inspector using a torque - calibrated wrench. a. Minimum torque - 60 foot pounds. E. Reinforced masonry shall be inspected as required by UBC Section 306(a)7. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the thicknesses indicated, and as required to align with existing finish surfaces to remain. B . Cut brick with motor - driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. C. Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new brick work with existing work, where indicated. D. Lay -up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. 3.03 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay brick with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. B. Remove brick disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. C. Collar Joints: Fill joints between wythes solidly with mortar. Fill collar joints after each course is laid. 3.04 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI -WYTHE BRICKWORK A. Use individual metal ties embedded in horizontal joints to bond wythes together. Provide ties as shown, but not less than one metal tie for 4 sq. ft. or wall area spaced not to exceed 24" o.c. horizontally and vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within l' -0" of all openings and space not more than 3' -0" apart around perimeter of openings. 3.05 CLEANING ARG: 89119 BRICK MASONRY RESTORATION 04420 -5 A. All bricks to be reused shall have all traces of mortar removed without damage to the surface of the brick. Complete mortar removal process by cleaning brick surfaces with compressed air. Sandblasting shall not be used. A. Tight cracks in mortar less than 1/16 inch wide: Repoint the affected mortar joints. These cracks do not require any subsequent in .plane shear testing to verify the adequacy of the repointing work. Especially true of vertical cracks. B. Cracks in mortar 1/16 inch to 3/16 inch wide: 1. Preparation of the wall. a. Remove loose mortar from open joints. Mortar not bonded to one brick of an open joint, or easily debonded shall be removed Fill the cracks and open joints with Type "S" mortar. The depth of mortar shall be no deeper than two times the crack or joint width. b. Remove and reset, with type "S" mortar, bricks that can be easily removed by hand. Bricks that are displaced out of the plane of an exposed wall and that are visually detrimental shall be removed and reset. Head and bed joints of reset bricks shall be made with only enough mortar to hold the brick in place and confine the grout; they shall be open to the collar joint to assure flow of the grout around the brick. Removal and resetting should be kept to a minimum. c. Drill 3/4 inch minimum diameter injection holes into the crack at each bed joint. Holes shall penetrate to the near face of the far wythe of brick d. Drill 3/4 inch minimum diameter verification ports into each bed joint at the base of the head joint that is a minimum of 1 full brick each side of the crack. Verification ports shall penetrate to the nearest inner wythe. e. Thoroughly wash and saturate the wall by flushing with water, at City pressure, through a nozzle with 1/4 inch maximum diameter stream. Direct the stream into each grouting hole and each verification port, working from top to bottom. Flush each hole until the water flows clear. f. Thoroughly saturate the wall by the same method immediately prior to grout injection if more than two hours have elapsed between flushing and grouting. 2. Grout injection: Grout shall be delivered to the wall at a minimum of thirty psi, and injected into the wall at each injection hole, working from the bottom to the top. Verification ports should be plugged as grout flows from them. When grout flows from the infection hole above, plug the hole being injected and apply grout to the injection hole immediately above. Continue until all injection holes have been injected. Collar joints filled by existing mortar will prevent grout from showing in some verification holes. If grout fails to appear in most verification holes, the reason shall be determined and corrected before proceeding with the work. a. Remove all grout from face of brick immediately to prevent staining. C. Cracks wider than 3/16 of an inch in mortar and cracked bricks: Brick(s) with through cracks shall be removed, replaced and set in place with type "S" mortar. If a crack in mortar is greater than 3/16 inch wide, remove a section of the outer wythe between the head joints (power driven impact tools shall not be used). The inner wythe can be reached at that point. The affected areas of the inner wythe's mortar joints can be pointed and then the outer wythe reset. Allow mortar to cure for four days and repeat the procedure on the other side of the wall, where possible. D. Dislodged Bricks: All dislodged or displaced bricks shall be removed and remortared in place with type "S" mortar. Power driven impact tools shall not be used. +" ARG: 89119 BRICK MASONRY RESTORATION 04420 -6 3.07 REINFORCED BRICK WALLS A. Removal: Remove the mortar which surrounds the bricks to be replaced. Power driven impact tools shall not be used. Once these units are removed, all of the old mortar shall be carefully chiseled out and all dust and debris should be swept out with a brush. B . Existing brick to be reused shall be cleaned of all old mortar. The brick surfaces in the wall shall be dampened before new units are placed. The existing masonry should absorb all surface moisture to ensure a good bond. The appropriate surfaces of the surrounding brickwork and the replacement brick shall be buttered with mortar. Center the replacement brick in the opening and pressed into position. Removed excess mortar with a trowel. Repoint area as part of repointing procedure. C. Only type "S" mortar shall be used. Cells shall be grouted with 2000 psi grout per plan requirements. Reconsolidate grout one -half hour (30 minutes) after initial consolidation. D. Match existing brick pattern. E. Use ASTM A615 reinforcing bar, grade 40 for number 4 bars and smaller. Vertical reinforcing shall be located at mid -depth of cells, unless otherwise noted. F. Grout pour height shall be five (5) foot maximum. No clean-outs are allowed. 3.08 REATTACHMENT OF BRICK VENEER A. Reattach exisitng brick veneer to existing structural brick with specified ties as indicated. B. Repair interior wall surfaces as required when work is completed. C. Match exisitng joint width at brick veneer. 3.09 POINTING A. The old mortar should be cut out, by means of a toothing chisel or a special painter's grinder, to a uniform depth of 1 1/2 ". Take care not to damage the brick edges. All dust and debris shall be removed from the joint by brushing, blowing with air or rinsing with water. B. The joints to be tuck- pointed should be dampened, but to ensure a good bond, the brickwork must absorb all surface water. Added water to the pre- hydrated mortar to bring it to a workable consistency (somewhat drier than conventional mortar). The mortar should be packed tightly into the joints in thin layers (1/4" maximum). Each layer should become "Thumbprint hard" before applying the next layer. C. Joints shall be tooled to match the original profile. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 BRICK MASONRY RESTORATION 04420 -7 SECTION 04525 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS STONE MASONRY RESTORATION A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere. 1. Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Shotcrete: Section 03360. 3. Brick Masonry Restoration: Section 04420 4. Masonry Cleaning: Section 04550. 5. Sealants: Section 07900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . Work of this section includes, but may not be limited to the following: 1. Close range survey of the sandstone facade by Contractor from scaffold to detect damaged masonry. 2. Reattachment of stone veneer to existing structural brick and/or new concrete. 2. Composite patching of spalls in sandstone masonry. 3. Pinning and hand grouting of cracked sandstone masonry. 4. Reattachment of detached sandstone masonry. 5. Low pressure injection grouting of delaminated portions of sandstone masonry. 6. Provision of anchors for patching and anchoring of sandstone masonry. 7. Removal of all non - functioning anchors on sandstone facade. 8. Selective re- pointing of sandstone masonry as indicated. 9. Re- tooling of shallow losses of sandstone masonry. 10. Injection of adhesive resin between existing sandstone venner and structural brick. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of five years successful experience using methods and material specified and proposed. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -1 A. The Contractor shall submit cured hand samples 3 -inch x 3 -inch x 1 inch of all mortars and grouts for Architect's review. The Architect shall review for color and texture. B . The Contractor shall submit a 1 pound sample of each type of pointing mortar sand used. C. Sample Panels: Provide the following panels using the techniques proposed for review and approval of the Architect. Approved test panels shall be left in place for comparison of the progress of the Work. 1. Re -point a 4 -foot x 4 -foot panel on the building in location selected by the Architect showing representative joint size and profile. 2. Prepare masonry and apply composite patch to one area of loss at an edge location showing patch sculpted to match profile of adjacent masonry, and tooled to match surrounding surfaces. 3. Repair crack in one masonry unit showing pinning, hand grouting and patching. 4. Re -tool shallow area of loss 1 -foot x 1 -foot to match existing tooling of surrounding surfaces. 5. Demonstrate low pressure injection grouting technique for one area of delamination, minimum size of 1 -foot x 1 -foot. After curing of grout, take two core samples to indicate penetration of grout. 6. Repeat the test processes and alter methods and materials as required to achieve results which are satisfactory to the Architect. 7. The approved sample panels shall be used as a standard for all masonry repair work. D. Submittals by the Manufacturer of Master Fill Resin: 1. Submit all previous test data for similar applications of the resin to the Architect for review prior to proceeding with the Work. 2. Conduct resin tests with uncleaned brick from the structure per the direction of the Architect prior to proceeding with the Work. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. General: All materials shall be delivered to the job site in unopened containers as shipped by the manufacturer. The Architect shall be permitted to view delivered materials in their original unopened containers. Store, handle and protect all materials from damage, moisture, dirt, and intrusion of foreign matter. Immediately re-seal containers after partial use. Remove and replace damaged materials. B. Incipient Spalls to be Removed and Reset: 1. Mark all spalled pieces to indicate location from which they were removed. Store units in an orderly and systematic manner. 2. Stored units shall be made available for inspection by Architect. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All uncompleted work shall be protected at any time when liable to injury from storms or freezing. B. Materials shall be used only at the manufacturer's recommended temperature tolerances for masonry materials. 1. The work shall be protected during hot weather from premature or rapid curing by the use of dampened fabric coverings. 2. Work shall not be permitted in freezing weather, or when temperature of the air is expected to freeze within 48 hours of work. ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ANCHORS AND FASTENINGS: A. Hardware for crack repair, and anchoring of patches and spalls. 1. Threaded stainless steel rod, type 302 or 304, 1/4 -inch diameter or larger and 16 gage wire. Length shall be determined at time of application depending on depth of patch. Provide minimum of 4" embedment into sound back -up masonry. B. Stone Veneer ties: 1. Galvanized, 3/4" threaded rods that meet the requirements of ASTM A307 for grade 2 materials. 2. Epoxy - coated reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM D3963 as indicated. 2.02 ADHESIVE FOR SETTING OF ANCHORS AND FASTENINGS: A. Sikadur 31 Hi -Mod Gel by Sika Corporation P.O. Box 297 Lyndhurst, NJ 07071, or accepted equal. B. Hilti Hit C20 Adhesives and screens, or accepted equal, for veneer anchors. 2.03 ADHESIVE: A. For Reattachment of Stone to Brick: Master Fill Resin by General Resins, Inc., 901 E Santa Ana Blvd., Suite 119, Santa Ana, Ca. 92667, or accepted equal. B. For Reattachment of spalled stone: Sikadur Lo-Mod Epoxy by Sika Corporation P.O. Box 297 Lyndhurst, NJ 07071, or accepted equal. 2.04 RESTORATION MORTAR FOR PATCHES AND GROUT: A. "Jahn M 70 Restoration Mortar" available from Cathedral Stone, 2505 Reed Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20018 (202- 832 -1135) 1. Mortar shall be premixed and color matched by the manufacturer to a freshly cleaned sample of the sandstone provided by the Contractor. Mortar shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers. 2. Mortar material shall be mixed and used in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Water: Clean and free of deleterious impurities, acids, alkalies, or organic matter. Water shall be potable, from city mains. 4. Admixtures: Admixture ingredients of any kind not specifically listed in this specification shall not be used. 2.05 INJECTION MORTAR FOR DELAMINATED SANDSTONE: A. Jahn M 40 Injectionmortar" or "Jahn M 50 Injectionmortar -foot available from Cathedral Stone, 2505 Reed Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20018 (202- 832 -1135) 1. Injectionmortar shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers. 2. Injectionmortar material shall be mixed and used in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Water: Clean and free of deleterious impurities, acids, alkalies, or organic matter. Water shall be potable, from city mains. 4. Admixtures: Admixture ingredients of any kind not specifically listed in this specification shall not be used. ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -3 2.06 COATING FOR STEEL ANCHORS OR ATTACHMENTS EXPOSED IN COURSE OF WORK: A. Tnemec 166 Epoxoline by Tnemec Company, Inc. P.O. Box 411749 Kansas City, MO 64141 -1749, or accepted equal. 2.07 MORTAR MIXES: A. Mortar for pointing sandstone masonry: 1 part by volume white or gray Portland cement 1 part by volume hydrated lime ( Type S) 6 parts sand (color selected to match original mortar) 2.08 MIXING OF POINTING MORTAR: A. General 1. Mortar ingredients shall be measured carefully so that proportions are controlled and maintained throughout all work periods. 2. Mortar shall be mixed in an approved type power operated batch mixer. Mixing time shall be such as to produce a plastic homogeneous mortar, but mixing shall not be less than five minutes, approximately two minutes of which shall be for mixing the dry materials and not less than three minutes for continuing the mixing after water has been added. A minimum amount of water shall be used to produce a workable consistency. 3. Mortar for pointing shall be as dry a consistency as will produce a mortar sufficiently plastic to be worked into the joints. 4. Where mortar is required in small batches of less than a cubic yard, and the Architect specifically approves, mortar may be mixed by hand in clean wooden or metal boxes prepared-for that purpose but not on slabs, sidewalks, etc., provided the methods of mixing and transferring the mortar are approved by the Architect. 5. After mixing, the mortar shall sit for 20 minutes prior to use to allow for initial shrinkage. Mortar shall be placed in final position within two hours of mixing. Re- tempering of partially hardened material is not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Inspect sandstone masonry at close range from scaffold prior to beginning any work. Sound each masonry unit to detect delamination or other deterioration condition. Report all conditions revealed in this survey to the Architect. B. After close -up inspection and evaluation of masonry, meet with the Architect and Owner to review proposed repair /replacement scope of work. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for masonry restoration work. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence work until such conditions have been corrected. D. All resin injection for the adhesion of existing stone veneer to existing brick shall be done under the continuous inspection of of an Inspector approved by the Architect. The Inspector shall file a report of the approval of the Architect, Owner and Building Department. ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -4. E. Where resin injection is indicated to adhere the stone veneer to the brick masonry 2 inch diameter sample cores shall be taken for each fifty (50) square feet of injected wall. The cores shall be located an equal distance from adjecent injection holes. 3.02 REATTACHMENT OF STONE VENEER A. Existing stone veneer shall be reattached to existing structural brick by resin injection. 3.03 RESIN INJECTION A. Wall Preparation: 1. From the interior side: Drill 3/4 inch minimum diameter injection holes into bed joints at 2 feet on center each way. Holes shall penetrate to the near face of the collar joint between the brick and the stone. 2. Remove debris completely from injection holes prior to resin injection. B. Resin Injection: 1. Resin shall be delivered to the wall at a pressure of twenty to thirty pounds per square inch (psi), and injected into the wall at each injection hole, working from bottom to top. 2. When resin flows from the adjacent hole, plug the hole of injection and move th nozzle to the next injection hole. Continue until all holes have been injected. 3. Collar joints filled by existing mortar will prevent resin from migrating to some adjacent injection holes. If resin fails to appear in most adjacent injection holes, the reason shall be determined and the problem corrected before proceeding with Work. 4. Remove any overage immediately, so that stone is not stained. Staining of stone will not be accepted. 3.04 PATCHING OF SPALLS A. General: Spalls as indicated and as revealed in the initial survey by the Contractor shall be repaired by composite patching with the following exceptions: 1. Shallow spalls less than 1/4" in depth shall be re- tooled to match original tooling. Refer to Article 3.10 for re- tooling procedure. 2. Incipient spalls, or spalls which are thicker than 1 ", and have a surface area greater than approximately 1 foot square shall be reattached. Refer to Article 3.06 for reattachment of detached masonry procedure. B . Procedure: 1. Remove or cut back embedded anchors or metal revealed during course of work, wire brush to remove all corrosion and paint with two coats of epoxy coating. 2. Remove all loose and poorly consolidated material back to sound stone, and then remove an additional 1/4" of stone. Patch shall be minimum of 1/2" in depth. 3. Undercut edges of area to be patched to create a slight dovetail. 4. Roughen area to be patched with tooth chisel. 5. For patches at edge of masonry units, set wood screed in mortar joint. 6. For patches greater than one -inch in depth and with an area greater than 24 square inches, install stainless steel anchors and wires set in stone with epoxy adhesive. Provide a minimum of 2 anchors per patch. 7. Maintain cover over pins of at least three quarter -inch. 8. To provide mechanical key for patches less than one -inch in depth drill 1/2 inch diameter holes 1/2 inch to 1 inch deep spaced 2 to 3 inches apart in staggered rows at alternate approach angles. Provide minimum 10 holes per square foot of patch surface area. ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -5 4 r. 9. Wet stone surface thoroughly with water and soft brush to remove all dust and friable material. 10. Apply base coat of patching mortar. 11. Mix patching mortar with water to obtain mix which is firm and can be applied without the use of molds. M -70 patching mortar is prepared to a dryer consistency than typical patching mortars. Following manufacturer's instructions. Avoid use of excess water. 12. For patches not reinforced with steel pins, work mortar into 1/2 inch diameter holes in stagered rows, drilled at alternate approach angles. Provide ten (10) holes per square foot. 13. Apply patching mortar without heavy pressure. 14. Avoid excessive troweling or overworking of mortar layers. Remove mortar from adjacent stone before curing by brushing. 15. Apply mortar beyond finish surface and allow to cure for approximately 30 minutes or until thumbprint hard before sculpting and tooling to match profile and texture of adjacent stone. 16. Tool patch approximately 45 minutes after application to match texture of adjacent masonry. 17. Protect patch from rapid curing by covering with dampened fabric coverings. 18. Remove wood screed from mortar joint after patch is firm. Re -point open joints surrounding patch. For re- pointing procedure see Article 3.10. 19. All patches shall be firmly affixed to mother stone with no shrinkage cracks or other defects. 3.05 PATCHING OF LOSSES IN EXISTING PATCHES A. General: Losses in existing patches shall be patches as outlined in Article 3.04 - PATCHING OF SPALLS. B. When patch is de- bonded, but is otherwise sound, and is adjacent to, or covering delaminated sandstone, the patch shall not be removed, but reattached as outlined in Article 3.09 - INJECTION GROUTING OF DELAMINATED PORTIONS OF MASONRY. 3.06 PINNING A. General: Cracks and breaks wider than 1/4 -inch shall require the insertion of stainless steel pins every 9- inches. B . Procedure: 1. To set pins, drill holes 1/8 -inch larger than pin at oblique angle so that hole passes through stone on each side of crack to stitch stone together. 2. Clean pin with organic solvent to remove all contaminants which may interfere with bond of the adhesive. 3. Blow holes clean of dust with compressed air. Fill hole with epoxy. Pressure inject if necessary to completely fill hole. 4. Insert pin into hole, and recess pin 3/4 -inch from face of sandstone. Remove excess epoxy maintaining 1/4 -inch cover over pin. 5. Remove excess epoxy immediately with acetone or other solvent. 6. After epoxy has cured, fill hole with mortar matching the color and texture of the cleaned stone. The patch shall exactly replicate the original profile and texture of the stone. No epoxy shall be left exposed on masonry. 3.07 GROUTING ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -6 A. General: All cracks and fractures on masonry surfaces that are wider that 1/16 -inch shall be patched and filled with restoration mortar. Existing deteriorated grout shall be - removed from previously repaired cracks and re- grouted. Cracks in otherwise sound patching material shall also be grouted. B . Procedure: 1. Cracks less than 1/4 -inch wide shall be cut to a depth of 3/4 -inch and a width of 1/4 -inch using small hand -held electric grinders with silicone carbide blades. 2. Thoroughly clean crack with compressed air and moistened well with water. 3. Prepare mortar per manufacturer's instructions. 4. Fill crack with mortar working mix well into crack. For cracks deeper than 5/8 -inch fill in several layers. 5. Mortar shall be placed in final position within two hours of mixing. 6. The repaired crack shall be flush with the face of the stone work and shall be tooled before final set to match the texture of the adjacent masonry. 3.08 REATTACHMENT OF DETACHED MASONRY A. General: Large incipient spalls in which the affected portion is sound other than being partially detached from the mother stone, and are greater in thickness than one -inch and have a surface area greater than one - square foot, shall be reattached. B . Procedure: 1. Carefully remove loose incipient spall, and store for reuse. 2. Drill corresponding holes into each side of fractured inner surface of stone to be reattached to receive stainless steel pin. Holes shall be 1/8 -inch larger than pin, and depth of holes shall be at least four times diameter of pins. Provide a minimum of 2 anchors per patch. End of pin shall be a minimum of 3/4 -inch from the expose surface. 3. Clean the surfaces to be joined free of dust and loose material with stiff bristle brush, and blow holes clean of dust with compressed air. 4. Clean pin with organic solvent to remove all contaminants which may interfere with bond of the adhesive. 5. Fill holes in the mother stone with Hi -Mod Gel and insert pins. Coat projecting ends of pins with Hi -Mod Gel. 6. Coat each surface to be joined with Lo -Mod adhesive. Coat well, but avoid heavy build -up. Fill holes to receive pins with Hi -Mod Gel. 7. Set detached piece in place aligning pins and tap in place with rubber mallet and provide temporary shoring until epoxy has cured. 8. Remove excess epoxy immediately with acetone or other solvent. 9. Apply color matched injection or patching mortar as appropriate at enlarged seams along break. Tool to match adjacent stone. 3.09 INJECTION GROUTING OF DELAMINATED PORTIONS OF MASONRY A. General: Portions of sandstone masonry which have delaminated shall be reattached by injection grouting. B. A low pressure pneumatic cement grout pump or 60 mm syringes shall be used. Pump pressure shall not exceed 50 p.s.i. C. Procedure: 1. Locate delaminated area of sandstone by sounding with mallet taking care not to damage masonry. Mark edges of void areas with chalk. ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -7 2. Drill one or two 3/8 -inch hole(s) in affected area near bottom of void area to the right or left of crack if present. Repeat the procedure at top of void area. Distance between holes should not exceed 30- inches. Provide additional holes as necessary. 3. Block cracks in or adjacent to area to be treated with non - staining, removal compound such as potters' clay or removable sealant. 4. Prepare injection mortar following manufacture's directions. 5. Wet interior of surfaces of void by introducing water into top holes. If water does not appear at bottom holes within a few seconds, introduce a small amount of additional water into bottom holes. 6. Within ten minutes of wetting interior surfaces, inject mortar into holes. Avoid false setting of mortar by continuous pumping. Continue pumping operations until mortar reaches top holes. 7. Thoroughly clean any excess mortar from surrounding masonry using water and bristle brushes. 8. Fill injection holes with color matched patching mortar. 9. After curing of mortar, take small core in treated area to indicate penetration of injection mortar and report poor penetration of mortar to Architect. 3.10 MORTAR REMOVAL A. General: Prepare mortar joints in areas indicated on drawings for pointing. Mortar joints in the top surface of the cornice, parapet wall, second story string course not covered by existing patches, and as indicated on the elevation drawings shall be sealed. Refer to Section 07900 SEALANTS. B . Joint Raking: 1. Rake joints to a minimum of 3/4 -inch depth, but in all cases remove deteriorated and loose material. 2. Take special precautions to ensure than masonry faces and arrises are not damaged during the process of raking. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of all adjacent joint surfaces. Work shall not proceed if contractor's methods are damaging existing surfaces. 3. Power grinders shall not be used to remove mortar from joints less than 1/4 -inch in width. For joints narrower than 1/4 -inch, mortar shall be raked out manually using a sharp knife blade or cutter made for this purpose. 4. Power grinders shall not be used on vertical joints in close proximity to masonry units above or below the vertical joint in order to avoid damage of these units. 5. Remove all mortar from the surface of the masonry within the joint so that new mortar bond directly to the masonry. 6. Repair all masonry damaged by raking at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.11 MORTAR APPLICATION: A. General: Joint profile shall match existing beaded profile. B. Pointing: 1. Remove all mortar and foreign material from raked joints and clean joint edges using a stiff natural bristle brush or compressed air to remove granular particles and dust. 2. Wet masonry 24 hours prior to pointing and again immediately before pointing. Masonry is to be damp, but without freestanding water. 3. Apply pointing mortar tightly in layers of 1/8 -inch to fill joint. Construct uniform joints. 4. Tool joints after final layer is thumbprint hard using a concave joint or as directed by the Architect. Mortar shall not cover or obscure the front edges of the masonry. cm LA ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -8 a_ 5. Keep joints damp for at least 48 hours, or until surface is cured. No direct stream of water shall be directed at any joint for at least 24 hours after mortar has been placed. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 STONE MASONRY RESTORATION 04525 -9 SECTION 04550 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS MASONRY CLEANING A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Stone Masonry Restoration: Section 04500. 2. Masonry Cleaning: Section 04550. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. Work of this section describes the requirements for removal of all soil, soot and biological growth from masonry surfaces. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of five years successful experience using methods and material specified and proposed. 2. Employ only Foremen, Nozzlemen, Gunmen and Rodmen with at least two years of experience. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. B. General Objective: The objective of masonry cleaning is to remove soot, soil, and biological growth from existing masonry without damaging the brick or sandstone. Overly aggressive cleaning will not be acceptable. C. Comply with all City, State, and Federal Environmental Protection Agency and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. Obtain permits for discharge of contaminated water into local sewers. If required by local authorities, provide alternate methods of disposal of wastes, at no additional cost to the Owner.. ARG: 89119 MASONRY CLEANING 04550 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Test Panels: 1. A test panel of wall surface ten square feet in area, at a location selected by the Architect, shall be cleaned for review and approval by the Architect, prior proceeding with the Work of this Section.. Accepted test panels shall serve as model for the rest of the cleaning. 2. Specified dilutions of cleaning materials, and dwell times are to serve as a guide only. Contractor shall test variations of dilutions and dwell times to arrive at the most successful processes for specific Project conditions. In general, the most diluted solutions of cleaning agents which will provide satisfactory cleaning shall be used. 3. The representative of the cleaning agent manufacturer and the Architect shall be present during procedures for preparation and application of cleaning agents. a. Notify the Architect at least 72 hours in advance of testing. 4. Repeat the test processes and alter methods and materials as required to achieve results which are satisfactory to the Architect. 5. No general cleaning shall commence until acceptance is obtained. 6. Document tests by recording locations, procedures, and dilutions of cleaning chemicals on elevation drawings. B. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's product literature and instructions for use to for all cleaning materials. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Avoid cleaning during periods of extreme or excessive winds. B Protection: 1. When cleaning from scaffolding in traffic areas, drape scaffolding with plastic or burlap to reduce spray drift. 2. Protect trees and plants around the building from contamination or danger. 3. Protect, using extreme care, surrounding materials and buildings. a. Products used for cleaning brick and stone may be harmful to metal, glass and pavers. Any damage to materials caused by the cleaning process is unacceptable and shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect at no cost to the Owner. b. During cleaning take all precautions necessary to avoid staining or streaking of masonry adjacent to areas being cleaned. Check condition of adjacent materials frequently during cleaning process, and stop all cleaning if discoloration or alteration of surface texture is observed C. Test all drains and other water removal systems to assure that drains and systems are functioning properly prior to performing any cleaning operations. Notify Owner immediately of any and all drains or systems that are found to be stopped or blocked. Do not begin work of this Section until the drains are in working order. D. Provide a method to prevent solids such as masonry residue from entering the drains or drain lines. Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning out drains and drain lines that become blocked or filled by sand or other solids because of work performed under this contract. E3 ARG: 89119 MASONRY CLEANING 04550 -2 W. E. Channel runoff and control residue from paint removal with loose sand or sandbags as required. Allow liquid runoff to evaporate, and dispose of solid materials appropriately and as acceptable to the governing authorities. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in unopened containers as shipped by the manufacturer. The Architect shall be permitted to view delivered materials in their original unopened containers. B. Store, handle and protect all materials from damage, moisture, dirt, and intrusion of foreign matter. 1. Immediately re -seal containers after partial use. 2. Remove and replace damaged materials. B. Store materials at jobsite in a secure area acceptable to the Owner, off the ground, and under cover. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Masonry Cleaner: The masonry cleaner shall be a commercially available chemical formulated specifically for the removal of dirt and grime from brick and sandstone masonry surfaces, and shall be "Restoration Cleaner" manufactured by ProSoCo, Inc., Kansas City, KS., "Restoration Cleaner" by Nova Chemical, North Kansas City, MO or accepted equal. B . Strippable masking: Window glass shall be protected during masonry cleaning by the use of "Strippable Acid Stop" manufactured by ProSoCo, Inc., Kansas City, KS, or "Glass Guard "by Nova Chemical, North Kansas City, MO or accepted equal. C. Sodium hypochlorite - 5% (household bleach), in dilution of one part concentrate to three parts water shall be used if masonry cleaner does not successfully remove biological growth. D. The water shall be potable, non - staining and free of materials detrimental to all surfaces to be cleaned. E. All chemical materials shall be safe in use and shall not violate city, state, or federal environmental or safety regulations. 2.02 MISCELLANEUS MATERIALS A. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for complete and proper performance of the Work. Use new materials of first quality of their respective kinds. ARG: 89119 MASONRY CLEANING 04550 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify than conditions are satisfactory for commencemnt of the Work of this Section. Do not begin the work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Inspect surfaces for existing damage, make a complete listing of preconditions for review by the Architect and Owner. 3.02 PRECAUTIONS A. Comply with recommendations of manufacturer's "Material Safety Data Sheets." 3.03 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's preparation requirements. Remove all loose surface debris, flaking paints, and bird droppings from the dry stone by means of careful scraping and brushing. 3.04 EQUIPMENT A. Hardwood Hand Scrapers: Corners shall be rounded to prevent gouging of masonry. B. Dusting brushes or brooms. C. Polyethylene tarps, masking tape, nylon cord. D. Buckets: Molded rubber or plastic for mixing of cleaning compounds. E. Washing Brushes: Use densely packed, masonry washing brushes, soft Tampico fiber brushes for use with acidic cleaning compounds. F. Rinsing Equipment: Capable of delivering a low pressure wash of below 1000 psi, cold or hot water fitted fan tip nozzles between 50 to 20 degrees. All pressure pumps shall be equipped with working pressure gauges. 3.05 CLEANING PROCESS A. Dilute cleaning materials using clean water according to instructions appearing on manufacturer's printed container labeled or product data sheets. 1. Cleaning material dilutions and dwell times recommended by manufacturer are to serve as an initial guide in testing only. Actual mixes and dwell times shall be as determined after tests and procedures specified in Article 1.04. C. Brick Cleaning: 1. After final repair and pointing clean existing brick by the bucket and brush, hand - cleaning method. Comply with requirements of BIA Technical Notes No. 20 "Cleaning Brick Masonry ". 2. Use accepted commercial cleaning agents as recommended by their manufacturer's. ARG: 89119 MASONRY CLEANING 04550 -4 D. Stone Cleaning: 1. Work shall proceed in sections without excessive dwell time. Pre -wet an area to be cleaned and the areas directly beneath with pressurized cold water. Apply dilute solution of chemical cleaner by brushing or spraying. Dwell time shall be in accordance with approved test procedures. Rinse all traces of chemical and residue with pressurized cold water. Repeat procedure if necessary. The finished surface shall present a uniformly clean appearance. 2. Rinse water pressure shall not exceed 1000 pounds psi, and shall be sprayed through nozzles fitted with 15 -20 degree wide nozzle tips. All pressure pumps shall be equipped with working pressure gauges. 3. Scrubbing methods will be employed, using natural fiber bristle brushes, for cleaning deeply embedded dirt and biological growth. 4. Finished work shall show no signs of stains, scratches, streaks or runs of discoloration from use of cleaners. Leave all exposed surfaces neat and clean. The appearance of the brick and stone after cleaning and after adequate drying time shall be uniformly clean. 3.06 COMPLETION A. Remove and dispose of, in a legal manner, masking materials following completion of the cleaning operation. Window and other non - cementitious surfaces shall be left clean. B. All residue washed from building surfaces shall be swept or flushed away from surrounding sidewalks and service areas nightly. All premises shall be clean and neat at all times. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 MASONRY CLEANING 04550 -5 SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100 2. Concrete: Section 03300 3. Brick Masonry Restoration: Section 04420 4. Stone Masonry Restoration: Section 04525 5. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500 5. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. Work of this section includes, but may not be limited to the following: 1. Installation of steel beams and columns. 2. Installation of straps, plates, brackets, etc. 3. Installation of steel trusses. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Steel Fabricator Qualifications: Not less than 5 years successful experience. in fabrication of structural steel. Furnish evidence of ability, facilities, proficiency of personnel and list of completed projects. 2. Steel Erector Qualifications: Not less than 5 years sucessful experience in erection of structural steel. Furnish evidence of ability, facilities, proficiency of personnel and list of completed projects. 3. Welding Qualifications: Welding procedures, welders and welding operations shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. a. Requalify welders who have not performed welding for a period of three or more months. b. Requalify welders whose work fails to pass inspection before allowing further welding by them. c. Contractor shall pay costs of certifying qualifications. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Perform selective demolition, as approved by the ARG: 89119 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 -1 Architect, as required to ascertain all field dimensions. Schedule selective demolition and verification of field dimensions as required so that progress of work is not delayed. C. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Straightness of Structural Members: Comply with AISC "Manual of Steel Construction." 2. Erection Tolerances: Erect individual pieces so that deviation from plumb, level and alignment shall not exceed 1 to 500. D. Reference Standards: 1. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction: a. "Manual of Steel Construction." b. "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." c. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. a. A 36: "Standard Specification for Structural Steel." b. A 307: " "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners." c. A 500: "Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel, Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes." d. A 325: "Standard Specification for High Strength Bolts." 3. AWS - American Welding Society. a. A2.0: "Welding Symbols." b. D1.1: "Structural Welding Code." 1.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Tests shall be performed by a qualified testing laboratory as specified in Section 01510. 1. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule the testing services. 2. All tests shall be in accordance with the all applicable Laws and Regulations governing this work. 3. Notify the Testing Agent 72 hours in advance of commencement of any work for which their presents may be required. B. Welding Tests: 1. The Testing Agent shall check materials, equipment and procedure as well as the welds, and will furnish a report, signed by the Testing Agent, that the welding which is required to be inspected is proper and has been done in conformity with the Contract Documents and all applicable Laws and Regulations. 2. Ultrasonic testing of welds shall be performed in accordance with Chapter 27 of the U.B.C. 3. Welding Electrodes: Welding electrodes will be checked for conditions, suitability and conformance with the specifications. C. Materials Testing: 1. Contractor's Certification: Mill tests and manufacturer's Certification of Compliance with appropriate ASTM Standards will be accepted in lieu of testing for ASTM A -36 steel, ASTM A -53 Grade B and ASTM A -500, grade B steel tube. ARG: 89119 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 -2 D. Source Quality Control: Testing Agents shall perform and report on tests and inspections as follows: 1. Structural steel which has a mill analysis and test reports certified by the manufacturer shall constitute conformity with specifications provided the materials can be identified in the fabricating shop in accordance with ASTM A -6 by the Testing Laboratory. When material cannot be identified or its source is questionable, one set of tension and bend tests shall be made for each 5 tons or fractional part thereof, of each size. 2. A report of the material inspection together with identified copies of the mill test reports, shall be submitted to the Architect by the Testing Agent when the manufacturer's mill test reports are used. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: As required by Section 01300. 1. Submit prior to fabrication. 2. Include complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and show size, length and type of weld. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. 4. Identify details by reference to drawing and detail number on the Drawings. Show all dimensions. B. Welding: 1. Submit Certificate of welders qualifications. 2. Welding Procedure: Submit descriptive data to illustrate welding procedures to be performed. 3. Field Welding Equipment: Submit descriptive data for field welding equipment including type, voltage and amperage. C. Samples: Provide as requested by the Testing Agent. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Unload materials carefully; do not dump onto ground. B . Delivery and Storage: Deliver all materials to the job site properly marked to identify the location in the structure for which it is intended Marking shall correspond to marking shown on Shop Drawing. Store in a manner to maintain identification and to prevent damage. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the Architect and at no cost to Owner. D. Store structural steel members, whether on or off site, above ground on platforms, skids, or other support; store other materials in weathertight, dry place until time of use. ARG: 89119 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 -3 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Provide the Testing Agent with free access to places, whether on or off the job site, where materials are stored or fabricated, to places where equipment is stored or serviced, and to job site during time of laying out, erection, or job -site fabrication. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sequencing of Structural Steel work with the work of other Sections. Structural Steel Work is to be performed in an orderly and careful manner. B. Coordinate as required for attachment of other work to structural steel. C . Ensure timely fabrication and delivery of items to be embedded in or enclosed by Work of other sections, such as Concrete, Masonry, and Rough Carpentry; furnish setting drawings or templates with directions for installation and be responsible for proper location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials used in the performance of the Work under this Section shall conform to the following requirements of A.I.S.C. (American Institute of Steel Construction): 1. Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Rods: ASTM A 36. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A -53, Grade 'B." 3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A -500, Grade "B." 4. Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A -325N, Unfinished bolts. 5. Welding Electrodes: E70XX Low Hydrogen Electrodes. 6. Galvanizing: ASTM A -123 7. Galvanizing Repair. "Galvalloy" or "Dri- Galv." 8. Paint: Zinc Chromate Primer conforming to Federal Specification TT- P -645A. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General Requirements: 1. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC. 2. Fabricate and preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible. 3. Do shearing, flame cutting, and chipping carefully and accurately. 4. Do not drift to match unfair holes. Misaligned holes will be cause for rejection of members. 5. Coordinate as required for attachment of other work to structural steel. B. Connections: 1. Shop Connections: Bolted or welded as shown or specified. 2. Field Connections: a. Locate field splices only where shown, specified or approved. b. Where connection is not shown, submit design for review in accordance with standard practice unless otherwise specified. c. Mark completely tightened bolts with identifying symbol. ARG: 89119 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 -4 C. Holes: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final Shop Drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 3. Punch or drill holes 1/16 inch larger than bolt size. 4. Holes to fit anchor bolts may be 1/4 inch oversize. D. Bolted Connections: 1. All field bolting shall be made with high strength steel bolts in conformance with the updated November 13, 1985 AISC Specification of Structural Joints using ASTM A325N bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Snug tight condition is acceptable. 2. All nuts shall be installed over plate washers or heavy cut washers. 3. As erection progresses, bolt up Work to withstand dead load, lateral forces, and erection stresses. E. Assembly with Standard Threaded fasteners: 1. All anchor bolts and threaded rods shall conform with ASTM A307. 2. Draw up tight, check threads with chisel or provide approved lock washers or self - tightening nuts. F . Welded Construction: 1. Weld in accordance with AISC and AWS D1.1. 2. Inspection: All structural steel welds shall be inspected. Prior to welding the Testing Agent shall approve the welders and equipment to be used. Single pass welds may, wherever possible, be inspected after the welding has been completed, but before painting. Multi-pass welds shall have continuous inspection. Welding inspection shall conform to Section 2 -2714 of Title 24. The Testing Agent shall submit written reports certifying that materials and workmanship conform to approved drawings. 3. Column Bases: Prepare in accordance with the provisions of AWS and AISC. 4. Weld sizes shown are minimum and may have to be increased due to material thickness (AISC 1.17.5). 2.03 FINISHES A. Preparation of Surfaces: Thoroughly clean mill scale, rust, dirt, grease and other foreign matter from steel prior to prime painting. Where structural steel is to remain exposed, clean SSPC SP -7. B. Shop Priming: 1. Apply one coat of primer to all structural steel surfaces which will remain exposed in finished Work, except as specified herein. 2. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's specifications to provide minimum dry-film thickness of 2.0 mils per coat. 3. Permit thorough drying before shipment. 4. Do not prime paint in temperatures lower than 45 degrees F. ARG: 89119 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 -5 C. All structural steel to be embedded in concrete or receive fireproofing material shall be free of paint, oil or dirt. D. Field Priming: After erection of structural steel and miscellaneous iron, all spots where paint has been removed, damaged or burnt, including bolts, shall be cleaned and painted. E. Do not prime paint the following surfaces: 1. Surfaces to be field welded. 2. Surfaces to be high - strength bolted. F . Galvanizing: 1. All items to be galvanized, shall be hot - dipped after fabrication and in the largest practical units. 2. All items that are galvanized, shall be smooth and free from projections, barbs, and/or icicles, resulting from the galvanizing process. 3. Field processes, such as welding and cutting, which expose bare steel in galvanized steel, will require application of an approved preparation, which will give protection equal to the galvanizing and will match its color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine units of work to be placed and verify that: 1. All anchor bolts and embedded items for connection to structural steel have been installed properly. B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Supervise setting of anchor bolts and other embedded items required for erection of structural steel. Ensure correct bearing of steel and correct location of anchor bolts. 3.03 ERECTION A. General requirements: 1. Erect structural steel in accordance with the requirements of AISC. 2. Erect members plumb, square, true to lines, levels and elevations indicated. Provide shoring and bracing to take care of all loads to which the structure may be subjected, including equipment and operation of same. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as required for safety. 3. Where erection requires performing work of fabrication on site, conform to acceptable standards for fabrication. 4. Field corrections of members will not be permitted without prior written acceptance of procedure to be followed by the Architect. B. Field Assembly. 1. Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembling members. 2. Accurately assemble to lines and elevations shown, within erection tolerances specified. ARG: 89119 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 -6 3. Provide temporary and additional bracing of steel as necessary to support safely and adequately any and all loads imposed upon the structure during construction. 4. Ensure assembly is plumb, level, and aligned before final connecting. 5. Do not fasten splices of compression members before abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact. C. Welding: 1. All welding shall be done by the shielded electric arc process conforming to UBC Standard 27. -6. 2. Surfaces to be welded shall be well cleaned by wire brushing, chipping, or hammering and be free of all loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint or any other foreign material. 3. Welding equipment to be used in each case, shall be approved by the Testing Agent, and shall be provided with suitable devices to regulate the speed and to manually adjust the operating amperage and voltage. D. Gas cutting: Use of flame cutting torch will be permitted only after prior written notification by the Architect that it is acceptable. Allowance will only be considered where metal cut will not carry stress during cutting, stresses will not be flame -cut surface and cut surface will not be visible. 1. Make cuts smooth and regular in contour. 2. To determine effective width of members so cut, deduct 1/8 inch from least width at cut edge. 3. Make radius or re- entrance of cut fillet as large as practical, but in no case less than 1 inch. 4. Do not use flame cutting torch to align bolt holes. 3.04 EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Examine existing structural steel work to determine of welding was used during original fabrication or if the structure has been successfully welded onto previously. Any steel whose weldability cannot be confirmed by visual inspection or mill certificates must be tested as follows: 1. Weld a lug of A36 steel to the existing member and strike it repeatedly with a hammer: a. If the weld deforms without fracturing, the member can be considered weldable. b. If the weld separates from the base metal at the junction of the weld and the base metal, the member shall be considered not weldable. 2. In lieu of the above procedure, the base metal may be chemically tested to determine its carbon equivalent, per AISC Journal Vol. 25, No. 1. B. Rusted structural steel shall be cleaned and painted with zinc rich primer. If more than 1/4 of the base material is missing, the steel member shall be replaced or otherwise strengthened per direction of the Architect. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. All miscellaneous items of steel and iron indicated, anchors, straps, angles, lag screws, joist hangers, etc., noted or detailed on the drawings, or required to complete the work, shall be provided and installed. B. Contractor shall design and provide all temporary shoring and bracing as required. ARG: 89119 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 -7 3.06 CLEANING A. After erection, thoroughly clean surfaces of foreign or deleterious matter such as dirt, mud, oil or grease that would impair bonding of concrete or insulating concrete. 1. Additional cleaning, required of items to be embedded in concrete or fireproofed, due to fabrication or erection, shall be done by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. B On completion of this work, remove from the site all excess material, all scaffolding and bracing and leave the site, insofar as this work is concerned, in a clean condition. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05100 -8 A! SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Brick Masonry Restoration: Section 044520 2. Stone Masonry Restoration: Section 04525 3. Structural Steel: Section 05100 4. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 5. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. The Work of this section includes, but may not limited to, metal fabrications for: 1. Shop and Field Fabricated Rough Hardware. 2. Handrails. 3. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Society of Testing and Materials (AST". B. Uniform Building Code (U.B.C.) latest edition, as adopted by the City of Gilroy. C. American Institute of Steel Construction "Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges" latest edition. D. American Welding Society "Standard Code for Arch and Gas Welding in Building Construction" (AWS), latest edition. E. National Association of Ornamental Metal Manufacturer's "Architectural Metal Handbook." F. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication. ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -1 B. Shop Assembly: Pre- assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re- assembly and coordination installation. C. Welding Qualifications: Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS DI -1 D. Testing and Inspection: Tests shall be performed by a qualified testing laboratory as specified in Section 01510. 1. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule the testing services. 2. All tests shall be in accordance with the all applicable Laws and Regulations governing this work.. 3. Welding Tests: a. The Testing Agent shall check materials, equipment and procedure as well as the welds, and will furnish a report, signed by the Testing Agent, that the welding which is required to be inspected is proper and has been done in conformity with the Contract Documents and all applicable Laws and Regulations. b. Ultrasonic testing of welds shall be performed in accordance with Chapter 27 of the U.B.C. c. The Contractor shall organize the work and employ a crew of sufficient size to hold inspections to a minimum. .4. Materials Testing: a. Contractor's Certification: Mill tests and manufacturer's Certification of Compliance with appropriate ASTM Standards will be accepted in lieu of testing for ASTM A -36 steel, ASTM A -53 Grade B and ASTM A -500, grade B steel tube. b. Welding Electrodes: Welding electrodes will be checked for conditions, suitability and conformance with the specifications. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others. 1. Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements for design loadings, include structural computations, material properties and other information needed for structural analysis. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Deliver, handle, and store fabricated products to prevent rust, and deformation, and other damage. Store steel products off grade and positioned to drain any rainwater readily. 2. Deliver bolts, nuts, and washers in bags or boxes, tagged for identification. B. Store other metal products in a weather -tight and dry place until ready for use in the Work. ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -2 W EN 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduling and Sequencing: 1. Insure timely fabrication of items to be embedded or enclosed by other work. 2. Furnish information and assistance required for locating embedded items and be responsible for proper location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, and roughness. B . Architectural and Miscellaneous Steel Items: ASTM A -36. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A -53 D. Steel Bars: ASTM A -36. E. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 BRONZE PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to design, dimensions, and details indicated Provide railings and handrails members formed of pipe of sizes and wall thickness indicated, or if not shown, as required to support design loading. B . Design Loading: Handrails shall be designed to resist a load 20 pounds per square foot applied horizontally at right angles to the top rail, as required by the UB C. C. Interconnect railing members by butt- welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At tee and cross intersections provide coped joints. 2. Form bends by use of prefabricated elbow fittings and radius bends or by bending pipe at fabricator's option. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross - section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. E. Close exposed ends of pipe by use of convex, prefabricated fittings. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -3 2.03 FASTENERS A. General: Provide galvanized fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls, unless otherwise noted. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. B . Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. C. Lag bolts: Square head type, FS FF -B -561. D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF -S -92. E. Wood Screws: Flathead carbon steel, FS FF -S -111. F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF -W -92. G. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF -S -325. H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF -B -588, type, class, and style as required. I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF -W -84. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Filler Metals for Welding: AWS A5.1 or A5.5. B. Grouts: 1. General: Non -shrink type, premixed, requiring only the addition of water, "Metal -Mix Grout" by Conrad Sovig, or accepted equal, of type and strength suitable for the particular project conditions. 2. Nonmetallic Type: For use where grout will be exposed to view in the finished Work. C. Temporary Supports, Staying, and Bracing: As required. D. Shims and Levelling Devices: As Required. 2.05 PAINT A. Shop Primer: Zinc carbonate type. B . Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for all items exposed to weather unless otherwise indicated, or specified as follows: I. ASTM A -153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A -123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and heavier. 3. ASTM A -386 for galvanizing assembled steel products. ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -4 4. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re- galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with Military Specifications MIL -P- 21035. C. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C -494 or SSPC -Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 -mil dry thickness per coat. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS A. Rough Hardware: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required. 1. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions as indicated or required. B . Coordinate with other work supporting or adjoining miscellaneous metals and verify requirements for cutting out, fitting and attaching. C. Verify sizes, designs and locations of items; do so at site whenever construction progress permits. D. Fabricate items from materials notes and make true to profiles shown. Include accessories and fasteners to adequately secure the work in place. E. Steel members shall be prefabricated and pre- assembled in the factory or shop as far as practicable. Welds shall be expertly made and ground and dressed smooth. F . Perform cutting, shearing, drilling, punching, threading, tapping as required for items or their adjacent work. Drill or punch holes, do not use cutting torch. G . Items to be galvanized shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM A385 and A386. H. All steel and ferrous metal items located on the exterior of the building or as otherwise shown as indicated to be galvanized by the hot -dip process conforming to ASTM A -123. All required galvanizing shall be done after fabrication, in the largest section possible. All galvanized work requiring field soldering or welding shall be restored by field cold galvanizing. I. All metal that is not galvanized shall be primed with zinc chromate primer. Spot paint abrasions and field connections after assembly. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Workmanship: Use of materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to field verififed dimensions, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -5 B. All materials, both before and after fabrication, shall be protected from rust and corrosion and shall be kept free from dirt, grease and other foreign matter. Each framing member shall be free from twists and bends. Holes and all cut and sheared edges shall be neatly made without kinks, burrs and warped edges. All metal left exposed shall be straight, smooth and free of nicks, scars and dents. Exposed welds shall be uniform and neat. C. Gas Cutting: Gas cutting of holes in a member shall not be permitted. D. Welding: 1. Preparation: All surfaces shall be clean, free of rust, paint and foreign matter of any kind. Paint or scale shall be removed by wire brush, chipping, or hammering as required. Burned or flame cut edges to be welded shall be chipped clean, and wire brushed before welding. Clamp members as required, space and alternate welds, all as may be necessary to prevent warping or misalignment. 2. Weld Metal: Weld metal shall conform to E70 for ASTM A -36 steel. Weld metal shall be thoroughly fused with the base metal along all surfaces and edges of the union. Penetration shall be 1/16" minimum and shall be into the root of the joint. 3. Weld Quality: Shall present a uniform surface, free of imperfections, and without undercutting or overlapping and free from excessive oxides, gas pockets, and non - metallic inclusions. Welds shall be made with proper number of beads or passes to secure sound, thoroughly fused joints. Provide backup bars, temporary backup bars or backup welds for all full penetration butt welds. Each deposit shall not exceed 5/16" of weld for each pass or bead. Preceding layers shall be cleaned by wire brushing or peening to remove scale and slag, before placing any new weld metal. 4. Faulty and Defective Welding: Any welding showing cracks, slag inclusion, lack of fusion, bad undercut or other defects, ascertained by visual or other means of inspection shall be chipped out and properly replaced at Contractor's expense. 5. Minimum Weld Strength: Details of fabrication not specifically shown shall follow in type similar details which may be specifically shown. E. Bolt Holes: Bolt holes to be 1/16" oversize round or oversize 1/16" by 1/4" oversize slotted where indicated. F. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. G. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not shown, regular flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. M ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -6 I. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. J. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of miscellaneous metal products. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items and coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through - bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. 1. Field Connections: Workmanship of field bolted and welded connections shall conform in all respects to methods and tolerances specified for fabrication. 2. Templates: Bolt setting templates shall be furnished for all anchor bolts. The Contractor shall furnish instructions for setting of anchors and bearing plates and shall ascertain that the items are properly set during the progress of the work. B. Installation of Bolts: Standard machine bolts (A307) shall be installed in matching holes. Bolts shall not be installed with damaged threads and shall be tightened to a snug condition using an impact wrench. C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connection accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Field weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch -up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -7 M M3 units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 3.04 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIALS A. Work found to be defective, missing or damaged shall be immediately replaced with proper work. Such replaced work and the inspection for same shall be at the expense of the Contractor. B . Straightening of any materials, if necessary, shall be done by a process and in a manner that will not injure the materials, and which is accepted by the Architect. Sharp kinks or bends shall be cause for rejection. Heating will not be allowed. C. If defects or damaged work cannot be corrected in the field, the materials shall be returned to the shop or new parts furnished, as directed by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 SHOP PAINTING A. After inspection and accepted shop paint structural steel and miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. B . Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP -2 "Hand Tool Cleaning." C. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP -1 "Solvent Cleaning." D. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer thoroughly and evenly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. E. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. 3.06 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint, repair shop - applied coating, and areas of weld where shop - applied coating has been damaged, with a primer or galvanizing repair compound compatible with shop coating. LM ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -8 3.07 COMPLETION A. Each items shall be set square, plumb, and level, accurately aligned, and securely anchored. 1. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from adhesive, scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -9 SECTION 06100 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ROUGH CARPENTRY A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Speed Elsewhere: 1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100. 2. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 3. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 4. Built -up Roofing: Section 07510 5. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 6. Metal Doors: Section 08110. 7. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 8. Access Doors: Section 08305 9. Wood Window Restoration: Section 08610. 10. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 11. Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIP'T'ION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . This section describes rough carpentry work and miscellaneous items which are to be furnished and/or installed. This Section does not individually describe each item. The most important features and those requiring detail description are mentioned. All rough carpentry work and miscellaneous items not mentioned or described, but required to complete the work, shall be furnished and/or installed in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Except where the provisions of the Contract Documents are more exacting, the following standards shall apply: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. American Plywood Association (APA): "Guide to Plywood Grades," latest edition. 3. American Wood Preservers' Bureau (AWPB) 4. National Bureau of Standards (NBS): a. PS 1: "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood. b. PS 20: "American Softwood Lumber Standard. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) ARG: 89119 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -1 6. Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee. 7. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB): "Standard Grading Rules, No. 16," latest edition 8. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS): "Standard Specifications for Grade of California Redwood Lumber," latest edition. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Lumber shall be grade stamped by an agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee and manufactured in accordance with Product Standard 20, as published by the Department of Commerce. 2. Each piece of plywood shall be grade stamped in accordance with APA "Guide to Plywood Grades," in conformance with the requirements of PS 1. 3. Each piece of lumber and plywood treated with fire - retardant shall be labeled to show compliance with the UL requirement specified and shall be grade stamped with the applicable AWPB quality mark indicating the preservative and retention. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work under this section shall be erected true to line, permanently secured in place and acceptable for the application of finish materials. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks. B . Any structural member damaged by handling shall be considered defective material and shall be replaced. C. Discard badly warped lumber. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Before commencing work, check lines, levels and dimensions indicated and such other work has has been completed. Should there be any discrepancies, report same in writing to the Architect for correction or adjustment. In event of failure to do so, the Contractor shall be responsible for correction of any errors. B. Coordinate work with other trades and perform all cutting, framing and fitting required to accommodate their work. C. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other related work. D. Coordinate sequencing of Rough Carpentry Work with the work of other Sections. Work is to be performed in an orderly and careful manner. ARG: 89119 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -2 La co IZA 2.01 MATERIALS A. Framing Lumber: All framing lumber shall be S4S Douglas fir unless otherwise noted, conforming to the requirements of the "Standard Grading and Dressing Rules No. 16," size as noted on drawings. Moisture content 22% maximum, average shall not exceed 19% unless otherwise noted. Member Grade Studs, blocking, bridging No. 2 Furring, backing, stripping No. 2 Posts No. 1 Joists, ledgers, purlins No. 1 Beams No. 1 B. Sills or plates: All sills or plates in contact with concrete foundations and slab on grade shall be foundation grade redwood or pressure treated "No. 1 Structural" grade Douglas fir in accordance with Federal Specification TT-W -572, for preservation and Federal Specification TT-W -5719 for pressure - treating. C. Treated Lumber: All wood in contact with concrete, masonry or exposed weather shall be treated on all surfaces, including field cuts. Preservative solution shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification TT-W -572. Wood blocks or any other wood members placed in contact therein, shall be pressure treated in accordance with Federal Specifications TT -W -571. Coordinate wood treatment with paint finish as specified in section 09900. D. Plywood Sheathing: All plywood sheathing, unless otherwise indicated, shall meet the requirements of the U.S. Plywood Standard PS 1 -74 of the size thickness, and grade shown on the structural drawings. Each panel shall carry the grade trademark of the American Plywood Association along with the DFPA Quality Stamp. E. Flooring underlayment: Underlayment for finish floor materials shall be 1/4" exterior grade plywood, or as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise noted. F . Rough Hardware: Furnish all items of rough hardware; connectors, bolts, nails, etc., required to complete the work. Size as indicated. 1. Nails: Common wire (hot dipped galvanized where exposed to weather). 2. Bolts, nuts, washers: Standard mill steel, square or hexagonal head machine bolts with matching nuts and malleable iron or steel plate washers or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers. Hot dipped galvanized where exposed to weather. 3. Lagbolts and Screws: Conform to Federal Specification FF- B -561B. 4. Power - driven Fasteners: " Ramset" system of Ramset Fastener, Inc., "Hilti" or accepted equal, including washers. Power driven fasteners shall not be used except where accepted by Structural Engineer. ARG: 89119 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -3 5. Framing Anchors: Timber Fasteners, Inc. Universal Anchors Co., Simpson Company or accepted equal, framing connectors and joist hangers. a. All exterior items shall have a fabricate applied galvanized coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of rough carpentry. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. B. Contractor shall replace decayed wood framing and sheathing encountered during demolition and the course of the Work. 3.03 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. General: All wood framing work shall be properly framed, closely fitted, accurately set to required lines and levels, and secured rigidly in place. Special framing, or construction not explicitly shown or specified, shall be provided as required to complete the work in the best and most workmanlike manner. Nailing shall be done in a thorough manner with nail sizing and spacing conforming to the UB C. 1. Install all wood framing, making proper provisions for work of other trades. a. Perform all cutting of wood required to accommodate plumbing, heating and ventilating, electrical and other trades. See Structural Drawings for requirements. b. Fit neatly around all exposed items, such as outlet boxes, conduits, pipes and ducts. 2. Nailing shall be as indicated on Structural Drawings and where not indicated shall conform to the requirements of UBC, Table 25 -Q. B . Framing of Openings: 1. Openings shall be provided for mechanical and electrical equipment, ducts, etc. 2. Frame all openings in walls required for the installations of cabinets and other items, including electrical and access panels. C. Joists and Beams: 1. Place with crown up. If cantilevered, place with crown down. 2. Joists and beams shall be accurately aligned and spaced as shown on the drawings. Coordinate with other framing and to other trades prior to actual construction. 3. Provide at least 2" of bearing at all conditions.. D. Studs: Generally, new walls shall be framed with metal studs as specified in Section 09250, Gypsum Wallboard. Where wood studs are required for replacement, inftll framing, blocking etc. they shall conform to the following: 1. Two inch nominal thickness, widths and spacing as required to match existing ARG: 89119 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -4 and/or indicated on drawings, set plumb and in alignment. 2. Stud partitions containing plumbing, heating or other pipes shall be framed to give proper clearance for piping. a. No notching will be allowed without written permission of the Architect. b. See Structural Drawings for notching and drilling requirements. Run cripple studs to floor plate. 3. When replacing existing studs or filling openings in existing walls, use studs of same dimension as existing and/or furnish furring as required. 4. Provide wood backing in stud walls, ceilings and furring to receive cabinets, hardware, and electrical fixtures, plumbing and heating apparatus and equipment. Accurately fit backing, set slightly back from face of studs, and securely spike to studs. 5. Sill and plates shall be single at bottom and double at top. a. Stagger splices in top plate 48" minimum. b. Except for interior non - bearing walls, no top plate shall be bored greater than 1/3 width diameter without approval. Where plates are cut for passing pipes and similar items, they shall be reinforced on both sides with Simpson ST18 or approved equal. c. Sill plates on concrete shall be as specified in Article 2.01, anchored with bolts, and shall have full bearing on concrete. e. Provide minimum of two sill bolts per sill piece with a bolt within 9" of each end of sill. Bolts to be 5/8" diameter X 10" long at 4' on centers, unless otherwise shown or noted. 1) All bolt nuts shall be provided with a cut plate steel washer for bearing on wood. 2) Holes and notches in sill plates exceeding one -half of the sill width shall be treated as end of sill. 6. All openings in stud walls and partitions shall be framed with headers, size as indicated, across the top resting on short cripple studs. a. Double studs on each side of all openings, unless shown or noted otherwise. 7. All bearing stud walls shall have horizontal solid blocking not less than 2 X width of the stud, fitted and nailed into the studs at 4' -0" on center and/or as required by the Uniform Building Code. 8. Fire blocking shall be installed as required by the Uniform Building Code, or other applicable codes. 9. Studding shall be blocked as indicated, with double -nails at each end. 10 Where studding or wall furring is over 10 ft. high, there shall be two runs of bridging. 11. Install new studs in same manner as existing. Bottom plate to be installed on top of flooring. 12. Furnish and install all stock items or rough hardware as indicated or required including clips, anchors, hangers, bolts, ties and plates, etc. for connecting wood framing members to wood, concrete, masonry, or steel, except as specified to be provided under other sections. 3.04 STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. General: See Structural Drawings for nailing requirements. Nail heads shall be driven flush with plywood face. Over - driving of nails so that heads cut the outer veneer is not allowed. Nails driven so as to miss bearing shall be removed and ARG: 89119 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -5 correctly driven. Only 1/2" or greater thickness of plywood may be machine nailed. All joints of plywood shall have solid bearing and sheets shall be laid up with tight joints.. B. Roof Sheathing: 19/32 inch thick CDX (Structural II) Plywood with a minimum APA rating of 24/0, unless otherwise noted 1. Lay plywood with face grain perpendicular to roof rafters. 2. Minimum nailing shall be: a. Edge: 10d at 4 inches on center b. Field: 10d at 12 inches on center. 3. All unsupported edges shall be blocked with 2x4 members minimum, unless other indicated. C. Replacement Floor Sheathing: 3/4 inch thick CDX (Structural II) Plywood with a minimum APA rating of 40/20, unless otherwise noted. 1. Lay plywood with face grain perpendicular to floor joists. 2. Minimum nailing shall be: a. Edge: 10d at 4 inches on center b. Field: 10d at 10 inches on center. 3. All unsupported edges shall be blocked with 2x4 members minimum, unless other indicated. D. Stair Landing Floor Sheathing: 1 -1/8 inches thick CDX Plywood with a minimum APA floor span rating of 48 inches as indicated. 1. LAy plywood with face grain perpendicular to floor joists. 2. Minimum nailing: a. Edge: 10d at 4 inches on center. b. Field: 10d at 10 inches on center. 3. Unsupported edges shall be tongue and groove. 3.05 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS AND BLOCKING A. Furring, blocking, and backing shall be furnished and installed where required for reception of veneer plaster, formation of architectural features, concealment of structural work, pipes, conduits, ducts, attachment of supports for plumbing fixtures and toilet room accessories, building specialties, and other fixtures. Contractor shall coordinate with the trades concerned and set furring and blocking as required. 1. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment to other work. 2. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Grounds and Nailing Strips: Dressed wood grounds shall be furnished and installed as indicated or required for securing trim or other finish. Set grounds rigid, true, and in perfect alignment. 1. Nail grounds to wood members and secure to concrete or masonry with nailing blocks or plugs or expansion type anchors. 2. Provide wood stripping where indicated or required for attachment of finish materials. ARG: 89119 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -6 a. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. b. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. c. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. d. Wherever possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3.06 LUMBER FASTENINGS A. General: Nails, spikes, screws, fabricated sheet metal anchors, ties, hangers, and any other materials shown or required for the attachment of wood to concrete, to steel, and to wood shall be furnished and installed as part of this work. B. Bolts, Lag Screws and Washers: 1. Bolts in wood shall be machine bolts conforming to ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted and shall be of such length that not more than 1/2" of thread shall bear against wood. 2. Bolt Holes: Bore holes true to line, 1/16" greater than bolt diameter. Drive bolts into place with a tight fit and provide with plates or washers. Tighten nuts, bolts and lag screws at time of installation and again before being enclosed or at completion of work, to insure that shrinkage has been overcome and the fastenings are tight. Use malleable iron washers, unless otherwise noted. 3. Provide square plate or malleable iron washers at nuts and heads where bearing is against wood; cut washer under nut where it is against steel. Provide galvanized, malleable iron washers where exposed. 4. Lag screws shall be screwed (not driven) into place. a. All lag screw and bolts shall have cut threads not rolled threads. b. Lagscrew shank holes shall be the same diameter as the shank. Predrill the hole for the threaded portion of the lag screw., producing a hole diameter 60% minimum / 75% maximum of the shank. c. Use plate washer as required for same bolt size. 5. All structural wood bolt connectins shall have a washer, unless a steel plate is speed. Countersinking of bolts will not be permitted without written permission form the Architect. 3.07 SHRINKAGE A. Where moisture content is greater than 12% at time of construction or where there is a significant variation in moisture content between individual framing members, allow for differential shrinkage in all wood connections and do not complete nailing until potential shrinkage differential is less than 1/8 ". This applies particularly where wood frames into glu- laminated beams and existing dry lumber. 3.08 COMPLETION A. Completed work shall be erected true to line, permanently secured in place and acceptable for the application of finish materials. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -7 SECTION 06180 GLU- LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100. 2. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 3. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 4. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 5. Built -up Roofing: Section 07510 6. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 7. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 8. Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. Work of this section includes all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install all glu- laminated timber as indicated and/or as required and specified herein. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Materials manufactured and quality controls shall be in conformance with Commercial Standard, CS 253, "Structural Glued Timber'; Uniform Building Code, Section 2511 and UBC Standard No. 25 -10; and AITC PS 56 -73. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer shall be licensed by ATTC and operate under ATTC Quality Control Program. 1. Each glued laminated member shall be inspected and marked with a quality mark by an ATTC qualified and certified inspector. In addition, a Certificate of Conformance shall be issued to indicate conformance with CS 253 -63. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Beams shall be bundle wrapped prior to, during, and after transit and shall be protected from moisture, weather, and shall be kept well ventilated at all times during construction. Beams specified to have architectural appearance shall be individually wrapped. ARG: 89119 GLU - LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06180 -1 Qj B. Glu- laminated timbers shall be stored off of the ground in a dry secure place until ready for use. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Submit Shop Drawings for review and comment prior to fabrication. C. Two copies of a warranty, in a form acceptable to the Owner and signed by an official of the Glu -Lam Manufacturing Company, shall be submitted to the Architect, certifying that workmanship shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner for a period of five years following the accceptance of the Work.. D. Certificate of Conformance with CS 253 -63. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Shall be coast region Douglas fir with maximum moisture content of 16% at time of manufacture. 1. Glu- Laminated Beams shall be Douglas Fir in accordance with W.C.L.A. Standard Specification 24F -E4, and AITC certified. 2. Glu- Laminated members used for blocking shall have a minimum grade of 16F -E23. B. Adhesive: Shall be exterior for wet surface condition (above 16 %) and shall meet requirements of ASTM D2559 -70. 2.02 APPEARANCE A. Glu- laminated members shall be Industrial Appearance Grade when not otherwise noted. 2.03 PROTECTION A. Ends shall be sealed after end trimming and entire surface of members shall be factory sealed with a penetrating sealer as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Field cuts, notches, and daps shall receive one coat of the same sealer prior to erection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of glu -lams construction. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. ARG: 89119 GLU- LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06180 -2 3.02 ERECTION A. Members shall be erected with suitable equipment and secured in place as detailed. B. Glu- laminated members shall be aligned and braced until all secondary members or other framing is secured. Contractor shall verify all beam cambers in the field prior to erection. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 GLU- LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06180 -3 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 2. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 3. Sealants and Caulking: Section 07900. 4. Wood Doors: Section 08200. 5. Access Doors: Section 08305 6. Wood Windows: Section 08610 7. Painting: Section 09900 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing finish carpentry items. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Submit Shop Drawings of all mill work, except items designated to match existing, at quarter size, showing materials; grain run; method of construction including attachment and weather sealing for installation as required Field check all dimension, including decorative trim pieces, prior to beginning Shop Drawings. C. Submit samples at least 12 inch length of each new trim type. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Lumber and Millwork: Woodwork Institute of California, Manual of Millwork; premium grade. 2. Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 20. 3. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1. 4. Grade Mark or Grade Certificate: Required for each piece or bundle of lumber, or each item. ARG: 89076 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -1 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed; or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable. Manufactured to actual sizes as required by PS 20; or to actual sizes and pattern as shown; or to match existing as indicated. B . Moisture content of Lumber: Provide kiln -dried (KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacture until time of installation as indicated within the ranges required in the referenced woodworking standard. C. Design and Construction Features: Comply with details shown for profile and construction of architectural woodwork and, where not otherwise shown, comply with applicable quality standards. 1. Fabricate to produce flush, smooth, hairline joints D. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork and especially where pieces are required to be fitted to other construction, obtain all measurements and verify all dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit. F . Lumber. 1. General: Sound, clean, free from tool marks and free from warp which would adversely affect finished installation. 2. Exterior: As required to match existing. 3. Interior : a. New Base: As required to match existing. b. Existing base to remain and be repaired as required. c. New Window Trim: As required to match existing. d. Existing window casing to remain and be repaired as required. e. Door Casings: As required to match existing. f. Trim: As required to match existing.. ARG: 89076 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -2 P. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of finish carpentry. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. B. Contractor to make thorough inspection of all existing elements to remain such as trim, casings, etc. All elements to remain shall be firmly re- attached to structure as required for sound, watertight construction. Repair all damaged elements as required or replace to match existing. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned, or which are of defective manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns. B. Install the work plumb, level and true to line of building with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. 3.03 INTERIOR TRIM A. General: Machine sand exposed surfaces at the mill. Provide window and door trim in single lengths. After installation, sand exposed surfaces smooth. B . New Bases and Trim: 1. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full- length pieces to the greatest extent possible. 2 Joints shall occur over center lines of support. 3. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. 4. Cope at returns, miter at corner, to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint. 5. Use scarf joints for end -to-end joints. 6. Joint straight runs of trim with diagonal butts only and not less than 12 feet apart. 6. Secure finish items in place with finishing nails. 7. Blind nail where possible. Set face nailing for putty stopping. C. New Door Frames: 1. Set plumb and square. 2. Provide solid blocking spaced at not more than 16 inches on centers for jambs. 3. Position blocking to occur behind hinges and lock strikes. 4. Double wedge frames and fasten with finishing nails. 5. Set nails for putty stopping. ARG: 89076 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -3 D. Existing door casings, window casings and base boards: 1. Contractor shall make a thorough close -up evaluation of all elements. All elements to remain shall be firmly reattached to structure. a. Post Inspection Conference: After close -up inspection and evaluation meet with Architect and Owner's Representative to review proposed repair/replacement scope of work. 2. Reinstall missing pieces with material to match existing. 3. Clean, fill holes and sand in preparation for painting. E. New Finish Stair: 1. Fit, nail, screw, bolt, and glue stairwork together to form a strong rigid structure without squeaks or vibrations. 2. Anchor newels and posts securely to rough stair framing. 3. Cut newels, posts, and drops accurately around floor construction to make a tight fit. 4. Install balusters at treads and landings as indicated. 5. Railings: a. Install railings with straight runs following slope of stairs and with smooth curve turns. b. Return railing profile at ends and secure joints with bolts and nuts. c. Secure railing to posts and newels with concealed anchors. d. Support wall rails on metal brackets spaced near ends and not over 6 feet on centers. 3.03 INTERIOR TRIM A. General: 1. Machine sand exposed flat members and square edges. 2. Construct joints to exclude water. 3. In addition to nailing, glue joints of built -up items as necessary for weather - resistant construction. 4. Provide well- distributed end joints in built -up members. 5. Hold backs of wide -faced miters together with metal rings and glue. 6. Backprime all areas of items to be concealed prior to installation. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION A. Repair existing elements wherever possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi- exposed surfaces. C. Refer to Section 09900 for final finishing of finish carpentry work. END OF SECTION LA ARG: 89076 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -4 SECTION 07200 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Plumbing: Section 15400. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing thermal insulation throughout the building and acoustic insulation at new walls inToilet and Mechanical Rooms and the Staging Kitchen. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. E84: "Standard Test Method of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials." 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer's original unopened packaging and shall be adequately protected against damage while temporarily stored at the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMAL INSULATION A. Batt Insulation: Glass -fiber or mineral -fiber units, foil faced on one side as follows: 1. Glass Fiber: Owens - Corning Fiberglas Corp., "Fiberglas FS25," or Manville "Flame- Resistant FSK," or approved equal. 2. Mineral Fiber: United States Gypsum "Thermafiber 'Flame Resistant' Blankets" or accepted equal. a. Thickness: As required to provide a minimum thermal rating of R -19 at ARG: 92075 INSULATION 07200 -1 walls and R -30 in ceiling construction. b. Width: As required. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Faced or unfaced, glass -fiber or mineral -fiber units 1. Manville, "Sound Control Batts ", Owens - Corning Fiberglas Corp., "Fiberglas ": Commercial insulation blankets, or accepted equal. a. Thickness: Full cavity thick. Minimum 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated. b. Width: As required to fit wall construction indicated. c. Weight: 2 pounds per cubic foot; 3 pounds per cubic foot at mechanical rooms. 2. Location: Concealed within walls and ceilings at Toilet and Mechanical rooms. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Bugle -head screws, galvanized roofing nails, or common nails driven through cap washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces to receive thermal and acoustical insulation are satisfactory for their installation. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions for the specific product. B . Do not install insulation until building is sufficiently enclosed or protected against absorption of moisture by the insulation, and do not install insulation unless supporting framing and surrounding construction is in a thoroughly dry condition. C. Insulation shall fit all framing space, including areas between joists and outside headers, behind electrical outlets and piping, to form a complete insulating blanket around the heated area of the structure. D. Do not install insulation over or within 3" of fixtures containing lights, fans, or other heat generating electrical devices. Use baffles to maintain these clearances. 1. Carefully cut and fit insulation around pipes, conduit, and other obstructions and penetrations. ARG: 92075 INSULATION 07200 -2 E. Where door and window frames occur in framing, cut additional strips of insulation and hand -pack as necessary to thoroughly fill any and all voids in and around such frames. F. Thermal Insulation: 1. Install with foil facing to building interior and recessed to provide not less than 3/4 inch air space between foil facing and back side of covering wall finish materials. 2. Install to completely fill all typical and odd spaces in framing where required, other than providing air space as specified. G. Acoustical Insulation: Install to completely fill typical and odd spaces in framing where required. END OF SECTION ARG: 92075 INSULATION 07200 -3 SECTION 07510 BUILT -UP ROOFIN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Brick Masonry: Section 04200. 2. Stone Masonry: Section 04400. 3. Structural Steel: Section 05120. 4. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 5. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 6. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 7. Plumbing: Section 15400. 8. Electrical: Section 16000. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . This Section describes the requirments for supplying and installing built -up roofing. C. Definition: Built -up Roofing System work is defined to include roofing, composition flashing and stripping, and roofing accessories integrally related to built -up roofing installation. D. Types of Built -Up Roofing required for project include: 1. Asphalt/glass -fiber felt roof membrane with mineral surfacing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide primary products, including each type of roofing sheet (felt), bitumen and composition flashings, produced by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary products only as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. B. UL Listing: Provide built -up roofing system and component materials which have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class A external fire exposure. 1. Provide roof covering materials bearing Classification Marking on bundle, package or container indicating that materials have been produced under UL's Classification and follow -up Service. ARG: 89119 BUILT -UP ROOFING 07510 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B . Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. 1. For asphalt bitumen, provide label on each container or certification with each load of bulk bitumen, indicating flash point, finished blowing temperature, softening point and equiviscous temperature. C. Submit samples of manufacturer's standard color range for cap sheet, for Architect's selection of color. D. Insurance Certification: Assist the Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. 1.05 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY A. Prior to final acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee, in a form acceptable to the Owner and signed by the Contractor and the Roofing Sub - Contractor, for a period of 10 years covering repairs required to maintain the roof, including all flashing, in a watertight condition. 1. During the ten year guarantee period, Contractor shall make repairs at no additional expense to the Owner. B. Guarantee shall be limited to ordinary wear and tear by the elements or by defects due to faulty materials and workmanship. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. 1. Weather conditions should be such that they meet all Equiviscous Temperature Method (EVT) requirements. B. Provide temporary roofing if it becomes necessary to make the building weathertight prior to installation of permanent roofing system. Temporary roofing shall be of the type as approved by the Architect. Completely remove temporary roofing from each area prior to installation of permanent roofing. Installation and removal of temporary roofing shall be installed at no addional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store and handle roofing sheets in a manner which will ensure no possibility of moisture pick -up. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weatherproof place. Unless protected from weather or other moisture sources, do not leave unused felts on roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. ARG: 89119 BUILT -UP ROOFING 07510 -2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -GENERAL A. Insurance and Code Requirements: Provide materials complying with governing regulations, and which can be installed to comply with the following: 1. Factory Mutual requirements for "Class A" or "Noncombustible," including zoned wind resistance. 2. Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Classified" and "Class 60" wind uplift resistance. 2.02 BUILT -UP ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM A. Roofing materials shall be those required by the manufacturer for providing the guarantee indicated above. Roofing shall be built -up gravel surface by Manville Roofing Systems, Specification No. 4 GNC by Flintkote or Owens - Corning Fiberglass Corporation. Flashing shall be as indicated. B . Materials shall be delivered in original packages bearing the manufacturer's label. C. Built -up roofing: The minimum amount of material required per 100 square feet ( "square ") of roof area will be the following: 1. Felts: a. "Glasply Finishing Felt ": Three plies. b. Surfacing: Mineral Surface Cap Sheet, comply with ASTM D 3909. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Bitumen: 170-degree, Type III, a total of 135 pounds per square. 3. Base Flashing: Comply with roofing material manufacturer's requirements. 2.04 EDGE/PENETRATION MATERIALS A. Plastic Cement: FS SS -C -153, cut back asphaltic type. B. Glass Fiber Fabric: 1.5 -1b. (min.) sheet, of woven glass fiber, impregnated with asphalt (ASTM D 1668). 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL A. Sheathing and Wood Members: Comply with requirements of Section 06100, "Rough Carpentry" of these specifications for nailers, and other wood members indicated as roofing system work. B . Substrate Joint Tape: 6" or 8" wide coated glass fiber mat. C. Elastomeric Sealant: One - component, moisture curing, polyurethane low modulus joint sealer. 1. Manufacturer: Tremco or approved equal. 2. Product: Dymenic. D. Asphaltic Primer: Comply with ASTM D 41. E. Fasteners: Simpson type large head (1 ") nails. ARG: 89119 BUILT -UP ROOFING 07510 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION OF SUBSTRATE A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built -up roofing system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that other work which penetrates roof deck has been completed, that penetrations through deck have metal fittings in place and that roof drains have been installed. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Cooperate with inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with roofing system installation. B . Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace /restore other work damaged by performance of roofing system work. C. Insurance /Code Compliance: Install roofing system for (and test where required) to show compliance with all applicable Laws and Regulations and with the following insurance requirements. 1. Factory Mutual requirements of "Class A" or "Noncombustible," including zoned wind resistance as specified by FM. 2. Underwriter's Laboratory "Fire Classified" and "Class 30" wind uplift resistance. D. Coordinate the installation of roofing sheets, flashings, stripping, coatings and surfacings, so that the felts are not exposed to precipitation or exposed overnight. Provide cutoffs at end of each day's work to cover exposed felts with a course of coated felt with joints and edge sealed with roofing cement. Remove cutoff immediately before resuming work. Glaze coat installed ply -sheet courses at end of each day's work where final surfacing has not been installed. 3.03 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen in accordance with equiviscous temperature method ( "EVT Method ") as recommended by NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid - holding temperature necessary to attain EVT ( 425 degrees F at point of application) more than one hour prior to time of application. Discard bitumen which has been held at temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature (FBT) for a period exceeding three hours. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature and EVT or bitumen, either by information from bitumen producer or by suitable tests, and determine maximum fire -safe handling temperature and do not exceed that temperature in heating bitumen; but in no case heat bitumen to a temperature higher than 25 degrees F below flash point. B . Shingling of Plies: Except as otherwise indicated, install membrane with ply sheets shingled uniformly to achieve required number in thickness of membrane everywhere. Shingle in proper direction to shed water on each large area of roofing. ARG: 89119 BUILT -UP ROOFING 07510 -4 C. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping, and for other moppings except as otherwise indicated, apply bitumen at the following rate: 1. Asphalt: 25 lbs. of asphalt per roof square (100 sq. ft.) between plies. D. Inter -Ply Sheets: Provide the number and type(s) of ply sheets (felts) indicated, lapped (shingled) amount as required to form a continuous, uniform membrane with bitumen moppings between sheets so that ply sheet does not touch ply- sheet. Except as otherwise indicated, glaze -coat top of ply -sheet membrane with 10 -1b. mopping of same bitumen, integrally with operation of laying up membrane. 1. Provide a folded -back envelope at edges and penetrations of roofing membrane where it is not turned up on a cant strip, so as to provide positive protection against flow of bitumen building or off the edge. Seal corners and otherwise interruptions of envelope with large beads of roofing cement to provide positive protection against flow of bitumen. 2. Set -on Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on roofing membrane, set metal flangers in a bed of roofing cement, and seal penetration of membrane with bead of roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane. E. Roof Drains: Fill clamping ring base with a heavy coating of roofing cement. Set lead flashing sheet in a bed of roofing cement on completed ply sheet courses, with lead sheet clamped in roof drain ring with extended 12 inches onto roofing. Cover lead sheet with composition stripping, with plies extended from to 4 inches to 6 inches beyond edges of the lead sheet. F. Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim which adjoins roofing. G. Cap Sheet Surfacing: Promptly after completion of ply -sheet membrane (same day where possible) apply one lapped course of cap sheet. Set cap sheet in uniform mopping of same hot bitumen used in ply -sheet courses, at a rate of 301bs. per square, with no bitumen exposed. Lap ends 6" minimum. H. Cut -offs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of 2 plies of No. 15 roofing felt set in full moppings of hot bitumen; remove at beginning of next day's work. Glaze -coat areas of organic ply sheets which cannot be covered before end of each day's work. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove bitumen from surfaces other than those requiring bituminous roof coatings. 3.05 COMPLETION A. Upon completion, entire installation shall be draught and water tight. Surface of roof assembly shall be uniform in level and appearance and free of debris. B. Contractor shall cause to be repaired any damage to roofing which may occur subsequent to roofing installation and prior to final acceptance of the Work. Contractor shall cause any deterioration or defective work found at time of final inspection to be repaired or replaced, a directed by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. ARG: 89119 BUILT -UP ROOFING 07510 -5 END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 BUILT -UP ROOFING 07510 -6 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Shotcrete: Section 03360 3. Brick Masonry: Section 04420. 4. Stone Masonry Restorations: Section 04525. 5. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 6. Built -Up Roofing; Section 07510. 7. Sealants and Caulking: Section 07900. 8. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 9. Painting: Section 09900. 10. Plumbing: Section 15400. 11. Electrical: Section 16000. 1.02 DESCRIMON A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. The Work of this section describes the furnishing and installation of flashing and sheet metal items. The Work includes, without limitation: 1. Sheet metal flashings as detailed and as required for a weather tight installation. 2. Removal and reinstallation of existing sheet metal roofing as indicated and required by work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Follow standards of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings of all downspout runs that may differ from the existing. Do not proceed with Work until proposed runs have been approved by the Architect. ARG: 89119 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal: Prime hot rolled steel, hot -dip galvanized, 2 oz. of prime spelter per square foot (two surfaces), ASTM A -93, 24 gauge, unless otherwise noted or specified. B . Solder: ASTM B -32, half pig lead, half block tin. C. Flux: Best quality paste, non -acid. D. Fastenings: Annular -type nails, screws, bolts and accessories of type best suited for the intended purpose and of composition that will not support galvanic action in the installation. Use zinc- coated fastenings for galvanized steel work. E. Asphalt- Saturated Felt: ASTM D -226 non - perforated 15 -1b. type. F . Plastic Cement: Koppers seal -on roofing cement. G. Sheet Metal Tile Roofing: Use existing to the greatest extent possible. If new sheet metal roofing is required it shall match existing in gauge, size, profile and texture. H. Gutters: 1. Repair/replace as required to match existing. 2. Provide bird screens at all gutters. I. Downspouts: 26 gauge, hot dipped galvanized in locations shown. 1. Size and profile to match existing. 2. Connect to existing foundation drainage system. J . Paint: Refer to Section 09900 "Painting" for backpriming and prime paint requirements. K. Miscellaneous Items: As required to make a complete weatherproof and finished installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to receive sheet metal and flashing and conditions under which Work will be installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that other work which penetrates flashing and sheet metal has been completed. am M ARG: 89119 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 -2 W, 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Do accurate work. 1. Molded and broken shapes shall finish with true, straight and sharp lines and intersections shall be tight fitting and securely soldered. 2. Joints: a. Reinforce butt joints on the back. b. Use flat standing locked and soldered or riveted seams. c. Fold or bead edges. d. Install stiffening and reinforcing where necessary for rigid work. e. Paint metal with asphalt paint before placing in contact with roofing felt or dissimilar metals, and use asphalt- saturated felt as an underlayment for all sheet metal linings or coverings. B. Provide expansion joints as recommended by SMACNA and as required: a. Unless otherwise specified, make up long straight runs of flashing and connect together with 3" loose lock split type joints and fill with plastic cement. b. Provide slip joints not more than 8 ft. from any external and internal corner. c. For straight runs less than 24 ft. but more than 8 ft., make a similar slip joint at corner of run. Lock and solder seams of intermediate joints between expansion joints. C. Nailing: In general, confine nailing to sheet metal less than 12" wide. Confine nailing to one edge only. Space nails evenly at approximately 4" centers, unless otherwise shown. D. Soldering and Seaming: Before soldering, pre-tin all edges of uncoated sheet metal to be soldered. Do soldering with heavy soldering coppers of blunt design; tin properly before using. Solder slowly with full width of seam. Use ample solder, 1" minimum width evenly flowed solder along seams. Solder immediately after application of flux. After soldering, neutralize acid; thoroughly clean surfaces. Seams shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Flat lock seams: At least 3/4" wide. 2. Soldered lap seams: At least 1" wide. 3. Unsoldered plain lap seams: At least 3" wide. 4. All seams: Make in direction of flow. 3.03 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METALWORK A. Provide sheet metal items not covered elsewhere in this Section, as required for a watertight installation. Accurately reproduce details and designs shown; make profiles, bends and intersections sharp, even and true. Lap, lock or solder joints as applicable. Provide adequate reinforcement. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 -3 SECTION 07900 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SEALANTS AND CAULKING A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 3. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 4. Painting: Section 09900. 5. Plumbing: Section 15400. 6. Electrical: Section 16000. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . Work of this section includes, but may not be limitted to supplying and installing materials for sealing exterior glazing, construction joints, and joints between different materials are specified in this Section. 1.03 GUARANTEE A. Prior to submitting aplication for final payment, provide written guarantee, in a form acceptable to the Owner and signed by the Contractor and an official of the sealant manufaciuring company guaranteeing the performance of all sealant materials for a minimum period of five years from the date of final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealant for General Exterior Building Use: Moisture cured polyurethane sealant - Ful Tek as distributed by Fuller O'Brien or accepted equal. B. Sealant for General Interior Use: Single- component, gun- grade, paintable, acrylic - latex, water -base sealant; Woodmont Products, Inc., "Chem -Calk 600," Tremco "Acrylic Latex," or accepted equal. C. Acoustical Sealant: Permanently plastic, nonskinning, nonbleeding, nonstaining, ARG: 89119 SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07900 -1 paintable, synthetic polymer base sealant; Presstite Products "No. 579.64 Acoustical Sealant," Tremco "Acoustical Sealant," or accepted equal. D. Backer Rod: 1. Material: Closed -cell foam, nonstaining, resilient material such as neoprene, butyl, or polyurethane, compatible with sealant to be used. 2. Sized and shaped to control depth of sealant and to provide 25 to 50 percent compression upon insertion. E. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Joint Cleaner: a. For Metal and Glass: Xylol, xylene, toluol, toluene, or methyl ethyl ketone. b. For removing Lacquer Coatings: Lacquer thinner. 2. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3. Masking Tape: Pressure- sensitive adhesive paper type. 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure- sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape. F. Colors: 1. Sealant color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards colors. 2. Whenever sealants are not exposed to view, provide manufacturer's standard color which has best overall performance characteristics for the application indicated. PART a-- EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect joints to be sealed to determine if conditions are satisfactory for the proper installation of joint sealants. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 GENERAL A. The full extent of joint sealant work is not necessarily fully or individually described herein or indicated. B. Provide sealants wherever required to prevent light leakage as well as moisture leakage; and at exposed joints, door frames and at other locations as required to facilitate cleaning. C. Consult Architect if in doubt as to whether sealant is required at a given location. ARG: 89119 SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07900 -2 ca im 3.03 PREPARATION A. General: Thoroughly clean all joints and/or openings to be caulked; free from dust, oil, grease, loose mortar, or any foreign matter. B. Mask areas adjacent to joints. C. Joints shall enclose sealant on three sides. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install backing materials in joints using blunt instrument to avoid puncturing. 1. Do not twist backing while installing. B . Apply sealants in joints using pressure gun with nozzle cut to fit joint width. C. Place sealants in uniform, continuous beads without gaps or air pockets. D. Tool joints to required configuration within 10 minutes of sealant applications, or as recommended by manufacturer. E. If masking materials are used, remove immediately after tooling. F. Seal joints adjacent to painted work before the final coat of paint is applied. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to joints without damaging B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07900 -3 SECTION 08110 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 3. Finish Hardware: Section 08700. 4. Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing steel doors in steel and/or wood frames. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A153: "Standard Specification for Zinc - Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ". 2. A526: "Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot - Dip Process, Commercial Quality". B. Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. SDI 100: "Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel doors and frames shall comply with SDI 100 and the requirements specified herein. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings covering each type of steel door, frame, frame condition, and complete anchorage details. 2. Provide a schedule of steel doors and frames using the same reference numbers for details and openings as those indicated ARG: 89119 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1 Go B . Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and shop painting, and installation instructions. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products in a manner to prevent damage or deterioration. B. Do not remove protective packaging until ready for installation. C. Store products in a vertical position in a manner to prevent twisting or bending. D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 FRAMES A. Provide new wood and/or steel frames to receive new steel doors as indicated and/or as required. Frames shall be rated as indicated or as required to meet the requirements of all applicable Laws and Regulations. Frames shall be manufactured to the standards required for the rating required and shall bear rating label. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Doors: Commercial quality cold -rolled sheet steel. Steel for door faces shall be stretcher leveled. Doors shall be bonderized. 1. Internal Stiffening: Manufacturer's standard steel or rigid mineral board. 2. Hardware: As specified in Section 08700. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Doors: 1. Type: Heavy duty, seamless, in accordance with the requirements of SDI 100. 2. Gauge: 16 gauge minimum. 3. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches. 4. Faces: Smooth and with no seams visible. Top and Bottom Edges: Close with 16- gauge steel closures at top and bottom. 5. Vertical Edges: No seams visible; beveled latch edge of single door and meeting edges of double doors; square hinge edges. 6. Clearances: Provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads; 1/8 inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of floor covering. a. Non -fire Rated Doors: Provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads; 1/8 inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of floor covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. b. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide clearances complying with the limitations of the authority having jurisdiction. ARG: 89119 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -2 B. Preparation for Finish Hardware: Hardware preparation for labeled openings shall conform to the requirements of the labeling authority. 1. Hardware supplier shall furnish door and frame manufacturer with approved hardware schedule, hardware templates, and samples of physical hardware where necessary to ensure correct fitting and installation. 2. Preparation includes sinkages and cut -outs for mortised and concealed hardware. 3. Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface applied hardware: a. Install reinforcements with concealed connections designed to develop full strength of reinforcements. 4. Coordinate for installation of mortised lockset. C. Finish: Doors shall receive one coat of baked -in, rust- inhibitive metal primer, in preparation for final painting on site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of steel doors and frames. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install steel doors in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and requirements of SDI 100. D. Hardware: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions taking care not to damage hardware, doors, frames, and their finishes. 2. Adjust and lubricate, as required, for proper operation. 3. Upon completion of application, doors and finish hardware shall operate smoothly. 3.03 TOUCH -UP A. Immediately after installation, areas where prime or finish coat has been damaged shall be prepared and touched -up with primer compatible with that applied at the shop. B. Remove rust before touch -up is applied. C. Touch -up shall not be obvious. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -3 SECTION 08210 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 3. Finish Hardware: Section 08700. 4. Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing new wood doors and frames; and reinstalling existing aoors as indicated and/or as as required. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. No. 80: "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows. B. National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA): 1. I.S.1. Series: "Wood Flush Doors." 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Flush Doors: Mark each door with National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA) Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of ANSI/NWMA I.S.1 Series. 1. Door construction shall meet or exceed requirements of NWMA I.S.1 Series for Custom Grade Doors. 2. Cores shall not telegraph through door faces. Core show - through shall be considered a defect when the face of the door varies from a true plane in excess of 0.010 inch in a 3 inch span. 3. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance and construction, unless otherwise indicated. ARG: 89119 WOOD DOORS 08210 -1 1.05 WARRANTY /GUARANTEE A. Warrant/guarantee each interior door against defects in materials and workmanship for the life of the original installation, including the cost of rehanging. B. Prior to submitting application for final payment, provide written warranty, in a from acceptable to the Owner and signed by the Contractor and an official of the door manufacturing company, for each exterior door against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten years from date of final acceptance of the Work. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit two copies of manufacturer's product literature including installation instructions and recommendations. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames in labeled, protective packaging. B. Store doors and frames on raised supports to prevent damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMES A. Provide new wood frames; or modify, repair, and/or replace existing frames as required to receive new wood doors as indicated and/or as required. Frames shall be rated as indicated or as required to meet the requirements of all applicable Laws and Regulations. Frames shall be manufactured to the standards required for the rating required and shall bear rating label 2.02 FLUSH INTERIOR DOORS A. Provide flush doors as indicated on door schedule. 1. Manufacturer: Weyerhauser Company or accepted equal. a. Model: Santa Rosa. 2. Assemble with Type II adhesive. 3. Face panels: Manufacturer's standard 2 or 3 ply face panels. a. Medium density overlay, prepared for opaque paint finish. 4. Cores: Solid core, glue block, 5 -ply construction. 5. Thickness: 1 -3/4 ". 6. Finish: Factory seal or prime door faces and all edges ready for field finish. B. Existing Doors: Rework existing doors as required for reinstallation and new hardware. C. Existing Doors: 1. Existing wood doors indicated to be reinstalled shall be repaired, refinished, and installed in good working order. ARG: 89119 WOOD DOORS 08210 -2 , 2. Fill all holes, and mortised areas that will not be covered by new hardware. 2.03 STILE AND RAIL DOORS A. Stile and Rail Doors: Premium grade, design to match existing in size, style, and profile of trim, as indicated on Door Schedule. 1. Species for Transparent Finish: Fir, stained and finished to match existing woodwork. 2. Construction: Solid stock, edge gluing for widths over 11 -3/8 ". Mortise and tenon construction. Assembled with Type R adhesive and clamped together under pressure. 3. Trim Moldings: Wood, matching door face. 4. Panels: Solid stock panel shall be used at all doors. 2.04 STORE DOORS A. Single, premium grade store Door at Entry to Restaurant Reception, size and configuration as indicated on door schedule. 1. Manufacturer: All Wood, Nocolai or accepted equal. a. Door shall have an V -6" inch high smooth panel at the bottom as indicated. b. Stiles shall be 4 inches wide, minimum for installation of mortisec lockset. 2. Glazing: Single lite, clear, single glazed. a. Glass shall be tempered. 3. Finish: a. Exterior: Primed for paint. 4. Hardware: As specified in Section 08700 "Finish Hardware". Coordinate for installation of mortised lockset. 5. Thickness: 13/4 ". B . Triple panel, premium grade store doors as indicated at Dining Room. 1. Manufacturer: Nana Doors or accepted equal. a. Model: Opening Glass Wall. b. Door shall have an 10" inch high, minimum, smooth panel at the bottom as indicated. 2. Material: splined, solid, kiln -dried, clear douglas fir, with rabbeted construction. 3. Thickness: 13/4 ". 4. Glazing: Single lite, clear, insulating glass. a. Glass shall be tempered. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 5. Finish: a. Exterior: Primed for paint. b. Interior: Primed for paint. 6. Hardware: All hardware shall be provided by door manufacturer. a. Finish: Oil rubbed bronze, number 415, unless otherwise noted. b. Butts: three (3) per panel, self - lubricating hinges with locater pins and screws. c. Hanger tracks: Fabric reinforced laminated plastic wheels with needle bearings. d. Threshold: Bronze anodized aluminium, water return threshold, integrated with lower door track. ARG: 89119 WOOD DOORS 08210 -3 e. Lockset: Each panel shall have mortised shoot bolts, operable by a single handle. Provide a mortised, lockset, key operable on the outside with thumb latch on the inside. on the primary leaf. 1) Provide lever handles. f. Weatherstripping: Foam as recommended by manufacturer. 2.05 FABRICATION OF PREFINISHED AND PREMACHINED DOORS A. Prefit and premachine doors at factory. B . Hardware Preparation: Carefully drill and machine each door as required for finish hardware. Obtain manufacturer's templates for use during machining. Verify hardware locations and hand of door. Predrill holes for screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that the conditions are satisfactory for the installation of wood doors and frames. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not proceed with installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all wood doors, new and existing to be reused, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as indicated. B. Install wood doors plumb to provide free swinging operation with easy closing and secure latching. C. Clearance: For non -rated doors provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of floor finish or covering. Where threshold is specified, provide 1/4 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. Coordinate installation of weatherstripping 3.03 COMPLETION A. When complete, doors shall be flat, shall be plumb in all positions of swing, and shall operate smoothly, quietly, and free from binding. B. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance, clean and free from scratches, tool marks, dents, discoloration, stains, and other damage and defects. END OF SECTION Ca ARG: 89119 WOOD DOORS 08210 -4 sp SECTION 08305 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ACCESS DOORS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 3. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 07250. 4. Painting: Section 09900. 5. Plumbing: Section 15400. 6. Electrical: Section 16000. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing access doors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 1340. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed data including installation instructions. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store access doors in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Do not remove protective packaging until ready for installation. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Frame: Minimum 16 -gauge steel. ARG: 89119 ACCESS DOORS 08305 -1 B. Door Panel: Minimum 14 -gauge steel. C. Drywall Bead: Galvanized steel. D. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. E. Finish: Factory- applied baked - enamel prime coat. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Hinges: Concealed, spring type, opening to 165 degrees. 2. Locks: Flush, screwdriver operated, with metal cams. 3. Fire Rating: Access doors in fire -rated walls and ceilings shall be fire rated accordingly. B . Wall Access Doors: 1. Size: As indicated 2. For flush installation in gypsum wallboard or plaster: Milcor Style DW manufactured by Inryco, Inc., or accepted equal. C. Ceiling Access Panel: 1. Size: 24 "x 30 ". 2. For flush installation in gypsum wallboard or plaster: Milcor Style M manufactured by Inryco, Inc., or accepted equal. D. Crawl Space Access Panel: 1. Size: 30" x 30 ". 2. Door and frame shall be galvanized 3. Provide lockset. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of access doors. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Install, as indicated and/or as required, for access to ceiling space above the Ground floor and to valves, ductwork and other work provided for by Division 15 "Mechanical and Division 16 "Electrical ". ARG: 89119 ACCESS DOORS 08305 -2 3.03 COMPLETION A. Finished access panels shall be painted with smooth appearance including at edges and hinges. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 ACCESS DOORS 08305 -3 SECTION 08600 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS WOOD WINDOW REHABILITATION A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Section 07900: Sealants and Caulking. 2. Section 08800: Glazing. 3. Section 09900: Painting. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. The work of this section consists of furnishing materials and labor for the rehabilitation of existing wood windows. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of three (3) years successful experience in the repair and rehabilitation of historic wood and leaded glass windows. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the . project. B. Materials and fabrication of wood window rehabilitation replacement parts shall be in accordance with standards for the Woodwork Institute if California (WIC) "Manual of Millwork" for "Custom" grade. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Restoration Program: Prior to beginning any work the Contractor shall submit the following for Architect's approval: 1. A written survey reprot for wood window restoration work indicating windows in need of repair, reglazing or replacement. 2. A written, narrative description of window restoration work describing sequence and methods proposed for rehabilitation work. ARG: 89119 WOOD WINDOW REHABILITATION 08600 -1 B. Certification: Prior to delivery.of materials to be used in wood window rehabilitation, furnish a WIC Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that the materials meet the requirements of the grades specified. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wood: Where new sash or frames are required, material shall match existing wood being repaired or replaced in species, grain, and profile. B . Epoxy Wood Filler: As manufactured by Smith and Company of Richmond, California, or approved equal. 1. Clear Penetrating Epoxy. 2. Epoxy Fairring Gel. C. Glazing: Reuse original glass in replacement sash to the greatest extend possible. Refer to Section 08800 "Glazing" for glazing requirements. D. Finish: 1. Interior a. Finish shall match existing. b. Clean and refurbish clear finish at existing windows to remain. c. Where parts of windows are replaced all care shall be taken to match the color and texture of the existing adjacent material. Refinish entire unit as required to blend new work with original. 2. Exterior Finish: Refer to Section 09900 "Painting" for finish requirements. E. Weather Stripping: All windows shall be weatherstripped with 'Y' bronze weatherstripping at top and bottom. 1. Manufacturer: Pemko. 2. Model Number: B74. F. Hardware: Repair existing hardware as required Where existing hardware is not reusable provide new hardware to match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for rehabilitation of wood windows. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence rehabilitation work until conditions have been corrected. B . Identify all areas of rotted or deteriorated wood in sashes, frames, heads and sills missing or broken hardware, or any other parts of window. The Contractor shall be responsible for detailed inspection of each window. 1. Post Inspection Conference: After close -up inspection and evaluation of each all windows meet with the Architect and Owner's Representative to review proposed repair/replacement scope of work. ARG: 89119 WOOD WINDOW REHABILITATION 08600 -2 3.02 INSTALLATION A. At exterior: Cut out areas of deteriorated or rotted wood until solid, healthy wood is reached. If more than 30% of member is determined to be deteriorated, replace entire member with new material conforming to specified standards. 1. Clean area of removed rotted wood as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Soak area with Clear Penetrating Epoxy applied with a brush. 3. Fill cracks and voids with Epoxy Fairring Gel per manufacturers recommendation. 4. Sand area smooth to match adjacent surfaces. 5. Seal area with final coat of Clear Penetrating Epoxy. B . Joining of any new wood sash stiles and rails shall be similar to existing joints. C. Inspect all exterior caulking around windows and re -caulk wherever deteriorated. D. Coordinate all window repairs with the requirements for new finish hardware and weatherstripping as required. 3.03 COMPLETED REHABILITATION A. Rehabilitated windows shall match existing in appearance, be weathertight and where operable, shall open and close smoothly and as originally designed. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 WOOD WINDOW REHABILITATION 08600 -3 SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 2. Steel Doors: Section 08110. 3. Wood Doors: Section 08610. 4. Wood Window Rehabilitation: Section 08600. 5. Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This Section describes the requirements for supplying and installing all finished hardware. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier shall be professionally qualified to schedule and service the requirements of this work. B. All hardware shall meet applicable requirements of NFBU, California Administration Code Title 24, ANSI A 115. 1, and other proper authorities. C. Fire Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local code requirements. Provide hardware that has been U.L. rated for types and sizes of doors and which complies with requirements or door and frame labels. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance with section on submittals. Include any necessary information to comply with requirements and include instructions for installation and maintenance of operating parts and finish. C. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in the manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and work related to ensure proper size, thickness, function and finish. ARG: 89119 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 -1 ELa �t 1. Final Hardware Schedule: Organize hardware schedule into "hardware groups" indicating every item required for each door, including the following: a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware cross- referenced to indications both Floor Plans and in Door Schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. Ow g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. 2. Submittal shall be made at the earliest possible date to ensure timely fabrication of other related work which is critical to the project construction schedule. Furnish templates to door and door frame manufacturer. Submit samples as requested by the Architect. Check Shop Drawings of door and door frame fabricators as requested. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver to job site in sealed carton, clearly marked for identification of contents. B. Store in a dry, protected location prior to installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish all hardware complete with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings for proper application, and in the same finish as hardware materials and finish. Provide two (2) tools for each type and size of special head screws used. B . While the following hardware schedule is intended to cover all doors and other movable parts of the building, and establish a type and standard of quality, it shall be the specific duty and responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to examine the plans and specifications and furnish proper hardware for all openings whether listed or not. If there are any omissions in hardware groups, they shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening for instructions; otherwise, the list will be considered complete. No extras will be allowed. C. Hardware shall be furnished with each unit or numbered in accordance with the accepted hardware schedule. The finish hardware schedule shall list the names of the manufacturers to facilitate checking and job identification. Provide for the Owner a complete accepted schedule for maintenance purposes. D. Products identified in this section are intended to establish a standard of quality and utility. Unless specifically noted to the contrary, other products may be , substituted therefor, provided the substitution procedure process outlined in Section 01605 "Products and Substitutions" is followed and the Architect's written approval of such substitution is obtained prior to fabrication or delivery of the substituted materials. ARG: 89119 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 -2 W 2.02 KEYS AND KEYING A. Keying schedule will be furnished by Owner. B. Furnish 3 keys per lock. C. Tag keys and deliver them to Owner upon completion of work of this Section. Deliver permanent keys directly to Owner. D. Provide Owner with all necessary adjustment tools (lock spanner wrenches, etc.) necessary for the simple adjustments required in everyday general maintenance procedures. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers' catalog numbers: Used below to establish operation, function, quality, weight, size, pattern, design, material, and finish required. B . Finish: Unless otherwise indicated the finish of all hardware shall be as shown below: 1. Typical finish, unless otherwise noted: Oil rubbed bronze, number 416. 2. Butts shall be same finish as latch and locksets of doors. 3. Weatherstripping shall be bronze anodized, unless otherwise noted. C. Butts: Unless otherwise specified, the size of the butts will be determined be the following table. (All exterior outswinging doors shall have non - ferrous butts with non - removable pins): 1. Doors 1 -3/4" thick and up to 41" wide to have 4 -1/2" height. 2. Provide widths sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees. 3. Provide 2 hinges to 60" high, 3 hinges to 90" high, 4 hinges to 120" high for each door leaf. 4. All hinges shall be ball- bearing with square corners. 5. Manufacturer to be Stanley, Hagar, McKinney, or accepted equal. D. Locks: Provide Schlage "B" and "L" series locks with tubular brass levers as indicated. 1. Lockset No. 1: L9082, Institutional, heavy duty, mortised lock with non- operable levers and keyed cylinder. 2. Lockset No. 2: L9010, Mortised, passage latch. 3. Lockset No. 3: L9080EL, Mortised, store room latch, . 4. Lockset No. 4: B463P, deadbolt with keyed cylinder and thumb turn. E. Exit Devices: Von Duprin, No. 5547. with keyed,lock and lever. F . Closer: LCN No. 4110, parallel arm installation. 1. Finish: Bronze anodized. G. Push and Pull Plates; and Kick Plates: Baldwin. 1. Finish: Bronze. 2 Kick Plate: Model No. 2002, 12 inches high. 3. Push Plate: Model No. 2150, with cut -out for thumb turn. 4. Grip: Model No. 2600, with Plate No. 2150 with cut -out for key cylinder. ARG: 89119 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 -3 H. Weatherstripping: 1. Door Jamb and Head: Pemko 70E -100, Hemmed spring bronze. 2. Door Bottom: Pemko 411AV. I. Acoustical Seals: 1. Door Jamb and Head: Pemko 315DR. a. Install on jamb. 2. Door Bottom: Pemko 411AV. J. Thresholds: : Pemko 114D, Interlocking threshold with concealed hook No. B61. 2.04 HARDWARE GROUPS A. See door schedule for speck door type and location. B. Group 1 - Restaurant Entry Doors (Single Door): 1 -1/2 pairs - Butts. 1 - Lockset No. L 1 - Door Stop. 1 - Threshold. 1 - Closer. Weatherstripping. C. Group 2 - Three Panel Doors at Dining Room: Hardware by Manufacturer. D. Group 3 - Exit Door: 1 -1/2 pairs - Butts. 1 - Exit Devise. 1 - Door Stop 1 - Threshold Weatherstripping E. Group 4 - Mechanical Room Door (Interior): 1 -1/2 pairs - Butts. 1 - Lockset No. 2. Acoustical Seals. F. Group 5 - Toilet Room and Staging Kitchen Doors (New and Existing Doors): 1 -1/2 Pairs - Butts. 1 - Lockset No. 4. 1 - Push Plate. 1 - Pull Plate. 1 - Kick Plate. 1 - Door Stop. G. Group 6: Not Used. ARG: 89119 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 -4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of finish hardware. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02. INSTALLATION A. The hardware shall be fitted prior to painting and then removed and painting completed before final installation of the hardware. B . Finish hardware shall be neatly and properly installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Contractor is responsible for coordinating all work to ensure a complete installation. No extra cost will be allowed because of changes or corrections necessary to facilitate the proper installation of any hardware. D. Thoroughly clean all hardware before final completion of the Work. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 FINISH HARDWARE 08700 -5 SECTION 08800 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS GLAZING A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 2. Wood Window Rehabilitation: Section 08600. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installation of window glazing. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z97.1: "Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings." B. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. DD- G -451D: "Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses)." 2. TT- S- 00230C(2): "Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)." C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 1. 16 CFR 1202: "Federal Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials." D. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): 1. "Glazing Manual." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of glazing sealant and compound, gasket, and associated material intended for use with this project. ARG: 89119 GLAZING 08800 -1 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle glass with manufacturer's labels intact. Do not remove labels until time of final cleaning. B. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining and otherwise damaging glass. C. Quality designation and guarantee label shall be affixed to each mirror, or submit manufacturer's certification that mirrors meet requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Materials shall conform to ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201. 2. Verify that glass thicknesses specified are appropriate for the application indicated, and meet all applicable Laws and Regulations. 3. All glass shall be new, clear, and free of dirt and scratches. 4. Labels: With manufacturer's name, quality or grade and weight or thickness on each piece of glass. Do not remove label until final acceptance of the Work, or until directed to do so by the Architect. B. Reuse existing glazing to the greatest extent possible. C. Glazing: Clear Float Glass: FS- DD- G -451D, Type I, Class 3, Quality q.3. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Provide tempered glass as required by code. 3. Provide curved glass where required. 2.02 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Sealant: G.E. "Silicone Construction Sealant," or accepted equal, color as selected by Architect. B . Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers: G.E. Type II preformed silicone rubber, or approved equal. 1. Gaskets: In profiles indicated and of 50 -80 Shore "A" hardness required for watertight construction; corners shall be vulcanized; color, black. 2. Setting Blocks: 80+ Shore "A" durometer hardness, antiwalk type, of length as required for size and weight of glass. 3. Spacers: 50 -80 Shore "A" durometer hardness. C. Tempered Glass: Provide prime glass of color and type indicated, which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed strength. ARG:89119 GLAZING 08800 -2 1. Tong Marks: Provide tempered glass produced by manufacturer's special process which eliminates tong marks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of glazing materials. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that glazing channels are free of burrs, irregularities, and debris, and coatings that could adversely affect the execution and quality of work. C. Verify that glazing channels contain no deviations beyond allowable tolerances for the installation of sealant. D. Verify that glass is free of edge damage and face imperfections. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: 1. Measure size of frame or area to receive glass. 2. Compute actual glass size, allowing for edge clearances. 3. Size glass for each opening within tolerances and dimensions established. B. Preparation of Surfaces: 1. Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed. 2. Clean glass to remove dust, oil, and other contaminants and wipe dry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations employing experienced glazers. 2. Install glass to be watertight and airtight. 3. Comply with FGMA "Glazing Manual." 4. Do not field cut, nip, or abrade glass. B. Install setting blocks of proper size, located 1/4 of glass width from each corner C. Gasket Glazing: Miter -cut and bond ends together at corners to prevent gaskets from pulling away at corners. D. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others, as nearly as possible, with pattern, draw, and bow oriented in the same direction. E. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to insure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. ARG: 89119 GLAZING 08800 -3 F. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. G. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. H. Replace all existing glass that is missing, broken, cracked or otherwise damaged. Replacement glass shall be similar to existing but shall meet the reference standards unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation. B. Remove non - permanent labels and clean surfaces. C. Cure sealants for high early strength and durability. D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism. E. Wash and polish glass on both faces. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning. END OF SECTION M ARG:89119 GLAZING 08800 -4 SECTION 09200 LATH AND PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Speed Elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Section 03300 2. Shotcrete: Section 03360 3. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 4. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200 5. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250 6. Painting: Section 09900 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Work in this Section describes the requirements for the installation and repair of existing cement and gypsum plaster walls, ceilings and trim as indicated or required. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C150: "Standard Specification for Portland Cement." 2. 0206: "Standard Specification for Finishing Lime." 3. C897: "Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement Plasters." 4. 0926: "Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster." B. California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association, Inc. (CLPCA): 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of three (3) years successful experience in the installation and repair of gypsum and cement plaster in historic builidngs. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. ARG: 89119 LATH AND PLASTER 09200 -1 B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Assemblies and installation shall conform to the Uniform Building Code (UBC) requirements for fire - resistance ratings. C. All lath and plaster work shall conform to the requirements of the "Lathing and Plastering Reference Specifications" as published by the California Lathing and Plastering Contractors' Association, Inc. (CLPCA), latest edition. D. Vermiculite aggregate shall be listed in UL Building Materials Directory and UL labeled for the purposes intended. E. Vermiculite gypsum- cement plaster shall conform to requirements of prototype fire - resistant assemblies as tested by UL for the ratings required. F. Allowable Tolerance of Finished Surface: Maximum deviation from true plane shall not exceed 1/4 -inch as measured from the line of a 5 -foot straightedge placed at any location on the surface. G. Delivery and Storage of Materials: Deliver manufactured materials in unbroken packaging, with labels of maker intact. Store materials in a dry location until ready to use. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from job site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test Panels 1. Prior proceeding with the Work of this Section, at a location approved by the Architect, prepare a test panel four (4) square feet for each type of plaster installation, for review and approval by the Architect. 2. Accepted test panels shall serve as model for the rest of the cleaning. 3. Repeat the test processes and alter methods and materials as required to achieve results which are satisfactory to the Architect. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in original unopened packages or containers with manufacturer's label intact and legible. B . Keep cement and lime dry, stored off ground, under cover, and away from damp surfaces. C. Protect metallic materials and accessories from moisture and other sources of damage. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation at enclosed areas where work of this section is being performed to allow cement plaster to properly cure. 2. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure that excessive temperatures changes do not occur. B . Protection: 1. Cover building openings in areas adjacent to plastering work with plastic film. ARG: 89119 LATH AND PLASTER 09200 -2 M3 2. Protect finished surfaces installed prior to plastering by covering with a suitable nonstaining material. Cover window frames with plastic film. Protect existing ornamental work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LATHING MATERIALS A. Metal Lath: Copper - bearing steel, coated with rust- inhibitive paint after cutting, or cut from zinc - coated steel sheets. 1. Self- Furring Paper - Backed Diamond Mesh: 3.4 pounds per square yard, with evenly spaced indentations to hold lath approximately 1/4 inch away from solid surfaces. 2. 3/8 inch Rib Lath: 3.4 pounds per square yard, fabricated in herringbone mesh pattern with 3/8 inch deep ribs. B. Steel Stud System Materials: 1. Punched Steel Non - Load - Bearing Studs: Manufacturer's standard 18 gauge narrow - flange studs with punched webs, ASTM A446 Grade A steel (33,000 psi yield). a. Size: 6 inch unless otherwise indicated. C. Metal Plastering Accessories and Reinforcement: 1. General: Coordinate depth of accessory with thickness of and number of coats of plaster to be applied. 2. Small -Nose Corner Beads: General purpose type with expanded or perforated flanges. 3. Bull -Nose Corner Bead: Expanded flange type with 1 " -wide face, 3/4 "- radius. 4. Cornerite: Manufacturer's standard preformed interior corner reinforcement made from 2.5 lb. per sq. yd. diamond mesh lath. 5. Square -Edged Casing Beads: Manufacturer's standard with expanded or short flange to suit application. 6. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Manufacturer's standard roll- formed pair of casing beads with modified back flanges providing positive slip joint action and dust barrier, adjustable for joint width variation of 1/8" to 5/8 ". To be custom painted; color to be selected by Architect. 7. "T" Mouldings as required or indicated. 8. "W" Mouldings as required or indicated. 9. Corner Reinforcement: Special stucco -type woven galvanized wire corner reinforcing strips. 10. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, of type and length suitable for adequate penetration of substrate. 11. Wood form blocks and shapes as indicated. Refer to Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry." 2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS A. General: Provide either neat or ready -mixed (where applicable) materials, at Installer's option, complying with ANSI A42.2. B. Base -Coat Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or H. ARG: 89119 LATH AND PLASTER 09200 -3 C. Base -Coat Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, Type S. D. Base -Coat Aggregate: Sand. E. Base -Coat Fiber: 1/2 -inch alkaline- resistant chopped -glass fibers, for scratch coat on metal lath or reinforcement as manufactured by Cem -Fil Corp., or approved equal. F. Prepared Finish Coat: Factory- prepared product containing all materials required for finish coat, except water; Peerless Stucco, La Habra, or approved equal. 1. Texture: To match existing. 2. Finish: To be painted, see Section 09900 "Painting ". 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C79, with tongue and groove edges, standard length 5/8" thick. B. Building Paper: 30 lb., asphalt impregnated, non - perforated. C. Provide additional components and materials not indicated or specified, but required. 2.04 GYPSUM PLASTER MATERIALS A. Ready -Mixed: ASTM C -28. B. Water: Clean, potable and free from deleterious amount of acid, alkali and organic materials. C. Fiber: Sisal of glass mill- additives. D. Finish: White coat gypsum, suitable for smooth finish and field painting. E. Vermiculite aggregate: U.S. Gypsum, W.R. Grace Co. or approved equal conforming to ASTM C -35. b'•' ".X0101 I•k 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of lathing. B. Verify that surfaces to be plastered are free of dust, loose particles, oil, and other foreign matter which would affect bond of plaster coats. C. All pipe, conduit, and similar materials shall have been installed, inspected, and accepted prior to commencing installation of lath. D. Do not commence the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. w` ARG: 89119 LATH AND PLASTER 09200 -4 6a 3.02 PREPARATION A. Solid surfaces shall have the suction (ability to absorb water) and surface roughness to provide the bond required for the plaster. B. Prepare existing cement plaster surfaces to receive patching plaster. 3.03 METAL LATH INSTALLATION A. General: Apply with long dimension perpendicular to supports, right, flush, free from irregularities, providing a smooth true base for plaster. B . Laps: 1" at sides, 2" at ends minimum. Lace and tap together where not occurring over supports. Stagger end laps in alternate rows. Lap exterior paper backing as recommended by manufacturer and as required to permit water runoff. C. Angles, Corners: Make internal and external corners square and true on bench. Carry external sheet around corners 12" minimum. D. Plaster beads shall be fastened securely to provide uniform plaster thickness at the dividing lines. Corner beads shall be provided for all exposed external vertical plastered angles, exposed vertical and horizontal angles at openings, and for all exposed external angles in soffits. Beads shall be rigidly secured in an approved manner and shall be in one piece runs as far as stock length permits. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. General: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. 1. Frame both sides of control joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. 2. Fixture Support Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing where work is indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment and support. B . Steel Stud System: Install steel studs with continuous runner tracks at top and bottom of each wall area, and above and below each opening more than T -0" in width. Anchor tracks to floor and overhead structure at each end and 24 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Space studs 16 inches on center, including jack studs above and below openings, except as otherwise shown. 2. Anchor punched steel partitions studs to bottom and top runner tracks, at both flanges. Install stud shoes or clips, or weld or screw fasten to tracks. 3. Install a minimum of three studs at partition corners and intersections, spaced as recommended by stud manufacturer for the application indicted. 4. Install horizontal stud system stiffeners in continuous runs as required to comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. 5. Install additional studs at each jamb of openings more than T -0" wide, and secure jab studs to frames of openings and to runner tracks above and below openings and to ARG: 89119 LATH AND PLASTER 09200 -5 runner tracks above and below openings in the manner indicated (secure to frame anchors or directly to frames, or wire -tie or weld, if not otherwise indicated). a. Install 2 studs at each jamb, except as otherwise shown. b. Install stud system stiffeners not more than 6 inches above and 6 inches below each opening, and extend 2 regular stud spaces beyond opening both ways. 3.05 MIXING A. Accurately proportion materials for each plaster batch with measuring devices of known volume. B . Size batches for complete use within maximum of one hour after mixing. C. Retemper plaster stiffened from evaporation, but do not use or retemper partially hydrated cement plaster. D. Mix factory- prepared plaster in accordance with the manufacture's written instructions. E. Use moist, loose sand in mix proportions. F. Withhold 10 percent of mixing water until mixing is almost complete, then add as needed to produce necessary consistency. G . Mix Proportions by Volume: 1. Scratch Coat: Four parts aggregate to one part cement, by volume. 2. Brown Coat: Five parts aggregate to one part cement, by volume. 3. Dash -Bond Coat: 1 -1/2 parts aggregate to one part cement, by volume. 4. Hydrated lime in an amount not exceeding 210 pounds per sack of Portland cement may be added to mix using Type I or Type II Portland cement; do not add hydrated lime to mixes containing plaster cement. 5. Finish Coat: In accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Admixture: 1/2 of 1 percent. 3.06 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATION A. Three -Coat Application of Cement Plaster. 1. Apply plaster by hand or machine spray. 2. Interrupt any plaster coat only at junctions of plaster planes at openings, or at. control joints. 3. Apply scratch coat with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through and to embed metal base. When firm, score only one direction. 4. Apply brown coat to scratch coat, bringing out to grounds flat to true surface, and free of imperfections which could reflect in finish coat. 5. Reconsolidate brown coat by floating, and roughen to assure bond with finish coat. 6. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 7. Nominal Plaster Thicknesses Measured from Face of Lath: a. Scratch Coat: 3/8 inch, Minimum b. Brown Coat: 3/8 inch. c. Finish Coat: 1/8 inch, Minimum ARG: 89119 LATH AND PLASTER 09200 -6 C3 B. Curing: 1. Maintain moist conditions by fine fog spraying. 2. Cure scratch coat for a minimum of 48 hours, and maintain a minimum of 48 hours between application of scratch coat and brown coat. 3. Cure brown coat for a minimum of 48 hours, and maintain a minimum of 7 days between the application of the brown coat and finish coat. 4. Cure finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 3.07 GYPSUM PLASTER APPLICATION A. Apply plaster in 3/4 -inch thickness, or in thickness required to match existing plaster adjacent, unless otherwise indicated or recommended. B. Finish: Shall match original. C. Patch all existing plaster in areas indicated where defective, damaged or cracked. Finish shall match original. 3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, point -up and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry-outs, efflorescence, sweat -outs and similar defects, including areas of work which do not comply with specified tolerances, and where bond to the substrate has failed. 3.09 COMPLETION A. Patching: 1. Upon completion of application, point up plaster around trim and other locations where plaster meets dissimilar materials. 2. Cut out and patch defective or damaged plaster. 3. Match patching of defective or damaged plaster in existing work and to new work in form, texture, and color. B. Cleaning: 1. Remove plaster and protective materials form control and expansion joints, perimeter beads, and adjacent surfaces. 2. Remove stains that would adversely affect subsequent finishes on plaster. C. When complete, plaster surfaces shall be flat; true to plane and free from scaffold and tool marks, stains, or other damage or defects and shall be uniform in color and texture throughout the work. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 LATH AND PLASTER 09200 -7 SECTION 09250 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specked Elsewhere: 1. Section 03300: Concrete 2. Section 03360: Shotcrete 3. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 4. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry 5. Section 07900: Sealants and Caulking 6. Section 09250: Gypsum Wallboard 7. Section 09900: Painting 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing gypsum wallboard, and related accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the recommended standards of the "Drywall Construction Manual' as published by the Drywall Contract Administrative Trust Fund, and with the U.S. Gypsum "Drywall Construction Handbook ". B . Manufacturer: Gypsum wallboard, including accessories and fasteners, shall be the products of the same manufacturer. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Comply with fire- resistance ratings indicated 2. Provide materials, accessories, and application procedures which have been listed by UL or tested according to ASTM E119 for the type of construction indicated. 3. Work shall comply with the applicable requirements of ASTM C840. D. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Gypsum wallboard surfaces on new stud walls shall have no measurable variation in any 2 -foot direction and a maximum variation of 1/8 -inch in 10 feet when a straightedge is laid on the surface in any direction. 2. Shim Work as required to comply with specified tolerances. 3. Do not exceed 1/16 -inch offset between planes of abutting sheets at edges or ends. ARG: 89119 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09250 -1 1.04 SYSTEMS PERFORMANCES A. Fire - Resistant Ratings: Where gypsum drywall with fire resistance ratings are indicated and/or as required by code, provide materials and installations which are identical with those of applicable assemblies tested per ASTM C 119 by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to job in original unopened containers or bundles and protect from damage and exposure to elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36; with tapered and wrapped edges. Use lengths to achieve as few joints as possible. 1. Type X, fire rated 5/8 inch thick shall be used throughout. 2. Type W R, 5/8 inch thick shall be used for wall and ceiling construction and repairs in Toilet Rooms and Kitchen areas, as indicated and/or as required. B. Screws: ASTM C646 self - drilling, self - tapping, corrosion- resistant bugle -head screws. Lengths sufficient for point penetration through supporting metal not less than 1/4 -inch or more than 1/2 -inch. C . Metal Trim: 1. Corner Bead: Fine -mesh expanded -steel wing type, zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A525, G90 coating designation, or ASTM A164, Type GS. 2. Control Joint: Steel, perforated -flange wing type, with single bead, zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A525, G90 coating designation, or ASTM A164, Type GS. 3. J- Moulds: Fry Reglet Co., or accepted equal. a. Size: As indicated for reveals. D. Joint Treatment Materials: In conformance with ASTM C475. 1. Joint Tape: Perforated 2. Joint Compound: Ready Mixed, all purpose. 3. Prefill Joint Compound: Powdered. E. Laminating Adhesive: In accordance with wallboard manufacturer's recommendations. F. Channel Screed: Fry Reglet Co., "Channel Screed: and Channel Screed Accessories" or accepted equal for drywall and plaster. Sizes as indicated. G . Miscellaneous Items: Furnish components not specified herein but indicated and required for a complete installation. ARG: 89119 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09250 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of gypsum wallboard and associated accessories. 1. Check framing for accurate spacing and alignment. 2. Verify that spacing of installed framing does not exceed maximum allowable for thickness of wallboard to be used. 3. Verify that door frames are set for thickness of wallboard to be used. 4. Repair protrusions of framing, twisted framing members, or unaligned members before installation of wallboard commences. B. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 BACKING PLATES A. Install as indicated for support of wall -hung cabinets, toilet partitions and accessories, and other items to be mounted on vertical surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL TRIM A. Furnish and install metal corner bead at vertical and horizontal external corners and angles. B. Install metal edge trim at junctions of wallboard and other materials and at exposed edges. C. Install control joints where indicated and at intervals not to exceed 30 feet in each direction in continuous vertical and horizontal surfaces. D. Reveal Trim: 1. Provide for locations indicated, set to straight lines, joints neatly fitted, mitered at corner returns or use accessories designed for the specific purpose. 2. Secure each piece into place using full and continuous bed of adhesive or as per manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.04 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Install as specified and as recommended by manufacturer and in conformance with ASTM C840. 1. End joints of adjacent panels shall not occur over the same stud. 2. Gypsum wallboard panels may be applied parallel or perpendicular to studs. 3. Cut and fit nearly around outlets and switches. Back - to-back wall penetrations shall be at least two stud spaces apart for acoustic insulation. 4. Provide perimeter relief where wallboard abuts structural decks, ceilings, or vertical structural elements or window sections. 5. Finish wallboard edge with metal casing bead of type indicated 6. Seal space between casing bead and structure with continuous sealant bead. ARG: 89119 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09250 -3 3.05 TAPING AND FINISHING A. Mix joint and finishing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B . Joints: 1. Center tape over joint and embed in uniform layer of joint compound of sufficient width and depth to provide firm and complete bond. 2. Apply skin coat while embedding tape. C. Treat angles with reinforcing tape folded to conform to adjacent surfaces and straight, true angles. D. Provide a minimum of 24 hours drying time between applications of compounds. E. Unless otherwise specified, apply two coats of finishing compound over joint compound and tape. 1. Spread first coat evenly and feather out beyond edges of tape and embedding compound. 2. After first finishing coat is thoroughly dry, cover with second coat with edges feathered out beyond the preceding coat. 3.06 COMPLETION A. Gypsum wallboard shall be installed neatly and cleanly. All taping, nails and screws shall be set, filled and invisible. Any taping, nails or screws that become visible during the progress of th work shall be reset and filled. The walls and ceiling shall be left ready for the installation of final finish. B. Any taping, nails or screws that become visible during the Correction Period shall be reset, filled and repainted to be undiscernible from the adjacent finishes, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.07 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Provide protection and maintain conditions which will ensure gypsum drywall undamaged and/or without deterioration at time of final acceptance of the Work. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09250 -4 Fin SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry. 3. Sealants and Caulking: Section 07900. 4. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 5. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 6. Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing ceramic tile flooring and wainscot at new toilet rooms. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A108.1: "Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Quarry Tile and Paver Tile Installed with Portland Cement Mortar." 2. A108.5: "Specifications for Ceramic tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar." 3. A118.1: "Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar." 4. Al 18.4 "Specifications for Latex - Portland Cement Mortar." 5. A136.1: "Specifications for Organic Adhesive for Installation of Ceramic Tile." 6. A137.1: "Specifications for Ceramic Tile." B. Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA): 1. "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. ", latest edition. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout and setting materials. ARG: 89119 CERAMIC TILE 09310 -1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit layout for special tile pattern work. Include full -size drawing of each pattern. B. Samples: 1. Special Pattern Tile: Panel for each pattern and color, with a minimum 12" x 12" inches per panel on plywood or hardwood backing and grouted. 2. Trim Shapes: Each color, type, and shape upon request. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's information on tile, including pictorial information on manufacturer's full line of standard patterns and colors. D. Upon completion of ceramic tile work, two copies of tile manufacturer's recommended maintenance products and procedures. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver tile in manufacturer's original cartons with grade seals unbroken. B. Deliver dry-set mortar in moisture proof containers. C. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and under cover in a manner to prevent damage or contamination. D. Handle materials carefully to avoid chipping and breakage. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Ambient Temperature: At least 50 degrees F° and rising, when setting and grouting with Portland cement mortar. B. Follow manufacturer's requirements for ambient temperature when setting and grouting with other than Portland cement mortar. C. Moisture Conditions: In accordance with tile and installation materials manufacturer's requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Tile shall conform to ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade. 2. All units shall be factory made. Provide bases, caps, stops, returns, trimmers, and other shapes for a complete installation. Vertical internal corners shall be square, external corners shall be bullnosed, and bases shall be coved. Color and finish shall match that of wall tile. B. Tile Types: 1. Floor Tile: For bidding purposes assume a 3 color pattern. a. Manufacturer: American Olean, or approved equal. b. Type: Ceramic Mosaic. c. Size: 2" x 2 ". ARG: 89119 CERAMIC TILE 09310 -2 d. Color: As selected from manufacturer's stnadard color range by Architect. 2. Wainscot Tile: For bidding purposes assume a 3 color pattern. a. Manufacturer: American Olean, or approved equal. b. Type: Ceramic Mosaic. c. Size: 2" x 2 ". d. Color: As selected from manufacturer's stnadard color range by Architect. C. Installation Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C -150, Type I. 2. Sand: ASTM C -144. 3. Water: Clean and potable. 4. Mortar: 1 part portland cement, 6 parts damp sand by volume. 5. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste on dry set mortar. 6. Reinforcing: 2" x 2" x 16 gauge welded wire mesh. 7. Cleavage Membrane: 15 lb. felt, 4 mil polyethylene or Kraft paper. 8. Grout: a. Floors: Upco Company, "Hydroment," or accepted equal, with latex additive. b. Walls: Latex Portland Cement Grout, or accepted equal, mastic grout. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 9. Floor Sealer: Hillyard Cem -Seal, or accepted equal, unthinned. D. Control Joints: Sealant type and sealant backup are specified in Section 07900, "Joint Sealants. ". E. Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds which are uniform in color and finish to sizes and profiles indicated. 1. Type: White marble. 2. Size: 6" x 1 -1/2" x 3' long. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of ceramic tile. Do not commence the installation until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prior to commencing tile work, protect surfaces adjoining those to receive tile. B. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, and electrical and mechanical work which will be in or behind tile in the completed work shall have been installed prior to installation of the tile. C. Surfaces on which ceramic tile will be installed shall be firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films or foreign matter. ARG: 89119 CERAMIC TILE 09310 -3 UM La 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install tile in accordance with the requirements of the specified TCA Method from the TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" appropriate to the tile and surface specified herein. B . Joint Width: Approximately 1/8 inch. C. Set tile in a manner to produce solid bedding, smooth even surfaces, and uniform joints, accurately aligned and symmetrically arranged. Avoid use of tile less than half size. Cut tile neatly, grind rough exposed edges. D. Establish lines of borders where applicable, prior to spreading setting bed, centering field work in both directions. Lay tile from center line of wall or floor surface outward, with adjustments made at junction with other floor or wall surfaces. E. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form as complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. F. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built -in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plats, collars, or covers overlap tile. G . Do not start floor tile operations occurring in spaces requiring both floor and wall tile until wall tile setting has been completed H. Omit tile where floor or wall area is covered by permanently built -in equipment such as toilet fixtures and recessed accessories. I. Install waterproofing membrane at areas as indicated. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J . Lay tile to edges of expansion and construction joints. K. Control Joints: Provide control joints at 10 feet on center each way and at all areas where tile abutts a restraining surface. 1. Control joints shall extend through setting bed to substrate. Saw cutting of control joints will not be permitted. Joints are to be kept clean of mortar and grout when setting tile. L. Placement Methods: - 1. Floor tile: TCA F141 on existing subfloor. 2. Wall tile: TCA W221 over existing and new water -proof gypsum board. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces after installation as recommended by tile manufacturer. B. Use no acid, metal cleaning tools, or harsh abrasive on tile. ARG: 89119 CERAMIC TILE 09310 -4 C. Replace all damaged surfaces prior to final acceptance. D. Seal Floor Tile with PPG Industries, Inc. "Deepguard Sealer ", or accepted equal, applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Keep floors free from traffic for a minimum of 3 days after tile has been installed. B. If use of newly tiled floors is unavoidable, provide board walkways for use for a minimum of 3 days. C. Protect floor tile by covering with Kraft paper or other approved means until time of final acceptance of the Work. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 CERAMIC TILE 09310 -5 SECTION 09560 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS WOOD STRIP FLOORING A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry. 3. Sealants and Caulking: Section 07900. 4. Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing oak strip flooring as indicated. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Oak flooring and finish shall meet all requirements of the National Oak Flooring Manufacturer's Association (NOFMA). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier's Qualifications: Supplier shall be a member of NOFMA. B . Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of three (3) years successful experience in the installation of wood strip flooring. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. ARG: 89119 WOOD STRIP FLOORING 09560 -1 M 1.05 WORKING CONDITIONS A. The flooring shall not be delivered or installed until vapor barrier is installed in crawl space, building is weathertight and permanent heat, light and ventilation are installed and systems are functioning. B . Flooring shall be stored on the premises a minimum of seven (7) days, or as required for acclimation, before installation commences. Final determination as to acclimation will be made by the Flooring Contractor. 1. All flooring bundles shall be broken and loosely piled at acclimate the flooring to the moisture conditions in the building. 2 Maintain a temperature range of 55 to 75 degrees with a relative humidity range of 35% to 50% during acclimization and installation. C. Contractor shall verify moisture content of existing sub -floor and floor joists prior to installation of flooring. Moisture content shall not exceed 9 %. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened bundles. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Samples: Submit 2 - 12" X 12" samples of flooring with finish as specified. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. Flooring shall be clear grade, red oak, strip flooring. Strips shall be 13/16 inch thich and face width shall be 2 -1/4 inches. Strips shall be continuous toungue and groove at sides and ends. B. Underlayment: Contractor and installer shall verify suitability of existing substrate. If existing substrate is not suitable for installation of wood flooring, substrate shall .be replaced with exterior A -C grade plywood. See Section 01015 "Allowances" for requiremetnts for an allowance for replacement of substrate. 1. Substrate thickness shall be as required to align with the top of the existing finish floor. B. Vapor barrier shall be as recommended by manufacturer. C. Attachment: Cut steel, 8d nails at 20 inches on center. ca ARG: 89119 WOOD STRIP FLOORING 09560 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of wood flooring. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence with the installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing tile flooring, as required for installation of new wood flooring. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign matter from subsrtate to receive wood flooring. B. Set any raised nails in existing sub -floor. Renail existing sub- flooring as required. Sand any high spots and fill any depressions as recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Clean and sweep sub -floor, do not use water. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Lay paper or felt as flooring is laid. 1. Lap joint 4 inches minimum. B . Lay wood flooring in the pattern indicated. 1. Provide expansion voids at perimeter, maximum width 1/2 ", as recommended by manufacturer. 2. All boards shall be driven up tightly to the next board and all joints shall be tight. In driving floor tightly do not dirive so tightly as to cause buckling. 3. Stagger end joints. C. Moisture content of the flooring shall not exceed 8% during installation. D. Attachment: 1. Blind nail tongue and groove flooring to subrate with 8d nails at 10 inches on center. 2. Flooring shall be nailed to provied a rigid, non - sqeaking floor. Nailing, as stated herein is the minimum required. 3.04 FINISHING A. Sand flooring as recommended by the manufacturer and NOFMA. B. Remove sanding dust from entire surface with vacuum and tack. C. Inspect entire surface to insure that surface is acceptable for finishing, completely free from sanding dust and perfectly clean. D. See Section .09900 "Painting" for final finish on wood floors. ARG: 89119 WOOD STRIP FLOORING 09560 -3 La 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Upon completion of installation, Contractor shall provide maintenance instruction, as prepared by the flooring manufacturer and NOFMA, to Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 WOOD STRIP FLOORING 09560 -4 SECTION 09650 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS RESILIENT FLOORING A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry. 3. Sealants and Caulking: Section 07900. 4. Section 09900: Painting. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing resilient flooring, including epoxy flooring and bases and vinyl bases. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. SS -W -40: "Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. Submit two (2) 12" x12" samples of epoxy flooring materials, for Architect's approval of color and texture. 2. Submit two (2) samples of vinyl base for Architect's approval of color and size. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers with label indicating brand names, colors and patterns, and quality designations legible and intact. B. Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature in the spaces to receive resilient flooring materials between 70 degrees F° and 90 degrees F° for a minimum of 48 hours Prior to installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees F°. ARG: 89119 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -1 B. Install vinyl base accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUID APPLIED RESILIENT FLOORING A. Provide epoxy flooring as manufactured by Tera -Lite, Inc. or accepted equal. 1. Product: Tera Gem (RP -70) Epoxy Decking with anti -skid second coat over existing substrate. a. Contractor and installer shall verify suitability of existing substrate for installation of epoxy flooring. If unsuitable for installation of epoxy flooring, substrate shall be replaced with exterior A -C grade plywood. See Section 01015 "Allowances" for requirements for an allowance for replacement of substrate. b. Substrate thickness shall be as required to align with the top of the existing finish floor. 2. Base: Cove base and carry epoxy 6 inches up wall. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. 2.03 BASE A. Provide Vinyl Base: Type in conformance with FS SS -W -40, Type I, as manufactured by Burke, Inc. , or accepted equal, as indicated. 1. Type: Cove. 2. Size: 4" X 1/8 ". 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Reducer Strips: Rubber or vinyl, tapered -edge style, of thickness to suit abutting floor covering material. 2.05 APPLICATION MATERIALS A. Application materials shall be of the types and brands as recommended by the flooring material manufacturer for the specific installation conditions, and include adhesives, primer, crack filler and leveling compound. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of resilient flooring. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence with the installation until such conditions have been corrected. 60 ARG: 89119 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -2 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing floor covering, dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign matter from surfaces to receive resilient flooring materials. B. Fill cracks to provide a level surface for application of resilient flooring. C. Prime surfaces, if recommended by resilient - flooring adhesive manufacturer. 3.03 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES A. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. C. Apply adhesives uniformly over surfaces. 1. Apply no more adhesive at any time than can be covered by resilient flooring material within the recommended working time of the adhesive. 2. Remove any adhesive which dries or films over. 3. Do not soil walls, bases, or adjacent areas with adhesive. 4. Promptly remove any spillage. D. Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool. E. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to ensure proper application of adhesive. 3.04 FLUID APPLIED RESILIENT FLOORING A. Apply first coat over clean, dry plywood underlayment per manufacturer's recommendations. Apply second anti-skid coat per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install reducer strips where epoxy flooring adjoins another floor materials. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF BASE A. Patch, fill, level subfloors under base to provide a straight line between base and flooring material, parallel to top of base on wall. Install base around perimeter of room or space and at base of all partitions as indicated. 1. Unroll base material and cut into accurate lengths to minimize the number of joints. 2. Match edges at all seams or double -cut adjoining lengths. 3. Install with tight butt joints with no joint width greater than 1/64 inch. 4. Apply adhesive and firmly adhere to wall surfaces. 5. Accurately scribe base to abutting materials. 6. Provide same type and color base for basework as that on adjacent walls, extending base to wall at cabinet returns and end panels. ARG: 89119 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -3 La 3.06 FINISHING AND CLEANING A. Not less than 4 days following completion of installation of resilient flooring, clean surfaces with a neutral cleaner recommended by the floor materials manufacturer for the type of material installed. B. Protect completed installation from traffic and damage with a covering of heavy Kraft paper, taped at edges, untill time of final acceptance of the Work. END OF SECTION Lj ARG: 89119 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -4 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 2. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200 3. Ceramic Tile: Section 09310. 4. Resilient Flooring: Section 09650 5. Finish Hardware: Section 08700 pertaining to thresholds. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing broadloom carpet and associated accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) Test Methods: 1. 134 -1975: "Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets." B. Department of Commerce, DOC FF 1 -70: "Standard for Surface Flammability of Carpeting (Pill Test)." 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Firm (carpet mill) shall have not less than 5 years of production experience with carpet similar to types specified in this section; and whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of products with requirements of this section. B. General Standard: "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" by the Carpet and Rug Institute; for definitions of terminology not otherwise defined herein, and for general recommendations and information. C. Prior to commencing installation an authorized representative of manufacturer shall inspect work areas and report his findings to Architect. ARG: 89119 CARPET 09680 -1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, maintenance recommendations, and form of guarantee offered for each type of carpet. B . Seaming Diagrams: Show layout for each area to receive carpeting. Indicate pattern, color, seam diagrams and techniques, orientation widths, joint layouts, and pertinent installation details. C. Samples: For each type and color of carpet, submit two (2) sets of 12 -X 12 inch samples. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in factory wrapping, packaging, and other means necessary to prevent damage and deterioration during shipment, handling, and storage. B. Maintain protective coverings in place and in good repair until removal is necessary for the work. C. Store products inside enclosed storage facilities or closed building supported above glade and slabs -on- grade. D. Maintain storage spaces and products in dry condition at all times, and within temperature extremes recommended by manufacturer. E. Follow manufacturer's special instructions 1.07 PROTECTION A. Protect products against damage during shipment, field handling, and installation B. Protect adjacent existing and newly placed construction and finishes as necessary to prevent damage during installation of this work. Installer shall repair damage done to adjacent work during installation at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Existing Substrates: 1. Removal of existing material and advanced preparation of existing substrates as specified in Section 02050 " Selective Demolition ". 2. Furnish instructions for condition required for such substrates which are to receive new carpet, in order for Contractor to incorporate this work into project schedule. 3. Provide compatible latex based floor filler and levelling compound necessary as part of floor preparation for Architects review. B. In advance of carpet installation, review details with Architect, and incorporate minor adjustments determined necessary. C. Painting work in areas to be carpeted shall have been completed prior to installation of carpet. ARG: 89119 CARPET 09680 -2. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish additional carpet for each type and color of carpet used in the work. 1. Provide in quantities equal to but not less than 5 percent of total installed area of each type and color of carpet. B . Supply extra carpet from the same production lots or color runs as used in the work. Supply in factory packaged and labeled roll goods and cartons. Identify packages with Owner's and Project name and "EXTRA CARPET: TYPE it C. Furnish written certification that extra materials supplied have been inspected and reconfirmed to be the same as installed. D. Deliver materials to Project premises prior to submittal of final application for payment, and store at location as directed by Architect. E. Upon completion of installation, similarly deliver and store unused units, and unused cut carpet pieces 8 inches and wider. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Provide written guarantee, in a form acceptable to the Owner and signed by the Contractor, the Installer and an offcial of the carpet manufacturing company, covering the following: 1. Guarantee that the carpet is properly installed and guarantee the surface pile in any given area against abrasive wear of more than ten (10 %) percent within for a period of ten (10) years from the date of final acceptance of the Work. Damage due to lack of maintenance, misuse, or improper cleaning methods shall not apply. Local carpet areas which fail to perform shall be replaced with no additional cost to Owner. 2. Guarantee installation against stretching, wrinkling, opening of joints, and other areas of poor materials and workmanship for a period of two years after date final acceptance of the Work. 3. During Guarantee Peirods provide all materials and labor necessary for repair or replacement or carpeting, with no additional cost to Owner. . flp f 2.01 CARPET A. Carpet to be installed over pad. 1. Manufacturer: Atlas Carpet Mills. Inc.. 2. Style: Princeton, 36 ounce, cut pile, 100 percent Ultron 3D Nylon. 3. Color: Desert Canyon, No. P215,. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Carpet Pad: Provide carpet pads complying with ASTM D 2859. Install as recommended by carpet manufacturer. ARG: 89119 CARPET 09680 -3 B. Nailing Strips: Provide either 3/8" or 9/32" thick as required to match carpet pad thickness. Provide strips with two rows of pins for a stretched width of 20' or less. Provide strips with three rows of pins for stretched with of 20' or greater. C. Edge Binder: Molded vinyl type designed for carpet in standard color as selected; Flexco, Mercer, or accepted equal. D. Reducer Strips: 1. Carpet Edge: Roppe Rubber Corporation or accepted equal, vinyl glue -down reducer #156. a. Color: As selected by Architect. E. Miscellaneous: Tape, thread, and other items necessary for installation. F. Floor leveling material: Latex type floor leveling compound Vitex, or as recommended by carpet manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine substrates and conditions under which carpeting is to be installed. Do not install carpeting over substrate which is uneven, cracked, or has other detrimental conditions that will affect the performance and appearance of the carpeting. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Before installation, inspect carpet for manufacturing flaws, shipping damage. Do not install carpet found not in compliance with Specifications. C. Maintain spaces to receive carpeting at 70 degrees F. minimum, for at least 48 hours previous to, during, and for 48 hours after installation of carpet. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Clean substrates free from dust and other foreign and residual materials which would inhibit proper bonding. B . Fill cracks, holes, and depressions to level surfaces. 3.03 LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS A. When edge binders are required at openings, center strips under doors, unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install carpet and associated materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install carpet prior to installation of movable fixtures. LZ ARG: 89119 CARPET 09680 -4 W C. Install carpet with pile inclination in one direction, unless otherwise indicated or accepted. D. Fit carpet neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases, around penetrations, under saddles and thresholds when indicated, and around permanent cabinets and equipment. F. Neatly trim carpet free from loose thread ends and projecting frays. G . Vacuum -clean completed installation using equipment of type recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3.05 COMPLETION A. When complete, carpet joint lines shall be straight and free from stagger and offsets not intended. B . All units shall lay fully in place, flat, true to plane, and free from warps, bulges, offsets across joints and lifting at edges. C. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from cuts, scratches, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. D. Maintenance Materials: Deliver specified overrun and useable scraps of carpet to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 CARPET 09680 -5 SECTION 09900 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PAINTING A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 3. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 4. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 5. Sealants and Caulking: Section 07900. 6. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 7. Access Doors: Section 08305. 8. Wood Windows: Section 08610. 9. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 10. Basic Mechanical Requirements: Section 15050. 11. Electrical: Section 16000. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . Work in this section includes application of paint to all exposed surfaces, and areas to be backprimed, of new and existing construction, unless otherwise noted. 1. 'Paint" as used herein is defined as all coating system materials including: primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate of finish coats. 2. Backpriming: All new wood and metal items and any exiting items which are to be reinstalled, shall be completely backprimed prior to installation. This applies to items which are to receive finish painting in the field and includes new exterior siding and trim, galvanized sheet metal, and new tongue and groove flooring. Backprime as specified under Paint System relating to each item in Section 2.02. 1.03 LIMITS OF WORK A. All exterior plaster, wood and metal surfaces are to be primed, back - primed and painted, unless otherwise noted. All interior wood and gypsum board surfaces are to be primed and painted as indicated, unless otherwise noted. Interior concrete slabs to be sealed. B. Do not paint: 1. Non - ferrous metals, such as brass, bronze, chrome, aluminum, or stainless steel. 2. Finish plated hardware and plated hardware and plumbing fittings. ARG: 89119 PAINTING 09900 -1 3. Interior metal registers and grilles unless factory finish is damaged during shipping or construction work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Sub - Contractor designated by the Contractor (or the Contractor if the Work will be performed by the Contractor directly) to perform the work of this Section must meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum of three (3) years successful experience in the application of paint systems in historic buildings. 2. Furnish Owner with satisfactory written evidence of such experience. 3. Provide list of similar projects completed within the last two years. 4. All work shall be done by first class workmen experienced in the best and accepted methods of the trade. a. Submit record of the experience of each superintendent proposed for the project. B. Colors: Each color shall be mixed in one large batch to provide uniformity of color throughout. C. Comply with EPA and state of California regulations regarding Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC). 1. All non -flat oil -based architectural coatings shall not exceed 250 VOC. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee all surfaces finishes to remain free of defects including the following: 1. Serious or uneven fading. 2. Evidence of blistering, peeling, or chalking. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. A complete list of materials proposed to be provided for the work. C. Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture. 1. Provide two 12" x 12" samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples, as requested by Architect, until acceptable sheen, color and texture is achieved. 2. Transparent Finishes: Provide two 4" x 8" samples, on actual wood surfaces, of stained wood finish to match existing at Main floor level. D. On -site Samples: Provide "brush- outs" on the building as necessary to obtain Architect's approval. E. Architect reserves the right to request additional samples as required at no additional cost to the Owner. ARG: 89119 PAINTING 09900 -2 ow 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. In addition to paints for completing the work required, furnish additional materials for each type and color of opaque paint used for this work. B. Furnish in quantities not less than the following: 1. Typical Interior and Exterior Wall Colors: 5 gallons for each color. 2. Accent Wall Colors: 5 gallons for each color. 3. Secondary Wall Colors: 2 gallons for each color. C. Supply extra paints from same production lots of color runs used in the work, factory sealed and labeled. D. Deliver materials and an inventory list to project premises prior to Substantial Completion, and store as directed by Owner's Representative. 1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to the site in sealed manufacturer's containers with legends and labels intact. B. Store paint materials in clean, dry, well - ventilated areas, away from heat, sparks, flame and direct rays of the sun. Maintain storage areas free from fire hazard. C. Frequently remove accumulated waste materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Paint and Finish Products: Highest quality standard brand, produced by a nationally known manufacturer. Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same man ufacturer as finish coats. Paint products shall be fresh and well ground; shall not settle readily, cake, or thicken in the container, shall be broken up readily with paddle to a smooth consistency; and shall have easy application. Other materials such as linseed oil, turpentine, mineral spirits, miscellaneous thinners, varnish, and shellac shall be the highest quality of an accepted manufacturer. B . Unless otherwise specified, the products indicated under "Painting" are products of Fuller- OBrien; comparable quality products of Benjamin Moore, Glidden- Durkee, Sherwin Williams, Sinclair, or accepted equal will be acceptable. C. Finishes: Surface treatments and finishes are indicated on the Finish Schedule. D. Colors: As indicated or to be selected by Architect from manufacturers' standard colors. E. Materials not specified by brand names: 1. Wood Filler: Paste filler recommended by manufacturer for wood type used, in color of stain to match wood. 2. Cementitious Filler: Non -shrink formulation; white Portland cement with fine silicate ARG: 89119 PAINTING 09900 -3 aggregate, zinc -oxide pigment, and reinforcing chemical binder. 3. General Purpose Filler: Standard spackling compound or gypsum wallboard joint compound or latex patching compound for patching plaster,gypsum wallboard surfaces to receive opaque finishes. 4. Turpentine - Federal Specification FS TT-T -801. 5. Thinners: As recommended by each manufacturer for his respective product. 6. Driers - Federal Specification TT-D -651 a. 7. Alcohol - Denatured. 8. Putty - Federal Specification TT -P -791 a. 9. Equipment: Provide scaffolding, staging, drop cloths, covers, brushes, rollers and spraying and other equipment required for proper execution of the work. 2.02 PAINT SYSTEMS A. Exterior Coating Systems: 1. Colors: See Paint Schedule on drawings. 2. Ferrous and Galvanized Metals - Satin Finish: a. One coat 621 -05, Blox Rust Latex Metal Primer. b. Two coats 664-XX Weather King II Latex House Paint 3. Wood - Satin Finish: a. One coat 220 -23 Exterior Wood Primer. b. Two coats 664-XX Weather King II Latex House Paint 4. Cement Plaster: a. Two coats 262 -XX, Acrylic Flat. B. Interior Coating Systems: 1. Assume a three color scheme for bidding purposes. Colors shall be chosen, by Architect, from manufacturer's standard color range. 1. Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster - Texture to match existing: a. One coat 220 -20 Pro-Tech Wall Pruner. b. Two coat 202 -XX, Flat Latex Wall Paint. 2. Opaque Wood Finish: a. 1 coat 220 -07, Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. b. 2 coats 214-XX "AA" Acrylic Semi -gloss Enamel. 3. Clear Wood Finish: a. one Coat 640 -XX, Penn - Chrome stain. 1) Color shall match existing wood work at adjacent surfaces. Where new woodwork is not adjacent to existing wood surface, color shall match existing wood baluster in Entry. b. Two coats 652 -01, satin Pen -Thane polyurethane. 3. New Concrete Floor Sealer: a. One coat of Ashford Formula, Curecrete Chemical Company, or accepted equal. 4. Hardwood Floor Finished: a. One coat 652 -00, gloss Pen -thane polyurethane (thinned 10 %), or accepted equal. b. Two coats 652 -01, satin Pen -Thane polyurethane, or accepted equal. M ARG: 89119 PAINTING 09900 -4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the application of paint and stains. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the application until such conditions have been corrected. Application of the first coat of finish constitutes acceptance of surface conditions and responsibility for the ultimate finish. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finish work. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Rooms and spaces shall be vacuum -clean before commencement of paint application. 2. All surfaces must be dry and clean. 3. Moisture content of surfaces shall be as recommended by paint manufacturer for specific coating system,or less. Moisture content shall be measured with a reliable,moisture meter before commencement of paint application. 4. Remove finish hardware; do not replace until adjacent finishes have thoroughly dried. B . Preparation of Exterior Ferrous Metals: 1. Clean ferrous surfaces that are not galvanized or shop coated of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 2. Touch up shop - applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare. 3. Back prime backs, edges and ends of exterior ferrous metal work. C. Preparation of Exterior Galvanized Metals: 1. Clean galvanized surfaces free of dirt, oil, silicone and surface contaminants. 2. Etch galvanized metals with phosphoric acid solution (Eco- Prime) and rinse with clear water. 3. Back prime backs, edges and ends of galvanized metal work D. Preparation of Interior Structural Steel to remain exposed: 1. Clean surface of structural steel to remove oil, grease, dirt and loose mill scale by solvent cleaners. 2. Provide a smooth uniform surface to receive new paint. a. For noticeable welds and arises, grind smooth. b. For holes and abrasions, fill with appropriate non - shrinking filler. 3. Touch up shop applied prime coats. E. Preparation of Cement Plaster: 1. Existing Cement Plaster: a. Remove as much efflorescence as possible using a clean dry wire or stiff fiber brush. b. Remove oil and grease by solvent wiping or by steam or alkali cleaning. c. Scrub surfaces with a solution of ten percent (10 %) muriatic acid to remove ARG: 89119 PAINTING 09900 -5 efflorescence and laitance, to clean , remove any glaze, and to etch the surface. Wash the acid solution from the surface using clean water. d. Patch cracks, holes and defects with patching plaster. e. Spot prime patches and stains. 2. New Cement Plaster: a. Clean cement plaster adjacent to new repairs so that the paint bonds and blends into new and old, minimum 6 inches beyond repairs. b. Allow new cement plaster to cure thoroughly (30 days minimum) prior to applying paint. Moisture content shall be 8% or less, as measured with a moisture meter, at time of paint application. c. Patch cracks, holes and defects with patching plaster. Remove all powder and dust by washing with clear water. d. Spot prime patches and stains. F. Preparation of Wood Surfaces: 1. Before finishing, remove handling marks or effects of exposure to moisture with final sanding with at least 150 -grit or finer sandpaper. 2. Clean soiled surfaces. 3. Neatly fill nail holes, cracks and depressions with filler. When dry, sand smooth and spot prime all filler. 4. Sand smooth and dust clean. G . Preparation of Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Remove all sanding dust. 2. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with as recommended by manufacturer.. 3. Allow fill to dry and sand smooth. Do not raise nap of paper on wallboard. H. Preparation of Plaster Surfaces: 1. Clean plaster adjacent to new repairs so that the paint bonds and blends into new and old, minimum 6 inches beyond repairs. 2. Allow new plaster to cure thoroughly (30 days minimum) prior to applying paint. Moisture content shall be 8% or less, as measured with a moisture meter, at time of paint application. 3. Scrub surfaces of existing plaster with a solution of ten percent (10 %) tri- sodium- phosphate to remove to clean , remove any glaze, and to etch the surface. Wash the solution from the surface using clean water. 4. Patch cracks, holes and defects with patching plaster. Remove all powder and dust by washing with clear water. 5. Spot prime patches and stains. H. Preparation of Concrete Floors: 1. Clean all areas to be treated with concrete floor sealer with fine bristle broom to remove surface dust and dirt, then vacuum clean surface. I. Preparation of Hardwood Floors: 1. Clean all areas to be finished with fine bristle broom tand tack paper to remove surface dust and dirt. 0 ARG: 89119 PAINTING 09900 -6 0. 3.04 PAINT APPLICATION A. Weather Conditions: 1. Do no exterior painting in inclement or threatening weather. 2. Do not paint at temperatures below 50 degrees F or if surface temperature is below 50 degrees F. 3. Do not paint in foggy weather or if surface moisture exceeds manufacturer's recommendations as measured by a moisture meter. B . Dust and Dirt: Do not paint in areas not free from dust or dirt and where work of other trades or wind may cause dusting. C. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Applications: Apply materials to completely cover all surfaces and dry uniformly to the color and sheen specked. Spray application is permitted. 1. Allow each coat to thoroughly dry before application of succeeding coat. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for drying time between coats. 2. Sand between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of five feet. 3. Finish coats shall be smooth, even and free from brush marks, streaks, laps and pile- up of paints, and skipped and missed areas. 3.05 CLEANUP A. Clean up spilled and splattered paint immediately. B. During progress of the work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day. C. Remove spilled,splattered and over - sprayed paint, taking care not to mar surface finish of item being cleaned END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 PAINTING 09900 -7 SECTION 09970 PREFINISHED PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 3. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 5. Resilient Flooring: Section 09659. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for supplying and installating prefinished panel waiscot as indicated 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Submit 12" x 12" samples of panel for Architect's approval of color and texture. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to job in original unopened containers or bundles and protect from damage and exposure to elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Liner Panels: Provide fiberglass panels as manufactured by Ornyte of Chino, California as Duratuf or accepted equal at Staging Kitchen. Install panels over new or existing W -P gypsum board. 1. Color and Texture: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. ARG: 89119 PREFINISHED PANELS 09970 -1 .�r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of prefinished panels and associated accessories. 1. Check for alignment. B. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected 3.02 PREPARATION A. Seal wall joints as required to prevent water infiltration. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's complete written instructions. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Wipe panels clean after installation. Use no acidic or abrasive cleaners. B. Protection: Protect all paneling as recommended by manufacturer until time of final acceptance of the Work. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 PREFINISHED PANELS 09970 -2 SECTION 10426 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SIGNAGE A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200 2. Wood Doors: Section 08210 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing directional signs. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for signs. C. Samples: Submit full-size samples of units to Architect for review of design. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Do not install signs until all painting operations are complete. 2. Remove protective coverings at final cleanup of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide signs as manufactured by: Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc., Advance Corporation or accepted equal. Product designations are based on Advance Corporations "Braille -Tac" line of products. B. Type of signs: 1. Toilet Room Signs: Cast aluminum, 6 "x8" pictogram and copy signs that spell out the words "Men" and "Women ", have the words written in Braille, and provide the international symbols for disabled accessible and for "Men" ARG: 89119 SIGNAGE 10426 -1 LA or "Women ". Height of raised letters and contrast between characters and background shall comply the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guideline (ADAAG). Signs shall be mounted with concealed screws at the height and location required by ADAAG. a. Women's Room sign: No. P102. b. Men's Room sign: No. P 101. c. Color: White letters on a teal background. d. Signs shall be mounted 5' -0" above the floor to the right of the doorjamb as required by ADAAG. 2. Parking Signage: 1. Metal signs, with reflective paint; color, size and typology shall be as required by Title 24. Locate at entrance to parking lot and at accessible parking space(s). 2. Mount signs on 2 inch outside diameter, galvanized metal posts set in 12 inch square x 18 inch deep concrete footing. a. Concrete footing shall be below grade and shall be covered with paving material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install signs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION ARG:89119 SIGNAGE 10426 -2 SECTION 10522 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 2. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 3. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing fire extinguishers and cabinets. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Fire extinguishers shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label and meet the requirements of the local Fire Marshal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive and technical data and illustration, annotated to clearly indicate specific product types, variations, and materials involved. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver extinguishers and cabinets in the original packaging with each package clearly identified with manufacturer's name, and type and name of product. B . Packaging shall be such to prevent damage during shipping and handling. C. Store materials in the original packaging in a manner to prevent them from being damaged. D. Follow additional requirements of the manufacturer. ARG: 89119 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Fire Extinguishers: UL rating 2AJOBC, dry- chemical type. B. Cabinets: 1. Recessed, cabinet as manufactured by Modern Metal Products or accepted equal, with baked enamel finish, "Break Glass" insert, lock and key. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of fire extinguishers and cabinets. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 CLEANING A. Following installation, clean inside and outside of fire extinguisher cabinets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10522 -2 0 SECTION 10600 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS TOILET PARTITIONS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Finished Carpentry: Section 06200. 3. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 5. Toilet Accessories: Section 10800. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishings and installing plastic laminate toilet partitions and screens. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work. B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As indicated in Section 01340. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing layouts, dimensions, finishes, method of attachment, and all hardware and fasteners. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive and technical data and illustration, annotated to clearly indicate specific product types, variations, and materials involved. 1.05 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and handle products in such a manner as to prevent them from twisting, bending or other damage. ARG: 89119 TOILET PARTITIONS 10600 -1 LA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Bobrick, or accepted equal. B. Type: 1. Toilet Compartments: Floor anchored, plastic laminate compartment, with overhead brace and institutional hardware. a. Model No: 1042.66. b. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard line. 2. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted, plastic laminate screen. a. Model NO: 1045.: b. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard line. E. Hardware and Fittings: 1. Finish: Satin stainless steel, type 304. 2. Doors: a. Hinges: Institution grade, self - lubricating balanced hinge with adjustable hold open. b. Door Latch: Institution grade combination slide latch and bumper equipment for emergency access, without the use of tools. c. Coat Hook/Bumper: Model No. B -212. 1) Install hook on wall in Accessible Toilet Compartment, not on door. 3. Brackets: For panels and pilasters, shall be double height, heavy extruded aluminum, heat treated, anodized and polished 4. Pilaster base: One - piece, 4 inches high. F. Minimum Thickness: 1. Doors, Partitions and Screens: 1 inch. 2. Pilasters: 1 -1/4 inches. G. Provide solid blocking as required for support of toilet partitions. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for partition system, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition- mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars as indicated. B . Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 30 inch wide in- swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 34 inches wide, out swinging doors at stalls equipped for use by the handicapped. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of toilet partitions and screens. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. W ARG: 89119 TOILET PARTITIONS 10600 -2 W 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet partitions, urinal screens, hardware, fittings, and accessories where indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and accepted Shop Drawings. B . Comply with manufacturer's recommended installation sequence. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearance of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1" between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. C. Screens: Attach with concealed anchoring devices, as recommended by manufacturer to suit supporting wall structure. Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out - swinging doors to return to fully closed position. C. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. 3.03 COMPLETION A. When complete each partition assembly and urinal screen shall be set square, plumb, and level, accurately aligned to the position intended, and securely anchored to prevent movement. B. Doors shall remain plumb in all positions of swing, and doors and hardware shall operate smoothly, quitely, and free from binding. C. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 TOILET PARTITIONS 10600 -3 SECTION 10800 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS TOILET ACCESSORIES A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Finished Carpentry: Section 06200. 3. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 5. Toilet Partitions: Section 10600. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing toilet and janitorial accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. 1. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Accessories and their installation shall conform to all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding disabled access. B. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Design Criteria: Grab bars shall be capable of withstanding a force of 900 pounds, minimum, when installed in accordance with the manufacture's instructions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet accessory. B. Samples: Submit full -size samples of units to Architect for review of design and operation. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. C. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices in other work. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ARG: 89119 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 -1 A. Quality designation and guarantee label shall be attached to each mirror, or manufacturer's certification that mirrors meet specified requirements shall be submitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Provide toilet accessories as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., or accepted equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ANSI Type 304, satin finish, 22 gauge minimum, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, FS 00 -B -613; Rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges, FS QQ -B -626. C. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366,20 gauge minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, G60. E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type SSC -2. F. Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. 1. Attachment Devices: Furnish backing plates, brackets, and hardware required for a complete installation; fasteners shall be concealed and theft -proof when available. H. Grab Bars: 1 -1/2 inches O. D. mandrel bent, with welded end flanges, exposed mounting, and peened or other accepted safety-grip finish; furnish manufacturer's standard anchor plates for each bar. I. Locks: Provide locks and furnish keys for standard lockable items. Z i ARG: 89119 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 -2 W 2.03 FABRICATION A. Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not permitted, except where otherwise indicated; unobtrusive labels on on surfaces not exposed to view are acceptable. Where locks are required for a particular type of toilet accessory, provide same keying throughout project. Furnish two keys for each lock. B . Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. 2.04 ACCESSORY ITEMS A. Recessed Paper -Towel Dispensers/Waste Receptacle: B -3944. B . Toilet Tissue Dispenser: B -2740. C. Recessed Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: B -221. D. Grab Bars: B -6106. E. Mirror Units: B- 209 -2460. F. Surface Mounted Stainless Steel Shelf. B -295, 1' -6" long. G. Soap Dispenser: B -190. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, fun-Ay anchored in locations indicated. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms functions smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B . Protection: 1. Maintain protective coatings or coverings on units until installation and painting is complete. 2. Remove protective coverings at final cleanup of installation. C. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 -3 SECTION 11400 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Metal Fabrication: Section 05500. 2. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 3. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 4. Sealants and Caulking: Section 07900. 5. Gypsum Board: Section 09250. 6. Painting: Section 09900. 7. Mechanical: Section 15050. 8. Plumbing: Section 15400. 9. Electrical: Section 16000. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . Work Included: Removal of existing equipment and storage for reuse. Cleaning, repair and reinstallation of existing equipment. Installation of stainless steel wall panels as indicated. Installation of metal shelving as indicated. Recessing of existing plumbing piping, gas piping and electrical conduit in the wall. Installation of floor sinks and indirect drain lines as required for plumbing and equipment drainage and as required by code. Installation of a mop sink as indicated. As part of reinstallation of equipment, provide all gas solenoid valves and electrical connections for automatic fuel shut -off as per NFPA requirements. 1. Definitions: a. Installation shall mean providing, delivering, uncrating, assembling, setting -in- place, testing,and demonstrating all new equipment specified herein. b. Reinstallation shall mean replacing equipment in original location, reattaching equipment to new or existing utility hook -ups and testing equipment for proper function. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: To be eligible as a Bidder the Subcontractor designated by the Contractor to perform the work of this Section (or the Contractor, if such work will be performed by the Contractor directly) must meet the following requirements: 1. Manufacturer: Provide food service equipment components from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of such equipment. The manufacturer shall have been regularly engaged in producing food service equipment. ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -1 E2 M 2. Shop Fabricator/Installer: Where indicated units of equipment require shop /field, custom fabrication, provide units fabricated and installed by skilled mechanics with a minimum of 5 years experience in similar work. B . Workmanship: Workmanship shall be of the highest quality throughout in accordance with the best standard practice for this type of equipment in a manner to fulfill the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. Materials used in the fabrication of this job shall be new and of the best grade obtainable. C. UL Labels: Where available, provide UL labels on new items of food service equipment with prime electrical components. Provide UL "recognized marking" on other items with electrical components, signifying listing by UL. All electrically operated or heating equipment shall be in full accordance with, and shall conform with the latest standard of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, National Electric Manufacturer's Association and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., where applicable standards have been set up by said agency and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for gas - burning appliances, for piping to compressed gas cylinders, and for vacuum breakers and air gaps to prevent siphonage in water piping (ANSI Z21- series, B57.1, A40.6 and A40.4). E. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and check prior to fabrication. Allow for adjustments as required. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all work and new materials in full accordance with all applicable Laws and Regulations including the latest rules and regulations of the California Administrative Code, OSHA, the National Electrical Code, the Uniform Plumbing Code, National Sanitation Foundation and the Santa Clara County Health Department. Nothing in these plans or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to all applicable Laws and Regulations. Furnish material and labor required to comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations, whether shown, specified or not at no addional cost to the Owner. B. NFPA CODES: Comply with "National Electrical Code" and with NFPA No. 96 for exhaust system equipment. 1.05 GUARANTEES A. All equipment and fixtures furnished by the Equipment Sub - contractor shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against defects in materials and workmanship. During the first year after the date of final acceptance of the Work, Contractor shall cause repairs of such defects to be made by the Equipment Sub - contractor within 72 hours of notification of the defect, at a time satisfactory to the Owner, at no cost to the Owner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each item; include rough -in dimensions, service connections, performances, power /fuel requirements, water /drainage requirements and similar information. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings, including plans, elevations, sections and details of custom - fabricated units and of assembled units made up of manufactured ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -2 W, O equipment. Show required plumbing, gas and electrical services by size and location. Include field measurements. The equipment contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the outlets in connection with his work. If any discrepancies exist between the Drawings and the verified field dimensions, the equipment contractor shall report same to the General Contractor and shall not proceed with the portion of work in question until discrepancies are clarified in writing. C. Samples of exposed finishes for custom - fabricated work: 8 inch squares of materials and 12 inch lengths of running members and trim. For manufactured items, submit samples of full range available. D. Maintenance Manuals: Bound manual for maintenance of operative food service equipment items. For each item, include operating and cleaning/maintenance instructions, parts listing, recommended parts inventory listing, purchase source listing, copy of warranties, and similar applicable information. 1.07 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. All fixed equipment (non - mobile, non - portable) furnished, installed and/or reinstalled under this section shall be provided with Zone 4 seismic restraints as required by code. All fixed equipment shall be lagged to the floor, or otherwise secured to structural partitions and/or framing in a manner to suit these requirements. Attachments shall be arranged and sized to avoid penetration through waterproof membranes. Where equipment is mounted on leg supports with or without adjustable feet, the supports shall be continuously welded to stainless steel floor flanges, 4 -inch thick, with full perimeter 45 -degree bevel, bolted and sealed to the floor. Unless otherwise specified, flanges shall measure 2 -1/2 to 3- inches in diameter minimum overall. 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metals: 1. Stainless Steel: ANSI Type 302 formula 18 -8, hardest workable temper, No 4 directional polish. U.S. Standard gauges as indicated. 2. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569 hot -rolled carbon steel. 3. Steel Structural Members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless stainless steel is indicated. B. Joint Materials: 1. General: All joint materials used in the kitchen area shall be non - toxic. 2. Sealants: 1 -part or 2 -part, polyurethane or silicone based, liquid elastomeric sealant, FS TT-S -00277 or FS- TT- S- 00230, non - solvent - release type, mildew- resistant, Shore A hardness of 30, except 45 if subject to traffic or similar abuse. Install as detailed or as specifically approved by Building Inspector. 3. Backer Rod: Polyethylene rod stock, larger than joint width. 4. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (but not cellular) neoprene or polyvinyl chloride; light grey, minimum of 40 Shore A hardness,self- adhesive or prepared for either adhesive application or mechanical anchorage. C. Paint and Coatings: 1. General: Provide types of painting and coating materials which, after drying, setting or curing, are suitable for use in conjunction with food service, and which are ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -3 0 durable, nontoxic, non - dusting, non - flaking, mildew resistant and comply with governing regulations and NSF recommendations for food service. 2. Special Coating: Where indicated in equipment listing as "Special Coating," provide Powdered epoxy or epoxy - polyester type thermosetting coating of 2.0 mils thickness. 3. Sound Deadening: Heavy - bodied resinous coating, filled with granulated cork or other resilient material, compounded for permanent, non - flaking adhesion to metal in a 1/8 inch thick coating. 2.02. FABRICATED PRODUCTS A. Casters: 1. General: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by caster manufacturer for type and weight of equipment supported; but not less than 5 inch diameter with 15/16 inch tread width, with sealed self - lubricating ball bearings,cadmium - plated steel disc wheels and solid light -grey synthetic rubber tires. Provide stainless steel horns and accessories. Unless otherwise indicated, equip each item with two swivel -type casters and two fixed casters, and provide foot brakes on two casters. 2. Caster Bumpers: Unless equipment item is equipped with another form of all- around protective bumper provide circular rotating bumper above each caster, 5 inch diameter tire or light grey synthetic rubber (hollow or closed -cell) on cadmium - plated disc. B. Plumbing Fittings, Trim and Accessories: 1. General: Where exposed or semi - exposed, provide bright chrome - plated brass or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. See Division 15 for additional information. 2. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with food service equipment where required by governing regulations, including locations where water outlets are equipped for hose attachment. 3. Waste Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide 2 inch remote -lever waste valve on sinks, with connected overflow. Provide stainless steel strap lever handle support to underside of sink. 4. Floor Sinks: Square, cast iron body with dome strainer, epoxy coated interior, 1/2 nickel bronze grate, manufactured by J.R. Smith, Fig. 3004- NB -12. a. Other acceptable manufacturers: 1) Zurn. 2) Josam. 3) Wade. 4) Accepted equal. D. Electrical Materials: 1. General: Provide standard materials, devices and components as recommended by manufacturer /fabricator, selected and installed in accordance with NEMA standards and recommendations, and as required for safe and efficient use and operation of food service equipment without objectionable noise, vibration and sanitation problems. 2. Connections: Equip each item requiring electrical power with either a terminal box for permanent connection or cord and plug for interruptible connection, as indicated. Provide standard light grey grounded -type plug- and -cord units, matching outlets specified in Division 16.. 3. Nameplates: Where possible, locate nameplates and labels on manufactured items in accessible position, but not within customer's normal view. Do not apply nameplates or labels on custom - fabricated work, except as required for compliance with all applicable Laws and Regulations insurance requirements or operator performance. @° ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -4 2.03 FABRICATION OF METALWORK A. General Fabrication Requirements: Remove burrs from sheared edges of metal work, ease corners and smooth to eliminate cutting hazard. Bend sheets of metal at not less than a minimum radius required to avoid grain- separation in the metal. Maintain flat, smooth surfaces without damage to finish. Reinforce metal at locations of hardware, anchorages and accessory attachments, where metal is less than 14 gauge or requires mortised application. Conceal reinforcements to greatest extent possible. Weld in place on concealed faces. Seams in stainless steel work shall be jointed by continuous welds. Brackets shall be 14 gauge stainless steel, formed with flanged out top and sides. B Corners: Exposed external corners shall be closed by means consistent with nature of material and made integral. Internal corners formed by intersection of two planes at 90 degrees or less shall have a minimum continuous and smooth radius of 5/8 inch. Where corners are formed by weld material, they shall be ground smooth to a minimum of 1/2 inch radius and represent one -piece construction. C. Body Construction: Sheet metal bodies and frames shall be fabricated of formed metal construction with faces of shelves, bulkheads and reinforcing members formed and welded into a integral part of the body 18 gauge stainless steel construction. D. Metal Counter Tops: All metal tops shall be one piece welded construction of 16 gauge stainless steel reinforced on the underside with 14 gauge stainless steel hat sections welded in place so tops will support a minimum of 200 pounds per square foot without deflection. Provide sound- deadening at all metal counter tops. E. Fasteners: Where fasteners are permitted, provide Phillips head, flat or oval head machine screws. Cap threads with acorn nuts unless fully concealed in inaccessible construction; provide nuts and lock washers unless metal for tapping is at least 12 gauge. Match fastener head finish with finish of metal fastened. F . Galvanizing: Where components of fabricated metal work are indicated to be galvanized and involve welding or machining of metal heavier than 16 gauge, complete the fabrication and provide hot -dip galvanizing of each component after fabrication, to greatest extent possible (depending upon available dip -tank sizes) comply with ASTM A123. G. Venting: Where vents are required for enclosed spaces, or for cabinet enclosures, provide removable stainless steel insect screens of 18 x 18 mesh. Locate vents to avoid moisture penetration during cleaning of equipment. H. Access Panels: Provide removable metal panels for access to mechanical and electrical service connections which are concealed behind or within food service equipment, but only where access is not possible and not indicated through other work. I . Internal Wiring of Fixtures and Equipment: Fixtures fabricator shall provide and locate junction boxes and conduits wherever access is not available for the electrical contractor to run his lines from junction boxes to end usage in fixture. The kitchen metal contractor shall supply and install suitable conduits for running these lines. Work shall be done in accordance with all applicable Laws and Regulations and satisfactory to parties having jurisdiction thereof. ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -5 J. Enclosures: Provide enclosures, including panels, housings and skirts for service lines, operating components and mechanical and electrical devices associated with food service equipment, except as specifically indicated or otherwise required to be open. K. Legs: Shall be 1 -5/8 inch o.d. 16 gage stainless steel tubing unless otherwise specified. The stainless steel gusset shall be welded to the underside of the countertop framing or at the bottom of an enclosed cabinet unit, complete with a 14 gauge stainless steel channel, whichever is the case, and fastened with a flush set -screw locking device. These legs shall not be spaced more than 48 inches on center. The legs to have longitudinal and cross braces of 1 inch 16 gauge stainless steel tubing where shown. Joints to be closely fitted, welded and ground smooth and polished to a finish to match with stainless steel tubing. Legs to be provided with sanitary type stainless steel adjustable foot. Where it is not practical to have longitudinal or cross bracing, leg will then be pinned to the floor with stainless steel pins. L. Stainless Steel Sheets: Grain of stainless steel sheets in same plane of equipment item shall run in same direction. M. Shelves: Except, as otherwise indicated, provide adjustable standards for positioning and support of shelves. Turn back -edge of shelf units up 2 inches and hem. Turn other edges down to form open channel. Reinforce shelf units to support 40 pounds per square foot loading, plus 100 percent impact loading shall be fabricated of 14 or 16 gauge stainless steel and shall be provided with coved back splash where shown on Drawings. Edges that are turned down shall be flanged back and finished so there is no danger of laceration or cutting when hand is drawn over edges. Where miters or bullnosed corners occur,they shall be welded and ground smooth. N. Support From Floor: Equip floor - supported mobile units with casters, and equip items indicated as "roll -out" units with manufacturer's standard one - directional rollers. Except for "closed- base" units, provide tubular stainless steel legs with adjustable bullet - design feet for floor supported items of fabricated metal work. 2.04 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS A. General: Where an item is indicated as "fabricated" it shall comply with standards Ott previously described and to the dimensions and design as indicated in the drawings. Where a manufacturer's name and model number is indicated, it shall mean that the item shall be equal to, or better than, the model specified and all standard materials, components, features and accessories provided for that model, whether specifically delineated or not, shall be considered inherent in the specifications. B . Manufacturers' Name Plates: Each piece of equipment shall have permanently fastened to it a manufacturer's name plate with model number, serial number, date of manufacture and utility characteristics. C. Itemized Equipment Specification: The following numbered equipment schedule relates to the equipment numbers provided on the Drawings: 1. Item 1 - New Mop Sink: a. Manufacturer: Stern- Williams, model number SBC -1500, Cornaro. Other acceptable manufacturers are Fiat or accepted equal. b. Type: Molded stone floor mounted with integral stainless steel cap and stainless low steel strainer. c. Size: 24 "x24 "x12" high. d. Trim: Reuse existing wall mounted faucet. ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -6 2. Item 2 - Refrigerator base under existing char - broiler. To be removed, cleaned and reinstalled after new stainless steel wall lining (Item 11) is installed. Rework connections and drains as required by work and to meet codes. 3. Item 3 - Existing Plastic Laminate Service Station: To be cleaned and remain. 4. Item 4 - Existing Shelving: To be removed, cleaned and reinstalled after new stainless steel wall lining (Item 11) is installed. 5. Item 5 - New Shelving: a. Manufacturer: Metro Shelving by Inter Metro Industries Corp., or accepted equal. b. Type: Wall Mounted Electra Wire Shelving. c. Size: 12" x 96" d. Finish: Stainless Steel. 6. Item 6 - Not Used. 7. Item 7 - Existing Stainless Steel Shelving: To be removed, cleaned and reinstalled. 8. Item 8 - Existing Warming Lamps - To be removed, cleaned and reinstalled. a. Manufacturer: Hatco. b Rework wiring as required to comply with codes. 9. Item 9 - Existing Stainless Steel Sandwich Table with refrigerated base: To be removed, steam cleaned and reinstalled. a. Manufacturer: Delfield. 10. Item 10 - Existing Stainless Steel Prep. Table: To be removed, cleaned and reinstalled. 11. Item 11 - New Wall Lining: Provide stainless steel wall lining from to of new epoxy base to bottom of existing galvanized hood as indicated. 12. Item 12 - Existing Blower, Motor and Ductwork: To be cleaned. a. The exhaust fans and make -up air have been tested by the Santa Clara County Health Department for adequate amounts of air as required by code and have been shown to meet the those requirements. Any work in this area which may affect air supply will necessitate that the Contractor retest the unit and make any adjustments required to meet code. b. Replace existing mesh filters with code compliant baffle filters. 13. Item 13 - Existing Gas Restaurant Range: To be removed, cleaned and reinstalled. a. Manufacturer: Wolf. 14. Item 14 - Existing Salamander: To be removed, cleaned and reinstalled. a. Manufacturer: Wolf 15. Item 15 - Existing Char Broiler: To be removed 16. Item 16 - Existing Fryer: To be removed, cleaned and and reinstalledd. a. Manufacturer: Pitco. 17. Item 17 - Existing Steam Kettle: To be cleaned and relocated under hood. a. Manufacturer: Groen. 18. Item 18 - Existing Ansul Fire Protection system: a. Remove wall mounted piping to location of char- broiler to be removed (Item 15). b. Rework remaining piping to be held a minimum of 1 inch away from surfaces for cleaning. c. Refurbish system as required to meet codes. d. Contractor shall arrnage to have system tested and shall adjust sytem as required to meet codes. 19. Item 19 - Existing Stainless Steel Prep. Sink and Counter: To be cleaned. a. Rework drain to existing floor sink as required by code. b. Relocate as required to install new fiberglass reinforced panels on wall behind unit. ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -7 20. Item 20 - Existing Stainless Steel Prep. Table: To be removed, cleaned and reinstalled a. Relocate as required to install new fiberglass reinforced panels (FRP) on wall behind unit. 21. Item 21 - New Shelving: a. Manufacturer: Metro Shelving by Inter Metro Industries Corp. b. Type: Super - Electra Wire Shelving. c. Size: 12" x approximately 120 ", as required to replace existing wall mounted, wood shelf over Items 16 and 17 (verify length in filed). d. Finish: Stainless steel. 22. Item 22 - Existing Walk -In Refrigerator / Freezer: Remove shelving (Items 24), steam clean exterior and interior. a. Rework existing drain lines to floor sinks as required to meet code. b. Rework existing electrical conduit t interior and on exterior as required to be held 1 inch away from surfaces for cleaning as required by code. c. Refurish existing refrigeration units as required. 23. Item 23 -Not Used. 24. Item 24 - Not Used. 25. Item 25 - Not Used. 26. Item 26 - New Metal Shelving for Refrigerator: a. Manufacturer: Metro Shelving by Inter Metro Industries Corp., or accepted equal. b. Type: Super - Electra Wire Shelving. c. Size: 18" x approximately 84 ", as required to replace existing shelving in refrigerator (Item 24) (verify length in field), 5 tiers high. First shelf shall be a minimum of 6" above the floor. d. Finish: Stainless Steel. 27. Item 27 - New Metal Shelving for Refrigerator / Freezer: a. Manufacturer: Metro Shelving by Inter Metro Industries Corp., or accepted equal. b. Type: Super - Electra Wire Shelving. c. Size: 18" x approximately 72 ", as required to replace existing shelving in refrigerator / freezer (verify length in field), 5 tiers high. First shelf shall be a minimum of 6" above the floor. d. Finish: Stainless Steel. 28. Item 28 - Existing Wire Shelving: Remove, steam clean and reinstall. 29. Item 29 - Existing Wire Shelving: Remove, steam clean and reinstall. 30. Item 30 - Existing Stainless Steel Hand Sink: To be steam cleaned and remain. . a. Rework existing drain to floor sink as required to comply with codes. b. Install paper towel dispenser on wall above sink. c. Relocate as required to install new fiberglass reinforced panels on wall behind 31. Item 31 - Existing, Vinyl- Coated Wire Shelving: Remove, clean and reinstall. 32. Item 32 - New Dishwasher: Not in Contract. a. Manufacturer: Jackson/Alco. b. Type: Conserver 1. 33. Item 33 - Existing Pot Sink: To remain and be cleaned Relocate and/or rework trim as required by work. a. Rework existing drain to floor sink as required to comply with codes. 34. Item 34 - Existing Clean Dish Table. To remain and be cleaned Relocate and/or rework trim as required by work. 35. Item 35 - Existing Soiled Dishtable with Sink and Pre -rinse Unit: To remain and be cleaned a. Relocate and/or rework trim as required by work. b. Rework existing drain to floor sink as required to comply with codes. ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -8 12 No 36. Item 36 - New Wire Shelves: a. Manufacturer: Metro Shelving by Inter Metro Industries Corp., or accepted equal. b. Type: Wall Mounted Electra Wire Shelving. c. Size: "L" shaped, 12" x approximately 192 ", as required to replace existing wood shelves. d. Repair holes in fiberglass reinforced panels (FRP) as required due to removing existing wood shelving. 37. Item 37 - Existing Service Station: To remain. Clean unit, fill cut -outs in sides and install new plastic laminate, to match existing, on exposed sides. 38. Item 38 - Existing Stainless Steel Pastry Case: To remain, clean and rework electrical connections as required to meet codes. 39. Item 39 - Existing Stainless Steel Plate Warmer: To remain, clean and rework electrical connections as required to meet codes. 40 Item 40 - Existing ice cream freezer: To remain, clean and rework electrical connections as required to meet codes. a. Provide new floor sink and drain unit as required by code. 41. Item 41- Existing Stainless Steel Sandwich Table with Reach -In Refrigerator below: Remove, clean and reinstall as indicated. 42. Item 42 - Existing Tray Racks: To be cleaned and remain. 43. New Ice Machine - Not in Contract. 44. Wire Shelving over Janitor's Sink: a. Manufacturer: Wall Mounted Metro Shelving by Inter Metro Industries Corp., or accepted equal. b. Type: Wall Mounted Electra Wire Shelving. c. Size: 12" x 96 "" d. Finish: Stainless Steel. 45. Stainless Steel Pre. Table: Remove, steam clean and reinstall as indicated. 46. Convection Oven: Remove, clean and reinstall. a. Rework gas line as required 47. Stainless Steel Counter at Range: Remove, clean and reinstall. •' JIB IONI 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify than conditions are satisfactory for commencemnt of the Work of this Section. Do not begin the work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All equipment and fixtures shall be delivered and installed on schedule. Store as per manufacturer's recommendations. Whenever possible, work shall be fabricated and finished in the shop and delivered complete to the job site ready to set in place. B. Coordination and Cooperation: The various equipment suppliers shall coordinate their work with each other in such a manner as to avoid delays, misunderstandings and disagreements, and shall arrange and execute their work in such a manner and times as will cause the least possible interruption and obstruction to such work of others. C. Inspection and Preparation: 1. Rough -In Work: Installer of food service equipment must examine roughed -in mechanical and electrical services, and installation of floors, walls, and ceilings, and ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -9 La Em conditions under which the work is to be installed and must verify dimensions of services and substrate before fabricating the work. Notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory locations and dimensions of other work, and of unsatisfactory conditions for proper installation of food service equipment. Do not proceed with fabrication and installation until unsatisfactory dimensions and conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. Equipment contractor shall check openings and passages so as not to build items too large for entry. 2. Cutting and Fitting: The equipment contractor shall cooperate with other trades in fitting his work to their work. Any cutting shall be borne by the equipment contractor. Cut all holes in equipment or fixtures for pipes, drains, conduit, etc.as required for their installation. D. Field Quality Control: In the event the specifications require materials of greater weight, quality, etc., the specifications shall apply. Tests of the installed equipment shall be required. Defects or deficiencies noted as a result of tests must be corrected to the complete satisfaction of the Architect at the expense of the Contractor. E. Tests: 1. New and existing water and steam lines shall be tested and sanitized as required by code. 2. Test each item of operational equipment to demonstrate that it is operating properly, and that controls and safety devices are functioning. Repair or replace equipment which is found to be defective in its operation, including units which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper operation and maintenance procedures for each item of operational food service equipment. F . Installation: 1. Gas and Water Service Lines and Equipment Connections: Comply with applicable requirements of Division 15 sections for piping connections and piping systems. All new piping located on the face of the wall shall be enclosed in a gypsum board finished chase. Chase shall be finished as required for adjacent wall surfaces, including installation of fiberglass reinforced panels where required. 2. Electrical Lines and Conduit: Comply with applicable requirements of Division 16 sections for electrical work including equipment connections. 3. Seismic Restraint: Set each item of non - mobile and non - portable equipment securely in place, leveled and adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages where possible. 4. Tolerances: Adjust counter tops and other work surfaces to a level tolerance of 1/16 inch maximum offset and maximum variation from level or indicated slope of 1/16 inch per foot. 5. Assembly: Complete field assembly joints in the work (joints which cannot be completed in shop) by welding as indicated. Grind welds smooth and restore finish. Treat enclosed spaces (inaccessible after equipment installation) by covering horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 ounces per square foot. Install closure plates and strips where required with joints coordinated with units of equipment. Install sealants and gaskets all around each unit to make joints air -tight, waterproof, vermin -proof and sanitary. 6. Sealant: In general, make sealed joints not less than 1/8 inch wide, and stuff with backer rod to shape sealant bead properly at 1/2 inch depth. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave, with edges flush with faces of materials at joint. At internal -corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove of not less than 3/8 inch radius. Provide sealant -filled or gasketed joints with sealant application each ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -10 W, side of strips. Anchor gaskets mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement. G. Cleaning and Restoring Finishes: 1. After completion of installation, and completion of other major work in food service areas, remove protective coverings, if any, and clean food service equipment, internally and externally. 2. Restore exposed and semi - exposed finishes to remove abrasions and other damages; polish exposed -metal surfaces and touch -up painted surfaces. Replace work which cannot be successfully restored. 3. Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, and before the time of substantial completion, clean and sanitize food service equipment and leave in condition ready for use in food service. I. Adjusting: Provide a competent representative to be present when installation is complete and ready to be put in operation and to instruct Owner's employees in the proper use and maintenance of items and to set up a maintenance schedule. J . Repair damage done to the premises as a result of the installation of equipment and fixtures. K. Cleaning: Fixtures and equipment shall be cleaned of all cosmoline and any materials used by the manufacturers to preserve finish of equipment during shipment. L. Completion: During and upon completion of work, remove excess materials, rubbish and debris from site. Prior to submitting final request for payment, submit three complete maintenance binders listing all the parts schedules of each piece of mechanical or power type equipment used on this project as part of the Work of this Section. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 -11 SECTION 12500 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS UPHOLSTERY A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing fabric and upholstery for existing banquettes in Dining Room. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabric shall meet the fire- resistant qualities required by the local Fire Marshal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of specified fabric for Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect upholstered furniture during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver upholstered furniture until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations have been completed in installation areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fabric: Orion, 70% Nylon, 30% Polyester, Style No. 1564. 1. Manufacturer: Design Tex. 56 -08 37th Ave. Woodside, N.Y. 11377 Telephone: (718) 335 -9000. 2. Color: Cinnamon, No. 701. 3. Width: 54 inches. E. Fabric shall be treated with flame - proofing as required by the local Fire Marshal and the County Health Department. ARG: 89119 UPHOLSTERY 12500 -1 La LA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of upholstery. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence with installation work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Remove existing fabric from banquettes scheduled to be reused and reupholster with new fabric. Details and appearance of upholstery shall match existing. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. B . Protection: Installer shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintenance conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. C. Contractor shall provide maintenance instructions for fabric to the Owner as part of Close -Out procedures END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 UPHOLSTERY 12500 -2 SECTION 12501 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS DRAPERY A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing drapes at the Auditorium Windows. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabric shall meet the fire- resistant qualities required by the local Fire Marshal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of specified drapery and lining fabric for Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect drapes during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver drapes until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations have been completed in installation areas. 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fabric: 100% Cotton Velvet. 1. Manufacturer: Peacock/ Chapman Enterprises. 200 Kansas Street San Francisco, Ca 94103 2. Color: No. 287. Telephone: (415) 255 -6011. 3. Width: 54 inches. B. Lining: Medium weight black -out fabric. C. Fullness: Match Existing. ARG: 89119 DRAPERY 12501 -1 D. Hems: 1. Bottom: 3 inches. 2. Sides: 1 inch. E. Pleats: Match existing. F. Hardware: Reuse existing hardware to the greatest extent possible. New hardware, if required, shall match existing. G. Window size: Contractor shall verify all dimensions prior to fabricating drapes. H. Fabric shall meet the flame retardent requirments of the local Fire Marshal and the County Health Department. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of drapes. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence with installation work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Fabricate drapes as indicated, as recommended by fabric manufacturer, per industry standards, and as required to match existing drapes. B. Install hardware plumb, level, and true to existing windows as recommended by manufacturer and as required to match existing. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. B. Protection: Installer shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintenance conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration -at time of acceptance. C. Contractor shall provide maintenance instructions for fabric to the Owner as part of Close -Out procedures END OF SECTION Q 0 ARG:89119 DRAPERY 12501 -2 ow SECTION 14212 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Temporary Facilities: Section 01510. 2. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100. 3. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03200. 4. Concrete: Section 03300. 5. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 6. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 7. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 8. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 9. Carpet: Section 09680. 10. Painting: Section 09900. 11. Section 1600: Electrical. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B. Work of this section includes all labor, materials, plant, appliances, tools, transportation and equipment required to install a hydraulic elevator, complete, as shown and specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintenance Qualifications: Maintenance shall be performed in a first class manner, by manufacturer installing elevators throughout the Correction Period, at no additional cost to Owner. Maintenance Provider shall: 1. Show evidence of successful experience in complete maintenance of elevators. 2. Employ sufficient competent personnel to handle service. 3. Have in stock a store of parts adequate for replacement on permanent or emergency basis. 4. Be able to respond to trouble calls within three hours. 5. Offer Owner agreement for continuing maintenance after expiration of Correction Period under this Contract. B. Design Criteria 1. Operating Qualities: Architect and Owner shall judge riding qualities of cars and enforce the following requirements. ARG: 89119 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14212 -1 2. Elevator Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments. a. Transition: Starting and stopping shall be smooth and comfortable. b. Slowdown, stopping, and leveling shall be without jars or bumps. c. Full Speed: Riding shall be free from vibration and sway. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Codes: Material and workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest applicable edition requirements with amendments of the following and as specified. a. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (ANSI/ASME A17.1). b. CAC: Titles 8 and 24; California Administrative Code. 2. Permits: Upon completion of Work of this Section, arrange and pay for inspections by governing authorities and obtain operating permits required for the lawful operation and use of elevators by Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 1340. B . Samples: Provide samples of materials and finishes exposed to public view, 6" X 6" panels, 12" lengths, or full size if smaller. C. Operating Instructions: Submit manufacturer's literature describing system operations and special operations as specified. D. Maintenance Data: Prior to submitting final application for payment, submit three sets of complete and accurate maintenance data specific for elevator as specified in Section 01700. Final payment will not be made until received. 1. Manuals: Describe proper use and maintenance of equipment, lubrication points, types of lubricants used and frequency of lubricant application. 2. Parts Catalogs: Complete listing of all parts of equipment and components used in the installation. 3. Wiring Diagrams: One set mounted on hard -board wall rack and protected under clear plastic in machine room, one reproducible mylar set and one blueline set delivered to Owner. Wiring diagrams shall be as built, specific for this installation, and reference identification on drawings shall match points identified on terminals or controllers. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR A. Manufacturer: Dover Elevator Company, or approved equal. B . Description of Equipment: 1. Model: Fleetwood 21 -H. 2 Control: Oildraulic Controller. 3. Capacity: 21001bs. 4. Speed: 100 F.P.M. 5. Operation: Single -car. 6. Car Size: 5' -8" wide, 4' -3" deep La ARG: 89119 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14212 -2 ap 7. Travel: 12' -0 " +/- (verify infield). 8. Power Supply: 3 phase, 60 hertz. 9. Machine Location: Remote, on level of lowest landing. 10. Stops: Two (2). 11. Openings: Two (2). 12.. Doors: a. Hoistway 1) Size: T -0" wide X T -0 high 2) Type: Single Slide. 3) Finish: Brushed Bronze. b. Car: 1) Size: Y -0" wide X T -0 high 2) Type: Single Slide. 3) Finish: Manufacturer's standard brushed bronze. a Door Operation: Microprocessor controlled, direct current powered. d Sill: Bronze anodized extruded aluminium. 13. Walls: a. Side and Back walls: Manufacturer's standard Vertical Panels finished with plastic laminate 1) Color as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors. 2) Expsed surface behind panel shall be Manufacturer's standard brushed bronze. b. Front Wall: Manufacturer's standard brushed bronze. c Handrail: Manufacturer's standard brushed bronze cylindrical metal. d Accessories: Pad Hooks 14. Canopy: Manufacturer's standard brushed bronze. 15. Lighting: Manufacturer's Standard Downlight. 16 Signals: a. Manufacturer's standard illuminated pushbuttons in car and at hall stations. b. Manufacturer's standard illuminated car riding lantern d. Manufacturer's standard Impulse Signal Fixtures. 17. Special Features: a. Seismic bracing as required by local and state codes. b. Braille/Raised Arabics as required by Title 24. c. Fireman's Control Phase I d. Steel and PVC Casing. e. Electronic Door Sensing Device PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify than conditions are satisfactory for commencemnt of the Work of this Section. Do not begin the work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ARG: 89119 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14212 -3 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field verify dimensions before proceeding with the work. Coordinate related work by other trades as required. B. Verify that hoistway has been correctly sized and otherwise properly prepared, rail bracket and sill supports are installed correctly, and electrical rough -ins are correct. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install elevator as recommended by manufacturer, meeting all requirements of state and local agencies. 3.03 TESTING A. Upon completion of elevators, the Contractor shall provide instruments, weights and personnel to conduct the following tests, which shall be witnessed by the Architect. The Contractor shall submit a complete report describing the results of the tests. 1. Performance and leveling tests, empty and fully loaded car. 2. Overload test with 125 percent of load in car per ANSI Code. 3. Check and verify operation of all safety features, particularly: a. Fire service b. Emergency power operation. c. Door pressure and impact. B . Inspection: Assist Owner in making a walk - through inspection of entire installation to assure workmanship and equipment complies with Contract Documents. C. Correction: Make corrections to defects or discrepancies at no cost to Owner. 3.04 INSTRUCTIONS A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use of each system. END OF SECTION Ea w, ARG: 89119 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14212 -4 A SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 3. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 4. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 5. Built -up Roofing: Section 07510 6. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 7. Access Doors: Section 08305 8. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 9. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 10. Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . This section describes the basic requirements for all minor alterations to existing heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) system required to repair damage and by the Work. The Work of this section includes, but may not be limited to: 1. Relocation, repair and/or replacement of existing duct work as required. 2. Cleaning of existing ductwork. 3. Relocation, repair and/or replacement of existing piping for HVAC system as required. 4. Relocation, repair and/or replacement of existing mechanical units as required 5. Refurbishing of existing furnace as required. 6. Installation of exhaust systems at new Toilet Rooms. 1.03 DESIGN WORK BY CONTRACTOR A. The Work shall include design of required modifications to existing systems. B . The Contractor's design shall conform to the following Design Requirements: 1. Applicable all applicable Laws and Regulations as interpreted by governing authorities. 2. Industry standards. 3. Manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. 4. Construction Documents (Drawings and Sspecifications). C. Where conflicts occur in the Design Requirements, comply with the higher or more restrictive standards, as applicable. ARG: 89119 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15050 -1 0 U D. Provide calculations as required. 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 01010 "Summary of Work ". B. Prior to beginning work Contractor shall make a close -up inspection of all existing mechanical equipment to evaluate condition of equipment and requirements of Work. C. After close -up inspection and evaluation of all equipment, meet with the Architect and Owner's Representative to review proposed repair /replacement scope of work. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, and regulatory requirements. B . Regulatory requirements shall include the following published specifications, standards, recommended methods, or tests of trade, industry, or governmental organizations: 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC), as adopted and interpreted by the local jurisdictions. 2. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), as adopted and interpreted by the local jurisdictions. 3. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC), as adopted and interpreted by the local jurisdictions. 4. Uniform Fire Code (UFC), as adopted and interpreted by the local jurisdictions. 5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards. 6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Standards. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes as interpreted by the City of Gilroy. 8. State of California Administrative Code, Title 24, Energy Standards. 1.06 FEES, PERMITS, AND UTILITY SERVICES A. Obtain and pay for all plan reviews, permits, and utility service charges. B. Arrange for required inspections and obtain approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Comply with all requirements of utility companies. 1.07 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. All products shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in its manufacture. B. All new products shall be unused and free from defects. C. Where a particular manufacturer's product is specified, it is not intended to discriminate against other manufacturers, whose products are equal in quality of material, workmanship, appearance, maintenance service, and function. The intent is to establish the level of standard for that product. D. Open competition is encouraged; however, as specified in Section 01600 "Products and Substitutions ", the responsibility and burden of proving that a product is equal shall ARG: 89119 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15050 -2 belong to the Contractor. The final decision as to whether a product is equal and acceptable shall belong to the Architect. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340. B . Submit Shop Drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories into a single submittal. C. Clearly mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. D. Prior to providing the submittals, verify product delivery dates and that such dates are acceptable to meet the project construction schedule. E. Provide Shop Drawings: 1. Show all new equipment, piping, and ducting drawn to scale with dimensions. Use double lines for ducts. 2. Indicate pipe and duct sizes. 3. Indicate locations of transitions, flex connections, volume dampers, fire dampers, air registers, grilles, valves, supports, and other such items. 4. Use not less than 1/4 -inch scale for overall floor plans. 5. Use not less than 1/2 -inch scale for equipment rooms and details. 1.09 JOB CONDITIONS A. Work shall be performed in existing structure. B . Prior to bid, investigate existing conditions. C. Modify work as required to best fit site conditions. Prepare Shop Drawings showing proposed arrangement of work to meet site conditions, including any changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain approval of Architect before proceeding. E. Changes due to project site conditions shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.10 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background color. Install with adhesive. B . Plastic Tags: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background color, minimum 1 -1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter. Install with corrosion resistant metal chain. C. Manufactured by Seton. D. Identification colors shall conform to Owner's requirements. E. Provide for all equipment, valves, and piping. ARG: 89119 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15050 -3 1. 12 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide record drawings in accordance with Section 01700. 1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide operating and maintenance information in accordance with Section 01730. B. Required for all new mechanical equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15050 -4 13 SECTION 15400 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PLUMBING A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete: Section 03300. 2. Metal Fabrications: Section 05500. 3. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 4. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 5. Built -up Roofing: Section 07510 6. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600. 7. Access Doors: Section 08305 8. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 9. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 10 Painting: Section 09900. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . This section describes the requirements for installation of plumbing at new second floor Toilet Rooms and Staging Kitchen; and all minor alterations to existing pluming in Toilet Rooms, Bars and Kitchen required to repair damage and by the Work. The Work of this section includes, but may not be limited to: 1. Pipe, valves and pipe fittings. 2. Plumbing Specialties: Floor drains, cleanouts, backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors, hose bibs/hydrants. 3. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 4. Plumbing equipment. 5. Minor alterations of supply lines for soft drink machines in Wine Cellar and at Bar. C. The intent of this Section and plumbing work shown on Drawings is to provide performance requirements. The Contractor shall design and build the plumbing system in conformance with these requirements, all applicable Laws and Regulations and all industry standards. D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required for a complete plumbing system. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required fittings, traps, valves, and accessories to meet such conditions. ARG: 89119 PLUMBING 15400 -1 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. As specified in Section 01010 "Summary of Work ". B. Examination of Premises: Before bidding on this work, Contractor shall make a careful examination of the premises and any existing work and shall become thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the Contract. 1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Backflow Prevention: No apparatus, fixture, device or construction shall be installed which will provide a cross - connection permitting any back -flow or syphonage from any source into the domestic water supply system. Wherever required, provide and install the necessary, approved anti-back syphonage valves or vacuum breakers. B . Quietness of Operation: Before the work will be accepted as complete, quietness of operation, to a degree of satisfaction to the Architect, shall be attained for all apparatus, equipment, fixtures, etc., included under the plumbing work. Provide all isolation and vibration protection required. C. Identification of Materials: Provide identification of parts, controls, valves, etc., instructions to operators and service manuals. Apply A.N.S.I. approved pipe markers indicating product and direction of flow. Markers shall be placed at intersection of branch lines, or at a maximum of 10 feet on centers on straight runs. 1.06 DESIGN WORK BY CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor's work shall include design of the plumbing systems. B. The Contractor's design shall conform to the following Design Requirements: 1. Applicable Laws and Regulations as interpreted by governing authorities. 2. Industry standards. 3. Manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. 4. Construction documents (drawings and specifications). C. Where conflicts occur in the Design Requirements, comply with the higher or more restrictive standards, as applicable. D. Provide design drawings and calculations as required. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 01340. B. Submit design drawings for review by the Architect. Architect shall review drawings for inclusion of equipment and conformance to Contract Documents. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to design and execute a complete, functioning plumbing system. C. Approval of Materials: 1. Within 30 days after award of the Contract, submit six copies of a complete list of materials proposed for the job including all rating and capacity data, sizes, grade, part or catalog numbers, manufacturer's name, pictures or cuts, to the Architect for approval. This list shall include all plumbing fixtures, drains, controls, valves, ARG:89119 PLUMBING 15400 -2 La 0 insulation, cleanouts, access boxes, special equipment or devices and all standard manufactured items. Submittals must be bound in sets, complete. Partial submittals will not be accepted. 2. Fixtures, trim and equipment specified are descriptive of the type, quality and size desired. Substitution of like value items with the same characteristics may be submitted, as specified in Section 01600 "Products and Substitutions ". 3. All such lists must be approved by the Architect before ordering materials or commencing rough -in for them. 1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS A. As required by Section 01700, Close -out Procedure, provide and maintain on the job one complete set of blue line prints of the drawings for plumbing work, label this set Record Drawings . Neatly and carefully draw on this set of prints, in ink, all work, visible and concealed. Locate dimensionally from fixed points. Prior to submitting final application for payment, these Record Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. If record drawings are not kept up to date, the Owner shall be entitled to withhold payment otherwise payable to the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1.09 FEES AND PERMITS A. Contractor shall obtain and pay for any permits required to carry out and complete the Work of this Section. Contractor shall provide any additional drawings required by local authorities for permits. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee of Ratings and Capacities: Guarantee all materials and equipment to deliver the ratings and capacities as herein specified or required for proper operation. MANdWOM03 2.01 PIPING A. Sanitary Sewer, Waste Piping (Buried): Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, hub and spigot joints with neoprene gaskets. B . Sanitary Sewer, Waste Piping (Above Grade): Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight, with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamps. C. Sanitary Sewer Vent Piping: Copper Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, with cast bronze or wrought copper fittings and Grade 50B solder joints. D. Water Piping (Buried): Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, annealed with wrought copper fittings and Grade 95TA (95/5 tin - antimony) solder joints. E. Water Piping (Above Grade): Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, with cast brass or wrought copper fittings and Grade 95TA solder joints. F . Rain Water Piping: 1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight, hub and spigot joints with neoprene gaskets. 2 ABS Pipe: ASTM D2680 with solvent weld joints. ARG: 89119 PLUMBING 15400 -3 M E2 G. Flanges, Union and Couplings: 1. Pipe Size 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under: Malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for soldered copper pipe joints. 2. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Forged steel flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; neoprene gaskets. 3. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing; "C" shape composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 4. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. H. Pipe Hangers: 1. For vertical pipes and horizontal pipes on walls, heavy galvanized steel riser clamps, U strap with cinch anchors set in masonry or concrete steel channels set in concrete. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Fee and Mason. 2) Elcen. 2. For horizontal pipes, other than on walls, shall have adjustable solid rods and rod sockets. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Fee and Mason. 2) Elcen. 3. No power activated fasteners shall be used except for secondary run of small pipe. 4. Hangers shall be separated from pipe by means of steel encased hair felt padded isolator. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Fee and Mason. 2) Elcen. 2.02 VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturer's 1. Crane Co. 2. Hammond Valve Corp. 3. ITT. 4. Jenkins Bros. 5. Milwaukee Valve Co. 6. Mueller Co. 7. NIBCO. 8. Stockham Valves & Fittings B. Gate Valves: 1. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze body, non -rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. 2. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, OS &Y, single wedge, flange or grooved ends. C. Ball Valves: 1. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze or stainless steel body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. 2. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, flange. ARG:89119 PLUMBING 15400 -4 D. Swing Check Valves: 1. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends. 2. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flange ends. E. Water Pressure Reducing Valves: 1. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, double union ends. 2. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flange. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Watts. b Conbraco. c. Approved equal. 2.03 CLEANOUTS A. General: Clean-outs will not be allowed in Dining Room or Auditorium. B. At Toilet Rooms: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel- bronze strainer, square, bronze, scoriated cover. C. At Kitchen: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated cover with gasket, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screws. D. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. J.R. Smith. 2. Zurn. 3. Josam. 4. Wade. 5. Approved equal. 2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non - threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. B. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. 2.05 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. PDI WH -201; precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F ( -73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa) working pressure. B . Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. J.R. Smith, Hydrotrol. 2 Zurn. 3. Approved equal. ARG: 89119 PLUMBING 15400 -5 LM L3 C. Sizes as required and as recommended by manufacturer. 2.06 HOSE BIBS/HYDRANTS A. Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, removable key, and vacuum breaker. B . Lockable, recessed box unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Woodford, Model B24. 2. Approved equal. 2.07 WATER CLOSET A. Standard: 1. Floor mounted, vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated rim, china bolt caps, 1 -1/2" top spud bowl. a. Manufacturer: America Standard. b. Model No. 2221.026 Madera or approved equal. 2 Flush Valve: Sloan 110-3 FQYV Royal, quiet flush valve with vacuum breaker and Sperzel No. 150E. 3. Seat: Solid white plastic, closed front, self - sustaining hinge, brass bolts, with cover, Model 44 manufactured by Olsonite. Other acceptable manufacturers: Bemis, Church. B. Disabled Accessible: I. Floor Mounted, vitreous china, siphon jet, 18" high, elongated rim, china bolt caps, 1 -1/2" top spud bowl. Olsonite #95, Beneke or Church open front white seat with check hinge. a. Manufacturer: American Standard b. Model No: 9469.016 Elongated Cadet for Handicapped. 2. Fitted with Sloan No. 110 -3 Royal quiet flush valve with vacuum breaker and Sperzel, 3. Seat: Solid white plastic, closed front, self - sustaining hinge, brass bolts, with cover, Model 44 manufactured by Olsonite. Other acceptable manufacturers: Bemis, Church. 2.08 URINAL A. Wall Mounted, vitreous china siphon jet, with integral extended shields, flushing rim integral trap, 1 -1/4" top spud, 2" I.P.S. female outlet connection and supporting bolts. 1. Manufacturer: American Standard. 2. Model No: 6540.017 Allbrook 3. Mount unit at accessible height as required by Title 24. B. Flush Valve: Sloan 180 Royal flush valve with vacuum breaker. 1. Mount unit at accessible height as required by Title 24. La ARG:89119 PLUMBING 15400 -6 2.09 LAVATORY A. Lavatory: Vitreous china, wall hung lavatory with drillings on 4 -inch (100 mm) centers, front overflow, splash shields; manufactured by American Standard, Lucerne, Model 0356.027. 1. Mount unit at accessible height as required by Title 24. B. Trim: Chrome plated gooseneck faucet, aerator with 2.5 gpm flow restricter, 4 -inch wrist handles (Model 7516.172, Heritage), grid drain with tailpiece (Model 7723.018), manufactured by American Standard. Other acceptable manufacturers: Kohler, Eljer, Price- Pfister, Delta. 2.10 SINK A. Relocate existing stainless steel counter with integral sink as indicated. Reuse existing fittings and trim making all repairs as required for a complete, functioning installation. 2.11 GREASE INTERCEPTORS A. Epoxy coated fabricated steel, with multi -weir baffle assembly, integral deep seal trap, removable integral flow control, and epoxy coated steel cover with gasket, manufactured by J.R. Smith, model and size as required by equipement loads and recommended by manufacturer. B. Other acceptable manufacturers: 1. Zurn. 2 Josam. 3. Wade. 4. Approved equal. i 1!y • 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of plumbing. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. Installation of rough -in work constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for the ultimate work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside of piping before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Coordinate cutting of existing floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. E. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect. F. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation. ARG: 89119 PLUMBING 15400 -7 r G. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough -in work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide minimum 1/2 -inch cold water piping to all plumbing fixtures. Provide minimum 3/4 -inch piping to flush valves. B. Provide minimum 1/2 -inch hot water piping to all fixtures except water closets. C. Provide dielectric connections wherever joining dissimilar metals. D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G . Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. H. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. I. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J . Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. Provide cover plates with type and finish as approved by Architect. K . Install hot and cold water hammer arrestors at end of line to all plumbing fixtures. Install water hammer arrestors complete with isolation valves. Provide access wall panel with type and finish as approved by Architect. L Install each fixture with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons. M Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing,. noise, or overflow. N. Install Back Flow Preventer Valve as indicated. Follow manufacturers recommendations for installation and all requirements of local governing agencies and utility companies. O. Install Grease Inceptor as indicated. Follow manufacturers recommendations for installation and all requirements of local governing agencies and utility companies. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners, and dielectric connections only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of all valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. ARG:89119 PLUMBING 15400 -8 04 C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install ball valves for shut -off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Insulate all new hot water piping in accordance with California Energy Standards, (Title 24 requirements). F. Wrap exposed lavatory hot water piping and drain piping at all toilet rooms and Staging Kitchen as required by Title 24 - Accessibility Standards. 3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). B . Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution. C. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. D. Flush disinfectant from system. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601. 3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Before commencing work, check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage. Connect new fixtures to existing sanitary sewer. B. Connect to existing water service. Provide sleeves in walls for piping to service main, caulked and made watertight. 3.07 SEISMIC DESIGN AND BRACING OF EQUIPMENT A. All prefabricated equipment is to be inspected and constructed in such a manner that all portions, elements, sub - assemblies and/or parts of said equipment and the equipment as a whole, including their attachments, will resist a horizontal load equal to the operating weights of those parts multiplied times .30 and resist a vertical load equal to the operating weights of those parts multiplied times 1. B . Load is to be applied at the center of gravity of the part and to be in any direction horizontally. Design stresses shall be in accordance with the specifications for design of the American Institute of Steel Construction. C. Anchorage, support and/or attachment of said prefabricated equipment and piping to the structure shall resist the same loading as described above. ARG: 89119 PLUMBING 15400 -9 3.08 TESTS A. Piping of the plumbing systems shall be tested as follows: 1. Water Piping: Test piping hydrostatically and make tight under 125 pounds per square inch pressure. 2. Instruments and labor for tests shall be furnished by Contractor. 3.09 CLEAN -UP A. Thoroughly clean all materials, equipment, fixtures and appliances. Clean and prepare all surfaces to be painted. Clean the entire premises of unused material and debris, spots, and marks to the satisfaction of the Architect. Remove, thoroughly clean and replace all fluid strainers after the system has been in operation thirty (30) days. END OF SECTION ARG:89119 PLUMBING 15400 -10 SECTION 16400 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ELF M- TC'AT A. All provisions of the Contract Documents including General and Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections and Drawings, apply to the Work of this section. B . Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 3. Lath and Plaster: Section 09200. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250. 5. Hydraulic Elevator: Section 14212. 6. Basic Mechanical Requirements: Section 15050. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the Work as described on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as may be required elsewhere by the Contract Documents, applicable Laws and Regulations and Site conditions. B . Work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and properly incidental to the complete furnishings and installation of all electrical work as indicated, as herein specified and as required. Work includes, but may not be limited to: 1. Refurbish existing service, panels, outlets, connections, lighting, etc.as required to repair damage, by the Work and as may be required due to the system having been shut down for an extended period of time. 2. Minor alterations to electrical connection at mechanical equipment as required by work. 3. Minor alterations to wiring, switches, outlets and lighting required by Work. 3. All electrical work associated with the installation of new hydraulic elevator. 4. Installation of new wiring, lighting switches and outlets as new second floor Toilet Rooms and Staging Kitchen. 5. Support systems for electrical equipment. 6. Modification of conduit switches and outlets at existing Commercial Kitchen and in Bar areas as required by Work and to meeet all applicable Laws and Regulations of the Santa Clara County Health Department. 7. Flashing of all conduits where they pierce the roof or other waterproof membranes, and all cutting and patching necessary to complete the work. 8. Test of electrical system. 1.03 DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION A. Drawings are diagrammatic and show general arrangement except where spec if dimensioned. Study Drawings and premises to determine the best methods, exact locations, routing and arrangement for the work. ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -1 B . Install equipment to avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and to keep openings and passageways clear. Keep conduits within furring lines established on the Architectural Drawings unless shown exposed. Provide sleeves and chases where conduits pass through floors or walls. Should additional opening spaces be required, submit location to Architect for approval, and arrange for in time to avoid unnecessary cutting. C. Cooperation among the trades is necessary for proper execution of the work as a whole. Contractor shall bear cost of delay due to unresolved conflicts between trades. Conflicts within the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Architect for clarification before the work is installed. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIRMENTS A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the all applicable Laws and Regulations including the latest rules and regulations of the State Fire Marshal, the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety National Electrical Code, NFPA (Life Safety Code). B . Nothing in the Contract Documents is to construed to permit work not conforming to these Laws and Regulation, and where conflict occurs, the Laws and Regulations shall govern, except where superior work is specified or indicated. Such conflicts shall be brought to the Architect's attention for clarification, prior to the submission of the bid. If minor changes or additions to the work are required by the regulattory agencies after award of the Contract, these changes shall be included at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 PERMITS, FEES AND LICENSES A. Provide, procure and pay all permits, licenses fees, etc., required to carry on and complete this work. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 01340,. C. Submit a complete list of all materials to be used on project, specifying manufacturer, grade, trade name, and catalog number. Any proposed substitutions shall be accompanied by data giving size, capacity, and other pertinent information concerning proposed substitutions. Samples furnished if required by Architect or his representative. Material list shall be complete. Partial list not acceptable. D. Furnish five (5) copies of lighting fixture cuts (in brochure form with indexed flyleaf in front). Where multiple types or catalog numbers are shown on sheets, underline or suitably identify proposed fixtures. 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Examine the site and premises prior to bidding, to determine the conditions under which the work is to be performed. No allowances will be made for extra expense incurred due ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -2 LJ L3 0 to failure to examine the premises or to discover site conditions which affect the work or for lack of coordination with other trades prior to installation of this work. 1.09 CONFERENCE WITH ARCHITECT A. Confer with the Architect to confirm exact locations, mounting heights and arrangements of all finish work prior to roughing in. Minor relocations and rearrangements of the work requested at this time shall be included at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. As required by Section 01700, Close -out Procedure, provide and maintain on the job one complete set of blue line prints of the drawings for plumbing work, label this set "Record Drawings ". Neatly and carefully draw on this set of prints, in ink, all work, visible and concealed. Locate dimensionally from fixed points. Prior to submitting final application for payment, these Record Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. If record drawings are not kept up to date, the Owner shall be entitled to withhold payment otherwise payable to the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1.12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to sumbitting final application for payment the Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of complete installation, servicing and operational instructions, including schematic and wiring diagrams for all systems to the Architect. 1.13 CERTIFICATE AND WARRANTY A. Prior ro submitting final application for payment submit two (2) complete bound sets of manufacturer's certificates, warranty slips, part lists, descriptive brochures and maintenance instructions for all equipment installed; properly tabbed and identified for easy reference to the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. New materials shall be unused and the best quality of their respective kinds for the purpose intended and satisfactory to the Architect. Deliver new materials to the site and store them in unbroken container. Use only one brand, kind and make of materials for each purpose throughout the Work. Brand or trade names are used to set standards of quality. Substitute materials may be submitted following the procedure outlined in Section 01600, Products and Substitutions. B. Materials shall bear Underwriters' Laboratory label except equipment for which UL does not list or provide label service. C. Furnish equipment, materials for any one system by same manufacturer. Such items as lamps, conduit fittings, wire, wiring devices, etc.: same brand throughout project. ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -3 E. Make materials installed outside building weather tight, of design intended for this purpose. Galvanize all ferrous exterior materials or zinc- phosphatized (Bonderized) and baked - enamel coated. 2.02 RACEWAYS A. Conduit - rigid steel as manufactured by Walker, National, Appleton, Triangle, Rome, General Electric, Kaiser or Reynolds Aluminum. Rigid steel: galvanized or sherardized. All fittings threaded. Bends 1 -1/4- inches or larger: factory, running and exposed threads not permitted. Ream all cuts. B . Electric metallic tubing - similar manufacturer as conduit. 2 -inch maximum for telephone or signal race ways. Galvanized or sherardized. Fittings - Duro or Thomas & Betts. Provide connectors with plastic insulated throats. Couplings and connectors sized 3/4- inch and less, set screw, threaded compression; couplings and connectors sizes 1 -inch and above threaded compression type (watertight) only. Ream all cuts. C . Flexible conduit - same manufacturer as conduit. Galvanized steel. Fittings: "Jake" as manufactured by W.F. Curlee Manufacturing Company. D. Liquid tight flexible conduit as manufactured by: American Brass, Sealtight, Type U.A. Fittings: Appleton series "ST" only. E. Coated pipe: Pittsburgh Standard "Plasti- Bond" PVC coated pipe or Scotchkote No. 202 factory applied and fittings. Joints made water -tight with "Plasti- Bond" coating compound. F. Plastic conduit: Krayloy Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride conduit and fittings. Elbows 1- 1/4 inches and above, factory. All joints solvent welded. Provide ground wire for each raceway per N.E.C. Table 25095, except No. 14 minimum. Exposed plastic conduit will not be permitted 2.03 POWER CABLE A. As manufactured by: Okonite, Anaconda, General Electric, General Cable, Simplex or Rome. B. Provide high temperature wires where required by ambient temperature conditions. Type RHH or THHN 90 C stranded used for fixture wire and circuit runs within fixtures. C. Cable size No. 6 and larger, all exterior underground wiring: Type THW or THWN, 600 volt copper. D. All other cable 600 volt size No. 8 and smaller: Type THEN copper. E. MC cable and non - metallic sheath cable (Romex) is acceptable if allowed by local Electrical Inspector. F. All cable No. 6 and larger: stranded. G . Pull wire in empty raceways: Nylon pull cord. 0 C3 ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -4 op a H. Pulling lubricants: "Ideal" - yellow. I. Wires No. 10 and smaller splices with insulated "Scotchloks ". Wires No. 8 and larger with Burndy "Hydent" connectors. J. Tag wiring with Brady "Quick" labels at all pull boxes, junction boxes and panel boards. K. Color code all wire as follows: Phase 120/208 Volt is em A ,y Black B Red C Blue Neutral White All Ground Wires Green 2.04 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES A. As manufactured by Steel City, Pyle National, Appleton, Raco Killark, Hope & Bowers. B. Exterior wall surfaces or otherwise exposed to weather: cast aluminum FD boxes with threaded hubs, neophrene gaskets. C. Other outlet boxes: one piece stamped steel galvanized. Minimum boxes size: 4 -inch octagon or square. Plaster rings, extensions provided where necessary. 2.05 SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. As manufactured by: Unistrut, Kindorf of Powerstrut. B. Clamps: One hole malleable iron. Multiple runs: supported on Unistrut P -1000 or P- 4000 channel with conduit clamps. Suspended trapezes: Unistrut P -1000 galvanized. 2.06 WIRING DEVICES A. As manufactured by: Arrow -Hart, P &S, Bryant, Sierra, Harvey Hubbell. B. Devices as follows: Numbers refer to Harvey Hubbell, (except as noted). 1. Single pole switch 12211 2. Duplex Receptacle 20A 3 PG, 125V 5362 I 3. Disconnect switch Square D, 240V Heavy Duty HP rated. 4. Manual starter, surface Square D Class mounted 2510FG -1 2.07 DEVICE PLATES A. Provide for each wall switch, receptacle, or other outlet. Plates in finish areas: Sierra ivory plastic, Smooth Line. Exposed boxes in unfinished areas: galvanized steel raised plates. Junction boxes or unused outlets provided with blank plates. Switches or other units in gang or tandem boxes provided with one piece gang or tandem plates. B. Weatherproof duplex receptacle cover plates shall be gray cast aluminum with spring loaded double lift covers to automatically snap shut equal to Hubbell #5205. ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -5 2.08 LIGHT FIXTURES As listed in Fixture Schedule as indicated by type letters: completely lamped. A. Provide fluorescent fixtures with high power factor, energy saving, "A" sound rated, UL labeled, E.T.L. certified Class "P" rapid start ballasts conforming to CBM standards. Ballasts: product of one manufacturer with built -in self- resetting thermal protectors. Ballasts shall be G.E. Maxi -Miser II or accepted equal. B . Provide core and coil ballast for high intensity discharge (HID) fixtures. Manufactured by GE or accepted equal. C. Materials used in ceilings for supporting fixtures: Non - combustible. D. Provide plaster rings for fixtures recessed in plaster or gypsum board, connect recessed fixtures to outlet boxes with minimum 48" length of flexible conduit. E. Gasket all exterior fixtures. F. Ballast for fixtures installed in outdoors shall be suitable for operation at -20 degrees. 2.09 LAMPS AND TUBES A. One manufacturer, as manufactured by Sylvania, Westinghouse, General Electric, of type as specified, as required by type of fixture. B. Fluorescent lamps: Energy saving cool white, rapid start similar G.E. Watt -miser lamps. C. Incandescent lamps: 125 volt rating, inside frosted, clear or reflector lamps as required. D. Metal Halide: As manufactured by Sylvania, Westinghouse or General Electric. E. Lamps: New for all new fixtures and as noted at time of installation, operating at time of acceptance of Electrical Work. 2.10 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Acceptable device manufacturers: Burndy, O.Z., Appleton and Cadweld. B. System neutral grounded by connection to ground bus at one point only at main switchboard. At all other locations, system neutral shall have 600 volt insulation. System ground shall be established to cold water main and ground rod. C. Install ground through stem or flex conduit of suspended fixtures and bond to fixture frame. D. Ground all electrical equipment and raceway systems to ground bus. E. Ground system devices and equipment: 1. Ground rod - 3/4" x 10' -0" copperweld. 2. Cable connections not accessible: "Cadwelded ". 3. Cable connection accessible: Burndy. ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -6 4. Ground bushings: O.Z. Type BL. 5. Pipe connections: O.Z. Type ABG. 6. Enclosure connector: O.Z. Type QG or KG. 7. Feed through lug: Bumdy Type Q2B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of electrical work. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the installation until such conditions have been corrected. Installation of rough -in work constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for the ultimate work. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install work neatly. Raceways, fittings, equipment level, plumb straight. Connectors, locknuts, screws, clamps, joints made up tightly. B . Conduit, outlets, equipment: Install to clear beams or obstructions. Do not cut or reduce size of any load carrying member without written acceptance from the Architect. C. Adjacent wall mounted wiring devices, room thermostats or other equipment to be located at same elevation or in line one above the other. 3.03 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY A. Install conduit in concrete parallel to principal reinforcing steel. Maximum size raceway permitted in structural concrete: 3 /4-inch trade size or as directed. B . Exposed raceways where required shall run parallel or at right angles to building walls or ceiling. C . Conceal all raceways in finished areas of building. D. Install all wiring systems in raceways. E. Flash penetrations through roof with four pound sheet lead extended 8 inches minimum on all sides from conduit. Seal opening between conduit and top of cone with sealant. Exposed conduit on roof rigid galvanized steel. This work shall conform with requirement of Section 07900 - flashing and sheet metal. F . Make underground piping watertight. G . Penetrations through concrete walls and footings sleeved and sealed. H. Minimum cover over all underground conduits and duct banks: 2' -6" from finish grade. I. Raceway Installation Schedule: Location or Use Raceways Permitted Incoming services Sand encased plastic conduit ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -7 In concrete slab Exterior exposed Interior exposed Interior concealed in ceiling or walls Exterior in planting areas Rigid steel, PVC or walls Rigid galvanized steel, EMT, liquid -tight flex EMT, galvanized flex Coated pipe, PVC 3.04 CABLE HANDLING AND INSTALLATION A. Make bends in accordance with minimum recommended by manufacturer. Parallel cables on reels and pull directly into raceway from coil or reels on which they are received. Do not lay cable on ground. B . No splicing on cables permitted unless accepted. Splice in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications. C . Install wire, cable only after raceways are free of obstructions and clean. All wire color coded. Wiring tagged with Brady "Quick" labels at all pull boxes, junction boxes, panel boards. Wiring in panel boards and terminal cabinets neatly trained and served. 3.05 INSTALLATION - OUTLETS AND PULL BOXES A. Set face or plaster rings of all outlets flush with finish surface, set square on box and square to all wall and ceiling lines. B . Clean debris from all boxes prior to installing wiring devices. C. Provide factory made metal box hanger in hollow furred spaces. D. Do not install through, or back to back outlet boxes. Where noted back to back, offset boxes and fill conduit with hydroseal for sound control. 3.06 INSTALLATION - SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. General: Materials secured to structure by: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, inserts cast in concrete, expansion anchors in concrete block, machine screws or bolts on metal surface, or wood screws on wood construction. Do not use hand driven clamps. Nails used only for securing 2 hole pipe straps in concealed areas, or when used in shear for securing patented hangers. Galvanized bolts, screws, used on interior, on exterior, brass or bronze. Cartridge driven studs used only where specifically noted or accepted. B. Raceway Supports: Rigid steel supported at intervals not over 10 feet. EMT supported at intervals not over 5 feet. Provide one support not over 12- inches from each change in direction. 3.07 CUTTING, MARKING AND REPAIRING A. All cutting, repairing, including structural reinforcing, necessary for this work shall be done under this section. LZA ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -8 ._ B. No cutting or patching done without acceptance. Repair damage done by cutting equal to original condition. 3.08 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND SITE REPAIR A. Dig trenches straight and true to line and grade. Bottom shall be completely smooth. Raceways shall be supported from undisturbed original earth. Minimum cover for all raceways outside the building shall be T -6 ". Trench kept free of water. Open trenching protected with suitable barricades and warning lights. Excess earth completely removed from the area and disposed of as directed. B . Trenches shall be backfilled immediately after acceptance. Trenches backfilled with excavation earth, free of organic matter and rock, air hammered in 6" layers to compaction requirements stated in Earthwork Section. Trenches shall be backfilled with "engineered fill" in accordance with these specifications except trenches under building floor slab which shall be backfilled with pea gravel. C. Repair and patch existing asphalt as required by the Work. Backfill with "engineered fill' up to point of subfill. D. Materials and procedures not otherwise specified shall conform to the requirements of the Section 02050 - Earthwork. 3.09 IDENTIFICATION A. Properly identify motor disconnect switches, starters, other apparatus used for operation of, control of, circuits, appliances or equipment by means of engraved laminated plastic descriptive nameplates mounted on apparatus, using contact cement. Submit nameplates to Architect for acceptance. Cardholders in any form not acceptable. Log all wires at terminal equipment, outlets, terminal cabinets, pull and junction boxes, with Brady "Quick" label tags. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Coordinate exact method of connections to equipment provided under other sections, provide additional labor, materials required for complete connections. Determine exact set -up locations, outlet heights from equipment installers. 3.11 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Provide necessary wiring, manual starters, disconnect switches, other control items as indicated Starters within packaged equipment are provided under Mechanical Division. B. Temperature control devices and motors shall be provided under Mechanical Division. 3.12 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR A. Provide necessary wiring, disconnect switches, other control items as indicated, as ecommended and required by manufacturer and as required to comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations. ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -9 LA 3.13 STORAGE AND SHOP A. Provide necessary storage and shop areas at the site for safe and proper storage and use of tools and materials in accepted locations which do not interfere with the Work. Remove these facilities and restore area to original condition within three (3) days after notification by the Architect. 3.14 CLEANING AND PRESERVATION A. Throughout the progress of the Work, protect all raceways, fixtures and equipment from intrusion by rain, dirt and foreign matter, and from damage of any kind. Thoroughly clean all vitreous, metallic, plastic and painted for final inspection. Replace with new materials any damaged work without additional cost to the Owner, so that the entire installation will be left in new condition satisfactory to the Architect. 3.15 TESTING AND ADJUSTING A. Tests shall be conducted throughout the installation as required by the Architect as are considered necessary to determine the conformity with the Contract Documents. 1. Insulation tests shall be applied to each new panel and each existing panel affected by new work after the wiring is completed prior to the attachment of fixtures and again when the fixtures have been attached Such tests shall be made with a magneto generator capable of ringing through 50,000 ohms, and with a maximum applied voltage of 500 volts. 2. The resistance between conductors and ground shall be not less than values stipulated in the National Electrical Code. 3. After the installation is complete, voltage and ampere readings shall be taken at the W mains of each panel under new work with all connected equipment turned on. Any phase unbalance shown from these tests shall be corrected by the Contractor. 4. All testing equipment, materials and labor shall be furnished by the Contractor. 5. Scheduling of tests shall be subject to review and acceptance by Architect, but in no case shall the final test made more than three (3) days after the entire installation is completed. 6. Any defects disclosed as a result of such tests shall be immediately remedied by and at the expense of the Contractor, and retested 3.16 FINAL TESTS A. Final test of the electrical installation will be made upon a date accepted by the Architect, preferably at a time when the heating and plumbing installations can also be tested and after the entire electrical system has been in operation for a period of time. This test must be made under the observation of the Architect , and any defects which it discloses must be promptly corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION ARG: 89119 ELECTRICAL 16000 -10